MR366MEGANE8

Electrical equipment BATTERY HEADLIGHTS DISCHARGE BULBS ENGINE IMMOBILISER INSTRUMENT PANEL RADIO MULTIMEDIA PASSENGER COMPARTMENT DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM ELECTRIC WINDOW PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION MULTIPLEX NETWORK AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

XM0B - XM0C - XM0F - XM0G - XM0H - XM0J - XM0U 77 11 318 282

NOVEMBER 2005

"The repair procedures given by the manufacturer in this document are based on the technical specifications current when it was prepared. The procedures may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the manufacturer in the production of the various component units and accessories from which his vehicles are constructed."

EDITION ANGLAISE

All rights reserved by RENAULT s.a.s. Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part reference numbering system is forbidden without the prior written authority of RENAULT s.a.s.

© Renault s.a.s. 2005

Electrical equipment Contents Page

Page

80A

Initialisation

80B

82A

BATTERY 80A-1

Vdiag No.: 44 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configuration and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status summary table Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Command summary table Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart

80B-1 80B-6 80B-8 80B-10 80B-11 80B-12 80B-14 80B-15 80B-30 80B-36 80B-37 80B-47 80B-48 80B-49 80B-50 80B-51

80C DISCHARGE BULBS Introduction Fault finding log System operation Configuration and programming Allocation of tracks Interpretation of faults Conformity check Customer complaints Fault finding chart

Fault finding

83A

HEADLIGHT

80C-1 80C-5 80C-7 80C-8 80C-10 80C-11 80C-24 80C-26 80C-27

ENGINE IMMOBILISER 82A-1

INSTRUMENT PANEL Vdiag No.: 04, 0C Introduction Fault finding log System operation Replacement of components Configuration and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status summary table Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Interpretation of parameters Command summary table Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart

83A-1 83A-6 83A-8 83A-10 83A-11 83A-13 83A-14 83A-17 83A-22 83A-23 83A-31 83A-32 83A-42 83A-43 83A-50 83A-51

Vdiag No.: 08 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Replacement of components Configuration and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status summary table Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Interpretation of parameters Command summary table Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart

83A-1 83A-6 83A-8 83A-9 83A-10 83A-14 83A-15 83A-23 83A-29 83A-30 83A-36 83A-37 83A-43 83A-44 83A-50 83A-51

Page

Page

86A

86C MULTIMEDIA

RADIO General information Fault finding log Security code recovery procedure Security code Replacement of components Configuration and parameters Connections Self-test procedure Customer complaints Fault finding chart Recovering a jammed CD

86A-1 86A-5 86A-7 86A-8 86A-11 86A-12 86A-13 86A-14 86A-15 86A-16 86A-30

NAV 4R Vdiag No.: 0000 Program No.: 24 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Replacement of components Configuration and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status summary table Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Interpretation of parameters Command summary table Dealing with commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart

86C-1 86C-6 86C-8 86C-10 86C-11 86C-12 86C-13 86C-22 86C-27 86C-28 86C-36 86C-37 86C-40 86C-41 86C-44 86C-46

Page

Page

87B PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

87D ELECTRIC WINDOWS / SUNROOF

CONNECTION UNIT UCH - Vdiag No. 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configuration and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status summary table Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Interpretation of parameters Command summary table Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart

87B-1 87B-6 87B-8 87B-37 87B-42 87B-43 87B-54 87B-56 87B-97 87B-117 87B-121 87B-219 87B-220 87B-223 87B-225 87B-264 87B-267

Introduction Fault finding log System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configuration and programming Summary table of faults Interpretation of faults Interpretation of statuses Interpretation of commands Fault finding chart

87B-1 87B-6 87B-10 87B-25 87B-30 87B-31 87B-43 87B-44 87B-86 87B-187 87B-226

87C DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Introduction Fault finding log Repair Specific commands Read configuration Configuration Conformity check (hands-free) Customer complaints Fault finding chart Help

87C-1 87C-5 87C-14 87C-15 87C-16 87C-17 87C-18 87C-29 87C-31 87C-54

List and location of components Role of components Operating diagram Service Defect and safe mode Electric sunroof Initialisation Initialisation check Customer complaints Fault finding chart

87F

87D-1 87D-3 87D-5 87D-6 87D-7

87D-8 87D-9 87D-10 87D-11

PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag No.: 04 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Replacement of components Configuration and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status summary table Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Interpretation of parameters Customer complaints Fault finding charts

87F-1 87F-6 87F-8 87F-9 87F-10 87F-11 87F-12 87F-20 87F-22 87F-23 87F-27 87F-28 87F-30 87F-31

Page

Page

87G ENGINE COMPARTMENT

88B MULTIPLEX NETWORK

CONNECTION UNIT UPC Program No.: All Vdiag No.: All Introduction Fault finding log System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configuration and programming Summary of faults Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status and parameter summary table Interpretation of statuses Interpretation of parameters Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart

87G-1 87G-6 87G-8 87G-10 87G-11 87G-12 87G-13 87G-14 87G-17 87G-27 87G-28 87G-36 87G-37 87G-54 87G-55

Program No.: C54 Vdiag No.: 48 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configuration and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status summary table Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Interpretation of parameters Command summary table Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart

87G-1 87G-6 87G-8 87G-12 87G-17 87G-18 87G-19 87G-20 87G-56 87G-64 87G-65 87G-72 87G-73 87G-77 87G-78 87G-91 87G-92

Introduction Configuration Interpretation of faults Customer complaints Fault finding chart Repair help

88B-1 88B-6 88B-8 88B-12 88B-13 88B-16

88C AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Autoliv ACU4 Vdiag No.: 04 Introduction System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configuration and programming Fault finding log Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Status and parameter summary table Conformity check Fault finding chart

88C-1 88C-8 88C-9 88C-11 88C-12 88C-15 88C-17 88C-18 88C-65 88C-66 88C-67

Autoliv ACU4 Vdiag No.: 08, 10, 0C Introduction Fault finding logs System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configuration and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Status and parameter summary table Conformity check Fault finding chart

88C-1 88C-10 88C-12 88C-14 88C-17 88C-18 88C-22 88C-23 88C-79 88C-80 88C-81

ABBREVIATIONS

ABBREVIATIONS

MEANING OF ABBREVIATION

ABS

Anti-lock braking system

ALP

Fault Finding Chart

APC

After ignition

AVC

Before ignition feed

BVA

Automatic gearbox

BVM

Manual gearbox

BVR

Sequential gearbox

CAN

Controller Area Network

AC

Air conditioning

CD

Compact disc

PAS

Power assisted steering (hydraulic)

DAE

Electric power assisted steering

DVD

Digital versatile disc

DTC

Fault finding code

EGR

Exhaust gas recirculation

ESP

Electronic Stability Program

GMV

Fan assembly

CNG

Compressed natural gas

LPG

Liquefied petroleum gas

HLE

High yield strength

MAG

Metal active gas (for welding steel)

MIG

Metal inert gas (for welding aluminium)

MR

Workshop repair manual

TN

Technical Note

OBD

On board diagnostics

SER

Resistance spot welding

SSPP

Tyre pressure monitoring system

THLE

Very high-tensile strength

TM

Labour time

UCH

UCH

UPC

Protection and switching unit

UCT

Roof control unit

UHLE

Ultra high yield strength

VIN

Vehicle identification number

180A

BATTERY Battery: Initialisation

Initialisation: When the battery is removed or when it has been disconnected, carry out a certain number of initialisations for different vehicle functions so that the vehicle operates correctly. These initialisations do not require a tool of any kind. ● ●

●

●

●

Enter the four-digit radio code. Setting the time on the clock. Use the satellite radio control to set the time on a clock equipped with a navigation system: – Press and hold the left-hand Source key for two seconds to access time setting mode (the hours will flash). – Press the + or - keys to adjust the hour. – Press the left-hand Source key to switch to setting the minutes (the minutes will flash). – Press the + or - keys to adjust the minutes. – Press the left-hand Source key to exit setting mode. Check that the electric windows are still initialised. The windows should open and close when the switch is pressed. If this does not happen, fully close the window which rises a few centimetres at a time, and press the control button for 2 seconds when the window is fully closed. Check that the sunroof is still initialised. The sunroof should open or close to the requested position without stopping. If this is not the case, perform initialisation again. – Start the engine. – Set the control to the sunroof closed position. – Press and hold the switch. The sunroof closes. – Hold the switch until motor switching noises can be heard (if the sunroof is already closed, wait for the motor switching noises). – Release the switch and press it again immediately. – Hold the switch for several seconds. The sunroof opens and then closes completely. Release the switch once the sunroof has completely closed. Initialisation of the electric power-assisted steering: with the engine running, turn the steering wheel a quarter turn to the left and then a quarter turn to the right, and bring back the steering wheel to the centre point with the wheels set straight ahead.

80A-1

80A

180B

HEADLIGHTS Fault finding - Introduction

Vdiag No.: 44

80B

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): MEGANE II Phase 2 Function concerned: xenon bulb

Computer name: Xenon bulb Vdiag No.: 44

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), paper version (Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) and Dialogys. Wiring diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP + CAN sensor Special tooling required

Special tooling required Multimeter Elé. 1674

Clip + CAN probe

3. RECAP Procedure To run fault finding on the vehicle computers, switch on the forced + after ignition feed. Proceed as follows: Switch on the forced + after ignition feed: – with the vehicle card in the card reader, – press and hold the Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not met, – connect the diagnostic tools and perform the required operations. Switching off the forced + after ignition feed: Press the Start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds); check that the + after ignition feed has cut (computer indicator lights on the instrument panel go out).

LAD_V44_PRELI

80B-1

Vdiag No.: 44

HEADLIGHTS Fault finding - Introduction

80B

Faults: Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since, or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used following the + after ignition supply being switched on (without acting on the system components). For a present fault, apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the notes are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors on these lines (corrosion, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the component detected as faulty, – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation, wear). Conformity check: The aim of the conformity check is to check statuses and parameters that do not produce a fault display on the diagnostic tool because they are inconsistent. Therefore, this phase is used to: – run fault finding on faults which are not displayed but which may correspond to a customer complaint, – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repair. This section provides the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for testing them. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values, consult the corresponding fault finding page. Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the check using the diagnostic tool is all clear, but the customer complaint is still present, the fault should be dealt as a Customer complaint. A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart

80B-2

HEADLIGHTS Fault finding - Introduction

Vdiag No.: 44

80B

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and the condition of the fuses

Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP or in the MR or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with the ECU?

no See ALP No. 1

yes Read the faults

Faults present

no Conformity check

yes The cause is still present

Deal with present faults

Deal with stored faults

no

Fault solved

yes Use fault finding charts (ALPs)

The cause is still present

no

yes Fault solved The cause is still present

yes

Contact the Techline with the completed fault finding log

80B-3

no

Fault solved

Vdiag No.: 44

HEADLIGHTS Fault finding - Introduction

80B

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE (continued) Wiring check: Fault finding problems: Disconnecting the connectors and/or manipulating the wiring harness may temporarily remove the cause of a fault. Electrical measurements of voltage, resistance and insulation are generally correct, especially if the fault is not present when the analysis is made (stored fault). Visual inspection: Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. Carefully check the fuses, insulators and wiring harness routing. Look for signs of oxidation. Tactile inspection: While manipulating the wiring harness, use the diagnostic tool to note any change in fault status from stored to present. Make sure that the connectors are properly locked. Apply light pressure to the connectors. Twist the wiring harness. If there is a change in status, try to locate the source of the fault. Inspection of each component: Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and tabs, as well as their crimping (no crimping on the insulating section). Make sure that the clips and tabs are properly locked in the sockets. Make sure that no clips or tabs have been dislodged during connection. Check the clip contact pressure using an appropriate model of tab. Resistance check: Check the continuity of entire lines, then section by section. Look for a short circuit to earth, to + 12 V or to another wire. If a fault is detected, repair or replace the wiring harness.

80B-4

HEADLIGHTS Fault finding - Introduction

Vdiag No.: 44

80B

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

IMPORTANT!

NOTE Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the fault finding procedure, ensures a record is kept of the procedure carried out. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT. You will always be asked for this log: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline. – for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory. – to be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement, and enables better analysis of the parts removed.

6. SAFETY GUIDELINES All work on components requires the observation of safety rules to prevent damage or injury: – Check that the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers in the event of a low load. – Do not smoke. – Use the appropriate tools. – Do not touch the xenon bulbs, and do not work on the xenon bulb system when it is in operation, as the voltage can be more than 20,000 V.

80B-5

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Xenon bulbs

Page 1/2

List of monitored parts: Computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

Update version ●

Customer complaint 1079

No automatic adjustment of the dipped headlights

1081

Erratic automatic adjustment

1082

The dipped headlights do not switch on

1080

The dipped headlights do not switch off

1083

The dipped headlights come on intermittently

1084

The headlight range is too weak

Other

●

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 005

While driving

011

When the ignition is switched on

009

Sudden fault

003

When stationary

004

Intermittently

999

When switching on the main beam headlights

Other

●

Your comments

Your comments

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of diagnostic manual:

Workshop Repair Manual

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault finding manual no: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No: Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 19 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Xenon bulbs ●

Page 2/2

Computer identification and system parts replaced

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Fault name

Specification

Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no.

●

Stored

Parameter name

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description:

●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments:

FD 19 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

Vdiag No.: 44

HEADLIGHTS Fault finding - System operation

80B

1. System description: The system on which a fault finding is being performed is fitted with xenon bulbs. This system allows: – dynamic adjustment of headlights (xenon bulb function).

2. System layout: Xenon bulb function: The system comprises: – a computer to manage information and control the actuators – a front height sensor mounted on the front axle to measure vehicle body height variations – a rear height sensor mounted on the rear axle to measure vehicle body height variations – 2 adjustment motors mounted inside the headlights – 2 voltage transformers (ballast) which cannot be diagnosed – 2 xenon bulbs located inside the headlights which cannot be diagnosed.

3. Operation programming Xenon bulb function: The user requests that the dipped headlights are switched on by pressing on the control stalk. The driver request is received by the UCH which sends it to the computer via the vehicle multiplex network. The xenon bulb computer operates the headlight adjustment motors. Initialisation: When the xenon bulbs come on, the headlights run through initialisation. This function consists of operating the actuators to three different beam heights. The driver is notified that the system is operating correctly. If the computer is faulty, the initialisation is not performed when the bulbs are switched on. Initialisation is performed if the following conditions are fulfilled: – stalk in dipped headlights position – system initialised – vehicle stationary or speed < 6 mph (10 km/h).

80B-8

Vdiag No.: 44

HEADLIGHTS Fault finding - System operation

80B

Dynamic adjustment: This function allows adjustment of the xenon bulb beam height as a function of variations in vehicle body height and vehicle speed. This information is provided by: – the front and rear body sensors – the ABS computer (speed signal via the multiplex network) – the longitudinal acceleration sensor The xenon bulb computer operates the adjustment motors according to the information received, thereby obtaining optimal beam characteristics under all driving conditions. Raise/lower according to speed: This function allows operation of the adjustment motors to elevate the beam at a speed of more than 18 mph (30 km/h), to optimise driving comfort. The beam is adjusted as a function of the vehicle speed. If the vehicle speed is < 18 mph (30 km/h), the adjustment motors lower the beam.

80B-9

Vdiag No.: 44

HEADLIGHTS Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

a) 12-track black connector Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Description Not connected CAN H signal Not connected CAN L signal Rear sensor analogue signal Sensor + supply + after ignition feed Earth Not connected Not connected Front sensor analogue signal Sensor earth

b) 10-track black connector Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Description Left-hand adjustment motor track 2 Left-hand adjustment motor track 4 Left-hand adjustment motor track 1 Left-hand adjustment motor track 3 Not connected Right-hand adjustment motor track 3 Right-hand adjustment motor track 1 Right-hand adjustment motor track 4 Right-hand adjustment motor track 2 Not connected

80B-10

80B

Vdiag No.: 44

HEADLIGHTS Fault finding - Replacement of components

80B

a) Instructions to be followed after replacing the xenon bulb computer: The following actions must be taken after replacing the xenon bulb computer: – Allocate the computer to the vehicle by using configuration CF001 Vehicle type. – Initialise the system using the VP002 System initialisation configuration.

b) Instructions to be followed after replacing one or both adjustment motors: Replacement of an adjustment motor requires manual adjustment of the headlight. (See MR366 mechanical, 80C, Xenon headlights: Adjustment).

c) Instructions to be followed after replacement of a height sensor: Replacement of a height sensor requires initialisation of the system operating parameters. Use the VP002 System initialisation configuration after each replacement of a height sensor.

80B-11

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Configurations and programming

80B

Summary of configurations and system configuration readings: CF001 and LC001 Vehicle type:

5-door/sport hatch 4-door/estate Cabriolet Not defined

This configuration must be used when replacing the xenon bulb computer. Select the vehicle on which fault finding is being run and confirm. Check configuration reading LC001 Vehicle type. If you do not have the correct vehicle type, restart the configuration. IMPORTANT After each configuration of the vehicle type, it is mandatory to perform a system initialisation. Use the VP002 System initialisation configuration. CF002 Dynamic adjustment:

WITH

This configuration is used to activate beam adjustment according to the movements of the vehicle body recorded by the front and rear height sensors. Select WITH to activate this feature. Check configuration reading LC002 Dynamic adjustment. LC002 Dynamic adjustment:

WITH NONE

This configuration reading should be WITH by default. If LC002 = NONE following replacement of the xenon bulb computer, use the CF002 Dynamic adjustment configuration. CF003 Automatic dipping of the headlights:

WITH

This configuration is used to change the direction of the beam as a function of vehicle speed in order to improve driving comfort. Select WITH to activate this feature. Check configuration reading LC003 Automatic dipping of the headlights. LC003 Automatic dipping of the headlights

WITH NONE

This configuration reading should be WITH by default. If LC003 = NONE following replacement of the xenon bulb computer, use configuration CF003 Automatic dipping of the headlights.

80B-12

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Configurations and programming

LC004 Raised dip:

80B

NONE

This configuration reading should be NONE by default. If LC002 is WITH following replacement of the xenon bulb computer, contact the Techline. CF005 Initialisation:

WITH

This configuration is used to operate the adjustment motors when the xenon bulbs are switched on. It tells the driver the system is operating correctly and there are no faults. Select WITH to activate this feature. Check configuration reading LC005 Initialisation. LC005 Initialisation:

WITH NONE

This configuration reading should be WITH by default. If LC005 = WITHOUT following replacement of the xenon bulb computer, use the CF005 Initialisation configuration.

VP002: System initialisation This configuration must be used when replacing the xenon bulb computer or a body height sensor. It is used to assign the operating values of the body height sensors in their initial position. This command must be performed under the following conditions: – Vehicle stationary – Under + after ignition feed – No fault present in the computer – Vehicle unladen – Handbrake off – Vehicle on horizontal flat ground – Gearbox in neutral Consult the interpretation of status ET002 Computer initialisation. If status ET002 does not become DONE, restart the configuration.

80B-13

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Fault summary table

Tool fault

Associated DTC

DF001

9C05

COMPUTER

DF002

9C01

FRONT HEIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT

DF003

9C00

REAR HEIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT

DF004

D208

VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL

DF005

9C0A

COMPUTER INITIALISATION

DF009

9C04

LEFT-HAND ADJUSTMENT MOTOR CIRCUIT

DF010

9C03

RIGHT-HAND ADJUSTMENT MOTOR CIRCUIT

DF013

9C08

COMPUTER SUPPLY VOLTAGE

DF014

9C0B

COMPUTER CONFIGURATION

AFTER REPAIR

Diagnostic tool title

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

80B-14

80B

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

COMPUTER DF001 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: Internal electronic fault

None

Disconnect the xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector. Check the condition of the connections for corrosion, damage, etc. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

LAD_V44_DF001P

80B-15

80B

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

DF002 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

CC.1

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80B

FRONT HEIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1.DEF: Values outside the limits

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: The fault is declared as present following a road test or a system initialisation.

NOTES

None.

Manipulate the wiring harness between the xenon bulb computer and the front height sensor in order to produce a change in status (Present ↔ Stored). Look for possible damage to the harness, and check the connection and condition of the front height sensor and its connection. Repair if necessary. Disconnect the front height sensor and check the condition of the connections (oxidation, damage, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation against + 12 V of the following connections: Front height sensor black connector track 4

Track 11 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Front height sensor black connector track 5

Track 6 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Front height sensor black connector track 1

Track 12 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, replace the front height sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

LAD_V44_DF002

80B-16

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80B

DF002 CONTINUED 1

CO.0

NOTES

None

Manipulate the wiring harness between the xenon bulb computer and the front height sensor in order to produce a change in status (Present ↔ Stored). Look for possible damage to the harness, and check the connection and condition of the front height sensor and its connection. Repair if necessary. Disconnect the front height sensor and check the condition of the connections (oxidation, damage, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the following connections for continuity and the absence of interference resistance: Front height sensor black connector track 4

Track 11 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Front height sensor black connector track 5

Track 6 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Front height sensor black connector track 1

Track 12 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Check the insulation against earth of the following connections: Front height sensor black connector track 4

Track 11 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Front height sensor black connector track 5

Track 6 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, replace the front height sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

80B-17

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80B

DF002 CONTINUED 2

1.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the condition of the sensor linkage rod. Replace if necessary. Disconnect the front height sensor and check the condition of the connections (oxidation, damage, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the following connections for continuity and the absence of interference resistance: Front height sensor black connector track 4

Track 11 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Front height sensor black connector track 5

Track 6 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Front height sensor black connector track 1

Track 12 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, replace the front height sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

80B-18

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

DF003 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

CC.1

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80B

REAR HEIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1.DEF: Values outside the limits

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: The fault is declared as present following a road test or a system initialisation.

NOTES

None

Manipulate the harness between the xenon bulb computer and the rear height sensor in order to produce a change in status (Present ↔ Stored). Look for possible damage to the harness, and check the connection and condition of the rear height sensor and its connectors. Repair if necessary. Disconnect the rear height sensor and check the condition of the connections (oxidation, damage). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation against + 12 V of the following connections: Rear height sensor black connector track 4

Track 5 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Rear height sensor black connector track 5

Track 6 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Rear height sensor black connector track 1

Track 12 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, replace the rear height sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

LAD_V44_DF003

80B-19

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80B

DF003 CONTINUED 1

CO.0

NOTES

None.

Manipulate the harness between the xenon bulb computer and the rear height sensor in order to produce a change in status (Present ↔ Stored). Look for possible damage to the harness, and check the connection and condition of the rear height sensor and its connectors. Repair if necessary. Disconnect the rear height sensor and check the condition of the connections (oxidation, damage). Repair if necessary. Check the following connections for continuity and the absence of interference resistance: Rear height sensor black connector track 4

Track 5 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Rear height sensor black connector track 5

Track 6 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Rear height sensor black connector track 1

Track 12 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Check the insulation against earth of the following connections: Rear height sensor black connector track 4

Track 5 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Rear height sensor black connector track 5

Track 6 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, replace the rear height sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

80B-20

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80B

DF003 CONTINUED 2

1.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the condition of the sensor linkage rod. Replace if necessary. Disconnect the rear height sensor and check the condition of the connections (oxidation, damage). Repair if necessary. Check the following connections for continuity and the absence of interference resistance: Rear height sensor black connector track 4

Track 5 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Rear height sensor black connector track 5

Track 6 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Rear height sensor black connector track 1

Track 12 xenon bulb computer 12-track black connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, replace the rear height sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

80B-21

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

DF004 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1.DEF: Error in speed signal coming from the ABS

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: The fault is declared present after a road test.

Test the multiplex network (see 88B, Multiplexing) and interpret any faults present. Test the ABS computer (see 38C, Anti-lock braking system). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

LAD_V44_DF004

80B-22

80B

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

COMPUTER INITIALISATION DF005 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: Computer initialisation not performed

None.

Fault DF005 is directly associated with the status ET002 Computer initialisation. If the computer initialisation has not been performed, run command VP002 System initialisation. Follow the procedure described in the Configuration and programming section of this Note. When the command is complete, check that ET002 Computer initialisation is DONE. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

LAD_V44_DF005P

80B-23

80B

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

DF009 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

LEFT-HAND ADJUSTMENT MOTOR CIRCUIT 1.DEF: Unidentified electrical fault

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: The fault appears after: – the dipped headlights are switched on, – command AC001 Adjustment motors is run.

Special notes: If the fault has appeared in the dipped headlights position: – the left-hand adjustment motor will remain immobile, – the right and left-hand adjustment motors will no longer be operational. If the fault has appeared in the main beam headlights position: – the left-hand adjustment motor will remain immobile, – the right-hand adjustment motor will be pointing downwards, – the left-hand dipped beam bulb will be off, – the front fog lights will be on, – an instrument panel warning message will be sent.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

LAD_V44_DF009

80B-24

80B

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80B

DF009 CONTINUED

The DF009 fault appears following: – an open circuit on the left-hand adjustment motor control lines – a short circuit to + 12 V on one of the left-hand adjustment motor control lines – a short circuit between 2 control lines of the left-hand adjustment motor – a short circuit to earth on one of the left-hand adjustment motor control lines Disconnect the black 4-track left-hand adjustment motor connector. Check the condition of the connections (oxidation, damage, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation to + 12 V and earth, the continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Xenon bulb computer black 10-track connector Track 2

Track 4 Left-hand adjustment motor black 4-track connector

Xenon bulb computer black 10-track connector Track 4

Track 3 Left-hand adjustment motor black 4-track connector

Xenon bulb computer black 10-track connector Track 1

Track 2 Left-hand adjustment motor black 4-track connector

Xenon bulb computer black 10-track connector Track 3

Track 1 Left-hand adjustment motor black 4-track connector

Repair if necessary. With the connectors disconnected, check the insulation between each control wire. If two wires are in short-circuit, repair the relevant connections. If the fault is still present, replace the left-hand adjustment motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

80B-25

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

DF010 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

RIGHT-HAND ADJUSTMENT MOTOR CIRCUIT 1.DEF: Unidentified electrical fault

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: The fault appears after: – the dipped headlights are switched on, – command AC001 Adjustment motors is run.

Special notes: If the fault has appeared in the dipped headlights position: – the right-hand adjustment motor will remain immobile, – the right and left-hand adjustment motors will no longer be operational. If the fault has appeared in the main beam headlights position: – the right-hand adjustment motor will remain immobile, – the left-hand adjustment motor will be pointing downwards, – the right-hand dipped beam bulb will be off, – the front fog lights will be on, – an instrument panel warning message will be sent.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

LAD_V44_DF010

80B-26

80B

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80B

DF010 CONTINUED

Fault DF010 appears following: – an open circuit on the right-hand adjustment motor control lines – a short circuit to + 12 V on one of the right-hand adjustment motor control lines – a short circuit between 2 control lines of the right-hand adjustment motor – a short circuit to earth on one of the right-hand adjustment motor control lines Disconnect the black 4-track right-hand adjustment motor connector. Check the condition of the connections (oxidation, damage, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation to + 12 V and earth, the continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Xenon bulb computer black 10-track connector Track 8

Track 4 Right-hand adjustment motor black 4-track connector

Xenon bulb computer black 10-track connector Track 6

Track 3 Right-hand adjustment motor black 4-track connector

Xenon bulb computer black 10-track connector Track 9

Track 2 Right-hand adjustment motor black 4-track connector

Xenon bulb computer black 10-track connector Track 7

Track 1 Right-hand adjustment motor black 4-track connector

Repair if necessary. With the connectors disconnected, check the insulation between each control wire. If two wires are in short-circuit, repair the relevant connections. If the fault is still present, replace the right-hand adjustment motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

80B-27

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

DF013 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

1.DEF

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80B

COMPUTER SUPPLY VOLTAGE 1.DEF: Feed voltage too low 2.DEF: Feed voltage too high

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: If the fault is declared present after: – starting the engine, – battery replacement.

NOTES

None

Check the condition of the battery and the vehicle charge circuit.

2.DEF

NOTES

None.

Check the following connection for continuity and make sure that there is no interference resistance: Check the insulation and continuity of the connection: Protection and Switching Unit

Track 1 xenon bulb computer 5-track black connector

Vehicle earth

Track 4 xenon bulb computer 5-track black connector

Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

LAD_V44_DF013

80B-28

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80B

COMPUTER CONFIGURATION DF014 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: Vehicle configuration not performed

None

If fault DF014 computer configuration is present, the vehicle configuration has not been performed. Use the CF001 Vehicle type configuration (see Configuration and programming). When the vehicle type has been entered, run command VP002 Initialise system to render the system operational. Once the procedure is completed, check for system faults.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

LAD_V44_DF014P

80B-29

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

80B

Only check the conformity after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Operating conditions: Vehicle with the ignition and dipped headlights lit.

MAIN SCREEN

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

ET002: 1

2

3

Computer initialisation

Display and Notes

Fault finding

Status ET002 should be DONE

If status ET002 is NOT DONE, use the VP002 Initialise system command. (See Configuration and programming) If status ET001 is NOT DONE, use the CF001 Vehicle type command. (See Configuration and programming)

Computer

ET001:

Computer configuration

Status ET001 should be DONE

PR016:

Computer supply voltage

10 V < voltage < 15.5 V

PR013:

Height sensor supply voltage

4.8 V < voltage < 5.2 V

Reverse gear signal

PRESENT or ABSENT

Supply voltages

Reverse gear

ET021:

80B-30

If one of the voltages does not comply with the operating values, consult the interpretation of fault DF013 Computer feed voltage. In the event of a fault, test the multiplex network and deal with any faults present. (see 88B multiplexing)

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

80B

Only check the conformity after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Operating conditions: Vehicle with the ignition and dipped headlights lit.

MAIN SCREEN (CONTINUED)

Order

4

5

Function

Vehicle speed

Dipped headlights

Parameter or Status checked or Action

PR006:

ET016:

Vehicle speed

Dipped headlights

80B-31

Display and Notes

Fault finding

0 mph

If parameter PR006 is not consistent, test the multiplex network (see 88B multiplexing) and run fault finding on the ABS computer (see 38C ABS)

ON or OFF

In the event of a fault, test the multiplex network (see 88B multiplexing), and run fault finding on the UCH. (See 87B UCH).

HEADLIGHTS Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

80B

Only check the conformity after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Operating conditions: Vehicle with the ignition and dipped headlights lit.

SUB-FUNCTION: LIGHTING POSITION

Order

1

2

3

Function

Sensor supply voltage

Parameter or Status checked or Action

PR013:

Height sensor supply voltage

PR011:

Front height sensor signal

PR012:

Rear height sensor signal

PR008:

Right-hand adjustment motor position

PR009:

Left-hand adjustment motor position

PR021:

Left-hand adjustment motor position setpoint

Sensor position signal

Adjustment motor position

PR022:

4

Actuator control

AC001:

Display and Notes

Fault finding

4.8 V < voltage < 5.2 V

If the supply voltage is not within the operating range, check the charging circuit and the condition of the battery.

12.5 % < X 1 min: OUT NO after a cut-off of 24 mph (40 km/h).

NOTES

None.

Check the condition and connection of the green 2-track connector of the clutch switch (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the blue 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure insulation from earth for the following connection: Switch track 1 track 5 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the connection is satisfactory, replace the switch. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-46

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF003 CONTINUED

CO.1

NOTES

None.

Check the condition and connection of the green 2-track connector of the clutch switch (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the blue 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation from +12 volts and the continuity of the connection between: Switch track 1 track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE1 connector Ensure the presence of vehicle earth on track 2 of the switch. Repair if necessary. If the connection is satisfactory and earth is present, replace the switch. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-47

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF004 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

STOP SWITCH CIRCUIT

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault appears after a series of 10 presses of more than 1 second Note: The fault could prevent cruise control/speed limiter operation.

Refer to processing of the ET047 Brake pedal position status in the Starting sub-function.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-48

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF005 PRESENT OR STORED

DEF

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CARD DEF : Card battery low

NOTES

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: Press one of the buttons on the card and check whether the fault appears. Perform the test with another card belonging to the vehicle.

Check the card battery. Replace the battery if necessary. If the fault persists, fill in the diagnostic sheet and contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-49

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF006 DF007 DF008 DF009 PRESENT

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

LEFT-HAND FRONT VALVE SENSOR RIGHT-HAND FRONT VALVE SENSOR REAR RIGHT-HAND VALVE SENSOR REAR LEFT-HAND VALVE SENSOR 1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF: 4.DEF: 5.DEF: 6.DEF: 7.DEF: 8.DEF:

Internal electronic fault Internal electronic fault Internal electronic fault Internal electronic fault Internal electronic fault Internal electronic fault Internal electronic fault Internal electronic fault

Special notes: Any operations involving replacing a valve or removing a tyre should not be attempted without full knowledge of the recommendations specified in Workshop Repair Manual 364, Section 35. Before any operation, ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves, and that the spare wheel has not been fitted.

For faults DF006 to DF009, if the fault is present as of the first kilometres, repeat programming of the 4 valves. If the programming fails, replace the valve in question according to the method described in the repair manual (Workshop Repair Manual 364, Section 35B). Make sure that no wheel has a rubber valve. If there is one, replace it by a wheel with a valve fitted with a sensor and perform a road test. If the problem is still present, carry out programming of the 4 valves. If the fault persists, replace the valve. The correspondence between fault numbers and the valve concerned is described below: – DF006 = Front left-hand valve sensor – DF007 = Front right-hand valve sensor – DF008 = Rear right-hand valve sensor – DF009 = Rear left-hand valve sensor Once the sensor has been replaced, program the four valve codes according to procedure SC002 Programming four valve codes described in the Repair section of this chapter.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a check with the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-50

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

STEERING COLUMN SWITCH COMBINED CIRCUIT

DF010 PRESENT OR STORED

1.DEF: Failure detected on a connection between the steering column switch control unit and the UCH 2.DEF: Internal electronic fault

NOTES

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault appears after an action on the switch, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

1.DEF

NOTES

None.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair it if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 12-track connector of the steering column control (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair it if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Black 12-track connector 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. track 3 track 14, track 4 track 9, track 5 track 12, track 12 track 15, track 2 track 4, track 8 track 17, track 14 track 11, track 13 track 5, track 9 track 2, track 10 track 19 Repair if necessary. If the connections are correct, replace the steering column control if necessary. Contact your Techline.

2.DEF

NOTES

None.

Replace the steering column switch control unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-51

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF011 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

1.DEF

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

RAIN/LIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT 1.DEF: Communication disrupted 2.DEF: Internal electrical fault

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Run the automatic wiper system and automatic light illumination system, then cover the sensor and/or place water on it. If the fault appears, carry out this fault finding procedure.

NOTES

Check the condition and connection of the sensor supply fuse in the passenger compartment fuse box and relay in position 2S. Replace it if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector of the sensor (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 3 of the sensor. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of 12 V on track 1 of the rain/light sensor. If okay, replace the sensor. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Sensor track 2 track 2 of the UCH PE2 connector. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

2.DEF

NOTES

If fault is present.

Replace the sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-52

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF012 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

RIGHT-HAND INDICATOR CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to +12 V CC : Short circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault appears after an action on the right-hand indicator control stalk, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Special note: The fault becomes stored following a change of bulb.

Check the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the left-hand headlight, the left-hand repeater and the rear left-hand light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb/Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the control activated, check the presence of +12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb / Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light connector. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-53

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF012 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary.

track 4 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-54

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF013 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

LEFT-HAND INDICATOR CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to +12 V CC : Short circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault appears after an action on the left-hand indicator control stalk, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Special note: The fault becomes stored following a change of bulb.

Check the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the right-hand headlight, the right-hand repeater and the rear right-hand light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb/Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 4 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the control activated, check the presence of +12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb/Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light connector. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-55

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF013 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary.

track 4 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-56

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF014 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

DEF

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CARD READER CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth DEF : Internal electronic fault

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Insert the card in the reader, switch off and restore the after ignition feed. If the fault appears, carry out this fault finding procedure.

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the black 8-track connector of the card reader (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary Check the condition and connection of the black 40-track PE2 connector and the blue 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of 12 V on track 3 of the card reader. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation from earth of the following connections: Card reader track 4 track 39 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Card reader track 6 track 40 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the card reader if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-57

Edition 3

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

Vdiag No.: 44

87B

DF014 CONTINUED

DEF

NOTES

None.

Replace the card reader.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-58

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF015 PRESENT OR STORED

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

OPTICAL SENSOR CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Lock the vehicle and place your hand in each handle. If the fault appears, carry out this fault finding procedure. NOTES Special note: Only with hands-free.

Check the condition of the sensors to determine on which sensor there is a short circuit. ET055 Front driver side optical sensor, ET056 Rear driver side optical sensor, ET057 Front and rear passenger side optical sensor, Each status should change to ACTIVE. If a status is INACTIVE: Ensure the presence of 12 V on track 3 of the sensor(s). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Driver's side front sensor track 1 track 21 of the UCH 40-track grey connector Driver's side rear sensor track 1 track 22 of the UCH 40-track grey connector Passenger side front sensor track 1 track 23 of the UCH 40-track grey connector Passenger side rear sensor track 1 track 23 of the UCH 40-track grey connector Repair if necessary. If the connections are correct and the power supply is present, then replace the suspected faulty sensor. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-59

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF016 DF017 PRESENT

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

AT LEAST 2 IDENTICAL CODES IN THE SUMMER SET AT LEAST 2 IDENTICAL CODES IN THE WINTER SET

Special notes: Any operations involving the replacement of a valve or the removal of a tyre should not be attempted without full knowledge of the recommendations specified in MR364, Section 35. Before any operation, ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves, and that the spare wheel has not been fitted on the same axle assembly.

Fault DF016 At least 2 identical codes/summer set appears when at least two valve codes are identical in the summer wheel set (incorrect programming of four valve codes). In this case, repeat programming of the four valve codes according to procedure SC002: Programming of the four valve codes described in the Repair section of this note.

Fault DF017 At least 2 identical codes/winter set appears when at least two valve codes are identical in the winter wheel set (incorrect programming of four valve codes). In this case, repeat programming of the four valve codes according to procedure SC002: Programming of the four valve codes described in the Repair section of this note.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a check with the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-60

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF018 DF019 PRESENT

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

4 CODES NOT PROGRAMMED FOR SUMMER SET 4 CODES NOT PROGRAMMED FOR WINTER SET

Special notes: Any operations involving the replacement of a valve or the removal of a tyre should not be attempted without full knowledge of the recommendations specified in MR 364, Section 35. Before any operation, ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves, and that the spare wheel has not been fitted.

Fault DF018: 4 summer set codes not programmed is present if the UCH has not programmed a valve code for the summer tyre set (after replacing the sensors or UCH). Fault DF019: 4 winter set codes not programmed is present if the UCH has not programmed a valve code for the winter tyre set and the winter tyre set is selected. In the Status menu, note the type of tyre set stored in memory (summer or winter). In the Status menu, note the valve codes assigned for the type of tyre stored in memory. Program the four valve codes according to procedure SC002: Programming the four valve codes described in the Repair section of this note.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a check with the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-61

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF020 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

FRONT INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary Ensure the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 25 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 24 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-62

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF021 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

REAR INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 35 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 36 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-63

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF022 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CENTRAL INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 26 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 37 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-64

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF023 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DRIVER SIDE FRONT DOOR EXTERNAL AERIAL CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 27 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 39 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-65

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF024 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PASSENGER SIDE FRONT DOOR EXTERNAL AERIAL CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 31 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 34 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-66

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF025 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DRIVER SIDE REAR DOOR EXTERNAL AERIAL CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 28 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 38 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-67

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF026 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PASSENGER SIDE REAR DOOR EXTERNAL AERIAL CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 32 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 33 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-68

Edition 3

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

Vdiag No.: 44

87B

EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

DF027 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.1 : Short circuit to +12 V CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault reappears as stored after: – the fault has been cleared.

NOTES

Check whether the right-hand door mirror is fitted with a temperature sensor. If NO, vehicle does not have this option. If YES, carry out the following fault finding procedure. Check the green 2-track connector of the temperature sensor (tabs crushed, oxidised, broken). Repair if necessary. Check the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, oxidised, broken). Repair if necessary. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Temperature sensor track 1 Track 3 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. Temperature sensor track 2 Track 13 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check sensor resistance on tracks 1 and 2. Approximate temperature in °C between 0 and 5 between 11 and 15 between 21 and 25 between 31 and 35

Sensor resistance in Ω between 5400 and 6200 between 3700 and 4400 between 2500 and 3000 between 1700 and 2100

Replace the sensor if necessary. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-69

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

STEERING LOCK CIRCUIT

DF029 PRESENT

CC.1 : Short circuit to +12 V 1.DEF: Open circuit (e.g. lock disconnected) or lock power supply absent 2.DEF: Lock earth absent or multiplex network faulty (e.g. steering lock connection => UCH) 3.DEF: Voltage not within the permitted limits 4.DEF: Short circuit to earth on the steering lock sensor connection 5.DEF: Open circuit on the steering lock sensor connection 6.DEF: Short circuit to +12 V on the steering lock sensor connection.

None NOTES Special note: Lock/unlock the vehicle, and check the lock power supply within the 5 minutes following door opening.

CC.1. SHORT CIRCUIT to +12 V

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of connectors PE2, PP2 of the UCH and PEH of the Protection and Switching Unit (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering lock on track 3 track 10 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 6 track 20 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 2 track 1 of UCH connector PP2 Steering lock on track 5 track 1 of the PEH connector of the Protection and Switching Unit Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-70

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 1

1.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PP2 and PE2 connectors of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of the steering lock. Ensure the continuity of the connection between track 1 of the connector and the body earth. Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering lock on track 3 track 10 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 6 track 20 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 2 track 1 of UCH connector PP2 Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-71

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 2

2.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track 1 of the connector and the body earth. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity of the connection between track 1 of the connector and the body earth. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering lock on track 3 track 10 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 6 track 20 of UCH connector PE2 Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-72

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 3

3.DEF

NOTES

None

Verify the battery voltage and check the charge circuit (excess voltage). Locking or unlocking possible if the voltage is in the range 9 V < Voltage < 16 V, Unlocking impossible if the voltage is > 16 V.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-73

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 4

4.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering lock on track 4 track 1 of the 12-track PP1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-74

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 5

5.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering lock on track 4 track 1 of the 12-track PP1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-75

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 6

6.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering lock on track 4 track 1 of the 12-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-76

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

ANTI-LOCKING LINE DF030 PRESENT

NOTES

CO.1

CO : Open circuit

None

NOTES

Check the condition and connection of the black 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and presence of the 5D fuse on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PEH connector of the Protection and Switching Unit. (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Steering lock on track 5 track 1 of the 12-track PEH connector of the Protection and Switching Unit Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-77

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF031 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

ONE TOUCH WINDOW CONNECTION CC.1 : Short circuit to +12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault appears after an action on a one-touch window, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Special note: If the vehicle is not fitted with one-touch windows, ignore this fault.

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the electric windows (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: 40-track PE2 connector on track 7 track 6 of the electric window connector Repair if necessary If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-78

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF032 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

BOOT EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to +12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 29 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 40 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-79

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF033 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DRIVER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to +12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Front door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 27 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 39 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-80

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DRIVER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) DF033 CONTINUED

Rear door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary Check the insulation of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 28 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 38 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-81

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF034 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PASSENGER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to +12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Front door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 31 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 34 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-82

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PASSENGER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) DF034 CONTINUED

Rear door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 32 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 33 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-83

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

DF035 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Front Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary Ensure the insulation and continuity relative to earth of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 25 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 24 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-84

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF035 CONTINUED

Centre Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 26 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 37 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Rear Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 35 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 36 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-85

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

OPENING REAR SCREEN ET041

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This status can be processed only for type J vehicles (Scenic, 5-seater), R (Scenic 7seater) and K (estate).

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the grey 8-track connector of the opening rear screen switch (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Lock 4-track connector on track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in OFF position. The continuity of the lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in ON position. Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-86

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

PASSENGER DOOR ET042

NOTES

Check that no fault is present.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector of the passenger door lock (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Passenger's door lock black 4-track connector Track A

track 15 of the UCH 40-track PE1 connector

Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks B and A in OFF position. The continuity of the lock switch on tracks B and A in ON position. Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-87

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

RAID FUNCTION ENABLED THROUGH CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING ET043

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check that the UCH is configured with Locking when driving. Press the vehicle lock button for more than 5 seconds with the after ignition feed to activate automatic locking (the locking status when driving is active).' Press the vehicle unlocking button for more than 5 seconds with the after ignition feed to deactivate automatic locking when driving (the locking status when driving is inactive). Press the vehicle lock button for more than 5 seconds without the after ignition feed to lock the vehicle (specification for Spain).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-88

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING BUTTON ET044

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the grey 8-track connector of the Electric Door Locking switch (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: 8-track Electric Door Locking switch Track 5 Track 14 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check continuity of the connection between track 4 of the 8-track connector and the vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Check: The continuity of the switch on tracks 5 and 2 (switch pressed) The insulation of the switch on tracks 5 and 2 (switch OFF) Replace the switch if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-89

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

RF FRAME RECEIVED ET045

There must be no present or stored faults.

NOTES

Special note: This status is used for the tyre pressure monitoring system (SSPP) function, Unlocking/Locking, Hands-free starting. This status is only used to check that the UCH receiver aerial is in good condition.

ET045 NO upon pressing one of the buttons on the Renault card or with sensor detection faults on the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System function.

Check with the vehicle's second card. If the status changes to YES, check status ET066 Card button press received. If the status remains NO, perform a test with another card of another MEGANE II type vehicle. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-90

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

TAILGATE ET050

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the white 4-track connector of the tailgate lock (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Tailgate lock 4-track white connector track 3 Track 8 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in OFF position. The continuity of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in ON position. Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-91

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

REAR LEFT-HAND DOOR ET051

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector of the rear left-hand door lock (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Left rear door 4-track black connector track D Track 19 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks C and D (door closed). The continuity of the lock switch on tracks C and D (door closed). Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-92

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

REAR RIGHT-HAND DOOR ET052

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector of the rear left-hand door lock (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Right rear door 4-track black connector track A Track 16 of the blue 40-track connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks A and B (door closed). The continuity of the lock switch on tracks A and B (door closed). Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-93

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

DRIVER'S DOOR ET053

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector of the rear left-hand door lock (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Left rear door 4-track black connector track D Track 17 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks C and D (door closed). The continuity of the lock switch on tracks C and D (door closed). Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-94

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

OPTICAL SENSOR POWERED (Only in hands-free vehicles) ET054

NOTES

After 72 hours without an attempt to open the vehicle, the UCH cuts out the optical sensors' power supply. To recover the optical sensors' power supply, one must pull the handle of one of the doors or unlock by card and lock the vehicle and place a hand in one of the handles.

ET054: is NO despite the door handles being used

The vehicle has been immobilised for less than 72 hours: Check that the UCH is in hands-free configuration by means of the LC001 Hands-free function configuration reading. If everything is correct, contact the Techline.

The vehicle has been immobilised for more than 72 hours: Check the insulation against 12 V of the following track (door handle pulled): track 23 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH, Check the earth on track 23 of the 40-track PE connector of the UCH by pulling a handle Is earth present?

YES

NO

Contact your Techline.

Check the continuity between track 23 of the 40-track PE3 connector and track 2 of the black 3-track connector of the optical sensor. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on track 3 of the connector, and repair if necessary. Check for continuity of the handle pulled switch on tracks 1 and 2, and if there is insulation change the handle. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-95

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ET055 ET056 ET057

NOTES

DRIVER'S SIDE OPTICAL SENSOR REAR DRIVER'S SIDE OPTICAL SENSOR FRONT/REAR PASSENGER SIDE OPTICAL SENSOR (Only in hands-free vehicles)

There must be no present or stored faults. Switch the ignition on, then switch it off.

Check that the status ET054 Optical sensor powered is YES. Place your hand behind the door handle; make sure the corresponding status is active. If the status is inactive, lock the vehicle and pull the handle. Is the status active?

YES

Check the condition of the reflective surface inside the handle (frost, dirt). Check the condition of the optical sensor. If necessary, replace the sensor.

NO

Check for insulation and continuity of the following connections: Driver side front sensor Passenger side front sensor Rear sensors, driver and passenger side Driver side front sensor

track 3

track 3 track 1

Passenger side front sensor

track 1

Rear right-hand sensor

track 1

Rear left-hand sensor

track 1

Sensors

track 2

track 3

Track 3 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH

Track 21 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH Track 23 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH. Track 23 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH. Track 22 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH. Earth Repair if necessary.

If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-96

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

LOCKING BUTTON ON DRIVER'S HANDLE LOCKING BUTTON ON PASSENGER HANDLE

ET058 ET059

(Only in hands-free vehicles)

NOTES

Check that no fault is present.

Check the condition and connection of the blue 9-track connector of the door (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 4 of the door handle. Repair if necessary Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Door handle switch on track 3 Track 30 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation between tracks 3 and 4 of the handle (OFF position) The continuity between tracks 3 and 4 of the handle (Pressed position) Replace the handle if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-97

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

BOOT LOCKING BUTTON ON TAILGATE (Only in hands-free vehicles) ET060

NOTES

Check that no fault is present.

Check the condition and connection of the white 2-track connector of the locking button on tailgate (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 2 of the locking button on tailgate. Repair if necessary Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Locking button on tailgate on track 1 Track 4 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the button on tailgate (OFF position). The continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the button on tailgate (Pressed position). Replace the button if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-98

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

TAILGATE OPENING REQUEST ET061

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET061 Absent when there is a request on the button

Scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free) Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 5 of the 40-track PE3 connector with the button pressed. Is earth present?

YES

NO

AFTER REPAIR

Contact your Techline.

Check the condition and connection of the switch's 2-track connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 2 of the switch's 2-track connector. Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2 (with the button pressed). If insulated, replace the switch. Check for continuity between the 40-track PE3 connector on track 5 of the UCH and track 1 of the switch's 2-track connector. Repair if necessary.

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-99

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ET061 CONTINUED

ET061 Absent when there is a request on the button

Scenario 1 vehicle (not hands-free) Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 1 of the lock's 4-track connector with the button pressed. Is earth present?

YES

Check for +12 V on track 2 of the lock's 4-track connector. Is it present? YES: Replace the tailgate lock NO: Check for +12 V on track 7 of the PP3 connector of the UCH If +12 V is present, check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: connector PP3 of the UCH on track 7 track 2 on the lock's 4-track connector Repair if necessary. If +12 V is not present, contact your Techline.

NO

Check the continuity between track 1 of the switch's 2-track connector and the body earth. Repair if necessary. Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If insulated, replace the switch.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-100

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ET061 CONTINUED 1

ET061 Present when there is no request on the button

Scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free)

Check for insulation against earth on track 5 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check for insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If there is continuity, replace the switch If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

Scenario 1 vehicle (not hands-free)

Check for insulation against earth on track 1 of the lock's 4-track connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If there is continuity, replace the switch If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-101

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

REAR SCREEN OPENING REQUEST ET062

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This status can be processed only for type J vehicles (Scenic, 5-seater), R (Scenic 7seater) and K (estate).

ET062 Absent when there is a request on the button.

Scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free) Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 16 of the 40-track PE3 connector with the button pressed. Is earth present?

YES

NO

AFTER REPAIR

Contact your Techline.

Check the condition and connection of the switch's 2-track connector. Repair if necessary. Check for continuity between the 40-track PE3 connector on track 16 of the UCH and track 1 of the switch's 2-track connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 2 of the switch's 2-track connector. Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If insulated, replace the switch.

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-102

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ET062 CONTINUED

ET062 Absent when there is a request on the button

Scenario 1 vehicle (not hands-free) Check the connection and condition of the 4-track connector of the lock. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 1 of the door lock connector with the button pressed. Is earth present?

YES

Check for +12 V on track 2 of the lock's 4-track connector. Is it present? YES: Replace the tailgate lock NO: Check for +12 V on track 7 of connector PP3 of the UCH. If +12 V is present, check the continuity and insulation of the following connection between connector PP3 of the UCH on track 7 and track 2 of the lock's 4-track connector. Repair if necessary. If +12 V is not present, contact your Techline.

NO

Check the continuity between track 1 of the switch's 2-track connector and the body earth. Repair if necessary. Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If insulated, replace the switch.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-103

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ET062 CONTINUED

ET062 Present when there is no request on the button

Scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free)

Check for insulation against track earth on track 7 of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check for insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If there is continuity, replace the switch. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

Scenario 1 vehicle (hands-free)

Check for insulation against earth on track 4 of the lock. Repair if necessary. Check for insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If there is continuity, replace the switch. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-104

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

CARD BUTTON PRESS RECEIVED ET066

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. It is essential to have the second card. The status is declared as YES when one of the buttons is pressed.

ET066: NO despite pressing one of the buttons on the card.

Check with the second card whether the status goes to YES. Replace the first card. If the status remains at NO, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-105

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

CARD BUTTON PRESS RECOGNISED ET067

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. The status is declared as YES when one of the buttons is pressed.

ET067: NO despite pressing one of the buttons on the card

Carry out resynchronisation of the cards by forced setting of the after ignition If the problem persists and if ET066 Card button press received is YES, replace the cards. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-106

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ET068 ET069

NOTES

ORIGIN OF LAST LOCK ORIGIN OF LAST UNLOCK

There must be no present or stored faults.

Makes it possible to know what mode is the origin of the last locking or unlocking operation. ET068 Origin of last lock RAID FUNCTION: The UCH controls locking according to the speed signal from the vehicle. AUTOMATIC: The UCH controls locking in case of non-detection of opening of a door or a hands-free or card unlocking request, within the 30 seconds following unlocking Electric door lock: follows an action on the button. HANDS-FREE: detection of a close request on button press located on the handles or in a flow chart. RENAULT CARD: detection when the button is pressed. FAULT FINDING: Action requested by the After-Sales tool via command AC004 Central door locking ET069 Last unlocking source HANDS-FREE: detection of a hand in the handle; Electric door lock: follows an action on the button. AIRBAG: following an impact signal detected. FAULT FINDING: Action requested by the After Sales tool via command AC005 Central door unlocking AC006 Driver unlocking RENAULT CARD: detection upon a button press.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-107

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ELECTRIC CHILD SAFETY SWITCH ET084

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.) Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 6-track connector of the child safety switch. (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track A3 of the child safety switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Child safety button 6-track connector track B1

Track 11 of the UCH 40-track PE1 connector

Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation between tracks B1 and A3 of the switch (OFF position) The continuity between tracks B1 and A3 of the switch (Pressed position) Replace the switch if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-108

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ELECTRIC CHILDPROOF LOCKS ET086

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Status ET084: Electric child safety switch must be consistent with the actual position of the switch. If it is not correct, carry out the fault finding procedure on this status first. The locking/unlocking function should work on all the doors. If faulty, carry out the fault finding procedure on commands AC004 and AC005 first.

Manually check the operation of the child safety system Otherwise, apply the following fault finding procedure. Check the condition and connection of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 6-track connector on the rear locks (tabs crushed, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Insert a warning light bulb and check that it lights, during the brief moment of activation or deactivation of the child safety system between tracks B and E of the rear lock motor. If faulty, check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: rear left-hand lock motor Track B Track 11 of UCH connector PP2 rear right-hand lock motor Track E rear left-hand lock motor Track E Track 8 of UCH connector PP2 rear right hand lock motor Track B Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-109

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ET088 ET090

NOTES

ORIGIN OF DEADLOCK ACTIVATION ORIGIN OF DEADLOCK DEACTIVATION

There must be no present or stored faults.

Makes it possible to know which component is the origin of the last locking or unlocking operation. ET088 Origin of deadlock activation RENAULT CARD: with a second button press on the card. HANDS-FREE: with a second press on the door handle button. ET090 Origin of deadlock deactivation Electric Door Locking: when pressing the locking/unlocking switch RENAULT CARD: press on card button. HANDS-FREE: placing a hand in the handle FAULT FINDING: with the After Sales tool running command AC 006. + After ignition feed: no deadlocking at this power supply level.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-110

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

UCH BLANK ET008

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET008: is at YES.

Refer to the start of this section to perform: – UCH programming and UCH configuration, – card programming.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-111

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

IMMOBILISER SYSTEM ET046

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Power supply level required + after ignition.

ET046 Active scenario 1 vehicle (without hands-free) with start request, but the after ignition level is not present.

1 Check status ET070: Start switch; it should be depressed in the event of a button press; if it is released, perform fault finding on this status. 2 Transponder status ET116 Card code recognised and ET117 Card code valid 3 Check status ET071 Blank steering lock for NO; if YES, run fault finding on that status. Check status ET072 Steering lock which should be unlocked; if locked, run fault finding on that status. Check status ET073 Steering lock sensor signal; if locked, run fault finding on that status. 4 Check status ET111 UCH request to injection system or Protection and Switching Unit if ET111 is at + after ignition 5 Check that there is no fault on the after ignition relay; this relay is located in the Protection and Switching Unit. 6 If these statuses are okay, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-112

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

ET046 CONTINUED

ET046 Active scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free) with start request, but the after ignition is not present.'

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8

Check whether the card is assigned to the vehicle by means of the SC006 Card assignment command. Transponder status ET116 Card code recognised and ET117 Card code valid. Testing of internal aerials via the command. Check status ET070: Start switch; it should be depressed in the event of a button press; if it is released, perform fault finding on this status. Check status ET071 Blank steering lock for NO; if YES , run fault finding on that status. Check status ET072 Steering lock which should be unlocked; if locked, run fault finding on that status. Check status ET073 Steering lock sensor signal; if locked, run fault finding on that status. Check status ET111 UCH request to injection system or Protection and Switching Unit if ET111 is at + after ignition. Check that there is no fault on the after ignition relay; this relay is located in the Protection and Switching Unit. If these statuses are okay, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-113

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

ET046 CONTINUED

ET046 Active present forced after ignition feed level

Check and repair if necessary. ET047 Brake pedal position should be PRESSED, ET048 Clutch pedal position should be PRESSED, Neutral status: see in Protection and Switching Unit. Status of automatic transmission speed selector. Status of engine immobiliser in the injection system; if ACTIVE, check the injection computer. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-114

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

START SWITCH ET070

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the engine ON/OFF button (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 2 of the ON/OFF button connector. Repair if necessary. Check: The continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the ON/OFF button in depressed position and the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the ON/OFF button in released position Replace the switch if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: On-off control button on track 1 track 7 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-115

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

BLANK STEERING COLUMN LOCK ET071

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

If the steering lock status remains at YES. Check that the card is authenticated (otherwise refer to processing of the ET116 Card code valid status). Check that when pressing on the disengaged clutch pedal or on the brake pedal or the ON/OFF button, the UCH issues an unlock signal (if the steering is locked). If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-116

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

STEERING LOCK ET072

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

If the status is at INCONSISTENCY, refer to processing of the DF029 Steering lock circuit fault.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-117

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

STEERING LOCK SENSOR SIGNAL ET073

There must be no present or stored faults. The status should be unlocked in after ignition present or pseudo-armed in + accessories NOTES Special note: Perform a locking/unlocking operation, and check the lock power supply during the 5 minutes.

ET073 Faulty when the steering column is not unlocked. ET073 Short circuit when the steering column is not unlocked.

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the power supply on track 2 of the 6-track connector of the steering lock. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity between vehicle track 1 of the 6-track connector of the steering lock and the vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering lock on track 3 Track 10 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering lock on track 6 Track 20 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering lock on track 4 Track 1 of the 12-track PP1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-118

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

ET073 CONTINUED

ET073 Unlocked and + after ignition absent.

The status remains UNLOCKED, with the ignition off, in case of failure of the airbag system or the speed signal. If everything is okay, refer to processing of the DF029: Steering lock circuit fault.

ET073 Pseudo-armed and + after ignition present.

In the pseudo-armed status, the lock bolt is pulled out, but the UCH cannot determine its position precisely. In case of inconsistency, contact the Techline.

ET073 Undetermined.

The status is UNDETERMINED in the event that neither the lock nor the lock sensor can inform the UCH regarding its position. Refer to processing of the DF029 Steering lock circuit fault.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-119

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

+ ACCESSORIES PRESENT ET075

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES Special note: Check satisfactory operation of the start switch: ET070 Start switch.

Status 075 is at YES but + accessories absent.

Check the power-supply fuses. Ensure +12 V on track 1B of the fuse box. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 2B of the fuse box by pressing the button. Is earth present?

YES

Ensure +12 V + before ignition on track 3B of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. Check on track 5 B of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box for a +12 V by pressing the start switch. If there is no 12 V, replace the relay. If there is 12 V, check the wiring harness.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-120

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

ET075 CONTINUED

Status 075 is at YES but + accessories absent.

NO

AFTER REPAIR

Check at UCH output for earth on track 34 of the 40-track PE3 connector If NO, contact the Techline. If YES, check the continuity of the following connection: 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH on Track 34 Track 2B of passenger compartment fuse and relay box. Repair if necessary.

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-121

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

CARD CODE RECEIVED ET116

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET116 Inactive key assigned to the vehicle.

If the status remains INACTIVE, try the other card assigned to the vehicle before performing any operation.' If the status goes ACTIVE with the vehicle's second card, replace the faulty card. If the ET116 Card code received status goes ACTIVE. Replace the vehicle's cards. If the ET117 Card code received status remains INACTIVE. Carry out the following checks: Check the following connectors: 8-track connector of the card reader (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised). 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation against the earth of the following connections: Card reader track 3 Track 21 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Card reader track 4 Track 39 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Card reader track 6 Track 40 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the reader if necessary. Contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-122

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

CARD CODE VALID ET117

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET117 Inactive key assigned to the vehicle

If the status remains INACTIVE, try the other card assigned to the vehicle before performing any operation.' If the status changes to ACTIVE with the vehicle's second card, replace the faulty card. Carry out card assignment SC006 Card assignment. Remove the cards if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-123

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

VEHICLE SPEED PR008

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. A speed signal failure may cause various problems to appear (on the steering lock, difficulty stopping the engine, non-operation of the RAID system, etc.).

Perform a complete diagnostic of the ABS and the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-124

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION ET047

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. The accessories relay must operate. During pedal travel, it is possible to note an inconsistency. This treatment applies only in cases in which the status is inconsistency or undetermined, with foot hard down on the accelerator or completely released from the brake pedal. Special note: Apply forced setting of after ignition.

Status 047 Inconsistency when pressing on the pedal.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch Repair if necessary. Check the insulation between tracks 3 and 4 of the brake pedal switch, with the pedal depressed. Replace the switch if faulty. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure insulation from +12 V of the connection between track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector and track 36 of the PE2 connector of the UCH. Note: The line is shared with the injection computer and, where applicable, the automatic transmission computer. It is therefore necessary, in case of faulty insulation, to check, using a wiring diagram, the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these computers. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-125

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ET047 CONTINUED

Status 047 Undetermined without pressing on the pedal.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake switch. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of 12 V on track 4 of the brake pedal switch connector. If not correct: – Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. – Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between the brake pedal switch connector track 4 and track 3 of the PP3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Contact your Techline, if still faulty. Check the continuity of the connection between track 3 and track 4 of the brake switch in OFF position. Replace the switch if faulty. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: UCH PE2 connector Track 36 Track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector. Repair if necessary. Note: The line is shared with the injection computer and, where applicable, the automatic transmission computer. It is therefore necessary, in case of faulty insulation, to check, using a wiring diagram, the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these computers.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-126

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ET047 CONTINUED

Status 047 Inconsistency without pressing on the pedal.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the brake pedal switch, with the pedal released. Replace the switch if faulty. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure insulation from +12 V of the connection between track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector and track 27 of the PE2 connector of the UCH. Note: The line is shared with the ABS computer or the electronic stability program (ESP) relay (depending on equipment) and the brake lights. It is therefore necessary, in case of faulty insulation, to check, using a wiring diagram, the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these items. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-127

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ET047 CONTINUED

Status 047 Undetermined with pressing on the pedal.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake switch. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of 12 V on track 2 of the brake pedal switch connector. If not correct: – Check the condition and connection of fuse 1H in the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. – Check the condition and connection of the 18-track connector of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. – Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between the brake pedal switch connector track 4 and track 1H of the 18-track connector of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. Repair if necessary. Contact your Techline, if still faulty. Check the continuity of the connection between track 1 and track 2 of the brake switch in depressed position. Replace the switch if faulty. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: UCH connector PE2 Track 27 Track 1 of the brake pedal switch connector. Repair if necessary. Note: The line is shared with the ABS computer or the ESP relay (depending on equipment) and the brake lights. It is therefore necessary, in case of faulty insulation, to check, using a wiring diagram, the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these items.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-128

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION ET048

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES Special note: Apply forced setting of after ignition.

Status 048 "Released" when pressing on the pedal.

Check the condition and connection of the clutch pedal switch connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 2 of the clutch pedal switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the clutch pedal switch in the pedal depressed position. If faulty, replace the clutch pedal switch. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Clutch switch on track 1 track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE1 connector Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-129

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ET048 CONTINUED

Status 048 "Depressed" without pressing on the pedal.

Check the condition and connection of the clutch pedal switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the clutch pedal switch in the pedal released position. If faulty, replace the clutch pedal switch. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Clutch switch on track 1 Track 5 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-130

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

+ AFTER IGNITION PRESENT ET049

There must be no present or stored faults.

NOTES

Special notes: starting conditions: Make sure the start button presses are properly perceived by the UCH by means of the ET070 Start switch status. Check that the card is properly recognised by the UCH by means of the ET116 Card code recognised and ET117 Card code valid statuses. Check that the steering lock operates correctly by means of the ET073 Steering lock sensor signal status. Check that the UCH request is properly sent to the other computers, by means of the ET111 UCH request to INJECTION OR Protection and Switching Unit status. Make sure the pedal presses are properly perceived by the UCH by means of the ET047 Clutch pedal and ET048 Brake pedal statuses. In case of problems, apply the fault finding procedure associated with the faulty status.

Status 049 NO with correct starting or forced after ignition setting conditions.

Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-131

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

START SWITCH ET070

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Check this status in the PROTECTION sub-function.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-132

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ENGINE RUNNING ET091

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET091: Inconsistent with the actual operation of the engine.

Run complete fault finding on the injection system and the multiplex network. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-133

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ENGINE STOPPED ET092

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET092: Inconsistent with the actual operation of the engine.

Run complete fault finding on the injection system and the multiplex network. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-134

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ENGINE STALLED ET093

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET093: Inconsistent with the actual operation of the engine.

Run complete fault finding on the injection system and the multiplex network. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-135

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ENGINE DRIVEN ET094

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET094: Inconsistent with the actual operation of the engine.

Run complete fault finding on the injection system and the multiplex network. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-136

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTOR POSITION ET108

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET108: ABSENT: no automatic transmission presence, OFF NEUTRAL: gear selector lever position on D, NEUTRAL: gear selector lever position on N, REVERSE: gear selector lever position on R. Run fault finding on the automatic transmission and the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-137

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

UCH REQUEST TO INJECTION SYSTEM OR PROTECTION AND SWITCHING UNIT ET110

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

This status gives information concerning the type of request made by the UCH to these computers.

ET110: ENGINE STOP: when an engine stop is requested. INACTIVE: without action on the vehicle. + AFTER IGNITION: a press of more than 5 seconds on the start switch. START: when starting is requested. If the status does not correspond to the current user request, refer to the corresponding fault finding charts in the Keyless Vehicle function section. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults.

87B-138

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT 187B Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING

EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE PR002

NOTES

None.

Check the temperature sensor's green 2-track connector. (e.g. connector poorly connected, pins crushed, oxidised, broken). Repair it if necessary. Check the UCH black 40-track connector. (e.g. connector poorly connected, pins crushed, oxidised, broken). Repair it if necessary. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Temperature sensor track 1 Track 3 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH Temperature sensor track 2 Track 13 of the UCH 40-track black connector Repair if necessary. Check sensor resistance on tracks 1 and 2. Approximate temperature in °C

Sensor resistance in Ω

between 0 and 5

between 5400 and 6200

between 11 and 15

between 3700 and 4400

between 21 and 25

between 2500 and 3000

between 31 and 35

between 1700 and 2100

Replace the sensor if necessary. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-139

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING

NUMBER OF RCHs REQUIRED ET017

There must be no present or stored faults. The status, depending on the conditions, will be at 0, 1, 2 or 3.

NOTES

Special note: Manual heating and ventilation system Defined by the UCH according to the engine coolant temperature, the exterior temperature and electrical availability. Regulated climate control Defined by the UCH according to the engine coolant temperature, the exterior temperature, electrical availability, the interior temperature and the user's request.

The passenger compartment heating resistor management conditions are: Manual heating and ventilation system: ET091 Engine running at YES ET015 Passenger compartment ventilation ACTIVE PR002: Exterior temperature < 5°C Engine coolant temperature < 50°C (refer to injection computer) Electrical availability -60%, alternator charge < 70% (refer to the Power and Switching Unit). Climate control: ET091 Engine running PR002: Exterior temperature < 5°C Engine coolant temperature < 50°C (refer to injection computer) Electrical availability -60%, alternator charge < 70% (refer to the Power and Switching Unit). Heat demand by the user (refer to the air conditioning computer). Check the consistency of these statuses and parameters. In the event of a problem, refer to the procedure for processing these statuses and parameters.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-140

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING

NUMBER OF PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTORS AUTHORISED BY ALTERNATOR ET018

There must be no present or stored faults.

NOTES

AFTER REPAIR

Special note: Authorisation given by the UCH according to the electrical availability provided by the Protection and Switching Unit. Check in the Protection and Switching Unit that the parameter corresponds to the availability. The status, depending on the conditions, will be at 0, 1, 2 or 3.

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-141

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING

NUMBER OF RCH AUTHORISED BY INJECTION ET019

There must be no present or stored faults.

NOTES

AFTER REPAIR

Special note: Authorisation given by the injection system according to the engine load and the driver's demands. The status, depending on the conditions, will be at 0, 1, 2 or 3.

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-142

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING

NUMBER OF PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTORS CONTROLLED ET020

There must be no present or stored faults.

NOTES

AFTER REPAIR

Special note: The UCH controls the passenger compartment heating resistor relays according to the authorisation from the injection computers and Protection and Switching Unit. The status, depending on the conditions, will be at 0, 1, 2 or 3.

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-143

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING

ET021 ET022

NOTES

RCH CONTROL 1 RCH CONTROL 2

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check on ET017 Number of passenger compartment heating resistors required, ET018 Number of passenger compartment heating resistors authorised by alternator, ET019 Number of passenger compartment heating resistors authorised by injection system, ET015 Passenger compartment ventilation. Check on requisite heating and ventilation parameters: heat request via the temperature setting.

If all the requisite conditions are consistent and the statuses are INACTIVE, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-144

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING

REAR SCREEN DE-ICER CONTROL ET026

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES Special note: For the rear screen de-icer to operate, the engine must be running.

ET026 Inactive despite a rear de-icing request by the user.

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING

Check whether the ET092 Engine running status is YES; otherwise run fault finding on the injection system. Check whether the ET028 Heated rear screen switch is PRESSED; otherwise run fault finding on that status. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

Automatic air conditioning

Check whether the ET092 Engine running status is YES; otherwise run fault finding on the injection system. Run fault finding on the air-conditioning computer. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-145

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING

FAST IDLE REQUEST FOR RCH ET031

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET031 Inactive when the status is inconsistent with normal operation of the vehicle.

Contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-146

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - USER SELECTION

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT VENTILATION ET015

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Apply to manual heating and ventilation.

ET015 Inactive position on the air conditioning control panel different from 0.

Check the condition and connection of the black 9-track connector on the air conditioning control panel (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: 9-track connector of the control panel on Track 1 Track 32 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Perform a check on the control panel; see unregulated air conditioning section. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-147

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - USER SELECTION

REAR SCREEN DE-ICER BUTTON ET028

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Apply to manual heating and ventilation.

ET028 Released with press on the button.

Check the condition and connection of the black 9-track connector on the air conditioning control panel (tabs crushed, broken.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 40-track connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Air conditioning control panel black 9-track connector on track 4

track 24 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Perform a check on the control panel; see unregulated air conditioning section. Contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-148

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - USER SELECTION

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON ET029

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Apply during manual heating and ventilation.

ET029 Released with press on the button.

Check the condition and connection of the black 9-track connector on the air conditioning control panel (tabs crushed, broken.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 40-track connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Air conditioning control panel black 9-track connector on track 7

track 30 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Perform a check on the control panel; see unregulated air conditioning section. Contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-149

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - COLD LOOP

AIR CONDITIONING REQUEST ET030

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. The status should be active when a request is made to the air conditioning control panel. The engine must be running.

ET030 Inactive despite an air conditioning request.

Manual air conditioning

Check whether the ET091 Engine running status is YES; if it is NO, run fault finding on the injection system. Check whether the ET029 Air conditioning button status is DEPRESSED with one press; if RELEASED, run fault finding on that status. Check the ET015 Passenger compartment ventilation status, which should be ACTIVE; if INACTIVE, run fault finding on that status. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

Regulated air conditioning

Run fault finding on the air-conditioning computer. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-150

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

LIGHTING SETTING ET081

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Command check in section 84.

ET081 Dipped beam with Park requested control stalk position. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET082 Right-hand indicator request: Set the control stalk to the right-hand indicator, ET096 Wiper speed ring position level 1: Place the speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET082 Right-hand indicator request ET096 Wiper speed ring position level 1

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control Track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-151

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

ET081 CONTINUED 1

ET081 Dipped beam with control stalk position on side lights requested.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET080 Rear screen wiper request: Set control stalk to rear screen wiper. ET096 Wiper speed ring position level 1: Place the speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET080 Rear screen wiper request ET096 Wiper speed ring position level 1

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control Track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control Track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-152

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

ET081 CONTINUED 2

ET081 Side lights with control stalk position on main beam headlights requested. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET098 Trip Computer button: Press the button at the end of the control stalk. ET096 Wiper speed ring position level 1: Place the speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET098 Trip Computer button ET096 Wiper speed ring position level 1

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Depressed

Released

Released

Depressed

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control Track 10 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control Track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control Track 10 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control Track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-153

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

ET081 CONTINUED 3

ET081 Dipped beam with control stalk position on headlight flash requested.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the wiper stalk to Park position. ET096 Wiper speed ring position level 1: Place the speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET077 Wiper stalk position ET096 Wiper speed ring position level 1

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Off

Intermittent facility

Intermittent facility

Off

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control Track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control Track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-154

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

ET081 CONTINUED 4

ET081 Side lights with control stalk position on dipped beam requested.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the wiper stalk to Park position. ET096 Wiper speed ring position level 1: Place the speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET077 Wiper stalk position ET096 Wiper speed ring position level 1

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Off

Intermittent facility

Intermittent facility

Off

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control Track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control Track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-155

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

REAR FOG LIGHTS REQUEST ET082

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. See Section 84 (test procedure).

ET082 Absent with control stalk position on rear fog light requested.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand indicator request: Set the control stalk to the left-hand indicator. ET080 Rear screen wiper request: Place the wiper stalk in rear screen wiper position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET080 Rear screen wiper request

Absent

Present

Absent

Present See ALP 4

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control Track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control Track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control Track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control Track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-156

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR REQUEST ET083

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Command check in section 84.

ET083 Absent with control stalk position on left-hand indicator.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET084 Right-hand indicator request: Place the control stalk on the right-hand indicator. ET082 Rear fog lights request: Place the control stalk on rear fog lights request. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET084 Right-hand indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET082 Rear fog lights request

Absent

Present

Absent

Present See ALP 4

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 14 Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control track 14 Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-157

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR REQUEST ET084

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Command check in section 84.

ET084 Absent with control stalk position on right-hand indicator.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand indicator request: Set the control stalk to the left-hand indicator. ET096 Wiper speed ring position level 3: Place the control stalk on rear fog lights request. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET096 Wiper speed ring position level 3

4

3

4

3 See ALP 5

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 14 Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 14 Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-158

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS BUTTON ET085

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET085 Absent with press on the switch.

Check on fuse F7B/RL 7 7.5 A of the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace it if necessary. Check on the grey 8-track connector of the doors/warning lights switch (e.g. connector properly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check on 40-track connectors PE2 and PE1 (e.g. connector properly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check for +12 V on track 3 and the earth and vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch track 6 Track 3 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH. Switch track 7 Track 35 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Power supply on track 3 Track 6 of the PPH 2 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check on the switch (depressed): tracks 6 and 7, If insulated, replace the switch. If continuity, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-159

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

ET085 CONTINUED

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET085 Present without pressing the switch.

Check on the grey 8-track connector of the doors/warning lights switch. (connector properly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the 40-track PE2 and PE1 connectors. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch track 6 Track 3 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH. Switch track 7 Track 35 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Power supply on track 3 Track 6 of the PPH 2 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check on the switch (OFF): tracks 6 and 7, If insulated, replace the switch. If there is continuity, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-160

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

FRONT FOG LIGHTS REQUEST ET111

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. See Section 84 (test procedure).

ET111 Absent with control stalk position on fog light requested.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand indicator request: Set the control stalk to the left-hand indicator. ET080 Rear screen wiper request: Place control stalk on rear screen wiper request. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET080 Rear screen wiper request

Absent

Present

Absent

Present See ALP 4

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-161

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

AUTOMATIC LIGHTING BUTTON ET113

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Refer to Section 84 (inspection method), only with rain sensor.

ET113 Released with one press on the button. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand indicator request: Set the control stalk to the left-hand indicator. ET096 Wiper speed ring position level 1: Place the control stalk on rear fog lights request. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET083 Left-hand indicator request ET096 Wiper speed ring position level 1

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-162

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

REQUEST FROM LIGHT SENSOR TO SWITCH ON HEADLIGHTS ET115

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Vehicle fitted with sensor.

ET115 is Inactive without lights lit.

Replace the sensor.

ET115 is Inactive with lights lit.

Check on 15 A fuse of sensor power supply line. Replace it if necessary. Check on black 3-track connector of the sensor. (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check on the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e.g. connector properly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sensor track 1 Track 11 of the Protection and Switching Unit PPH2 connector Sensor track 2 Track 2 of UCH PE2 connector. Sensor track 3 Vehicle earth Repair if necessary. If necessary replace the sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-163

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

ET115 CONTINUED

ET115 is Active without lights lit.

Check on black 3-track connector of the sensor, poorly connected connector (e.g. tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check on 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sensor track 1 Track 11 of the Protection and Switching Unit PPH2 connector Sensor track 2 Track 2 of UCH PE2 connector. Sensor track 3 Vehicle earth Repair if necessary. If necessary replace the sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-164

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL ET112

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET112 Inactive when the footwells/floor are operative.

Check whether the footwell/floor switches operate correctly; if YES, contact your Techline. If NO, check for earth on tracks 9 and 10 of the PP3 connector of the UCH; if earth is present, check the continuity and insulation of the wiring harness between the UCH and the switch connectors (see wiring diagram). Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, replace the faulty switch.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-165

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

VEHICLE SPEED PR008

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Perform a complete diagnostic of the ABS and the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-166

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

WIPER STALK POSITION ET077

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. To obtain status 081, main beam headlights, hold the switch in position. Command check in section 84.

ET077 Slow speed but with control stalk in Park position requested. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand indicator request: Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator. ET081 Lighting stalk position: Place the control stalk on main beam headlights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET081 Lighting stalk position on main beam headlights

Dipped headlights

Main beam

Dipped headlights

Main beam Change the steering column control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 4 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-167

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ET077 CONTINUED 1

NOTES

If no contact is detected by the UCH, slow speed is automatically selected.

ET077 Slow speed control stalk on Park requested position.

Change the steering column control. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-168

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ET077 CONTINUED 2

ET077 Slow speed but with control stalk in fast speed requested position.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET080 Rear screen wiper request: Set the wiper stalk to a rear screen wiper request. ET081 Speed ring position level 2: Place the speed ring on level 2. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET080 Rear screen wiper request ET096 Speed ring position level 2

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

4

2

4

2 Change the steering column control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 9 track 2 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 13 Track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-169

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ET077 CONTINUED 3

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. To obtain status 081, main beam headlights, hold the switch in position. Command check in section 84.

ET077 Level 2 but with intermittent speed level 1 requested. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET081 Lighting stalk position: Set the lighting stalk to Park position. ET081 Lighting stalk position: Set the lighting stalk to main beam headlights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET081 Lighting stalk Park request position ET081 Lighting stalk position on main beam headlights

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Off

Dipped headlights

Dipped headlights

Off

Dipped headlights

Main beam

Dipped headlights

Main beam Change the steering column control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 5 Track 12 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Steering column control track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-170

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ET078 ET079

NOTES

FRONT WINDSCREEN WASHER REQUEST REAR SCREEN WASHER REQUEST

There must be no present or stored faults. Command check in section 84.

ET078 Absent when the control stalk is pressed. ET079 Absent when the control stalk is pressed.

Check on the steering column control 6-track connector. E.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken. Repair if necessary. Check the UCH 40-track PE1 connector. E.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken. Repair if necessary. Check for +12 V on track 6 of the steering column control connector. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control on track 1 Track 12 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (front) Steering column control on track 2 Track 28 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (rear) Control earth on track 5 Vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Check the steering column control black connector. Tracks 1 and 6 front windscreen washer control on; if insulated, change the control. Tracks 2 and 6 rear windscreen washer control on; if insulated, change the control. If continuity, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-171

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

REAR SCREEN WIPER REQUEST ET080

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Command check in section 84. To obtain ET082 Rear fog lights request, hold the handle.

ET080 Absent with control stalk position on rear screen wiper requested. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET082 Rear fog lights request: Set the lighting stalk to rear fog lights. ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the front wiper stalk to high speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET082 Rear fog lights request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET077 Wiper stalk position at high speed

High speed

Low speed

Low speed

High speed See ALP 10

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 13 track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-172

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

INTERMITTENT WIPER RING POSITION ET096

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Command check in section 84.

ET096 Level 1 but with intermittent speed level 2 requested.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand indicator request: Set the lighting stalk to the left-hand indicator. ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the front wiper stalk to the low speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET077 Wiper stalk high speed position

Off

Low speed

Off

Low speed Change the steering column control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 9 Track 2 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-173

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ET096 CONTINUED 1

ET096: Level 1 but with intermittent speed level 3 requested.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Right-hand indicator request: Set the lighting stalk to the right-hand indicator. ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the front wiper stalk to high speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET084 Right-hand indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET077 Wiper stalk position at high speed

Low speed

High speed

Low speed

High speed Change the steering column control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-174

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ET096 CONTINUED 2

NOTES

To obtain status ET081 Main beam headlights, hold the switch in position.

ET096 Level 1 but with intermittent speed level 4 requested. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the windscreen wiper stalk to high speed. ET081 Lighting stalk position: Set the lighting stalk to main beam headlights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET077 Wiper stalk position at high speed

High speed

Low speed

Low speed

High speed

ET081 Lighting stalk position on main beam headlights

Dipped headlights

Main beam

Dipped headlights

Main beam Change the steering column control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-175

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

REAR SCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION ET097

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET097 Inactive

Check the condition and connection of the white 3-track connector of the rear screen wiper (tabs crushed, broken). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Rear screen wiper motor on track 2 Track 37 of the PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity of the connection between connector track 3 and vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Check the rear screen wiper motor. Check fitting. If everything is okay, replace the wiper motor. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-176

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET109

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET108 is NO when reverse gear is engaged.

Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-177

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

AUTO GEAR SELECTOR POSITION ET108

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES Special note: This status informs of the automatic transmission gear selector position.

ET108: ABSENT, without automatic transmission, OUT OF NEUTRAL, with a gear shift to position D, NEUTRAL, gear selector lever on position N, REVERSE, gear selector lever on position R, If there is an incorrect position, run fault finding on the automatic transmission. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-178

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

WINDSCREEN WIPER REQUEST BY RAIN SENSOR ET114

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Vehicle fitted with sensor.

ET114 is Inactive without wiper in operation.

Replace the sensor.

ET114 is Inactive with wiper in operation.

Check on 15 A fuse of the sensor power supply line. Replace if necessary. Check on black 3-track connector of the sensor (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check on 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sensor track 1 Track 11 of the Protection and Switching Unit PPH2 connector Sensor track 2 Track 2 of UCH connector PE2. Sensor track 3 Vehicle earth Repair if necessary. If necessary replace the sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-179

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ET114 CONTINUED

ET114 is Active without wiper in operation.

Check on black 3-track connector of the sensor, for connector poorly connected (e.g. tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check on 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sensor track 1 Track 11 of the Protection and Switch Unit PPH2 connector Sensor track 2 Track 2 of UCH connector PE2. Sensor track 3 Vehicle earth Repair if necessary. If necessary replace the sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-180

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

MAIN SCREEN

BATTERY VOLTAGE PR001

NOTES

None.

Check the + battery voltage reading.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-181

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

MAIN SCREEN

EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE PR002

NOTES

None.

Check the green 2-track connector of the temperature sensor (tabs crushed, oxidised, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the black 40-track connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, oxidised, broken, etc.). Repair it if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Temperature sensor track 1 Track 3 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. Temperature sensor track 2 Track 13 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check sensor resistance on tracks 1 and 2. Replace the sensor if necessary. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-182

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

MAIN SCREEN

CONTROL POWER LEVEL ET014

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Special note: This status displays the power level.

ET014: NONE, no power supply TIME-DELAYED, when a door is opened + ACCESSORIES FEED, when the Start switch is pressed + AFTER IGNITION FEED at starting or a forced + after ignition feed Contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-183

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses MAIN SCREEN

ONE-TOUCH WINDOW ACTIVATION ET087

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET087 Active No operation of one or more one-touch windows.

Ensure the presence of earth on track 6 of the connector on the electric window suspected as faulty. Is earth present? NO

Check earth at UCH output on track 7 of the 40-track PE2 connector. If there is no earth, contact your Techline. If the earth is present, ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: 40-track PE2 connector on track 7 Track 6 of the electric window connector Repair if necessary.

YES

AFTER REPAIR

Run complete fault finding on the electric window motor.

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-184

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

MAIN SCREEN

ET087 CONTINUED

ET087 Inactive no operation of one or more one-touch windows.

Run the AC025 One-touch window enabling command, and check for earth on track 6 of the electric window connector. Is earth present?

YES

NO

AFTER REPAIR

Operating conditions: Door open; if failure, check the door statuses. + accessories level power supply raised at least once.

Run complete fault finding on the electric window motor.

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-185

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

MAIN SCREEN

TRIP COMPUTER BUTTON ET098

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This status should go to ON when the control is actuated.

ET098 Released with press on the button.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET082 Rear fog lights request: Set the lighting stalk to the fog lights position. ET081 Lighting stalk position: Set the lighting stalk to dipped headlights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET082 Rear fog lights request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET081 Dipped headlights wiper stalk position.

Off

Dipped headlights

Off

Dipped headlights Change the steering column control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering column control track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering column control track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Command check in section 84. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-186

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

OPENING ELEMENT LOCKING AC004

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing locking relay operation. The command lasts 7 seconds. Note: The driver's door circuit is shared with the fuel tank flap circuit.

One or more doors do not lock when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the PP2 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the connector on the faulty lock(s). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on: Driver's door and Rear right-hand door locks, tracks C and D. Passenger's door and Rear left-hand door locks, tracks A and B. Fuel tank flap lock motor, tracks 1 and 3. If faulty:

If okay: With the command activated, check for +12 V: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks on track D, taking the earth on track C. Passenger's door and Rear left-hand door locks on track A, taking the earth on track B. Fuel tank flap lock motor on track 3, taking the earth on track 1. If okay, replace the faulty lock(s).

If faulty:

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-187

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

AC004 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver's door bolt track C Fuel tank flap bolt track 1

Track 6 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Driver's door bolt track D Fuel tank flap bolt track 3

Track 5 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Passenger door and rear left-hand door locks track B

Track 8 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Rear right-hand door bolt track C Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks track A

Track 7 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Rear right-hand door bolt track D Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-188

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

AC005 AC006

NOTES

UNLOCKING OF DOORS AND BOOT UNLOCKING OF DRIVER'S DOOR

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing unlocking relay operation. The driver's door circuit is shared with the fuel tank flap circuit. The command lasts 7 seconds.

One or more doors do not unlock when the commands are activated.

Check the condition and connection of the PP2 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the connector on the faulty lock(s). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks, tracks C and D. Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks, tracks A and B. Fuel tank flap lock motor, tracks 1 and 3. If faulty:

If okay: With the command activated, check for +12 V: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks on track C, taking the earth on track D. Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks on track B, taking the earth on track A. Fuel tank flap lock motor on track 1, taking the earth on track 3. If okay, replace the faulty lock(s).

If faulty:

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-189

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

AC005 AC006 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver's door bolt track C Fuel tank flap bolt track 1

Track 6 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Driver's door bolt track D Fuel tank flap bolt track 3

Track 5 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks track B

Track 8 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Rear right-hand door bolt track C Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks track A

Track 7 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Rear right-hand door bolt track D Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-190

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING BUTTON INDICATOR AC020

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is used to see if the button has the proper power supply. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The electric door lock button light does not come on when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the door locking button connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 5 of the electric door lock button connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for +12 V on track 5 of the electric door lock button connector. If okay, replace the switch. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Start switch track 5 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-191

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

CHILD SAFETY INDICATOR LIGHT AC029

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing child safety indicator light operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The child safety switch light does not come on when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of +12 V on track A2 of the Start switch connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track B3 of the child safety switch connector. If okay, replace the switch. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Start switch track A2 Track 9 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-192

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ONE-TOUCH WINDOW ACTIVATION AC025

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command can activate operation of the electric window motors after replacement of the UCH or a harmless loss of enabling. The command lasts 7 seconds.

After activation, read the ET087 One-touch window enabling status, to verify a change of status. If there is a problem, see the treatment for this condition.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-193

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

DRIVER-SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC032

Before executing this command, it is essential to have checked by means of command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding that there is no fault on the aerials. There must be no present or stored faults. During this command, make sure that the vehicle is isolated from the other Megane II's so as to make a correct diagnostic. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the driver-side external aerials. If the range exceeds 1.50 m, please check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. This command lasts 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

Front door

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 27 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 39 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-194

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

AC032 CONTINUED

Rear door

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 28 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 38 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-195

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

PASSENGER-SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC033

Before executing this command, it is essential to have checked by means of command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding that there is no fault on the aerials. There must be no present or stored faults. During this command, make sure that the vehicle is isolated from the other Megane II's so as to make a correct diagnostic. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the driver-side external aerials. If the range exceeds 1.50 m, check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. This command lasts 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

Front door

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 31 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 34 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-196

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

AC033 CONTINUED

Rear door

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 32 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 33 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-197

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

BOOT EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC033

Before executing this command, it is essential to have checked by means of command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding that there is no fault on the aerials. There must be no present or stored faults. During this command, make sure that the vehicle is isolated from the other Megane II's so as to make a correct diagnostic. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the driver-side external aerials. If the range exceeds 1.50 m, please check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. This command lasts 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 29 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 40 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-198

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

INTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC034

Before executing this command, it is essential to have checked by means of command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding that there is no fault on the aerials. There must be no present or stored faults. During this command, make sure that the vehicle is isolated from the other Megane II's so as to make a correct diagnostic. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the internal aerials. If the range goes beyond the door sill, please check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. This command lasts 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity relative to earth of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 Track 25 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 3-track connector on track 3 Track 24 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-199

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

AC034 CONTINUED 1

Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 Track 35 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 3-track connector on track 3 Track 36 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-200

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

AC034 CONTINUED 2

Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 Track 26 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 3-track connector on track 3 Track 37 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-201

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

SENDER AERIAL DIAGNOSTICS AC037

No faults should be present or stored.

NOTES

Special Note This command is for running fault finding on the aerials in open circuit or short circuit to +12 V. This command lasts 1 minute.

After activating the command, perform fault reading. If one (or more) fault(s) concerning the aerials appear(s), refer to the processing of this (these) fault(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-202

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

CARD CONTROL SC005

This command can indicate whether the card is blank, the card's assignment to the vehicle, the type of card and the card frequency. Normal operation Blank card

NO

Card assigned to vehicle

YES

Type of card

Hands-free or simple

Card frequency (MHz)

433

Abnormal operation Blank card

YES

Card assigned to vehicle

NO

Type of card

Hands-free or simple

Card frequency (MHz)

433

Blank card

NO

Card assigned to vehicle

NO

Type of card

Hands-free or simple

Card frequency (MHz)

433

Blank card

NO

Card assigned to vehicle

NO

Type of card

Hands-free or simple

Card frequency (MHz)

433

Blank card

YES

Card assigned to vehicle

YES

Type of card

Hands-free or simple

Card frequency (MHz)

433

This card is blank; you can carry out the assignment procedure.

This card does not belong to the vehicle; the card belongs to another type of vehicle.

This card does not belong to the vehicle; the card belongs to the Mégane II vehicle type.

Contact your Techline.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-203

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

ENGINE IMMOBILISER INDICATOR LIGHT AC003

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. The instrument panel must be seen to be present on the multiplex network. This command is for testing immobiliser indicator light operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The immobiliser indicator light does not come on when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the instrument panel connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track 29 of the instrument panel. If okay, replace the instrument panel. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Instrument panel track 29 Track 29 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-204

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

START SWITCH LIGHTING AC026

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing start switch lighting operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The start switch light does not come on when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the start switch connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 2 of the start switch connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 4 of the Start switch connector. If okay, replace the switch. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Start switch track 4 Track 13 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-205

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

CARD HOLDER LIGHTING AC024

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing card reader operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The card holder light does not come on when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the card holder connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 5 of the card holder connector. If okay:

If faulty: Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Card holder track 5 Track 25 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

With the command activated, check for the presence of + 12 V on track 2 of the card reader connector. If okay, replace the card holder. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Card holder track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-206

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTOR 1 RELAY AC016

Check that the vehicle is fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors. There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors. The command lasts 7 seconds.

NOTES

Ensure the presence of earth on tracks 2 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. Repair if necessary.

With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 3 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.

YES

Check that the resistances between tracks 2 and 3 and between tracks 3 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector are equal to infinity. Replace the passenger compartment heating resistors if faulty.

YES

Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A5 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1 and track 3 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.

NO With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track A5 of passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay. NO

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-207

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING

AC016 CONTINUED

Contact your Techline. NO With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay.

NO

With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track 33 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay and track 33 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

YES

Check for the presence of +12 V on track A3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay.

NO

Check the presence, the condition and connection of the F7 fuse on the power supply fuse board. Repair if necessary. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay and track 7 of the power supply fuse board.

YES

Check for the presence of +12 V on track A1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay.

NO

Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay and track 11 of the PPH2 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit.

If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-208

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTOR 2 RELAY AC017

Check that the vehicle is fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors. There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors. The command lasts 7 seconds.

NOTES

Ensure the presence of earth on tracks 2 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. Repair if necessary.

With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on tracks 1 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.

YES

Check that the resistances between tracks 1 and 2 and between tracks 4 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector are equal to infinity. Replace the passenger compartment heating resistors if faulty.

YES

Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B4 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay and tracks 1 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.

NO With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track B4 of passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay. NO

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-209

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - HEATING

AC017 CONTINUED

Contact your Techline. NO With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track B1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay.

NO

With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track 32 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay and track 33 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

YES

Check for the +12 V feed on track B3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay.

NO

Check the presence, the condition and connection of the F9 fuse on the power supply fuse board. Repair if necessary. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay and track 9 of the power supply fuse board.

YES

Check for the +12 V feed on track B2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay.

NO

Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay and track 11 of the PPH2 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit.

If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-210

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - USER SELECTION

AIR-CONDITIONING BUTTON INDICATOR LIGHT Manual heating and ventilation only. AC015

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing air-conditioning indicator light operation. Apply the after ignition feed, and the air conditioning control panel should light up. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The indicator light does not come on when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the heater control panel connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 5 of the heater control panel connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 6 of the heater control panel connector. If okay, replace the control panel. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Control panel track 6 Track 26 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-211

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - USER SELECTION

REAR SCREEN DE-ICER INDICATOR LIGHT Except with climate control. AC019

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing rear screen de-icer indicator light operation. Apply after ignition feed. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The rear screen de-icer indicator light does not come on when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the heater control panel connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 5 of the heater control panel connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 4 of the heater control panel connector. If okay, replace the control panel. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Control panel track 4 Track 38 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-212

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

REAR FOG LIGHTS AC009

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing fog lights operation. Check the bulbs.

The rear fog lights do not come on when the command is activated.

Left-hand drive Check the condition and connection of the connector for each rear light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for +12 V: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 1 of the rear light connector. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light. Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 3 and 5-door saloon: track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: track 1 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: track 1 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary.

Track 6 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-213

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

AC009 CONTINUED

Right-hand drive Check the condition and connection of the connector for each rear light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 4 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 4 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for +12 V: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 6 of the rear light connector. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light. Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 3 and 5-door saloon: track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: track 1 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: track 6 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary.

Track 6 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-214

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR AC022

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing direction indicator operation. Apply after ignition feed. Check the bulbs.

The direction indicators do not light when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the left-hand headlight, the left-hand repeater and the rear left-hand light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb/Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the control activated, check for the presence of +12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb/Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light connector. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-215

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR AC022

Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary.

Track 4 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-216

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR AC023

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing direction indicator operation. Apply after ignition. Check the bulbs.

The direction indicators do not light when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the right-hand headlight, the right-hand repeater and the rear right-hand light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb/Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 4 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb/Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light(s). Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-217

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

AC023 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary.

Track 4 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-218

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

INTERIOR LIGHTS AC021

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing interior lights operation. Check the bulbs.

The interior lights do not light when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the interior lights connectors. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 3 of each interior light. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of each interior light. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the interior light(s). Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Track 2 of each interior light Track 1 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-219

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

FOOTWELL/FLOOR LIGHTS AC027

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing footwell/floor lights operation. Check the bulbs.

Check the condition and connection of the footwell lighting connectors.' Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of each footwell light. If okay:

If faulty: Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Track 1 of each interior light Track 9 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track 2 of each footwell light. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Track 2 of each interior light Track 10 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-220

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

WIPERS - WIPER POWER

REAR SCREEN WIPER AC007

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing rear wiper operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The rear screen wiper does not operate when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the rear screen wiper motor connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 3 of the rear screen wiper connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of the rear screen wiper connector. If everything is okay, replace the rear screen wiper motor. Check the condition and connection of the PE3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Motor track 1 Track 37 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-221

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

WIPERS - WIPER POWER

HEADLIGHT WASHER 1 RELAY AC030

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing headlight washer 1 operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

NOTES

Check for the presence of earth on tracks 1 and 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct?

Faulty on track 2

Carry out the fault finding procedure for command AC031 Headlight washer 2 relay

YES Faulty on track 1

With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct? NO

YES Replace the headlight washer pump.

Check the condition and connection of the headlight washer 1 relay connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track A4 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Headlight washer 1 relay track A3 Track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Repair if necessary. If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-222

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

WIPERS - WIPER POWER

AC030 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of headlight washer 1 relay. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of +12 V on tracks A2 and A5 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track A2 of the relay connector. Is it correct? NO Check the condition and connection of the PE3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. YES

Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Relay connector track A2 Track 13 of UCH connector PE3. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Headlight washer 1 relay track A3 Track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Repair if necessary. If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-223

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

WIPERS - WIPER POWER

HEADLIGHT WASHER RELAY 2 AC031

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing headlight washer 2 operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

NOTES

Check for the presence of earth on tracks 1 and 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct?

Faulty on track 1

Carry out the fault finding procedure for command AC030 Headlight washer 1 relay

YES Faulty on track 2

With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct? NO

YES Replace the headlight washer pump.

Check the condition and connection of the headlight washer 2 relay connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track B4 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Headlight washer 1 relay track B3 Track 2 of the headlight washer pump. Repair if necessary. If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-224

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

WIPERS - WIPER POWER

AC031 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of headlight washer 2 relay. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of +12 V on tracks B2 and A5 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track B2 of the relay connector. Is it correct? NO Check the condition and connection of the PE3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. YES

Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Relay connector track B2 Track 14 of UCH connector PE3. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Headlight washer 1 relay track B3 Track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Repair if necessary. If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-225

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

These customer complaints should only be investigated after a complete check has been run using the diagnostic tool.

NOTES

CUSTOMER COMPLAINTS NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER

ALP 1

LIGHTING NO REAR FOG LIGHT

FAULT FINDING CHART 2

NO RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR

FAULT FINDING CHART 3

NO LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR

ALP 4

NO SIDE LIGHTS

ALP 5

NO DIPPED HEADLIGHTS

ALP 6

NO MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS

ALP 7

NO FRONT FOG LIGHTS

ALP 8

WIPERS, WASHERS NO REAR SCREEN WIPER

ALP 9

NO REAR PARK POSITION

ALP 10

NO WINDSCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION

ALP 11

NO WINDSCREEN WIPER

ALP 12

NO FRONT AND REAR SCREEN WASHER

ALP 13

NO HEADLIGHT WASHERS

ALP 14

NO AUTOMATIC WINDOW RAISING AT SECOND PRESS ON CARD OR HANDLE

ALP 15

NO AUTOMATIC RAISING OF ONE OF THE FRONT WINDOWS BY A SECOND PRESS ON CARD OR HANDLE

ALP 16

WINDOW LIFT

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-226

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

NOTES

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87B

These customer complaints should only be investigated after a complete check has been run using the diagnostic tool.

CUSTOMER COMPLAINTS

NO AUTOMATIC RAISING OF ONE OF THE REAR WINDOWS BY A SECOND PRESS ON CARD OR HANDLE

ALP 17

NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE PASSENGER'S WINDOW

ALP 18

NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE DRIVER'S WINDOW

ALP 19

NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE REAR LEFT-HAND WINDOW

ALP 20

NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE REAR RIGHT-HAND WINDOW

ALP 21

ELECTRIC WINDOWS DO NOT OPERATE

ALP 22

NO SUNROOF CLOSING AT SECOND PRESS ON CARD OR HANDLE

ALP 23

NO SUNROOF OPENING OR CLOSING WHATEVER THE USER'S REQUEST

ALP 24

NO SUNROOF OPENING POSITION 1 NO SUNROOF OPENING POSITION 2 NO SUNROOF OPENING POSITION 3

ALP 25

NO FOLDING-IN OR FOLDING-OUT OF ONE OR MORE DOOR MIRRORS

ALP 26

NO ADJUSTMENT ON ONE OF THE TWO DOOR MIRRORS

ALP 27

POWER

NO + ACCESSORIES FEED

ALP 28

+ AFTER IGNITION FEED REMAINS BLOCKED

ALP 29

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-227

Edition 3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 1

87B

No dialogue with the computer

Check the condition and connection of the battery connections. Check the condition of the power fuses on the battery's positive terminal. Check the battery voltage. Repair if necessary.

NOTES

Is it possible to switch on the ignition or another power supply level?

YES

Refer to ALP 1 in multiplexing section 88B. Has the fault disappeared?

NO NO Perform locking/unlocking. Did locking/unlocking operate?

Refer to the "fault processing, multiplex network inoperative" part of the multiplexing section 88B.

YES

NO Check the condition and connection of connector PP1. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 1 of the connector PP1 and on track 2 of connector PP3. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on tracks 3 and 4 of connector PP1. Are the power supplies okay? YES NO Contact your Techline. Repair the faulty connections and fuses up to the battery, checking the passenger compartment fuse and relay boxes and the power supply fuse board.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-228

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 2

No rear fog lights

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

NO

Run fault finding on the command.

YES Check status 082 Rear fog lights request by actuating the control stalk. Is it present? YES Run command AC009 Rear fog lights. Is the fog light controlled? YES For switch test, see Section 84. Replace the steering column control. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-229

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 3

No right-hand direction indicator

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply?

Check the connector for oxidation.

NO Check status 084 Right-hand indicator request by actuating the control stalk. Is it present?

Run fault finding on the status.

YES Run the AC023 Right-hand indicator command; is the right-hand indicator controlled?

NO

Run fault finding on the command.

YES Command check in Section 84. Replace the steering column control. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-230

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 4

No left-hand direction indicator

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply?

Check the connector for oxidation.

NO Check status 083 Left-hand indicator request by actuating the control stalk. Is it present?

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

NO

Run fault finding on the command.

YES Run the AC022 Left-hand indicator command; is the left-hand indicator controlled? YES Command check in Section 84. Replace the steering column control. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-231

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 5

NO SIDE LIGHTS

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply?

Check the connector for oxidation.

NO Check status 081 Lighting stalk position. Is the side lights request on side lights?

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

YES Run diagnostics on the Protection and Switching Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-232

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 6

NO DIPPED HEADLIGHTS

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply?

Check the connector for oxidation.

NO Check status 081 Lighting stalk position. Is the dipped beam headlight request on dipped beam?

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

YES Run diagnostics on the Protection and Switching Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-233

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 7

NO MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply?

Check the connector for oxidation.

NO Check status 081 Lighting stalk position: is the main beam headlight request on main beam headlights?

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

YES Run diagnostics on the Power and Switch Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-234

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 8

NO FRONT FOG LIGHTS

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check status 111 Front fog lights request. Is it present?

Run fault finding on the status.

YES Run diagnostics on the Protection and Switching Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-235

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 9

No rear screen wiper

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check status 080 Rear screen wiper request is present. Is it present?

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

NO

Run fault finding on the command.

YES Run command AC007 Rear screen wiper. Check the power supply of the wiper motor: On track 2 for +12 V. On track 3 for earth. Is the rear wiper controlled? YES For switch test, see Section 84. Replace the steering column fingertip control. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-236

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 10

No rear screen wiper park position

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check status 097 Rear screen wiper park position is absent. Is it absent?

YES

Run fault finding on the status.

NO Contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-237

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 11

No windscreen wiper park position

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check status 077 Wiper stalk position Park position request. Is it present?

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

YES Protection and Switching Unit fault finding.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-238

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 12

NO WINDSCREEN WIPER

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check status 077 Wiper stalk position; is the position on intermittent wiping, slow speed or fast speed?

Check whether status 114 Wiper request by rain sensor is active.

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

YES Protection and Switching Unit fault finding.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-239

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 13

No front and rear screen washer

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

WINDSCREEN WASHER

Check status 078 Windscreen washer request. Is it present?

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

NO

Check the continuity and insulation of track 2 of the pump and track 1 of the steering column control on the black 6-track connector.

NO

Check the continuity and insulation of track 1 of the pump and track 2 of the steering column control on the black 6-track connector.

YES Check for + 12 V on track 2 of the window washer pump when activated; is +12 V present? YES Check for an earth on track 1 of the window washer pump; is earth present? YES Check the hoses. If everything is okay: Replace the windscreen washer pump.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-240

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 13 CONTINUED

Rear screen washer

Check status 079 Windscreen washer request. Is it present?

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

NO

Check the continuity and insulation of track 1 of the pump and track 2 of the steering column control on the black 6-track connector.

NO

Check the continuity and insulation of track 2 of the pump and track 1 of the steering column control on the black 6-track connector.

YES Check for +12 V on track 1 of the screen washer pump when activated; is +12 V present? YES Check for an earth on track 2 of the window washer pump; is earth present? YES Check the hoses. If everything is okay: Replace the windscreen washer pump.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-241

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 14

No headlight washers

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check whether dipped headlights status ET081 Lighting stalk position is on side lights.

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

NO

Run fault finding on the command.

YES Check whether dipped headlights status ET078 Windscreen washer request is present on side lights. YES Run commands AC030 Headlight washer 1 relay and AC031 Headlight 2 relay Do the commands operate? YES Check the condition of the pipes and nozzles. Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-242

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87B

ALP 15

No automatic window raising at second press on card or handle

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check manual operation of the four windows: Do they operate in 50 mm stages?

NO

Check on 25 A and 40 A fuses. Check power supply on track 4 of the earth modules Repair if necessary.

YES Reprogram the four windows.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-243

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87B

ALP 16

No automatic raising of one of the front windows by a second press on card or handle

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Open the 4 windows and with the card request automatic raising. Is there a confirmation of the fault?

NO

Go over the list of symptoms, and deal with that which corresponds.

YES YES

Do the manual controls work in 50 mm stages? NO Check correct operation of the one-touch window, ALP 19, ALP 20.

Reprogram the four windows.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-244

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87B

ALP 17

No automatic raising of one of the rear windows by a second press on card or handle

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Open the 4 windows and with the card request automatic raising. Is there a confirmation of the fault?

NO

Go over the list of symptoms, and deal with the one which corresponds.

YES YES

Do the manual controls work in 50 mm stages? NO Check correct operation of the one-touch window, ALP 21, ALP 22.

Reprogram the four windows.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-245

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87B

ALP 18

No raising or lowering of the passenger's one-touch window

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check, on the driver's control panel, whether the electric window operates?

NO

YES Check on switch according to the method (Section 84A).

Replace the switch.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Passenger switch on track A2 Track 1 of the motor, Passenger switch on track A1 Track 2 of the motor, Passenger switch on track A3 Track 2 of the white connector of the driver switch, Passenger switch on track B1 Track 3 of the black connector of the driver switch. Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-246

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 18 CONTINUED

Check on switch according to the method 84A.

NO

Replace the switch.

YES Check on status 087 One-touch window authorisation. Is it active?

Run fault finding on this status.

YES Check for earth on track 6 of the motor connector.

Run command AC025. Run fault finding on this command.

Ensure +12 V on track 4 of the window-lift motor. YES Check for earth on track 3 of the electric motor. Repair if necessary.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: White connector of the driver control panel track 2 Black connector of driver control panel track 3 Black connector of the driver control panel track 2 White connector of the driver control panel track 1 Repair if necessary.

Passenger switch on track A3, Passenger switch on track B1, Track 2 of the motor, Track 1 of the motor.

YES Replace the motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-247

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 19

No raising or lowering of the driver's one-touch window

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check the fuses and change them if necessary. YES Check on switch according to the method (Section 84A).

Replace the switch.

YES Check on status 087 One-touch window enabling. Is it active?

NO

Run fault finding on this status.

NO

Run command AC025. Run fault finding on this command.

YES Check for earth on track 6 of the motor connector. YES Ensure +12 V on track 4 of the window-lift motor. Repair if necessary YES Check for earth on track 3 of the electric window motor. Repair if necessary

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black connector of the driver switch track 5 Track 2 of the motor, White connector of the driver switch track 4 Track 1 of the motor, Repair if necessary. YES Replace the motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-248

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 20

No raising or lowering of the one-touch rear left-hand window

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check, on the driver's control panel, whether the electric window operates.

NO

YES Check on indicator light and whether status ET089 is present.

Run fault finding on this status.

Check on switch according to the method 84A.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Rear left-hand switch on track B2 Track 1 of the motor, Rear left-hand switch on track A1 Track 2 of the motor, Rear left-hand switch on track A3 Track 2 of the white connector of the driver control panel, Rear left-hand switch on track B1 Track 5 of the white connector of the driver control panel, Rear left-hand switch on track A2 Track B1 of the child safety switch connector. Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-249

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 20 CONTINUED

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check on switch according to the method 84A.

NO

Check on status 87 One-touch window authorisation. Is it active?

Replace the switch.

Run fault finding on this status.

YES Check for earth on track 6 of the motor connector.

NO

Run command AC025. Run fault finding on this command.

Ensure +12 V on track 4 of the electric window motor, and repair if necessary.

Check for earth on track 3 of the electric motor and the vehicle. Repair if necessary.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: White connector of the driver control panel track 2 Black connector of driver control panel track 3 Black connector of the driver control panel track 2 White connector of the driver control panel track 1 Repair if necessary.

Track A3 of the rear left-hand switch, Track B1 of the rear left-hand switch, Track 2 of the motor, Track 1 of the motor.

YES Replace the motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-250

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 21

No raising or lowering of the one-touch rear right-hand window

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check whether, on the driver control panel, the electric window operates.

NO

YES Run fault finding on this status.

Check whether status ET089 is present.

Check on switch according to the method 84A.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Rear right-hand switch on track B2 Track 1 of the motor Rear right-hand switch on track A1 Track 2 of the motor Rear right-hand switch on track A3 Track 2 of the white connector of the driver switch Rear right-hand switch on track B1 Track 5 of the white connector of the driver switch Rear right-hand switch on track A2 Track B1 of the child safety switch connector Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-251

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 21 CONTINUED

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check on switch according to the method 84A.

NO

Check on status 87 One-touch window enabling. Is it active?

Replace the switch.

Run fault finding on this status.

YES Check for earth on track 6 of the motor connector.

NO

Run command AC025. Run fault finding on this command.

Ensure +12 V on track 4 of the electric window motor, and repair if necessary.

Check for earth on track 3 of the electric motor and the vehicle. Repair if necessary.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: White connector of the driver control panel track 2 Black connector of driver control panel track 3 Black connector of the driver control panel track 2 White connector of the driver control panel track 1 Repair if necessary.

Track A3 of the rear right-hand switch, Track B1 of the rear right-hand switch, Track 2 of the motor, Track 1 of the motor.

YES Replace the motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-252

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87B

ALP 22

The electric windows are not working

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check for +12 V on track 5 of the white connector on driver's side. On tracks A1 and B2 of the brown connector on passenger's side. Is the +12 V present?

NO

Check on the 40 A fuse of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection. Repair if necessary.

NO

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection. Repair if necessary.

NO

Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections. Repair if necessary. If everything is okay: Replace the faulty switch.

YES Check for earth on track 4 of the black connector. Is there an earth? YES Check for +12 V on the grey connector. Check the earth. Is the +12 V present? Is there an earth? YES Check the runners. If everything is OK, replace the faulty electric motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-253

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87B

ALP 23

No sunroof closing at second press on card or on handle switch

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Open the sunroof and actuate the card or the handle.

NO

Go over the list of symptoms. Process that corresponding to the fault.

YES Does central door locking operate with the card? YES

NO Perform the test with a second card or the handle. YES

NO Run complete fault finding on the locking/unlocking system.

Repair the first card. Is the fault still present? YES

End.

Redo programming.

AFTER REPAIR

NO Check the 20 A fuse. Replace it if necessary. Ensure +12 V on track 7. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connection: sunroof motor track 9 Track 7 of the PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Contact your Techline.

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-254

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87B

ALP 24

No sunroof opening or closing whatever the user's request

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check for +12 V on track 7 of the motor. Is the +12 V present?

YES

Check for earth on track 10 of the motor and the vehicle body. Repair if necessary.

NO

Check the 20A fuse. Replace it if necessary.

Replace the switch. If the fault persists, change the sunroof motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-255

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87B

ALP 25

No sunroof opening in position 1 No sunroof opening in position 2 No sunroof opening in position 3

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sunroof switch on track 3 Track 4 of the motor. Sunroof switch on track 2 Track 3 of the motor. Sunroof switch on track 5 Track 2 of the motor. Sunroof switch on track 1 Track 1 of the motor.

Replace the switch if necessary. If the fault persists, replace the electric motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-256

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87B

ALP 26

No folding-in or folding-out of one or more door mirrors

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check for +12 V on the door mirror switch control. Is the +12 V present?

Check the fuse. Replace it if necessary.

Check for earth. Repair if necessary.

Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 5 and 1 for folding-in Track 4 and 10 Tracks 4 and 1 Track 5 and 10

Replace the switch if necessary.

for folding-out

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 10 Door mirror switch track 1

Track 9 left-hand door mirror Track 7 of the right-hand door mirror Track 7 of the left-hand door mirror Track 9 of the right-hand door mirror

Replace the door mirror(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-257

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87B

ALP 27

No adjustment on one of the door mirrors

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Non-retractable door mirror. Left-hand door mirror.

Check for continuity of switch: Tracks A3/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting upward. Tracks A3/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting downward. Tracks A1/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting leftward. Tracks A1/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track A3 Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track A1 Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track B4 Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror.

Replace the door mirror.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-258

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87B

ALP 27 CONTINUED 1

Non-retractable door mirror. Right-hand door mirror.

Check for continuity of switch: Tracks B2/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting upward. Tracks B2/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting downward. Tracks B1/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting leftward. Tracks B1/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track B2 Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track B1 Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track B4 Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror. Repair if necessary.

Replace the door mirror.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-259

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87B

ALP 27 CONTINUED 2

Retractable door mirror. Left-hand door mirror.

Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 7/5 and 4/3 Slanting upward. Tracks 7/4 and 5/3 Slanting downward. Tracks 9/5 and 4/3 Slanting leftward. Tracks 9/4 and 5/3 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 7 Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track 9 Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track 3 Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror. Repair if necessary.

Replace the door mirror.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-260

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87B

ALP 27 CONTINUED 3

Retractable door mirror. Right-hand door mirror.

Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 6/5 and 4/3 Slanting upward. Tracks 6/4 and 5/3 Slanting downward. Tracks 8/5 and 4/3 Slanting leftward. Tracks 8/4 and 5/3 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 7 Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track 8 Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track 6 Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror. Repair if necessary.

Replace the door mirror.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-261

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 28

No + accessories feed

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check on status ET070 Start switch; is the status Depressed when the switch is used?

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

NO

Check the card with command SC005 and run fault finding on this command.

YES Check that the card is not perceived as absent using the messages on the instrument panel. Card perceived as absent? NO Check on status ET075 + Accessories feed present; is the status YES when the switch is used?

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-262

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 44

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 29

+ after ignition feed remains blocked

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check on status ET070 Start switch; is the status Depressed with action on the switch?

NO

Run fault finding on the status.

YES Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the fault finding tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-263

Edition 3

187B UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Introduction

87B

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): Mégane II Function concerned: UCH

Name of computer: UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schema (CD-ROM), paper version. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP Special tooling required Special tooling required Multimeter Elé. 1681 Universal bornier

3. RECAP Procedure To run fault finding on the vehicle computers, switch on the forced + after ignition feed. Proceed as follows: Switch on the forced + after ignition feed: – with the vehicle card in the card reader, – press and hold the Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not met, – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. Switching off the forced + after ignition feed: Press the start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds); check that the + after ignition feed has cut (computer indicator lights on the instrument panel go out).

UCH_V48_PRELI/UCH_V4C_PRELI/UCH_V4D_PRELI/ UCH_V4F_PRELI/UCH_V50_PRELI

87B-1

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Introduction

87B

Faults Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since, or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used after the forced + after ignition feed switch on (without acting on the system components). For a present fault, apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the instructions in the Notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, check: – The electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – The connectors on these lines (corrosion, bent pins, etc.), – The resistance of the faulty component, – The condition of the wires (insulation melted or split, chafing, etc.).

Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check data that does not produce a fault on the diagnostic tool when inconsistent. Therefore, this phase is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values, consult the corresponding fault finding page.

Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK but the customer complaint is still present, the fault should be processed by customer complaint. A summary of the general procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart

87B-2

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Introduction

87B

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Perform a pre-diagnostic on the system

Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with computer?

no See ALP No. 1

yes Read the faults

Faults present

no Conformity check

yes The cause is still present

Deal with present faults

no

Fault solved

yes

Deal with stored faults

Use fault finding charts (ALPs)

The cause is still present

no

Fault solved

The cause is still present

no

Fault solved

yes yes Contact the Techline with the completed fault finding log

87B-3

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Introduction

87B

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE (continued) Wiring check Fault finding problems Disconnecting the connectors and/or manipulating the wiring harness may temporarily remove the cause of a fault. Electrical measurements of voltage, resistance and insulation are generally correct, especially if the fault is not present when the analysis is made (stored fault). Visual inspection Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. Carefully check the fuses, insulators and wiring harness routing. Look for signs of oxidation. Tactile inspection While manipulating the wiring harness, use the diagnostic tool to note any change in fault status from stored to present. Make sure that the connectors are properly locked. Apply light pressure to the connectors. Twist the wiring harness. If there is a change in status, try to locate the source of the fault. Inspection of each component Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and tabs, as well as the crimping (no crimping on the insulating section). Make sure that the clips and tabs are properly locked in the sockets. Check that no clips or tabs have been dislodged during connection. Check the clip contact pressure using an appropriate model of tab. Continuity, insulation and resistance check Check the continuity of entire lines, then section by section. Look for a short circuit to earth, to + 12 V or to another wire. If a fault is detected, repair or replace the wiring harness.

87B-4

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Introduction

87B

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

IMPORTANT!

NOTE Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the procedure, enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT You will always be asked for this log: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline, – for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory, – to be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement, and enables better analysis of the parts removed.

6. SAFETY ADVICE Safety rules must be observed during any work on a component to prevent any damage or injury: – make sure that the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load, – use the appropriate tools. Procedure for disconnecting the battery: – Switch off the ignition. – Switch off all the electrical consumers. Wait at least 1 minute for the electronic systems to switch off. Disconnect the battery, starting with the negative terminal.

87B-5

Edition 2

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Engine immobiliser

Page 1/2

List of monitored parts: Computer, card reader, handle modules, aerials, transponder ring ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

Update version ●

Customer complaint 1469

Ignition fault

1468

Does not start

1467

No warning light

1466

Continuously lit

1465

Slow flashing

1464

Rapid flashing of warning light

004

Intermittently

Other

●

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 009

Other

●

Your comments:

Sudden fault

010

Gradual deterioration

Your comments:

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of fault finding manual:

Workshop Repair Manual Assisted fault finding

Technical Note

Fault finding manual no: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No: Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 13 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Engine immobiliser ●

Page 2/2

Computer identification and parts exchanged for the system

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Stored

Specification

Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no.

●

Fault name

Parameter name

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description: ●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Are there any other defective functions? Your comments: For Laguna II, Vel Satis and Espace IV vehicles: Is there a fault with both cards?

Yes

No

The instrument panel warning lights come on after the card is fully inserted in the reader:

Yes

No

The steering column is unlocked after the card is fully inserted in the reader:

Yes

No

After the card is fully inserted in the reader, the reader light:

Flashes rapidly Is continuously lit

Remains unlit

Three seconds after the card is fully inserted in the reader, the immobiliser warning light on the instrument panel:

Flashes: slowly Is continuously lit

rapidly Remains unlit

The vehicle starts after the Start button is pressed for more than 3 seconds

Yes

No

FD 13 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit

Page 1/2

List of monitored parts: Computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

OPTIMA 5800

NXR

Update version ●

Customer complaint 875

Door locking/unlocking fault

1194

Warning light comes on

Other

●

Lights fault

1075

Wiper fault

004

Intermittently

Your comments:

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 005

While driving

009

Sudden fault

Other

●

1070

010

Gradual deterioration

Your comments:

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of fault finding manual:

Workshop Repair Manual Assisted fault finding

Technical Note

Fault finding manual no: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No: Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 15 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit ●

Page 2/2

Computer identification and parts exchanged for the system

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Fault name

Specification

Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no.

●

Stored

Parameter name

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description:

●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments:

FD 15 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

General operation: The UCH is involved in the following four functions (shared between several computers):

1/ Access-safety function This function is divided into three sub-functions: Access, Protection and Starting.

2/ Air-conditioning function This function is divided into three sub-functions, which are: User selection, Heating and Cold loop (see: 62A, Air conditioning). In this function, the UCH manages the triggering of the passenger compartment heating resistor control relays, as well as the heated rear screen and air conditioning indicator lights.

3/ Wiping function This function is divided into two sub-functions, which are: Wiper control and Wiper power.

4/ Lighting function This function is divided into two sub-functions, which are: Lighting control and Lighting power.

5/ Tyre function This function is divided into three sub-functions which are: Tyre Reception, Tyre Management and Tyre display (see MR364 Mechanical, 35B Tyre Pressure Monitoring System).

87B-10

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

The ACCESS/SAFETY function is divided into three sub-functions: Access, Protection and Starting. The maximum number of Renault cards which can be programmed on the vehicle is 4. There is no master Renault card.

1

ACCESS/SAFETY FUNCTION

1.1 SUB-FUNCTION: ACCESS The Mégane II allows: – – – –

locking/unlocking by pressing the buttons on the Renault card (remote control function), locking/unlocking by pressing the buttons on the central door locking button, locking via the Renault Anti-Intruder Device (RAID), automatic relocking.

If the vehicle is fitted with the hands-free function: – hands-free unlocking of the entire vehicle, by cutting the optical beam on one of the door handles, – hands-free tailgate-only unlocking by pressing the tailgate opening switch, – hands-free locking (by pressing the handle closure switch or the switch located in the tailgate badge), If the vehicle is fitted with: – – – –

electric child safety locking, deadlocking, selective opening element unlocking, the valet card function.

1.1.1 Method of locking/unlocking by pressing the buttons on the Renault card: Opening element locking motors

Card button pressed

M

UCH

Encrypted 433 MHz RF connection (315 Mhz in Japan).

Renault card

a/ Main components of the function providing access through the pressing of a button on the Renault card: – Renault card, – UCH, – opening element locking motors.

87B-11

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

b/ Unlocking by the unlock button on the card The vehicle may be unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the Renault card (open padlock symbol), if the card is less than 50 m from the vehicle (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). The RF reception aerial is inside the UCH (except Scenic II fitted with the SSPP function). Pressing the lock button on the Renault card starts the vehicle unlocking procedure. When the unlocking button is pressed, the card sends a 433 MHz encrypted signal to the UCH (315 MHz in Japan). If the UCH authenticates the Renault card, the UCH requests the locking motors to unlock. Conditions required: – The Renault card button must be pressed within the area covered by the card (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). – No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. Statuses available for the unlocking function: System operation may be viewed using statuses ET045 RF frame received, ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised. The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested. c) Locking using the card's "lock" button The vehicle may be locked by pressing the lock button on the Renault card (closed padlock symbol), if the card is less than 50 m from the vehicle (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). The RF reception aerial is inside the UCH (except Scenic II fitted with the SSPP function). Pressing the lock button on the Renault card starts the vehicle locking procedure. When the locking button is pressed, the card sends a 433 MHz encrypted signal to the UCH (315 MHz in Japan). If the UCH authenticates the Renault card, the UCH requests the locking motors to lock. Conditions required: – The Renault card button must be pressed within the area covered by the card (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). – No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. – No doors open. – No card in the card reader. Statuses available for the locking function: System operation may be viewed using statuses ET045 RF frame received, ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised. The statuses of the doors seen open or closed by the UCH can be displayed using the ET053 Driver's door, ET042 Passenger door, ET051 Rear left-hand door, ET052 Rear right-hand door and ET050 Tailgate/boot statuses and, where applicable, the ET041 Opening rear screen status. The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested.

87B-12

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

d) Boot-only locking/unlocking by pressing the "toggle tailgate status" button: The boot alone may be locked/unlocked by pressing the Renault card's "toggle tailgate status" button ("open tailgate" symbol), if the card is less than 50 m from the vehicle (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). The RF reception aerial is inside the UCH (except Scenic II fitted with the SSPP function). Pressing the toggle tailgate status button on the Renault card starts the tailgate-only locking/unlocking procedure. When the toggle tailgate status button is pressed, the card sends a 433 MHz encrypted signal to the UCH (315 MHz in Japan). If the UCH authenticates the Renault card, it will authorise or inhibit opening of the boot depending on the previous status (locked or unlocked). Conditions required: – The Renault card button must be pressed within the area covered by the card's radio frequency signal (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). – No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. – No card in the card reader. The statuses available for the boot-only unlocking/locking function (and for the opening rear screen if fitted) are: System operation may be viewed using statuses ET045 RF frame received, ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised. The open or closed status of the boot as seen by the UCH can be checked using status ET050 Tailgate/boot. The status of the tailgate opening request is visible using status ET062 Tailgate opening request. The open or closed status of the opening rear screen (if fitted) as seen by the UCH can be checked using status ET041 Opening rear screen. The status of the request to open the rear screen (if fitted) can be checked using status ET062 Rear screen opening request. The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested. e/ Principle of the identifier code: The Renault card is authenticated by the UCH by transmission of a "rolling code" for the access function. The code transmitted is automatically incremented every time the card button is pressed. To allow for the case where the signal is not received by the UCH, a table of 1024 accepted codes has been created. The UCH and the Renault card can become desynchronised if the limit of 1024 possible presses is exceeded, that is the customer has pressed more than 1024 times outside the reception zone. If the Renault card does become desynchronised (code transmitted by the Renault card is outside the acceptance limit of the UCH), the user can access his vehicle using the emergency insert. Resynchronisation is performed when the vehicle is started with the card in the card-reader, or by removing/replacing the card battery. f/ Display: Unlocking is indicated by 1 flash of the direction indicators. Locking is indicated by 2 flashes of the direction indicators. When using the "tailgate status toggle" switch, display is not performed if a toggle request is made when the vehicle is completely unlocked. In fact, in this case, the vehicle is not locked as only the boot is locked.

87B-13

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.1.2 Method of locking/unlocking by pressing the central door locking button: This button is used to lock/unlock the vehicle while stationary or moving. This button has no effect if the vehicle has been locked using the card in hands-free or manual mode. If the electric central door-locking button is pressed when one door is unlocked it causes all the doors to lock and the warning light to come on. Status ET044 Electric door-locking button may be used to check that the button is operating correctly. Command mode AC020 Electric door-locking button indicator light checks the operation of the electric door-locking button indicator light.

1.1.3 Principle of automatic locking when driving (RAID system): The RAID function locks the vehicle as soon as the speed signal is above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). Activation or deactivation of the RAID function can be viewed using status ET043 RAID function authorisation by electric door-locking button. The RAID function is activated or deactivated with the engine running, after pressing and holding the electric doorlocking switch for approximately 5 seconds. Acknowledgement is indicated by a buzzer. Note: Unlocking can be performed by the UCH if the airbag computer has detected an impact or if it is faulty (not recognised on the multiplex network, internal fault, etc.). (see 88B, Multiplexing).

1.1.4 Principle of automatic relocking: Automatic relocking takes place 2 minutes after a hands-free or card unlocking operation not followed by the opening of a door.

87B-14

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - System operation

1.1.5 Principle of hands-free locking/unlocking: Boot/rear screen opening switch 125 kHz RF connection Passenger side optical sensors

Handle and boot locking switches Access aerials

Renault Card

UCH

Driver side optical sensors

M

433 MHz RF connection

Opening elements locking motors

a/ Main components of the hands-free function: – – – – – – –

Renault card, UCH, optical presence sensors located in the door handles, access aerials integrated in the door handles and the tailgate, the locking switches incorporated in the door handles, the boot-only opening/opening element locking switch integrated in the boot badge, opening element locking motors.

b/ Hands-free unlocking When a hand is detected inside a handle (interruption of one of the optical beams) or a press on the boot opening switch is detected, the UCH sends a 125 kHz signal to the access aerials and interrogates the access zone (driverside aerial interrogated first). If the Renault card is in the access zone, it responds to the UCH at 433 MHz. If the UCH authenticates the Renault card, it requests unlocking of the opening elements or boot-only locking motors.

Hands-free unlocking of the entire vehicle by stage: 1) The user places his/her hand within one of the door handles and the optical sensor detects its presence. 2) If the Renault card is not disabled for hands-free operation, the UCH sends a 125 kHz encrypted signal to the access aerials (interrogation of the aerials on the side of the activated handle is performed first). 3) If the Renault card recognises the code, it responds to the UCH using a 433 MHz encrypted signal. 4) The UCH confirms that the Renault card code is correct and activates the locking motors.

87B-15

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

Conditions required: – – – –

Interruption of one of the optical beams in one of the handles or pressing the boot or rear screen opening switch. A vehicle card detected by the access aerials. No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. The card must not be hands-free disabled (a Renault card is disabled for hands-free starting and access if it was present in the vehicle when it was locked; the card is no longer disabled if it is detected by any aerial during unlocking).

Statuses available for the unlocking function: The UCH receives the unlocking request when an optical beam is cut on one of the handles. The sensors' power supply can be displayed using the ET054 Optical sensors supplied status. Operation of the sensors can be viewed using statuses ET055 Driver's side front optical sensor, ET056 Driver's side rear optical sensor, ET057 Passenger side front/rear optical sensors and boot switch status ET060 Tailgate locking button. The status of the tailgate opening request is visible using status ET061 Tailgate opening request. The status of the request to open the rear screen can be checked using status ET062 Rear screen opening request. The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested. The AC037 Transmitting aerials fault finding command interrogates the aerials for an update of potential faults. Commands AC032 Test driver's side exterior aerials, AC033 Test passenger side exterior aerials and AC034 Test boot exterior aerials are used to check each zone separately. When the card is in the interrogated zone, the card reader flashes. The interrogation lasts 1 min. These commands are used to check the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and will operate even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle.

c/ Hands-free unlocking of the boot only When a press on the boot opening switch is detected, the UCH receives the signal requesting opening (ET061 Tailgate opening request). The UCH sends a 125 kHz signal to the access aerials. If the Renault card is in the access zone (initial interrogation on the boot side, then interrogation of both sides of the vehicle), it responds to the UCH at 433 MHz. If the UCH authenticates the card, the UCH orders unlocking of the boot only. d) Hands-free locking When a press on a door handle closing switch is detected, the UCH sends a 125 kHz signal to the access aerials. If the Renault card is in the access zone, it responds to the UCH at 433 MHz. If the UCH authenticates the card (and if it cannot be detected in the hands-free starting zone), the UCH requests the locking motors to lock. If, however, there is another card in the vehicle, locking will be possible, but the card left in the vehicle will temporarily lose its hands-free access and hands-free starting functions until the next unlocking operation (inhibition).

87B-16

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

Hands-free locking of the entire vehicle by stage: 1) The user presses one of the locking switches on the door handle or tailgate (located in the badge). 2) If the Renault card is not disabled for hands-free operation, the UCH sends a 125 kHz encrypted signal to the access aerials (interrogation of the aerials on the side of the activated handle is performed first), and to the starting aerials. 3) If the Renault card authenticates the code, it responds to the UCH using a 433 MHz encrypted signal. 4) If the UCH detects at least one Renault card in the access zone and this is authenticated (at least one Renault card detected by the external aerials and not detected by the starting aerials; this is necessary to avoid the vehicle being locked with the card inside), it activates the locking motors. 5) If the UCH detects other cards inside the vehicle, it disables these cards for hands-free functions (access and starting) until the next time the vehicle is unlocked. Conditions required: – – – – –

At least one vehicle card detected by the access aerials and not detected by the starting aerials. No doors open. No Renault card in the card reader. No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. The card must not be hands-free disabled (a Renault card is disabled for hands-free starting and access if it was present in the vehicle when it was locked; the card is no longer disabled if it is detected by any aerial during unlocking).

Statuses available for the locking function: The UCH receives the locking request in the form of an earth, when one of the locking buttons on the door handles or in the centre of the boot badge is pressed. The locking requests can be viewed using statuses ET058 Driver's side handle locking switch, ET059 Passenger's side handle locking switch and ET060 Tailgate locking switch. The statuses of the doors seen open or closed by the UCH can be displayed using the ET053 Driver's door, ET042 Passenger door, ET051 Rear left-hand door, ET052 Rear right-hand door and ET050 Tailgate/boot statuses and, where applicable, the ET041 Opening rear screen status. The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested. The AC037 Transmitting aerials fault finding command interrogates the aerials for an update of potential faults. Commands AC032 Test driver's side exterior aerials, AC033 Test passenger side exterior aerials and AC034 Test boot exterior aerials are used to check each zone separately. When the card is in the interrogated zone, the card reader flashes. The interrogation lasts 1 min. These commands are used to check the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and will operate even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle. e/ Display Unlocking is indicated by 1 flash of the direction indicators. Locking is indicated by 2 flashes of the direction indicators.

87B-17

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.1.6 Principle of Electric Childproof Locking: The UCH controls the rear door locks to prevent them from being opened by means of the interior door handles and inhibits operation of the rear electric window switches. The switch statuses and the activation of electric childproof locks can be viewed using the following statuses: – ET233 Child safety switch, – ET159 Rear left-hand door child safety lock, – ET160 Rear right-hand door child safety lock. The child safety configuration can be read using configuration LC035 Child safety and changed using configuration CF104 Child safety.

1.1.7 Principle of Deadlocking: The UCH controls the door locks to prevent unlocking via the interior handles. This function is activated by a long press (+ 2 seconds) on the Renault card locking button or by pressing the door locking button twice. The direction indicators flash rapidly three times for deadlocking (in addition to the two flashes for locking). For this function to operate the vehicle must have deadlocking (2 motors) and configuration LC003 Deadlocking must be WITH (see Configuration and programming). Deadlocking is configured using CF009 Deadlocking. The source of the last deadlocking activation/deactivation can be viewed using statuses ET088 Deadlocking activation source and ET090 Deadlocking deactivation source. It is impossible to deadlock the vehicle if the + accessories feed is active, if the lights are switched on or if the hazard warning lights are activated.

1.1.8 The valet card function, specific to certain countries (e.g. Mexico): This function controls the valet card option which enables vehicles fitted with it to separately control unlocking of the driver's door, the boot, or the passenger doors and the glovebox. When the vehicle is electrically pre-equipped with the valet option and this option has been configured, the cards can be used in two different customer modes. The cards known as "masters" can unlock all the opening elements, but the cards known as "valets" cannot unlock the glovebox, the boot and the passenger opening elements. They can start the vehicle, lock the whole vehicle, and unlock the driver's door only. The function is configured with CF085 Valet card function using the specific command SC008 UCH type. To access CF085, set CF036 Selective opening element opening to WITH. To check that this function has been configured correctly, use LC016 Card valet function.

87B-18

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.2 SUB-FUNCTION: PROTECTION 125 kHz RF connection

Start button Steering column lock Starter aerials

Multiplex network

Renault card

UCH

Injection computer 433 MHz RF connection

Wire connection

Card reader The UCH shares control of the vehicle's immobiliser protection system with other computers. De-protection of the vehicle is performed in three consecutive stages: – Authentication of the card (hands-free or card reader) – Unlocking of the steering column (to allow after ignition feed to be established). – Unlocking the injection computer. 1.2.1 Authentication of the Renault card: Authentication is performed differently depending on whether the vehicle is fitted with the hands-free option or not. a) Authentication of the Renault card when the vehicle is fitted with the hands-free option: When the user presses the start button, the UCH activates its starting aerials and authenticates a card in the following way: 1/ The UCH activates its three starting aerials which generate a 125 kHz radio frequency signal. This signal is sent to the Renault card. 2/ If the Renault card is located in the zone covered by the starting aerials and recognises its UCH, it responds to it directly with a 433 MHz signal giving its identifier. 3/ The UCH decrypts the response and compares it with that stored in its memory. If the result is correct, it continues the starting procedure. The aerials stop transmitting once the card is authenticated. If no Renault card responds in hands-free mode, the UCH interrogates the card reader. If the Renault card is in the card reader, authentication is via transponder. Situations where use of the card reader is necessary for hands-free starting: – flat card battery, – vehicle in an area of frequency interference, – boot open (indication on instrument panel).

87B-19

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

The statuses and commands available on the card authentication function: ET035 RF frame received, ET070 Start button, ET046 Immobiliser, ET014 Power supply level commanded, AC036 Test of interior aerials. b) Authentication of the Renault card when the vehicle is not fitted with the hands-free option: When the user presses the start button, the UCH authenticates the card in the card reader using the transponder mode (short-range data exchange at 125 kHz). The transponder mode does not require a battery in the card. Short range

Wire connection

UCH

TRANSPONDER connection

Renault card

Card reader

The statuses and commands available on the card authentication function: ET070 Start button, ET046 Immobiliser, ET014 Power supply level ordered.

1.2.2 Unlocking/locking the steering column: Steering column lock CAN Supply

UCH

SensorLine

SafetyLine

PSU

Earth a/ Unlocking the column Following authentication of the Renault card: 1) The UCH sends a code to the electric steering column lock with an unlocking request via the multiplex network (ET119 UCH request to steering column lock). 2) If the electric steering column lock recognises the code, it unlocks and sends its unlocked status to the UCH (ET073 Steering column lock sensor signal). 3) When the UCH receives the "column unlocking completed" signal, it orders the Protection and Switching Unit (PSU) to activate the + after ignition relay and the procedure continues.

87B-20

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

The physical status of the column lock can be displayed by the ET072 Column lock status and its programming can be displayed by the ET071 Column lock blank status. It is important to note that establishment of after ignition feed is only possible if the unlocking operation is performed correctly. The column remains locked if: – There is excessive mechanical load on the column (e.g.: wheel jammed against a kerb), – the battery voltage is too low, – the power demanded by the column lock is too high (thermal protection of the column lock electric motor). b/ Locking the column The column is locked with the engine off, after the Renault card is removed from the card reader. This locking operation requires: – a valid 0 mph speed signal, – a correctly functioning airbag and no impact detected, – a deactivated + after ignition connection. When the engine has not been started but the after ignition feed has risen (e.g. forced after ignition feed), certain conditions in which there is a drop in the after ignition feed do not cause the steering column to lock (column not locked message).

The steering column does not lock if: – – – – – – – – – –

the card is present in the card reader, the vehicle speed is not zero, the airbag unit is faulty or locked, the airbag unit is disconnected, the airbag has been triggered, the power demanded by the column lock is too high (from the Vdiag 50 UCH), the Renault card is removed from the card reader when the vehicle is being powered by + forced after ignition, 3 mins have elapsed following a starting failure due to an engaged gear, the Renault card is removed from the card reader following a starting failure due to an engaged gear, a front door is open following a starting failure due to an engaged gear and the card is not in the reader.

1.2.3 Locking the injection computer: When the + after ignition feed has been established, the UCH and the injection computer compare their codes via the multiplex network. If the codes are identical, the vehicle immobiliser is deactivated (ET046 Immobiliser). If there is a failure, the immobiliser remains active. Reactivating protection: the immobiliser is reactivated when the engine stops.

87B-21

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.2.4 Renault card check by the UCH: a/ Presence check When the engine is running, the UCH checks for the presence of the Renault card in the passenger compartment (if vehicle is hands-free) or in the card-reader when a door is opened then closed. If the Renault card is not detected, a message on the instrument panel and a buzzer warn the driver. Command AC036 Interior aerial test is used to check the area covered by the starting aerials inside the passenger compartment (hands-free vehicles). The card reader flashes when the card is detected. This command allows a hands-free card to be recognised even if it does not belong to the vehicle. b/ Low battery warning If the Renault card battery is faulty or flat, the change card battery message is displayed on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started, if there have been 5 attempts to authenticate the Renault card since the battery fault. c/ Storing information on the card A device allowing information relating to the vehicle to be read from the card is available. The available items of information are: – VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). – Mileage. – Fuel level. – Mileage before oil change. – Tyre pressure (if vehicle fitted with SSPP). – Status of OBD warning light. – Oil level. 2.5 Immobiliser warning light programs Immobiliser warning light Warning light flashes slowly ignition off Warning light not lit

ignition on

Vehicle protection status Vehicle protected (immobiliser active or fault with steering lock) New vehicle or blank UCH storage mode

Warning light flashes slowly

Renault card not recognised

Warning light continuously lit

Injection authentication problem

Warning light not lit

Vehicle unprotected (immobiliser inactive)

87B-22

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.3 SUB-FUNCTION: STARTING The UCH manages the control section of the starting sub-function. For this function to operate normally, the protection function must proceed correctly (immobiliser inactive ET046 Immobiliser). In order to control the starter motor, the UCH requires the following status and parameter information to check that the starting conditions have been met: – Start button status ET070 Start button. – Clutch pedal position ET048 Clutch pedal position. – Brake pedal position ET047 Brake pedal position. – Automatic gearbox selector lever position ET108 Automatic gearbox selector lever position. If the starting conditions are met, the request for the Protection and Switching Unit to activate the starter motor can be viewed using status ET110 UCH request to injection or Protection and Switching Unit.

87B-23

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.4 Main COMPONENTS of the ACCESS/SAFETY function 1.4.1 Main components of the ACCESS sub-function: – – – – – – –

Renault card, UCH, optical presence sensors located in the door handles, access aerials built into the door handles and the tailgate, the locking switches built into the door handles, the boot-only opening/locking switch built into the tailgate badge, opening element locking motors.

1.4.1.1 The Renault card: The Renault card has three buttons which allow: – locking of the vehicle, – unlocking of the vehicle, – the boot to be locked/unlocked. The Renault hands-free card allows hands-free operation if it is located in the access and starting zones. The Renault card is powered by a 3 V battery. This battery is required for operation in hands-free mode or remote control mode (card button presses). If the battery is old or in an area of frequency interference, the emergency insert located in the Renault card allows the driver's door to be unlocked. 1.4.1.2 The UCH: a)

In hands-free mode the UCH receives the unlocking request through the optical sensors, and the locking request through the locking switches.

b)

The UCH manages the exchanges with the Renault card. In hands-free mode: The UCH interrogates and authenticates the Renault card via the access aerials located in the door handles and the tailgate, at a frequency of 125 kHz. After authentication from the UCH, the Renault card responds directly to it at 433 MHz. Outside hands-free mode: The UCH receives the access requests coming from card presses at 433 MHz (315 MHz in Japan). The RF reception aerial is incorporated in the UCH (except Scenic II fitted with the SSPP function). The signals are encrypted.

c)

The UCH activates the locking motors. If the exchanges between the Renault card and the UCH are correct, the UCH activates the locking motors.

87B-24

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.4.1.3 The optical presence sensors built into the door handles (hands-free vehicles): The optical presence sensors inform the UCH of the hands-free unlocking request for the entire vehicle when the infrared beam is cut in one of the handles (by a hand). This presence detection starts the hands-free access procedure. To limit battery use, the optical sensors are powered at 12 V only for 72 hours after the last change of vehicle lockedunlocked status. After this period, the handle must be pulled to operate a switch which 'wakes up' the UCH to resupply the optical sensors. In this case, pull the handle a second time to open the door once the card has been authenticated. The switch signal is parallel to the optical sensor signal: activation of the optical sensor or the switch earths the signal going to the UCH. The handle groups are shown in the diagram below:

Driver's side

Optical Sensor + Switch

Passenger side

UCH

Optical Sensor + Switch

Optical Sensor + Switch

Optical Sensor + Switch

Boot unlocking

Note: The tailgate is not fitted with an infrared optical sensor. The tailgate and rear screen opening switches notify the UCH of a request to open the tailgate or rear screen.

87B-25

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.4.1.4 The access aerials built into the door handles and tailgate (hands-free vehicles): The access aerials are built into the door handles and the tailgate. Only the tailgate aerial is removable. The UCH activates these aerials in the following order: – first, the side on which the handle has been pulled, – next, if the card has not been detected, the UCH activates the aerials on the opposite side, – finally, if the card is still not detected, the UCH interrogates the rear aerial.

The access aerial groups are shown in the diagram below:

Passenger side

Driver's side

UCH

Tailgate

Note: 3-door and 5-door versions are distinguished by different handle aerials.

87B-26

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.4.1.5 The locking switches built into the door handles and the tailgate badge (hands-free vehicles): These switches are used to lock the opening elements (the switch in the tailgate badge is used to lock all the opening elements and unlock the tailgate only). They are not removable, except for the tailgate switch which is separate from the badge. When a switch is pressed, a UCH track is connected to earth, informing it of a vehicle locking request. The access aerials are then activated. The grouping of these switches is shown in the diagram below:

Driver's side Locking switch

Passenger side

UCH

Locking switch

Locking switch

Locking switch

Tailgate switch

87B-27

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.4.1.6 The door locking motors: These are direct current motors (12 V) controlled by the UCH. The deadlocking function requires a second motor per door. 1.4.2 Main components of the PROTECTION sub-function: The protection sub-function is based on 4 main coded components: – The Renault cards. – The UCH. – The electric steering column lock. – The injection computer. These parts are coded definitively: a part coded for one vehicle may not be used on another vehicle. It is possible to replace a coded part with an uncoded part using special procedures in the CLIP tool and the vehicle repair code (See Configuration and programming).

1.4.2.1 The Renault card: The Renault card enables the vehicle to be started in two modes: – starting by inserting the card into the reader: – hands-free starting without insertion of the card into the card reader (hands-free vehicles). The Renault card is powered by a 3 V battery. This battery is necessary to operate in standard and hands-free mode. If the battery is too old, or if the vehicle is in an area of frequency interference, hands-free starting is not possible, but always possible by inserting the Renault card into the reader.

1.4.2.2 The UCH: a) The UCH detects the starting request (Start button pressed under starting conditions). b) The UCH authenticates the Renault card via the starting aerials for hands-free mode, or via the card reader for transponder mode. c) The UCH manages the exchange with the steering column lock: The UCH sends an unlocking request to the steering column via the vehicle's multiplex network, and the steering column responds with the status of the lock bolt. d) The UCH requests activation of the + after ignition feed from the Protection and Switching Unit. e) The UCH manages the exchange with the injection computer: The UCH and the injection computer exchange their codes via the vehicle's multiplex network to deactivate protection and unlock the immobiliser. f) The UCH requests the Protection and Switching Unit to supply the starter motor.

87B-28

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.4.2.3 The electric steering column lock: The electric steering column lock is controlled by the UCH. It engages and disengages a lock bolt to lock and unlock the column. It replaces the Neimann type lock. The steering column lock is powered before + after ignition feed. The supply is via the after ignition relay (located in the Protection and Switching Unit) in its rest position, from where it is distributed to the column lock by the UCH. The UCH sends an unlocking request and a code to the steering column lock, via the vehicle's multiplex network. The steering column is unlocked if the code is recognised. A sensor located on the column lock bolt informs the UCH, via the multiplex network and by wire connection, that it is unlocked. When unlocking is confirmed, the UCH activates the + after ignition feed via the Protection and Switching Unit. The column lock is no longer supplied. The column lock has a "+ after ignition feed present on vehicle" wire signal which inhibits locking while the feed is active. NOTE The steering column lock is: – not removable when the bolt is disengaged, – fitted with a left-hand thread self-shearing mounting bolt.

1.4.2.4 The injection computer: The injection computer is coded and unlocks following the encrypted challenge exchange with the UCH. 1.4.2.5 The starting aerials (hands-free vehicles) There are 3 transmitter aerials located in the passenger compartment They are controlled by the UCH in the interrogation of the card during a starting request or in confirming the presence of the card in the vehicle (e.g. after a door is opened). The power used allows the whole passenger compartment to be covered, including the boot. Overspill outside the passenger compartment is minimal. 1.4.2.6 The card reader: This is linked to the UCH by a wire connection. It provides the transponder function (like a key recognition ring). It therefore allows authentication of a Renault card without a battery. If the card is not detected or recognised during hands-free starting, the card reader flashes to tell the customer to insert the Renault card.

87B-29

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.4.3 Main components of the STARTING sub-function: The starting sub-function is based on the following main factors: – The starting conditions being present. – The UCH. – The automatic gearbox computer (if fitted on the vehicle). – The Protection and Switching Unit.

1.4.3.1 Start button: The start button transmits the driver's requests to start or stop the engine to the UCH.

1.4.3.2 The UCH: The UCH ensures that the starting conditions are met, and that no other computer on the multiplex network is inhibiting starting of the vehicle. If the conditions are present, it requests control of the starter from the PSU.

1.4.3.3 The Protection and Switching Unit (PSU): The Protection and Switching Unit activates the starter motor following a request from the UCH via the multiplex network.

1.4.3.4 Neutral sensor (manual gearbox): Informs the UCH of the position of the gearbox (neutral or gear engaged).

1.4.3.5 Clutch switch (manual gearbox): Sends clutch pedal depressed signal (end of travel) to the UCH.

1.4.3.6 Brake switch: Sends brake pedal depressed signal to the UCH.

1.4.3.7 Automatic gearbox computer (if fitted): The computer informs the UCH of the selector position (park, neutral, etc.) via the multiplex network.

87B-30

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

2

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

AIR CONDITIONING FUNCTION

The type of air conditioning control can be displayed by configuration reading LC013 Air conditioning type and configured using command CF019 Air conditioning type (can be configured during configuration of the UCH by the SC008 UCH type command). 2.1 Sub-function: USER SELECTION (Non-regulated air conditioning only) The UCH receives the signal from the air conditioning panel via cable connection for the air conditioning request, for electric heated rear screen and the signal for passenger compartment blower operation. The UCH sends the request to the Protection and Switching Unit to start electric heated rear screen de-icing. The UCH sends the request to the injection system to activate the air conditioning compressor. The following statuses can be displayed: – ET029 Air conditioning button, – ET028 Heated rear screen button, – ET015 Passenger compartment blower. Operation of the indicator lights on the air conditioning and electric heated rear screen request buttons can be checked using the following actuator commands: AC015 Air conditioning button indicator and AC019 Heated rear screen indicator. 2.2 Sub-function: HEATING The UCH manages the passenger compartment heating resistors (RCHs) by controlling power relays according to the request for ventilation in the passenger compartment, the engine coolant temperature, the exterior temperature, the electrical balance, engine loading and, for the cabriolet version, if the roof is open. The statuses produced by the UCH can be displayed: – PR001 Battery voltage, – PR002 Exterior temperature, – ET015 Passenger compartment fan only with non-regulated air conditioning, – ET017 Number of RCHs required, – ET018 Number of RCHs authorised by alternator - alternator load factor – ET019 Number of RCHs authorised by injection system, – ET020 Number of RCHs activated, – ET021 RCH control 1, – ET022 RCH control 2, – ET031 Fast idle request for RCH, – ET169 Engine, – ET025 Retractable roof for Cabriolet version only, – ET026 Heated rear screen switch.

87B-31

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

Relay 1 controls a passenger compartment heating resistor unit consisting of one resistor. Relay 2 controls a passenger compartment heating resistor unit consisting of two resistors. Check the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors using actuator commands: AC016 RCH relay 1, AC017 RCH relay 2 and AC018 RCH relay 3. Passenger compartment heating resistor power

Relay 1

Relay 2

0W

0

0

333 W

1

0

667 W

0

1

1000 W

1

1

The configuration can be displayed with LC030 Heating resistor type.

2.3 Sub-function: COLD LOOP The UCH requests the injection to switch on the compressor via the multiplex network, depending on the exterior temperature, the passenger compartment blower activation signal and whether the engine is in operation. The following statuses and parameters can be displayed: ET030 Air conditioning request 2, ET169 Engine, ET015 Passenger compartment blower and PR002 Exterior temperature.

87B-32

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

3 WIPER FUNCTION 3.1 Sub-function: WIPER CONTROL The UCH receives the driver's request via the wiper control stalk. Windscreen wiper: The UCH requests the Protection and Switching Unit via the CAN network to supply power to the windscreen wiper. The park position is managed by the Protection and Switching Unit. The wiper control stalk has four positions (neutral, intermittent wiping, slow speed and fast speed) and a speed ring by which the time between each wipe can be varied. Special note: If the windscreen wiper is set to fast speed when the vehicle is stationary, the system switches to low speed. If the windscreen wiper is set to low speed when the vehicle is stationary, the system switches to intermittent wipe. The requests made to the UCH via the wiper control stalk can be displayed using the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position and ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring. If the vehicle is fitted with a rain sensor, see the explanation of the special features of the rain and light sensor. Rear screen wiper: Rear wiper speed and power supply are also controlled by the UCH. Windscreen wiper outside neutral position: – The rear screen wiper starts up as soon as reverse gear is engaged. – At high speed, rear screen wiper wiping is continuous up to 48 mph (80 km/h) and is set to 3 s intermittent wipe above this speed. The statuses corresponding to operation of the rear screen wiper can be displayed using statuses ET080 Rear screen wiper request, ET097 Rear screen wiper park position and ET109 Reverse gear engaged or ET108 Automatic gearbox lever position, by configuration reading LC064 Rear screen wiper and by configuration CF166 Rear screen wiper. Windscreen washers: The front and rear windscreen washers are controlled directly by the wiper control stalk, via a cable connection. These connections are duplicated up to the UCH to permit wiping and status reading. ET078 Windscreen washer request,; ET079 Rear screen washer request. Special features of headlight washers For vehicles fitted with xenon bulbs, the headlight washers are actuated at the same time as the windscreen washer, only if the headlights are on.

87B-33

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - System operation

Two cases are possible concerning the control of the headlight washers. First case: (vehicles fitted with a SIEMENS Vdiag 44 PSU): the UCH sends the command by cable to two headlight washer relays on a relay plate underneath the PSU. Second case: (vehicles fitted with a LEAR Vdiag 48 or later): the UCH requests the PSU via the multiplex network to activate the washer relays. IMPORTANT If the UCH does not manage to determine the position of the control stalk, or inform the Protection and Switching Unit of the control stalk's position, the Protection and Switching Unit will activate the windscreen wiper at low speed (defect mode).

3.2 Sub-function: WIPER POWER The UCH controls the rear screen wiper's power (and that of the headlight washers if the vehicle is fitted with xenon headlights and a SIEMENS Vdiag 44 PSU). Their operation can be checked using commands AC007 Rear screen wiper, AC030 Headlight washer relay 1 and AC031 Headlight washer relay 2.

Rain and light sensor Information displays

Steering column control

Multiplex network

UCH Protection and Switching Unit

Rear screen wiper Windscreen wiper Windscreen and rear screen washers Headlight washers

87B-34

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - System operation

3.3 RAIN SENSOR (if fitted). Rain and light sensor Information displays

Steering column control

Multiplex network

UCH

Protection and Switching Unit

Side lights

Windscreen wiper

Dipped headlights Main beam headlights The rain and light sensor is a single sensor, connected to the UCH by a single connection. This sensor is installed on the windscreen. The rain sensor enables the windscreen wipers to be operated automatically and controls the wiper speeds according to the quantity of water on the windscreen. The sensor is activated by setting the wiper stalk to AUTO position. Depending on the vehicle's bodywork, two cases are possible for the operation of the rain sensor: a) Phase 1 bodywork: Automatic operation of the rain sensor is inhibited following ignition switch-off with the wiper stalk in the Auto position. To reactivate operation when next switching on the ignition, place the wiper control stalk in the neutral position then return it to the Auto position. b) Phase 2 bodywork: Automatic operation of the rain sensor remains active following ignition switch-off with the wiper stalk in the Auto position. On a vehicle equipped with a rain sensor, if automatic detection is activated and it is not raining, the rear screen wiper will come into operation if the reverse gear is engaged. The wiper intermittent speed ring is used to modify the sensor's sensitivity to rain and therefore the time between wipes. When the vehicle is not fitted with a rain sensor, the intermittent speed position on the control stalk takes the place of the Auto position. The status ET118 Rain sensor sensitivity ring position can be interpreted if the vehicle is configured with rain sensor and inhibits status ET096 Intermittent wipe ring position. The operation of the rain sensor can be displayed using status ET114 Wiper request by rain sensor, and by configuration reading LC044 Rain/light sensor. Configuration CF035 Rain/light sensor is available during a UCH configuration SC008 UCH Type (See Configurations and programming).

87B-35

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

4

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

FUNCTION: LIGHTING

4.1 Sub-function: LIGHTING CONTROL The UCH receives the request from the driver, from the lighting stalk, from the hazard warning lights button and, if fitted to the vehicle, from the light sensor. The UCH requests the Protection and Switching Unit, via the multiplex network, to provide power to the side lights, dipped headlights, main beam headlights and fog lights (front). If a request to activate the lighting is made, the PSU provides power to the xenon bulb computers. The dipped headlights are still supplied when the main beam headlights are activated. The following statuses can be displayed: ET081 Lighting stalk position, ET082 Rear fog lights request, ET085 Hazard warning lights button, ET083 Left-hand indicator request, ET084 Right-hand indicator request. If the UCH cannot determine the position of the control stalk, or inform the Protection and Switching Unit of the control stalk's position, the Protection and Switching Unit will activate the dipped headlights.

4.2 Sub-function: LIGHTING POWER The UCH controls the power supply for the rear fog light (a single one), direction indicators and interior lighting (roof lights and footwell/floor lights). The interior lighting request can be displayed using the ET112 Interior lighting control status. Operation of the lights powered by the UCH can be checked using the actuator commands AC009 Rear fog lights, AC022 Left-hand indicator, AC023 Right-hand indicator, AC021 Interior lights and AC027 Footwell/floor lighting. Rain and light sensor Information displays

Steering column control

Multiplex network

UCH

Protection and Switching Unit

Rear fog light

Side lights

Main beam headlights

Direction indicators

Dipped headlights

Front fog lights

Interior lighting

87B-36

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

87B

4.3 LIGHT SENSOR (if fitted). Rain and light sensor Information displays

Steering column control

Multiplex network

UCH

Protection and Switching Unit

Side lights

Windscreen wiper

Dipped headlights Main beam headlights The rain and light sensor is a single sensor, connected to the UCH by a single connection. This sensor is installed on the windscreen. The light sensor enables the side lights and dipped headlights to be operated automatically as soon as the vehicle is in a dark place (tunnel, night, gloomy weather conditions, etc.). The status of the light sensor can be displayed using ET115 Lights on request by light sensor, and by configuration reading LC044 Rain/light sensor. Configuration CF035 Rain/light sensor is available during a UCH configuration SC008 UCH Type (See Configurations and programming). To activate the automatic lighting function, press the AUTO button on the lighting stalk for at least 4 seconds. This action is confirmed by two beeps. To deactivate the automatic lighting function, switch the engine off and press the AUTO button on the lighting stalk for at least 4 seconds. A beep confirms this action and the message Automatic lighting OFF appears on the instrument panel. Any other operation on the lighting stalk overrides and cancels automatic operation.

87B-37

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - System operation

Entry level Multiplex connection Fault finding Card management ● RENAULT Basic ● RENAULT hands-free ● Coded immobiliser ● + Accessories feed relay control

Mid-range

87B Top of the range

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Opening elements ● Locking the opening elements (and unlocking in the event of an impact) ● Relocking the opening elements ● One-touch electric windows ● Tailgate lock ● Deadlocking the opening elements ● Electric child safety lock ● Opening driver's door only ● Management of exterior lock buttons Wiping ● Rain and light sensor ● Front wiper (speed control/low and high speed) ● Rear screen wiper (wiper speed according to vehicle speed) ● Windscreen and rear screen washers ● Headlight washers Lighting ● Lighting/wiper control management ● Direction indicators and hazard warning lights ● Hazard warning lights in emergency braking and airbag deployment ● Rear fog light ● Lights on reminder management (control) ● Timed interior lighting supply ● Interior lighting (floor) ● Daytime running lights ● Automatic lighting when driving and stationary Heated rear screen management Air conditioning request management Alarm management (predisposition) Exterior temperature management Tyre pressure monitoring system (SSPP) Additional heating

87B-38

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

87B

25526

White PE1 connector: 40 tracks

Black PP1 connector: 4 tracks

Black PE2 connector: 40 tracks

Black PP2 connector: 12 tracks

Grey PE3 connector: 40 tracks

Grey PE3 connector: 12 tracks

87B-39

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

87B

White 40-track PE1 connector (brown section) Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Description Electric steering column lock Exterior temperature (output) Hazard warning lights Card reader (card inserted) Clutch pedal sensor Door locking/unlocking switch Engine start push-button (signal), Tailgate opening switch Child safety indicator light Boot opening switch Not used Steering column control (headlight washer track 1) Engine start push-button (engine running indicator light) Door locking indicator light Passenger door opening sensor Rear right-hand door opening sensor Driver's door opening sensor Not used Rear left-hand door opening sensor Rear right-hand door deadlocking signal status

White 40-track PE1 connector (green section) Track 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Description Headlight washer relay (1) Headlight washer relay (2) OR glovebox locking if Mexican vehicle Window opening motor Window opening signal status Rear left-hand door deadlocking signal status Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

87B-40

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

87B

Black 40-track PE2 connector (brown section) Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Description Rain and light sensor Steering column control connection (track 9) Exterior temperature sensor Steering column control connection (track 2) Steering column control connection (track 13) Multiplex connection H (Protection and Switching Unit) One-touch electric windows and sunroof Multiplex connection H (passenger compartment) Steering column control connection (track 4) Multiplex connection H (steering column electric lock) Steering column control connection (track 14) Steering column control connection (track 5) Exterior temperature sensor earth Steering column control connection (track 3) Steering column control connection (track 12) Multiplex connection L (Protection and Switching Unit) Steering column control connection (track 8) Multiplex connection L (passenger compartment) Steering column control connection (track 10) Multiplex connection L (steering column electric lock)

Black 40-track PE2 connector (green section) Track 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Description Card reader Passenger compartment heating relay control Not used Air conditioning control (rear screen de-icer) Card reader (earth) Air conditioning control (air conditioning indicator light) Brake pedal switch (depressed) Steering column control connection (rear screen washer track 2) Immobiliser warning light output Air conditioning control Not used Air conditioning control (heater fan) Passenger compartment heating relay control + Accessories feed relay Hazard warning lights switches Brake pedal switch (inactive) Rear screen wiper park position Heated rear screen indicator light Card reader Card reader

87B-41

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

87B

Grey 40-track PE3 connector (brown section) Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Description Not used Not used Driver's door presence sensors' supply Boot locking switch Not used Passenger door presence sensors' supply Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

Grey 40-track PE3 connector (green section) Track 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Description Presence sensor (driver's door) Presence sensor (driver's side rear door) Presence sensor (passenger door) Hands-free starting aerial (front) Hands-free starting aerial (front) Hands-free starting aerial (centre) Front hands-free opening aerial, driver's side Rear hands-free opening aerial, driver's side Boot hands-free opening aerial Presence sensor (passenger side rear door) Front hands-free opening aerial, passenger side Rear hands-free opening aerial, passenger side Rear hands-free opening aerial, passenger side Front hands-free opening aerial, passenger side Hands-free starting aerial (rear) Hands-free starting aerial (rear) Hands-free starting aerial (centre) Rear hands-free opening aerial, driver's side Front hands-free opening aerial, driver's side Boot hands-free opening aerial

87B-42

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

87B

Black 4-track PP1 connector Track 1 2 3 4

Description Earth Rear right-hand direction indicator and right-hand repeater output + Before ignition feed (protected) + Before ignition feed (protected)

Black 12-track PP2 connector Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Description Steering column electric lock (supply) Steering column electric lock (signal) Rear screen wiper (control) Rear screen wiper (supply) Driver's door and fuel filler flap closing control Driver's door and fuel filler flap opening control Passenger door, rear doors and boot closing control Passenger door, rear doors and boot opening control Locking motors supply Front doors deadlocking control Rear doors deadlocking control Rear right-hand direction indicator and right-hand repeater output

Grey 12-track PP3 connector Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Description Interior lighting (control) Earth + before ignition feed Front left-hand direction indicators control Front right-hand direction indicators control Rear fog light control Not used Not used Interior lighting (supply) Interior lighting (supply) Not used Not used

87B-43

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Replacement of components

87B

For replacement of the various components, see the relevant sections in the Mechanical Workshop Repair Manual for the vehicle. The programming and configurations are described in the following pages of the present document.

87B-44

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

1/ GENERAL INFORMATION Opening element and engine immobiliser management system. During manufacture, a 13-character hexadecimal code is assigned to the vehicle to make the engine immobiliser operational. The 4 coded components are: – UCH, – Renault cards, – steering column lock, – injection computer. This immobiliser code is necessary to: – add or replace a Renault card, – deallocate one or more RENAULT cards (e.g. if lost or stolen), – replace the UCH or the injection computer. IMPORTANT When the Clip tool issues the programming key, the user has a limited time in which to enter the immobiliser code. If this time elapses, the tool displays the message "Time expired. Restart the procedure". This immobiliser code is available on RENAULT.net or by contacting Techline. When requesting an immobiliser code, always provide the VIN number of the vehicle and the programming key obtained from the Clip tool. This information enables the operator to identify the vehicle. IMPORTANT If not all of the Renault cards are available, it will be necessary to reallocate all the Renault cards later.

87B-45

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

The UCH and the cards are not coded when new. Once fitted on the vehicle, they must be programmed with a code to become operational. The steering column lock and the injection computer are automatically coded when the after ignition + is switched on. To perform this procedure, it is essential that some parts on the vehicle are already correctly coded (with the vehicle code). Refer to the allocation table. Operation

Status of the components

After-Sales

UCH

Renault card

Injection computer

Steering column lock

Programming the UCH

Blank

Coded

Immaterial

Immaterial

YES

Allocation or deallocation of a Renault Card

Coded

Blank or assigned to the vehicle

Immaterial

Immaterial

YES

Programming the steering column lock

Coded

Coded

Immaterial

Blank

NO

Programming the injection computer

Coded

Coded

Blank

Coded

NO

Immobiliser code

NOTE Once a part is programmed with a code, it is allocated to the vehicle; the code cannot be deleted and the part cannot be reprogrammed with another code. The programmed code cannot be erased.

87B-46

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

2/ PROGRAMMING THE UCH (SC004) This operation will allow the UCH to be coded. NOTE – Do not interrupt the procedure when it is in progress. – If it is interrupted, restart the procedure, a new programming key will be displayed. – Enter the UCH computer. – Select the Repair mode. – Select the Programming menu and select SC004 Program UCH. – The tool displays Remove card from reader. Select End to continue. – The tool displays the programming key. Make a note of the programming key and the VIN of the vehicle in order to obtain the immobiliser code (see Technical Note 5037A Code issue procedure). – Enter the immobiliser code on the screen (13 characters) and confirm. – If the immobiliser code is correct, the tool displays Insert card fully into reader. – Insert the blank Renault card or a card belonging to the vehicle and press Next. – The tool displays Programming in progress. Do not remove card. – If programming has been successful, the tool displays Programming complete. Allocate cards and configure UCH. Configure the UCH according to the vehicle options (See 87B Passenger compartment connection unit).

87B-47

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

3/ RENAULT CARD ALLOCATION PROCEDURE (SC006) NOTE – Do not interrupt the procedure when it is in progress. – If it is interrupted, restart the procedure, a new programming key will be displayed. – Carry out a Multiplex network test and enter the UCH computer system. – Select the Repair mode. – Select the Programming mode and select line SC006 Card allocation. – The tool displays Important: all previously programmed cards will no longer be usable after the first card has been programmed. Important note: be sure to insert all cards allocated to the vehicle for programming. – The tool displays the programming key. Make a note of the programming key and the VIN of the vehicle in order to obtain the immobiliser code (see Technical Note 5037A Code issue procedure). – Enter the immobiliser code on the screen (13 characters) and confirm. – If the immobiliser code is correct, the tool displays Insert card fully into reader. – Insert a blank Renault card or one allocated to this vehicle into the reader and confirm. – The tool displays: Programming in progress. Do not remove the Renault card if the message One card programmed is not displayed. – The tool displays Do you want to program another card?. The vehicle can have up to four Renault Cards. – To allocate a Renault card, select YES. – The tool displays Insert card fully into reader. – Insert the Renault card or a card belonging to the vehicle and confirm (if the same Renault card is inserted twice the system will not acknowledge it and the immobiliser warning light will remain off). – To finish programming, select NO and confirm. The Renault cards are allocated to the vehicle and the vehicle identification number is stored in the cards and in the UCH.

NOTE These cards must be old Renault cards belonging to the vehicle or new, uncoded Renault cards.

87B-48

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

NOTE After entering and confirming the immobiliser code, the maximum time between each operation is five minutes, otherwise the procedure is cancelled and the tool displays the message "Procedure interrupted: warning, the cards allocated to the vehicle are those which were allocated before initiation of the procedure, they are no longer blank and can only be allocated to this vehicle". This message also appears when communication with the UCH is lost or the battery is disconnected. With this system it is not possible to replace some components, such as the UCH and the Renault card as these parts are sold blank and uncoded. These components cannot be coded when replaced unless they have the vehicle's original code stored. There is no way of erasing the code programmed into the system components. The programmed code cannot be erased.

4/ INJECTION COMPUTER PROGRAMMING This operation enables the injection computer to be programmed with the UCH immobiliser code. – Carry out a Multiplex test and enter the Injection computer. – Select the Repair mode. – Select the Programming menu and select line SC017 Program injection immobiliser code. – The tool displays Programming the injection immobiliser code is only possible if the UCH, cards and steering column lock have been programmed. Switch on the ignition. Insert the card into the card reader and switch on the ignition. – The tool displays Switch off the ignition. Remove the card from the reader and press START with no starting conditions met. – The tool displays the programming key. Make a note of the programming key and the VIN of the vehicle in order to obtain the immobiliser code (see Technical Note 5037A Code issue procedure). – Enter the immobiliser code on the screen (13 characters) and confirm. – If the immobiliser code is correct, the tool displays Remove the card from the reader, then reinsert it. Switch on the ignition. – The tool displays Programming complete. The injection computer is now coded.

87B-49

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

5/ PROGRAMMING THE STEERING COLUMN LOCK This operation will program the steering column with the immobiliser code from the UCH. NOTE – Do not interrupt the procedure when it is in progress. – If it is interrupted, restart the procedure, a new programming key will be displayed. – Carry out a Multiplex network test and enter the UCH computer system. – Select the Repair mode. – Select the Programming menu and select line SC027 Program steering column lock immobiliser code. – The tool displays Programming the immobiliser code is only possible if the UCH is not blank. Select Next to continue. – The tool displays Attempt to start engine with card in reader. – The tool displays the programming key. Make a note of the programming key and the VIN of the vehicle in order to obtain the immobiliser code (see Technical Note 5037A Code issue procedure). – Enter the immobiliser code on the screen (13 characters) and confirm. – The tool displays Programming complete. If the immobiliser code is correct.

87B-50

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

6/ FUNCTION: TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM 6.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE FOR THE 4 VALVE CODES (SC002) This procedure will allow the tyre pressure monitor valve code to be programmed so that the UCH interprets the wheel position in relation to its code. – Click on the Repair mode and in the Programming menu, – select the line SC002 Programming the 4 valve codes, – display the 4 summer set valve codes depending on where they are located on the vehicle and the 4 winter set valve codes if the customer possesses another set of wheels, – confirm and follow the procedure, – select the set of wheels currently fitted to the vehicle, confirm and follow the procedure, – inflate the tyres to a minimum of 3.5 bar 1 minute before programming, confirm and follow the procedure, – program the vehicle's 4 valves following the procedure and using the valve exciter, – confirm and follow the procedure, – reinflate to the recommended pressures for the vehicle and carry out a road test.

6.2 PROCEDURE FOR ENTERING THE RECOMMENDED PRESSURES (VP005) This procedure will allow the tyre pressures recommended by the manufacturer to be configured. – Click on the Repair mode and in the Setting other parameters menu, – Enter CF097 Vehicle type Long MPV (multi-purpose vehicle) or other, – confirm and follow the procedure, – enter the front and rear axle low and high speed recommended pressures (see Owner's Manual), – confirm and finish.

87B-51

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

7/ CHILD SAFETY CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE (SC016) This procedure will enable the child safety system, if fitted to the vehicle, to be configured for optimum running during the replacement of a UCH. – Click on the Repair mode and in the Programming menu, – confirm the line SC016 Child safety, – follow the procedure and enter the following data: – CF104 Child safety (WITH or WITHOUT), – confirm, follow the procedure, – finish by confirming and clearing the stored faults. The child safety function is configured.

8/ PROCEDURE FOR CONFIGURING PSU TYPE (CF135) This procedure will enable certain functions of the UCH computer to be configured to differentiate between a vehicle fitted with a phase 1 electronic layout and a vehicle fitted with a phase 2 electronic layout (only for UCHs after Vdiag 4F). – Click on Repair mode and in the Configuration writing menu, – confirm the line CF135 Protection and Switching Unit computer type, – follow the procedure and enter the following data: – CF135 PSU computer type (SIEMENS Vdiag 44 or OTHER), – CF114 Body type (phase 1 or phase 2), – CF112 Headlight washers on vehicle (WITH or WITHOUT), – confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: – CF085 Valet card function (WITH or WITHOUT) Important: the Valet function is only available on vehicles for the MEXICO market (this configuration is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a Vdiag 44 PSU), – confirm, follow the procedure, – a screen prompts the user to verify that the characteristics configured are those for the vehicle, – confirm and follow the procedure.

87B-52

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

9/ UCH TYPE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE (SC008) This procedure will enable the UCH to be configured in relation to the vehicle to provide optimum running. – Click on the Repair mode and in the Programming menu, – confirm line SC008 UCH type, – follow the procedure and enter the following data: – CF097 Vehicle type (3-door/4-door/5-door/cabriolet/extended MPV/MPV/Estate), – confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: – – – – – – – – –

CF010 Hands-free function (WITH or WITHOUT), CF023 Tyre pressure monitoring system (WITH or WITHOUT), CF057 Type of heating resistors (NONE, 1000 W, or 1800 W), CF019 Type of air conditioning (HEATING, AUTOMATIC, MANUAL), CF027 Type of windscreen (TINTED, HEAT INSULATING), CF035 Rain/light sensor (WITH or WITHOUT), CF014 Daytime running lights (WITH or WITHOUT), CF022 First assembly perimeter protection (WITH or WITHOUT), CF173 One-touch window(s)/Sunroof (WITH or WITHOUT),

– confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: – CF036 Selective opening of the opening elements (WITH or WITHOUT) Only if CF010 = WITHOUT – confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: – CF085 Valet card function (WITH or WITHOUT) Function only available in Mexico, (This status will only be available if the following conditions are fulfilled: CF036 Selective opening of the opening elements = WITH) – check that the options configured are those desired and finish.

87B-53

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

The UCH configurations performed in accordance with the vehicle's equipment level are configured using CLIP: Configuration reading

Configuration

Name of configuration

Choice of configuration

LC001

Hands-free function

(See SC008 UCH type)

WITH/WITHOUT

LC002

Exterior temperature sensor

CF029

WITH/WITHOUT

LC003

Deadlocking

CF009

WITH/WITHOUT

LC005

Gearbox type

CF011

MANUAL/AUTOMATIC

LC008

Daytime running lights

CF014

WITH/WITHOUT

LC011

Vehicle type

(See SC008 UCH type)

Cabriolet/3-door/All except E/C

LC013

Type of air conditioning

(See SC008 UCH type)

HEATING/AUTOMATIC/ MANUAL

LC014

Driving layout

CF020

LEFT-HAND/RIGHTHAND

LC015

Front fog lights

CF021

WITH/WITHOUT

LC016

Valet card function

(See SC008 UCH type)

WITH/WITHOUT

LC017

Tyre Pressure Monitoring System

(See SC008 UCH type)

WITH/WITHOUT

LC018

Hazard warning lights switched on by ABS

CF024

WITH/WITHOUT

LC020

First assembly perimeter protection

(See SC008 UCH type)

WITH/WITHOUT

LC021

Type of windscreen

(See SC008 UCH type)

TINTED/HEAT INSULATING

LC023

Engine type

CF028

F ENGINE/K ENGINE/M ENGINE

LC029

Selective opening element opening

(See SC008 UCH type)

WITH/WITHOUT

LC030

Type of heating resistors

(See SC008 UCH type)

NONE/1000 W/1800 W

LC035

Child safety

(See SC016 Child safety)

WITH/WITHOUT

LC044

Rain and light sensor

(See SC008 UCH type)

WITH/WITHOUT

LC064

Rear screen wiper

CF166

WITH/WITHOUT

LC070

One-touch window(s)/ sunroof

(See SC008 UCH type)

WITH/WITHOUT

87B-54

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

Specific UCH commands: Specific commands

Name of Specific command

SC001

Reading the valve set and the stored codes

SC002

Programming the 4 valve codes

SC003

Spare

SC004

UCH programming

SC005

Card check

SC006

Card allocation

SC008

Type of UCH

SC016

Child safety

87B-55

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault summary table

Tool fault

87B

Diagnostic tool title

DF001

UCH

DF002

Steering column lock

DF003

Clutch switch circuit

DF004

Brake light switch circuit

DF005

Map

DF006

Front left-hand wheel valve sensor

DF007

Front right-hand wheel valve sensor

DF008

Rear right-hand wheel valve sensor

DF009

Rear left-hand wheel valve sensor

DF010

Steering column control unit circuit

DF011

Rain/light sensor circuit

DF012

Right-hand direction indicator circuit

DF013

Left-hand direction indicator circuit

DF014

Card reader circuit

DF015

Optical sensor circuit

DF016

At least 2 identical codes/summer set

DF017

At least 2 identical codes/winter set

DF018

Programming of 4 codes in summer set not performed

DF019

Programming of 4 codes in winter set not performed

DF020

Front internal aerial circuit

DF021

Rear internal aerial circuit

DF022

Centre internal aerial circuit

DF023

Driver's side front external aerial circuit

DF024

Passenger side front external aerial circuit

DF025

Driver's side rear external aerial circuit

DF026

Passenger side rear door external aerial circuit

DF027

Exterior temperature sensor circuit

DF029

Steering column lock circuit

DF030

Anti-locking line

87B-56

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault summary table

Tool fault

87B

Diagnostic tool title

DF031

One-touch window connection

DF032

Tailgate external aerial

DF033

Driver-side external aerial(s)

DF034

Passenger-side external aerial(s)

DF035

Internal aerial circuit

DF072

Child safety circuit

DF073

Right-hand door child safety lock circuit

DF074

Left-hand door child safety lock circuit

DF075

Timed supply circuit

87B-57

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

UCH DF001 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: internal electronic fault 2.DEF: internal electronic fault

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: Perform locking/unlocking by pressing button on card. If the fault appears, carry out this fault finding procedure. Special notes: If a fault concerning the steering column lock is present or stored, deal with it first.

Contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF001P/UCH_V4C_DF001P/UCH_V4D_DF001P/ UCH_V4F_DF001P/UCH_V50_DF001P

87B-58

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

STEERING COLUMN LOCK

DF002 PRESENT

1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF: 4.DEF: 5.DEF: 6.DEF: 7.DEF: 8.DEF:

Steering column lock internal electronic fault Steering column lock internal electronic fault Mechanical fault on column Steering column lock authentication fault Steering column lock authentication fault UCH internal electronic fault Steering column lock internal electronic fault Steering column lock internal electronic fault

Priorities when dealing with a number of faults: Firstly, deal with the DF029 Steering column lock circuit fault, if it is present. NOTES Special notes: Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

1.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

If the fault is still present, replace the steering column lock.

2.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

Make another attempt to lock/unlock the column. If the fault is still present, replace the steering column lock.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF002P/UCH_V4C_DF002P/UCH_V4D_DF002P/ UCH_V4F_DF002P/UCH_V50_DF002P

87B-59

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF002 CONTINUED 1

3.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

Release the column by turning the steering wheel, while pressing the start button. If the problem persists without mechanical fault (wheels straight), replace the steering column lock.

4.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

The steering column lock does not belong to this vehicle (or the UCH and/or the cards do not belong to this vehicle). Fit the correct steering column lock (or UCH and/or cards). If the fault is still present, contact Techline.

5.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

The steering column lock does not belong to this vehicle (or the UCH and/or the cards do not belong to this vehicle). Fit the correct steering column lock (or UCH and/or cards). If the fault is still present, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-60

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF002 CONTINUED 2

6.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

Make another attempt to lock/unlock the column. If the problem persists, replace the UCH.

7.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

If the vehicle is fitted with a Vdiag 0F ABS computer, or a Vdiag 0B or Vdiag 11 ABS/ESP computer: establish dialogue with the ABS or ABS/ESP computer and verify that PR020 Vehicle speed on initialisation is correctly configured. If the configuration is incorrect, use command VP032 Vehicle speed on initialisation to reconfigure the ABS or the ABS/ESP. Make five attempts to start and lock the column. If the fault is still present, replace the steering column lock.

8.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

Deal with DF029 Steering column lock circuit first. If the fault is still present, replace the steering column lock.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-61

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF003 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

CO.1

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault appears following a road test with V > 24 mph (40 km/h).

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the green 2-track clutch switch connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.) Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the blue 40-track PE1 UCH connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation to + 12 V and the continuity of the following connection: Switch track 1

track 5 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector

Check for the presence of earth on track 2 of the clutch pedal switch. Repair if necessary. If the connection is OK and earth is present, replace the clutch pedal switch. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF003/UCH_V4C_DF003/UCH_V4D_DF003/ UCH_V4F_DF003/UCH_V50_DF003

87B-62

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF004 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH CIRCUIT

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault appears after a series of 10 presses of more than 1 second Note: The fault could prevent cruise control/speed limiter operation.

Refer to the interpretation of status ET047 Brake pedal position.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF004/UCH_V4C_DF004/UCH_V4D_DF004/ UCH_V4F_DF004/UCH_V50_DF004

87B-63

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF005 PRESENT OR STORED

DEF

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CARD DEF: Card battery low

NOTES

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: Perform 5 start operations with each vehicle card.

Check the condition of the card battery and that it is inserted the right way round. Replace the battery if necessary. After each battery change, verify that the fault does not recur after 5 starts. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF005/UCH_V4C_DF005/UCH_V4D_DF005/ UCH_V4F_DF005/UCH_V50_DF005

87B-64

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF006 DF007 DF008 DF009 PRESENT

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

FRONT LEFT-HAND WHEEL VALVE SENSOR FRONT RIGHT-HAND WHEEL VALVE SENSOR REAR RIGHT-HAND WHEEL VALVE SENSOR REAR LEFT-HAND WHEEL VALVE SENSOR 2.DEF: 3.DEF: 4.DEF: 5.DEF: 6.DEF: 7.DEF: 8.DEF:

Internal electronic fault Internal electronic fault Internal electronic fault Internal electronic fault Internal electronic fault Internal electronic fault Internal electronic fault

Special notes: No operation involving replacement of a valve or removal of a tyre should be attempted without full knowledge of the required precautions (see MR 374, Mechanical, Scénic 35A, Wheels and Tyres). Before any operation, ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves, and that the spare wheel has not been fitted.

For faults DF006 to DF009, if the fault is present as of the first kilometres, repeat programming of the 4 valves. In the event of a programming failure, replace the valve concerned following the method described in the repair manual (see MR 364, Mechanical, 35B Tyre Pressure Monitoring System). Check that there are no wheels with rubber valves. If there are, replace them with wheels with a valve fitted with a sensor and carry out a road test. If the fault is still present, carry out programming of the 4 valves. If the fault is still present, replace the valve. The correspondence between fault numbers and the valve concerned is described below: – DF006 = Front left-hand valve sensor – DF007 = Front right-hand valve sensor – DF008 = Rear right-hand valve sensor – DF009 = Rear left-hand valve sensor Once the sensor has been replaced, program the four valve codes according to procedure SC002 Programming the four valve codes (see Configuration and programming).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF006P/UCH_V4C_DF006P/UCH_V4D_DF006P/UCH_V4F_DF006P/UCH_V50_DF006P/ UCH_V48_DF007P/UCH_V4C_DF007P/UCH_V4D_DF007P/UCH_V4F_DF007P/UCH_V50_DF007P/ UCH_V48_DF008P/UCH_V4C_DF008P/UCH_V4D_DF008P/UCH_V4F_DF008P/UCH_V50_DF008P/ UCH_V48_DF009P/UCH_V4C_DF009P/UCH_V4D_DF009P/UCH_V4F_DF009P/UCH_V50_DF009P

87B-65

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

STEERING COLUMN COMBINED STALK CIRCUIT

DF010 PRESENT OR STORED

1.DEF 2.DEF 3.DEF 4.DEF 5.DEF

1.DEF : The combined stalk is not connected or not correctly connected (stalk or UCH side), not being supplied or has an internal electronic fault 2.DEF : Combined stalk lighting function connection to UCH in open circuit or internal stalk fault 3.DEF : Combined stalk wiping function connection to UCH in open circuit or internal stalk fault 4.DEF : Combined stalk direction indicator function connection to UCH in open circuit or internal stalk fault 5.DEF : Combined stalk trip computer function connection to UCH in open circuit or internal stalk fault.

NOTES

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault becomes present after an operation on the stalk, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE2 connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair it if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 12-track steering column control connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair it if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Black 12-track connector

40-track UCH PE2 connector track 1 track 2 track 14 track 9 track 11 track 12 track 17 track 18 track 13 track 16

Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track

14 9 12 15 4 17 11 5 2 19

Repair if necessary. If these connections are sound, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF010/UCH_V4C_DF010/UCH_V4D_DF010/ UCH_V4F_DF010/UCH_V50_DF010

87B-66

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF011 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

1.DEF

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

RAIN/LIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT 1.DEF: Communication disrupted 2.DEF: Internal electrical fault

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Run the automatic wiper system and automatic light illumination system, then cover the sensor and/or place water on it. If the fault appears, carry out this fault finding procedure.

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the sensor 3A power fuse in the passenger compartment fuse and relay box in position S. Replace it if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector of the sensor (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 3 of the sensor. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of 12 V on track 1 of the rain/light sensor. If OK, replace the sensor. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: sensor track 2

track 2 of the UCH PE2 connector.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

2.DEF

NOTES

If fault is present.

Replace the sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF011/UCH_V4C_DF011/UCH_V4D_DF011/ UCH_V4F_DF011/UCH_V50_DF011

87B-67

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR CIRCUIT

DF012 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

87B

CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1.DEF: Bulbs not working or open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault appears after action on the right-hand direction indicator control stalk, apply this fault finding procedure. Special note: The fault becomes stored after changing a bulb.

Check the bulbs. Replace them if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the right-hand headlight connectors of the right-hand indicator repeater and the rear right-hand light. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on the following components: Track 1 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of + 12 V on the following components: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb / Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light connector.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF012/UCH_V4C_DF012/UCH_V4D_DF012/ UCH_V4F_DF012/UCH_V50_DF012

87B-68

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF012 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection UCH PP3 connector. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary.

track 4 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If OK, check the bulbs again, and if still not OK replace the rear light(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-69

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR CIRCUIT

DF013 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

87B

CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1.DEF: Bulbs not working or open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault appears after action on the left-hand indicator control stalk, then apply this fault finding procedure. Special note: The fault becomes stored after changing a bulb.

Check the bulbs. Replace them if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the left-hand headlight connector, the left-hand repeater and the rear lefthand light. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on the following components: Track 1 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on the following components: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb / Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light connector.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF013/UCH_V4C_DF013/UCH_V4D_DF013/ UCH_V4F_DF013/UCH_V50_DF013

87B-70

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF013 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 6 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary.

track 4 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If OK, check the bulbs again, and if still not OK replace the rear light(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-71

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF014 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

CC.0

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CARD READER CIRCUIT CC.0 CO.0 CC.1 DEF

: : : :

Short circuit to earth Open circuit or short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Internal electronic fault

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Insert the card into the card reader, switch on and switch off the engine, leaving the card in the card reader. Carry out fault finding on the card reader circuit with the card in the card reader (after the engine is switched off, the card reader is supplied and controlled for 20 min).

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 8-track card reader black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 black connector and the 40-track UCH PE1 blue connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation against earth of the following connections: Card reader track 4

track 39 of the 40-track UCH PE2 black connector

Card reader track 6

track 40 of the 40-track UCH PE2 black connector.

Card reader track 3

track 21 of the UCH 40-track PE2 black connector.

Repair if necessary. Using an oscilloscope check for a square wave signal on track 3 of the card reader connector: Connect the oscilloscope between track 3 of the connector and a bodywork earth. Set the oscilloscope as follows: Calibration at 5 V/division Time base 100 ms/division Using an oscilloscope check for a square wave signal coming from the UCH on this track 3 of the card reader connector. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF014/UCH_V4C_DF014/UCH_V4D_DF014/ UCH_V4F_DF014/UCH_V50_DF014

87B-72

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF014 CONTINUED 1

CO.0

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 8-track card reader black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 black connector and the 40-track UCH PE1 blue connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on track 3 of the card reader (see instructions). Check for earth on track 5 of the card reader (see instructions). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation against earth of the following connections: Card reader track 4

track 39 of the 40-track UCH PE2 black connector.

Card reader track 6

track 40 of the 40-track UCH PE2 black connector.

Card reader track 3

track 21 of the UCH 40-track PE2 black connector.

Card reader track 5

track 25 of the UCH 40-track PE2 black connector.

Repair if necessary. Replace the card reader if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-73

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF014 CONTINUED 2

CC.1

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 8-track card reader black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 black connector and the 40-track UCH PE1 blue connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check for earth on track 5 of the card reader (see instructions). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation against + 12 V on the following connections: Card reader track 4

track 39 of the 40-track UCH PE2 black connector

Card reader track 6

track 40 of the 40-track UCH PE2 black connector.

Card reader track 5

track 25 of the UCH 40-track PE2 black connector.

Repair if necessary. Replace the card reader if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

DEF

NOTES

None

Replace the card reader if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-74

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF015 PRESENT OR STORED

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

OPTICAL SENSOR CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Lock the vehicle and place your hand in each handle. If the fault appears, carry out this fault finding procedure.

NOTES

Check that ET054 Optical sensors powered, is YES. If status ET054 remains NO, consult the interpretation of status ET054. Check the statuses of the sensors to determine which sensor is in short circuit: without a hand being placed inside the handles, the statuses must be INACTIVE. ET055 Driver's side optical sensor, ET056 Driver's rear optical sensor, ET057 Front/rear passenger side optical sensor, If one of the statuses remains ACTIVE, disconnect the faulty sensor(s): if, after disconnection, the status returns to INACTIVE, replace the faulty sensor. If a status remains INACTIVE after placing a hand inside the handle: Check for 12 V on track 3 of the sensor(s). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and the continuity of the following connections: Driver's side front sensor track 1

track 21 of the UCH black 40-track PE3 connector.

Driver's side rear sensor track 1

track 22 of the UCH 40-track PE3 black connector.

Passenger side front sensor track 1

track 23 of the UCH 40-track PE3 grey connector.

Passenger side rear sensor track 1

track 23 of the UCH 40-track PE3 black connector.

Repair if necessary. If the connections are correct and the power supply is present, then replace the sensor concerned. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF015/UCH_V4C_DF015/UCH_V4D_DF015/ UCH_V4F_DF015/UCH_V50_DF015

87B-75

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF016 DF017 PRESENT

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

AT LEAST 2 IDENTICAL CODES/SUMMER SET AT LEAST 2 IDENTICAL CODES/WINTER SET

Special notes: No operation involving replacement of a valve or removal of a tyre should be attempted without full knowledge of the required precautions (see MR 364, Mechanical, 35B Tyre Pressure Monitoring System). Before any operation, check that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves, and that the spare wheel has not been fitted on the same axle assembly.

Fault DF016 At least 2 identical codes/summer set appears when at least two valve codes are identical in the summer wheel set (incorrect programming of four valve codes). In this case, repeat programming of the four valves according to procedure SC002: Programming of the four valve codes (see Configuration and programming). Fault DF017 At least 2 identical codes/winter set appears when at least two valve codes are identical in the winter wheel set (incorrect programming of four valve codes). In this case, repeat programming of the four valves according to procedure SC002: Programming of the four valve codes (see Configuration and programming).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF016P/UCH_V4C_DF016P/UCH_V4D_DF016P/UCH_V4F_DF016P/UCH_V50_DF016P/ UCH_V48_DF017P/UCH_V4C_DF017P/UCH_V4D_DF017P/UCH_V4F_DF017P/UCH_V50_DF017P

87B-76

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF018 DF019 PRESENT

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

4 CODES NOT PROGRAMMED FOR SUMMER SET 4 CODES NOT PROGRAMMED FOR WINTER SET

Special notes: No operation involving replacement of a valve or removal of a tyre should be attempted without full knowledge of the required precautions (see MR 364, Mechanical, 35B Tyre Pressure Monitoring System). Before any operation, ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves, and that the spare wheel has not been fitted.

Fault DF018: 4 summer set codes not programmed is present if the UCH has not programmed a valve code for the summer tyre set (after replacing the sensors or UCH). Fault DF019: 4 winter set codes not programmed is present if the UCH has not programmed a valve code for the winter tyre set and the winter tyre set is selected. In the status menu, note the type of tyre set stored in the memory (summer or winter). In the status menu, note the valve codes allocated for the type of tyre stored in the memory. Program the four valve codes using SC002 Programming the four valve codes (see Configuration and programming).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF018P/UCH_V4C_DF018P/UCH_V4D_DF018P/UCH_V4F_DF018P/UCH_V50_DF018P/ UCH_V48_DF019P/UCH_V4C_DF019P/UCH_V4D_DF019P/UCH_V4F_DF019P/UCH_V50_DF019P

87B-77

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF020 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

FRONT INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the front internal aerial 3-track black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 grey connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 3-track connector track 1

track 25 of the 40-track UCH PE3 black connector

3-track connector track 3

track 24 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector

Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF020/UCH_V4C_DF020/UCH_V4D_DF020/ UCH_V4F_DF020/UCH_V50_DF020

87B-78

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF021 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

REAR INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the rear internal aerial 3-track black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 grey connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 3-track connector track 1

track 35 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

3-track connector track 3

track 36 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF021/UCH_V4C_DF021/UCH_V4D_DF021/ UCH_V4F_DF021/UCH_V50_DF021

87B-79

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF022 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CENTRE INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the centre internal aerial 3-track black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 grey connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 3-track connector track 3

track 37 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

3-track connector track 1

track 26 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector

Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF022/UCH_V4C_DF022/UCH_V4D_DF022/ UCH_V4F_DF022/UCH_V50_DF022

87B-80

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF023 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DRIVER'S SIDE FRONT DOOR EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the driver's side front door external aerial (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 4-track connector track 2

track 39 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

4-track connector track 1

track 27 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector

Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF023/UCH_V4C_DF023/UCH_V4D_DF023/ UCH_V4F_DF023/UCH_V50_DF023

87B-81

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF024 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PASSENGER SIDE FRONT EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the passenger side front door external aerial (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 1

track 34 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

4-track connector track 2

track 31 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF024/UCH_V4C_DF024/UCH_V4D_DF024/ UCH_V4F_DF024/UCH_V50_DF024

87B-82

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF025 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DRIVER'S SIDE REAR EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial diagnostic; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure. Verify that configuration CF097 Vehicle type has been correctly performed.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the driver's side rear door external aerial (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 1

track 28 of the 40-track UCH PE3 black connector

4-track connector track 2

track 38 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF025/UCH_V4C_DF025/UCH_V4D_DF025/ UCH_V4F_DF025/UCH_V50_DF025

87B-83

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF026 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PASSENGER SIDE REAR EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then carry out this fault finding procedure. Verify that configuration CF097 Vehicle type has been correctly performed.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the passenger side rear door external aerial (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 4-track connector track 1

track 32 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

4-track connector track 2

track 33 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF026/UCH_V4C_DF026/UCH_V4D_DF026/ UCH_V4F_DF026/UCH_V50_DF026

87B-84

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

DF027 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0 : Short circuit to earth CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault reappears as stored following the fault being cleared

NOTES

Check whether the passenger door mirror is fitted with a temperature sensor. If NO, vehicle is not fitted with it; (if the vehicle is not fitted with an exterior temperature sensor, check that configuration CF029 Exterior temperature sensor has been correctly configured as WITHOUT. If YES, perform the following fault finding procedure. Check the 2-track green connector of the temperature sensor (tabs bent, oxidised, broken). Repair if necessary. Check the 40-track UCH PE2 black connector (tabs bent, oxidised, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Temperature sensor Track 1

Track 3 of the 40-track black connector of the UCH

Temperature sensor Track 2

Track 13 of the 40-track UCH black connector

Repair if necessary. Measure the sensor resistance on tracks 3 and 4 of the 4-track passenger electric door mirror black connector. Approximate temperature in °C

Sensor resistance in Ω

between 0 and 5

between 5400 and 6200

between 11 and 15

between 3700 and 4400

between 21 and 25

between 2500 and 3000

between 31 and 35

between 1700 and 2100

Replace the sensor if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF027/UCH_V4C_DF027/UCH_V4D_DF027/ UCH_V4F_DF027/UCH_V50_DF027

87B-85

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

STEERING COLUMN LOCK CIRCUIT CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V 1.DEF : Open circuit (e.g. lock disconnected) or lock power supply absent 2.DEF : Lock earth absent or multiplex network faulty (e.g. steering column lock connection ⇒ UCH) 4.DEF : Short circuit to earth on the steering column lock sensor connection 5.DEF : Open circuit on the steering column lock sensor connection 6.DEF : Short circuit to + 12 V on the steering column lock sensor connection

DF029 PRESENT

None NOTES

Special note: Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

CC.1

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track steering column lock black connector. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE2, PP2 connectors of the UCH and PEH (PSU V44) or CT1 (PSU V48) connectors of the PSU (bent or broken tabs, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column lock on track 3

track 10 of UCH PE2 connector

Steering column lock track 6

track 20 of UCH PE2 connector

Steering column lock track 2

track 1 of the UCH connector PP2

Steering column lock track 5

track 1 of the PEH or CT1 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF029/UCH_V4C_DF029/UCH_V4D_DF029/ UCH_V4F_DF029/UCH_V50_DF029

87B-86

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 1

1.DEF 2.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track steering column lock black connector. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PP2 and PE2 connectors of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on track 2 of the steering column lock. Check the continuity of the connection between track 1 of the steering column lock 6-track black connector and the bodywork earth. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column lock on track 3

track 10 of UCH PE2 connector

Steering column lock track 6

track 20 of UCH PE2 connector

Steering column lock track 2

track 1 of the UCH PP2 connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-87

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 2

4.DEF 5.DEF 6.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track steering column lock connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and the insulation of the following connection: Steering column lock track 4

track 1 of the UCH PE1 connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-88

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

ANTI-LOCKING LINE CO : Open circuit

DF030 PRESENT

NOTES

None

CO.1

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track steering column lock connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the presence and condition of the F5D fuse on the PSU (Vdiag 44 PSU) or the F18 fuse (Vdiag 48 PSU or later). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PEH connector (PSU V44) or CT1 (PSU V48) connector of the PSU (bent or broken tabs, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Steering column lock track 5

track 1 of the 12-track PEH or CT1 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF030P/UCH_V4C_DF030P/UCH_V4D_DF030P/ UCH_V4F_DF030P/UCH_V50_DF030P

87B-89

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF031 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

ONE-TOUCH WINDOW CONNECTION CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault becomes present after a one-touch window has been activated, then apply this fault finding procedure. Special note: If the vehicle is not fitted with one-touch windows, ignore this fault.

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the electric windows (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: 40-track PE2 connector on track 7

track 6 of the window winder connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF031/UCH_V4C_DF031/UCH_V4D_DF031/ UCH_V4F_DF031/UCH_V50_DF031

87B-90

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF032 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

BOOT EXTERNAL AERIAL CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault appears, then apply this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the boot external aerial 4-track black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and the continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 2

track 40 of the black 40-track UCH PE3 connector

4-track connector track 1

track 29 of the UCH 40-track PE3 black connector

Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF032/UCH_V4C_DF032/UCH_V4D_DF032/ UCH_V4F_DF032/UCH_V50_DF032

87B-91

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF033 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DRIVER'S SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault appears, then apply this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the driver's side external aerial 4-track black connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and the continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 2

track 39 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

4-track connector track 1

track 27 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector

4-track connector track 1

track 28 of the 40-track UCH PE3 black connector

4-track connector track 2

track 38 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Repair if necessary. Disconnect one aerial then the other to identify which is the cause of the fault. (The aerials are connected on each side, a short circuit in one aerial affects all the aerials on the same side) Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF033/UCH_V4C_DF033/UCH_V4D_DF033/ UCH_V4F_DF033/UCH_V50_DF033

87B-92

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF034 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PASSENGER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then apply this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the passenger side external aerial 4-track black connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and the continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 2

track 34 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

4-track connector track 1

track 31 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

4-track connector track 1

track 32 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

4-track connector track 2

track 33 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Repair if necessary. Disconnect one aerial then the other to identify which is the cause of the fault. (The aerials are connected on each side. A short circuit in one aerial affects all the aerials on the same side) Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF034/UCH_V4C_DF034/UCH_V4D_DF034/ UCH_V4F_DF034/UCH_V50_DF034

87B-93

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF035 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

INTERNAL AERIALS CIRCUIT CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then apply this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the front internal aerial 4-track black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation to earth of the following connections: Front aerial, 3-track connector on track 1

track 25 of the 40-track UCH PE3 black connector

Front aerial, 3-track connector on track 3

track 24 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector

Centre aerial, 3-track connector on track 3

track 37 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Centre aerial, 3-track connector on track 1

track 26 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector

Rear aerial, 3-track connector on track 1

track 35 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Rear aerial, 3-track connector on track 3

track 36 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Repair if necessary. Disconnect the aerials one by one to identify which is the cause of the fault. (The 3 aerials are interconnected in the UCH, a short circuit in one aerial affects all the aerials). Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF035/UCH_V4C_DF035/UCH_V4D_DF035/ UCH_V4F_DF035/UCH_V50_DF035

87B-94

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CHILD SAFETY CIRCUIT

DF072 PRESENT OR STORED

CC : Short circuit CO : Open circuit

CO CC

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on tracks A1 and B3 on the child safety lock switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track A3 of the child safety lock switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of PE1 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Child safety lock switch track B3

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector

Child safety lock switch track B1

Track 11 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF072/UCH_V4C_DF072/UCH_V4D_DF072/ UCH_V4F_DF072/UCH_V50_DF072

87B-95

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

RIGHT-HAND DOOR CHILD SAFETY LOCK CIRCUIT

DF073 PRESENT OR STORED

CC : Short circuit CO : Open circuit

CO CC

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on tracks A1 and B3 on the child safety lock switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track A3 of the child safety lock switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the UCH PE1 and PP2 connectors. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Child safety lock switch track B3

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector

Child safety lock switch track B1

Track 11 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector

Rear right-hand door locking motor 6-track black connector track B

Track 11 of the 12- track UCH PP2 connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF073/UCH_V4C_DF073/UCH_V4D_DF073/ UCH_V4F_DF073/UCH_V50_DF073

87B-96

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

LEFT-HAND DOOR CHILD SAFETY LOCK CIRCUIT

DF074 PRESENT OR STORED

CC : Short circuit CO : Open circuit

CO CC

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on tracks A1 and B3 on the child safety lock switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track A3 of the child safety lock switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the UCH PE1 and PP2 connectors. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Child safety lock switch track B3

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector

Child safety lock switch track B1

Track 11 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector

Rear left-hand door locking motor 6-track black connector track E

Track 11 of the 12- track UCH PP2 connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF074/UCH_V4C_DF074/UCH_V4D_DF074/ UCH_V4F_DF074/UCH_V50_DF074

87B-97

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF075 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

TIMED SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC : Short circuit

After unlocking, opening of a door causes time-delayed power supply, indicated by lighting of the starting switch and the instrument panel. Before any check on the UCH tracks, unlock the vehicle.

Check the condition and connection of the connectors on the UCH and the connectors on the PSU. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on tracks 3 and 10 of the 12-track UCH connector PP3. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 1 of the 12-track UCH PP3 connector. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_DF075/UCH_V4C_DF075/UCH_V4D_DF075/ UCH_V4F_DF075/UCH_V50_DF075

87B-98

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

MAIN COMPUTER STATUSES AND PARAMETERS Fault finding Computer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

See 87B, Passenger compartment connection unit

Battery voltage

9 < X < 16

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of parameter PR001

ET014:

Control power level

NONE ACCESSORIES TIMED AFTER-IGNITION FEED

None

ET087:

One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET087

ET098:

Trip Computer button

PRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET098

ET195:

UCH frequency (IN MHz)

315 433

None

ET205:

Type of UCH RF aerial

INTERNAL EXTERNAL

None

PR001:

UCH

Display and notes

UCH_V48_CCONF/UCH_V4C_CCONF/UCH_V4D_CCONF/ UCH_V4F_CCONF/UCH_V50_CCONF

87B-99

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Access Fault finding Computer

UCH

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

See 87B, Passenger compartment connection unit

PR013:

Number of cards programmed

1 2 3 4

None

ET195:

UCH frequency (in MHz)

315 433

None

ET205:

Type of UCH RF aerial

INTERNAL

None

ET045:

RF frame received

YES NO

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET045

ET066:

Card detected button

YES NO

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET066

ET067:

Card button press recognised

YES NO

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET067

ET054:

Optical sensors supplied

YES NO

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET054

ET055:

Front driver side optical sensor

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET055

ET056:

Rear driver side optical sensor

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET056

ET057:

Passenger side front/rear optical sensor

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET057

ET058:

Locking button. On driver's side handle

PRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET058

87B-100

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Access (continued 1) Fault finding Computer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

See 87B, Passenger compartment connection unit

ET059:

Locking button on passenger side handles

PRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET059

ET060:

Locking tailgate button

PRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET060

ET053:

Driver's door

OPEN CLOSED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET053

ET042:

Passenger door

OPEN CLOSED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET042

ET194:

Passenger's door or bonnet

OPEN CLOSED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET042

ET051:

Rear left-hand door

OPEN CLOSED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET051

ET052:

Rear right-hand door

OPEN CLOSED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET052

ET061:

Open tailgate request

PRESENT = Tailgate opening button pressed. ABSENT = Switch not pressed.

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET061

ET050:

Tailgate/Luggage compartment

OPEN CLOSED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET050

ET062:

Open rear screen request

ABSENT PRESENT

None

UCH

87B-101

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Access (continued 2) Fault finding Computer

UCH

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

See 87B, Passenger compartment connection unit

ET041:

Opening rear window

OPEN CLOSED

None

ET044:

Electric central doorlocking button

PRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET044

ET233:

Child safety switch

PRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET233

ET230:

Child safety

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of fault DF072

ET160:

Child safety Rear right-hand door

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET160

ET159:

Child safety Rear left-hand door

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET159

ET087:

One-touch electric window authorisation

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET087

87B-102

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Access (continued 3) Fault finding Computer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

ET068:

See 87B, Passenger compartment connection unit

Most recently locked by

AUTOMATIC = automatic relocking if there is no action on the opening elements within 2 minutes of unlocking. Electric central door locking = locking by pressing button on centre console HANDS-FREE = locking by pressing the door handle or tailgate switch RAID FUNCTION = Renault Anti-Intruder Device. Operates from approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). CARD = locking with card FAULT FINDING = Locking with actuator AC004 Opening element locking Central door locking LONG = locking by pressing and holding down centre console switch

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET068

Most recently unlocked by

HANDS-FREE = optical sensors Electric central door locking = electric central door locking button CARD = by card FAULT FINDING = AC005 by actuator IMPACT SIGNAL = following impact signal AIRBAG = unlocking by the airbag computer following an accident

If the status= Airbag, carry out fault finding on the Airbag computer (see 88C, Airbag and pretensioners). In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET069

UCH

ET069:

Display and notes

87B-103

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: KEYLESS VEHICLE Sub-function: Access (continued 4) Fault finding Computer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

See 87B, Passenger compartment connection unit

Source of deadlocking activation

CARD HANDS-FREE FAULT FINDING

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET088

ET090:

Deadlocking deactivation source

Central Door Locking Function CARD HANDS-FREE FAULT FINDING AFTER-IGNITION FEED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET090

ET043:

Renault AntiIntruder Device (RAID) via the central locking function

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET043

ET088:

UCH

87B-104

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: KEYLESS VEHICLE Sub-function: Protection Fault finding Computer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

See 87B, Passenger compartment connection unit

ET070:

Start button

PRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET070

ET008:

UCH blank

YES = If the UCH is blank. NO = If the UCH is programmed.

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET008

PR013:

Number of cards programmed

1 2 3 4

None

ET071:

Unprogrammed steering column lock

YES NO

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET071

ET119:

UCH request to steering column lock

LOCKING UNLOCKING

None

ET248:

Steering column lock immobiliser code

INCORRECT CORRECT

None

ET073:

Steering column lock sensor signal

FAULTY UNLOCKED UNDETERMINED SEMI-ACTIVATED SHORT CIRCUIT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET073

ET072:

Steering column lock

INCONSISTENT LOCKED UNLOCKED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET072

UCH

87B-105

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: KEYLESS VEHICLE Sub-function: Protection (continued) Fault finding Computer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

See 87B, Passenger compartment connection unit

ET014:

Control power level

NONE ACCESSORIES TIMED AFTER-IGNITION FEED

ET250:

Injection

PROGRAMMED BLANK

None

ET229:

Injection immobiliser code

INCORRECT CORRECT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET229

Engine immobiliser

INACTIVE = Vehicle unprotected, ready to start. ACTIVE = Vehicle protected, starting impossible.

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET046

UCH

ET046:

87B-106

None

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: KEYLESS VEHICLE Sub function: Starting

Computer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

ET070:

Start button

PRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET070

ET108:

Automatic gearbox lever position

NOT IN NEUTRAL P NEUTRAL REAR

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET108

ET048:

Clutch pedal position

DEPRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET048

ET047:

Brake pedal position

NOT FOUND RELEASED DEPRESSED INCONSISTENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET047

ET110:

UCH request to injection or PSU

ENGINE STOPPED INACTIVE AFTER-IGNITION STARTING

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET110

ET169:

Engine

STOPPED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET169

UCH

87B-107

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: AIR CONDITIONING Sub-function: User selection

Computer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

ET029:

ET028:

Display and notes

Fault finding

Air conditioning button

DEPRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET029

Heated rear screen button

PRESSED if the heated rear screen button on the air conditioning control panel is pressed. RELEASED otherwise

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET028

Passenger compartment blower

ACTIVE INACTIVE Note: this status is only operative for manual air conditioning systems (and heating versions without air conditioning).

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET015

UCH

ET015:

87B-108

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: AIR CONDITIONING Sub-function: Heating

Computer

UCH

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

PR001:

Battery voltage

9 < X < 16

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation PR001

PR002:

Exterior temperature

Temperature in °C

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation PR002

ET017:

Number of RCH required

0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET017

ET018:

Number of RCH authorised by alternator

0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET018

ET019:

Number of RCH authorised by injection computer

0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET019

ET015:

Passenger compartment blower

ACTIVE INACTIVE Note: this status is only operative for air conditioning systems (and heating versions without air conditioning).

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET015

ET020:

Number of passenger compartment heating resistors activated

0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET020

ET021:

Passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay control

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET021

ET022:

Passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay control

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET022

87B-109

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: AIR CONDITIONING Sub-function: Heating (continued)

Computer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

ET031:

Fast idle request for passenger compartment heating resistor

INACTIVE Fast idle speed to prevent battery discharge

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET031

ET169:

Engine

STOPPED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET169

ET025:

Retractable roof

CLOSED NOT CLOSED ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET025

ET026:

Heated rear screen command

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET026

UCH

87B-110

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: AIR CONDITIONING Sub-function: Cold Loop

Computer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

ET030:

Air conditioning request 2

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET030

ET169:

Engine

STOPPED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET169

ET015:

Passenger compartment blower

ACTIVE INACTIVE Note: this status is only operative for manual air conditioning systems (and heater versions without air conditioning).

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET015

PR002:

Exterior temperature

Temperature in °C

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of parameter PR002.

UCH

87B-111

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: TYRES Sub-function: Tyre approval

Computer

UCH

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

ET040:

Tyre pressure monitoring system

OUT OF USE ACTIVE

ET037:

Tyre pressure appropriate for the speed

YES NO

PR008:

Vehicle speed

In mph

ET036:

Tyre pressure imbalance

NONE FRONT REAR FRONT/REAR

ET045:

RF signal received

YES NO

ET032:

Front left-hand wheel valve signal

ET033:

Front right-hand wheel valve signal

ET034:

Rear right-hand wheel valve signal

ET035:

Rear left-hand wheel valve signal

PR003:

Front left-hand wheel pressure

In bar

PR019:

Front left-hand tyre temperature

In °C

PR004:

Front right-hand wheel pressure

In bar

OK ABSENT OVER-INFLATED PUNCTURED UNDER-INFLATED

87B-112

Fault finding See 35B, SSPP In the event of a fault, refer to Configuration and programming

Without (See 35B, SSPP)

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: TYRES Sub-function: Tyre approval (continued)

Computer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

PR020:

Front right-hand tyre temperature

In °C

PR005:

Rear right-hand wheel pressure

In bar

PR021:

Rear right-hand tyre temperature

In °C OK/ABSENT/OVERINFLATED/ PUNCTURED/UNDERINFLATED

UCH

PR006:

Rear left-hand wheel pressure

In bar

PR022:

Rear left-hand tyre temperature

In °C

87B-113

Fault finding See 35B, SSPP

Without (See 35B, SSPP)

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: TYRES Sub-function: Tyre management

Computer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

PR009:

Front wheel low speed recommended pressure

PR010:

Rear wheel low speed recommended pressure

PR012:

Front wheel high speed recommended pressure

PR011:

Rear wheel high speed recommended pressure

UCH PR014:

Left/right pressure difference threshold

PR015:

Low under-inflation threshold

PR059:

Puncture report threshold

PR017:

Cold over-inflation threshold

PR018:

Warm over-inflation threshold

87B-114

In bar

Fault finding See 35B, SSPP

Without (See 35B, SSPP)

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: TYRES Sub-function: Tyre display

Computer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

ET039:

STOP warning light on request

ACTIVE INACTIVE

ET016:

Buzzer activation request

INACTIVE STATUS 1 STATUS 2 INCONSISTENCY

UCH

87B-115

Fault finding See 35B, SSPP

Without (See 35B, SSPP)

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: LIGHTING Sub-function: Lighting command

Computer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET081

ET081:

Lighting switch position

PARK SIDE DIPPED MAIN FLASH

ET115:

Request to switch on lights by light sensor

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET115

ET169:

Engine

STOPPED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET169

ET113:

Automatic lighting button

DEPRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET113

ET111:

Front fog lights request

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET111

ET082:

Rear fog lights request

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET082

ET085:

Hazard warning lights button

PRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET085

ET083:

Left-hand direction indicator request

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of statuses ET083

ET084:

Right-hand direction indicator request

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of statuses ET084

UCH

87B-116

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: WIPING Sub function: Wiper control

Computer

UCH

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

PR008:

Vehicle speed

In mph

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of parameter PR008

ET077:

Wiper stalk position

PARK INTERMITTENT LOW SPEED HIGH SPEED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET077

ET096:

Wiper speed ring position

1 2 3 4

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET096

ET118:

Rain sensor sensitivity ring position

ET114:

Wiper request by rain sensor

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET114

ET078:

Windscreen washer request

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET078

ET080:

Rear screen wiper request

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET080

ET097:

Rear screen wiper park position

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET097

ET079:

Rear screen washer request

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET079

ET109:

Reverse gear engaged

YES NO

In the event of a fault, check the reverse gear switch and its connections

ET108:

Automatic gearbox lever position

NOT IN NEUTRAL P NEUTRAL REAR

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET108

87B-117

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: LIGHTING Sub-function: Lighting power

Computer

UCH

Parameter or Status checked or Action ET112:

Display and notes

Fault finding

ACTIVE INACTIVE

None

Interior lighting control

87B-118

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Status summary table

Tool status

87B

Diagnostic tool title

ET008

UCH blank

ET014

Control power level

ET015

Passenger compartment blower

ET016

Buzzer activation request

ET017

Number of RCH required

ET018

Number of RCH authorised by alternator

ET019

Number of RCH authorised by injection computer

ET020

Number of passenger compartment heating resistors activated

ET021

RCH control relay 1

ET022

RCH control relay 2

ET023

RCH 3 relay control

ET025

Retractable roof

ET026

Heated rear screen command

ET028

Heated rear screen button

ET029

Air conditioning button

ET030

Air conditioning request 2

ET031

Fast idle request for passenger compartment heating resistor

ET032

Front left-hand wheel valve signal

ET033

Front right-hand wheel valve signal

ET034

Rear right-hand wheel valve signal

ET035

Rear left-hand wheel valve signal

ET036

Tyre pressure imbalance

ET037

Tyre pressure appropriate for the speed

ET038

Service warning light on request

ET039

STOP warning light on request

ET040

Tyre pressure monitoring system

ET041

Opening rear window

ET042

Passenger door

87B-119

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Status summary table

Tool status

87B

Diagnostic tool title

ET043

RAID function authorisation by central locking button

ET044

Electric central door locking button

ET045

RF frame received

ET046

Engine immobiliser

ET047

Brake pedal position

ET048

Clutch pedal position

ET050

Tailgate/Luggage compartment

ET051

Rear left-hand door

ET052

Rear right-hand door

ET053

Driver's door

ET054

Optical sensors supplied

ET055

Front driver side optical sensor

ET056

Rear driver side optical sensor

ET057

Passenger side front/rear optical sensor

ET058

Locking button on handles, driver's side

ET059

Locking buttons on handles, passenger side

ET060

Locking tailgate button

ET061

Open tailgate request

ET062

Open rear screen request

ET066

Card detected button

ET067

Card button press recognised

ET068

Most recently locked by

ET069

Most recently unlocked by

ET070

Start button

ET071

Unprogrammed Steering column lock

ET072

Steering column lock

ET073

Steering column lock sensor signal

ET075

+ Accessories present

87B-120

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Status summary table

Tool status

87B

Diagnostic tool title

ET077

Wiper stalk position

ET078

Windscreen washer request

ET079

Rear screen washer request

ET080

Rear screen wiper request

ET081

Lighting switch position

ET082

Rear fog lights request

ET083

Left-hand direction indicator request

ET084

Right-hand direction indicator request

ET085

Hazard warning lights button

ET087

One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation

ET088

Deadlocking activation source

ET090

Deadlocking deactivation source

ET096

Wiper speed ring position

ET097

Rear screen wiper park position

ET098

Trip Computer button

ET108

Automatic gearbox selector lever position

ET109

Reverse gear engaged

ET110

UCH request to injection or PSU

ET111

Front fog lights request

ET112

Interior lighting control

ET113

Automatic lighting button

ET114

Wiping request via rain sensor

ET115

Request to switch on lights by light sensor

ET116

Card code received

ET117

Card code valid

ET118

Rain sensor sensitivity ring position

ET119

UCH request to steering column lock

87B-121

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Status summary table

Tool status

87B

Diagnostic tool title

ET159

Rear left-hand door child safety lock

ET160

Rear right-hand door child safety lock

ET169

Engine

ET194

Passenger's door or bonnet

ET195

UCH frequency (in MHz)

ET205

Type of UCH RF aerial

ET229

Injection immobiliser code

ET230

Child safety

ET233

Child safety switch

ET248

Steering column lock immobiliser code

ET250

Injection

87B-122

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

UCH BLANK ET008

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET008 is YES. Refer to the configuration and programming section in order to perform: – programming and configuration of the UCH, – programming or reallocation of the cards. ET008 is NO. Programmed UCH.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET008/UCH_V4C_ET008/UCH_V4D_ET008/ UCH_V4F_ET008/UCH_V50_ET008

87B-123

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CONTROL POWER LEVEL ET014

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Special note: This status displays the power level.

NONE, no power supply. + ACCESSORIES feed, when the start switch is pressed. TIMED, when a door is opened. + AFTER IGNITION FEED when starting or on forced + after ignition feed. In the event of an inconsistency, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET014/UCH_V4C_ET014/UCH_V4D_ET014/ UCH_V4F_ET014/UCH_V50_ET014

87B-124

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT BLOWER ET015

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Apply to manual air conditioning and heating systems.

ET015 Inactive position on the air conditioning control panel different from 0. Check the condition and connection of the 8-track air conditioning control panel black connector (bent, broken tabs, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 8-track control panel connector Track 7

Track 30 of the PE2 40-track UCH grey connector

8-track control panel connector Track 1

Track 32 of the PE2 40-track UCH grey connector

Repair if necessary. Check the control panel (see 62C, Manual air conditioning). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET015/UCH_V4C_ET015/UCH_V4D_ET015/ UCH_V4F_ET015/UCH_V50_ET015

87B-125

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

BUZZER ACTIVATION REQUEST ET016

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: Status ET016 is STATUS 1 or STATUS 2 if the SSPP buzzer is activated. A tyre is punctured or there is a severe under-inflation.

ET016 is STATUS 1 Request for activation of the buzzer linked to display of a puncture warning message on the instrument panel. Adjust the pressures of the four tyres to the recommended pressures. Repair or replace the tyre if necessary. ET016 is STATUS 2 Request for buzzer activation to warn the driver that the vehicle speed is too high when the vehicle has one or more punctured tyres. This information is only valid on vehicles fitted with PAX System tyres. Adjust the pressures of the four tyres to the recommended pressures. Repair or replace the tyre if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET016/UCH_V4C_ET016/UCH_V4D_ET016/ UCH_V4F_ET016/UCH_V50_ET016

87B-126

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

NUMBER OF RCHs REQUIRED ET017

There must be no present or stored faults. The status, depending on the conditions, will be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.

NOTES

Special note: Manual air conditioning Defined by the UCH according to the engine coolant temperature, the exterior temperature and electrical availability. Climate control Defined by the UCH according to the engine coolant temperature, the exterior temperature, electrical availability, the interior temperature and the user's request.

The passenger compartment heating resistor control conditions are: Manual air conditioning: ET169 Engine is Running, ET015 Passenger compartment blower is Active, PR002: Exterior temperature < 5 °C, engine coolant temperature < 50 °C (refer to injection computer), electrical availability - 60 %, alternator load < 70 % (refer to the Power and Switching Unit). Climate control: ET169 Engine is Running, PR002: Exterior temperature < 5 °C, Engine coolant temperature < 50 °C (refer to injection computer) Electrical availability - 60 %, alternator load < 70 % (refer to the Power and Switching Unit). Heat demand by the user (refer to the climate control computer). Check the consistency of these statuses and parameters. In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of these statuses and parameters.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET017/UCH_V4C_ET017/UCH_V4D_ET017/ UCH_V4F_ET017/UCH_V50_ET017

87B-127

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET018

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

NUMBER OF PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTORS AUTHORISED BY ALTERNATOR

There must be no present or stored faults.

NOTES

Special note: This information is usable only on vehicles fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors. Calculation performed by the UCH according to the alternator power available (information supplied by the PSU). This information allows the number of passenger compartment heating resistors to be supplied depending on the available power. The status, depending on the conditions, will be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.

In the event of a fault, perform fault finding on the PSU (see 87G, Engine compartment connection unit). Parameter PR010 of the alternator load PSU should be less than 70 % so that the passenger compartment heating resistors can be authorised by the alternator. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET018/UCH_V4C_ET018/UCH_V4D_ET018/ UCH_V4F_ET018/UCH_V50_ET018

87B-128

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET019

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

NUMBER OF PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTORS AUTHORISED BY THE INJECTION

There must be no present or stored faults.

NOTES

Special note: Calculation performed by the UCH depending on the maximum power authorised by the injection computer. This information allows the number of passenger compartment heating resistors to be supplied depending on the engine load. The status, depending on the conditions, will be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.

In the event of a fault, run fault finding on the injection system (see 13B, Diesel injection or 17B, Petrol injection). Conditions for authorisation of passenger compartment heating resistor by the injection: – injection system status ET111 Fixed number of RCHs should be NO – injection system status ET112 RCH cut-off should be NO If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET019/UCH_V4C_ET019/UCH_V4D_ET019/ UCH_V4F_ET019/UCH_V50_ET019

87B-129

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET020

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

NUMBER OF PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTORS CONTROLLED

There must be no present or stored faults. The maximum number of passenger compartment heating resistors controlled will be the maximum number indicated by statuses ET017, ET018, ET019. NOTES

Special note: The UCH controls the passenger compartment heating resistor relays according to the authorisation from the injection computers and Protection and Switching Unit. The status, depending on the conditions, will be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.

The passenger compartment heating resistor control conditions are: – Engine running, – Battery voltage > 12 V, – Interior temperature < 10 °C, – User temperature setpoint in warm position (> 20 °C), – PR002 Exterior temperature < 5 °C, – ET015 Passenger compartment blower ACTIVE, – ET018 Number of RCHs authorised by alternator > 0, – ET019 Number of RCHs authorised by injection computer > 0, – PR010 (PSU) Alternator charge < 70 %. If all the conditions are satisfied, and depending on the air conditioning function program, the UCH controls the Passenger Compartment Heating Resistors needed to provide the service. Check that these statuses and parameters are working properly. In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of these statuses and parameters.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET020/UCH_V4C_ET020/UCH_V4D_ET020/ UCH_V4F_ET020/UCH_V50_ET020

87B-130

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET021 ET022 ET023

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

RCH RELAY CONTROL 1 RCH RELAY CONTROL 2 RCH RELAY CONTROL 3

There must be no present or stored faults. For statuses ET021 and ET022, the signal is interpretable if the vehicle is configured with RCH 1000 W or RCH 1800 W. For status ET023, the signal is interpretable if the vehicle is configured with RCH 1800 W.

In the event of a fault, check the operation of statuses ET015 Passenger compartment blower, ET017 Number of heating resistors required, ET018 Number of heating resistors authorised by alternator, ET019 Number of heating resistors authorised by injection computer and ET020 Number of heating resistors controlled. Carry out fault finding on commands AC016 RCH relay 1, AC017 RCH relay 2 and AC018 RCH relay 3. Check the parameters needed to switch on the Passenger Compartment Heating Resistors; exterior temperature, interior temperature, temperature setpoint on the heater control panel, alternator load, battery voltage. If all the requisite conditions are consistent and the status remains INACTIVE, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET021/UCH_V4C_ET021/UCH_V4D_ET021/UCH_V4F_ET021/UCH_V50_ET021/ UCH_V48_ET022/UCH_V4C_ET022/UCH_V4D_ET022/UCH_V4F_ET022/UCH_V50_ET022/ UCH_V48_ET023/UCH_V4C_ET023/UCH_V4D_ET023/UCH_V4F_ET023/UCH_V50_ET023

87B-131

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

RETRACTABLE ROOF ET025

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. If the vehicle is a cabriolet, status ET025 is CLOSED or NOT CLOSED. If the vehicle is not a cabriolet, status ET025 will be ABSENT.

ET025 is CLOSED The retractable roof of the cabriolet vehicle is closed. In case of inconsistency, contact the Techline. ET025 is NOT CLOSED The retractable roof of the vehicle is not closed. In case of inconsistency, contact the Techline. ET025 is ABSENT The position of the retractable roof is unknown. In case of inconsistency, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET025/UCH_V4C_ET025/UCH_V4D_ET025/ UCH_V4F_ET025/UCH_V50_ET025

87B-132

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

HEATED REAR SCREEN CONTROL ET026

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: Operation of the heated rear screen requires the engine status to be Running.

ET026 Inactive despite a rear de-icing request by the user. Manual air conditioning

Verify that status ET142 Engine operating phase is Running; otherwise, carry out fault finding on the injection system. Verify that status ET028 Heated rear screen switch is PRESSED, otherwise refer to interpretation of this status. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Climate control

Verify that status ET142 Engine operating phase is Running; otherwise, carry out fault finding on the injection system. If the fault is still present, perform a fault finding procedure on the air conditioning computer. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET026/UCH_V4C_ET026/UCH_V4D_ET026/ UCH_V4F_ET026/UCH_V50_ET026

87B-133

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

HEATED REAR SCREEN SWITCH ET028

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: Information interpretable if the vehicle is configured with Heating or Manual Air Conditioning (SC008 UCH type and CF019 Type of air conditioning).

ET028 Released with press on the button. ET028 Pressed without press on the button. Check the condition and connection of the 8-track air conditioning control panel black connector (bent, broken tabs, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 40-track UCH black connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Air conditioning control panel 8-track black connector on track 3

track 24 of the UCH 40-track PE2 black connector

Repair if necessary. Check the control panel (see 62C, Manual air conditioning). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET028/UCH_V4C_ET028/UCH_V4D_ET028/ UCH_V4F_ET028/UCH_V50_ET028

87B-134

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH ET029

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: Information interpretable if the vehicle is configured with Manual Air Conditioning (SC008 UCH type and CF019 Type of air conditioning).

Check the condition and connection of the 8-track air conditioning control panel black connector (bent, broken tabs, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 40-track UCH black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Climate control panel 8-track black connector on track 7

Track 30 of the PE2 40-track UCH black connector

Repair if necessary. Check the control panel (see 62C, Manual air conditioning). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET029/UCH_V4C_ET029/UCH_V4D_ET029/ UCH_V4F_ET029/UCH_V50_ET029

87B-135

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AIR CONDITIONING REQUEST 2 ET030

There must be no present or stored faults. The engine must be running.

NOTES

Special note: This is the request for air conditioning sent by the UCH to the injection computer. This request may reach the UCH in two ways: – In the case of a vehicle fitted with manual air conditioning, by pressing on the air conditioning button. – In the case of a vehicle fitted with climate control, by request from the user or the climate control computer in automatic mode.

ET030 Inactive despite a climate control request. Manual Air Conditioning

Verify that status ET169 Engine is Running. If it is not, carry out a diagnostic of the injection system. Verify that status ET029 Air conditioning button is PRESSED by pressing the button. If status ET029 is RELEASED carry out fault finding on this status. Verify that status ET015 Passenger compartment ventilation is ACTIVE. If status ET015 is INACTIVE carry out fault finding of this status. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Climate control

Carry out fault finding on the climate control computer (see 62C, Climate control). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET030/UCH_V4C_ET030/UCH_V4D_ET030/ UCH_V4F_ET030/UCH_V50_ET030

87B-136

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

FAST IDLE SPEED REQUEST FOR HEATING RESISTOR ET031

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET031 Inactive with engine at idling speed with the passenger compartment heating resistors switched on. In case of inconsistency, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET031/UCH_V4C_ET031/UCH_V4D_ET031/ UCH_V4F_ET031/UCH_V50_ET031

87B-137

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

PASSENGER DOOR ET042

NOTES

There must be no faults present.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the passenger door lock (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Passenger lock black 4-track Track 1

Track 15 of the UCH 40-track PE1 connector.

Repair if necessary. Check: The continuity of the lock switch on tracks 2 and 1 in the rest position. The insulation of the lock switch on tracks 2 and 1 in the engaged position. Replace the lock if it is not correct. In case of inconsistency, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET042/UCH_V4C_ET042/UCH_V4D_ET042/ UCH_V4F_ET042/UCH_V50_ET042

87B-138

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET043

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

RAID FUNCTION AUTHORISED THROUGH CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check that the UCH is configured with Locking when driving. Press the vehicle lock button for more than 5 seconds with the after ignition feed to activate automatic locking (the locking when driving status is active). Press the vehicle unlocking button for more than 5 seconds under after ignition to deactivate the RAID function (the RAID status is active). Press the vehicle lock button for more than 5 seconds without the after ignition feed to lock the vehicle (specification for Spain).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET043/UCH_V4C_ET043/UCH_V4D_ET043/ UCH_V4F_ET043/UCH_V50_ET043

87B-139

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING BUTTON ET044

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 8-track grey connector of the Central Door Locking switch (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Electric central locking 8-track switch Track 5

Track 6 of the UCH 40-track PE1 connector

Central door locking 8-track switch Track 6

Track 14 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector

Repair if necessary. Check continuity of the 8-track connector track 1 and the vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Check: The continuity of the switch on tracks 5 and 2 (switch pressed). The insulation of the switch on tracks 5 and 2 (switch OFF). Replace the switch if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET044/UCH_V4C_ET044/UCH_V4D_ET044/ UCH_V4F_ET044/UCH_V50_ET044

87B-140

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

RF FRAME RECEIVED ET045

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: This status is used for the Unlocking/Locking and hands-free starting functions. This status simply makes it possible to check the condition of the UCH internal receiver aerial.

ET045 NO on pressing one of the card buttons. Check with the vehicle's second card. If the status changes to YES, check status ET066 Card button press received. If the status remains NO, perform a test with a card belonging to another vehicle. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET045/UCH_V4C_ET045/UCH_V4D_ET045/ UCH_V4F_ET045/UCH_V50_ET045

87B-141

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ENGINE IMMOBILISER ET046

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Power supply level required + after ignition.

ET046 Active with starting request but no after ignition present. 1 Insert the card into the reader. 2 Check if the card is allocated to the vehicle with command SC006 Card allocation. 3 Check status ET070 Start switch; it should be pressed in the event of the button being pressed; if it is released, perform fault finding on this status. 4 Check that status ET071 Unprogrammed steering column lock is NO, if it is YES, run fault finding on this status. Check that status ET072 Steering column lock is unlocked; if locked, run fault finding on this status. Verify status ET073 Steering column lock sensor signal, if locked perform fault finding on this status. 5 Check to see if status ET110 UCH request to injection system or Protection and Switching Unit is + after ignition. 6 Check that there is no fault on the after ignition relay; this relay is located in the Protection and Switching Unit. 7 If these statuses are okay, contact Techline. ET046 Active power supply level after forced ignition present. Check and repair if necessary: Status of engine immobiliser in the injection system; if ACTIVE, check the injection computer. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET046/UCH_V4C_ET046/UCH_V4D_ET046/ UCH_V4F_ET046/UCH_V50_ET046

87B-142

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION ET047

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. The accessories relay must operate. During pedal travel, it is possible to note an inconsistency. This treatment applies only in cases in which the status is inconsistency or undetermined, with foot hard down on the accelerator or completely released from the brake pedal. Special note: Switch on forced after ignition.

Status 047 Inconsistency when pressing on the pedal. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation between tracks 3 and 4 of the brake pedal switch, with the pedal depressed. Replace the switch if faulty. Check the condition and connection of the UCH PE2 connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation against + 12 V of the connection between track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector and track 36 of the PE2 connector of the UCH. The line is shared with the injection computer and, if fitted, the automatic gearbox computer. In the event of faulty insulation, it is therefore necessary, using a wiring diagram, to check the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these computers. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET047/UCH_V4C_ET047/UCH_V4D_ET047/ UCH_V4F_ET047/UCH_V50_ET047

87B-143

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET047 CONTINUED 1

Status 047 Undetermined without depressing on the pedal. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake switch. Repair if necessary. Check for 12 V on track 4 of the brake pedal switch connector. If not correct: – Check the condition and connection UCH connector PP3. – Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between the brake pedal switch connector track 4 and track 3 of the UCH connector PP3. Repair if necessary. Contact your Techline, if still faulty. Check the continuity of the connection between track 3 and track 4 of the brake switch in OFF position. Replace the switch if faulty. Check the condition and connection of the UCH PE2 connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: UCH PE2 connector Track 36

Track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector

Repair if necessary. The line is shared with the injection computer and, if fitted, the automatic gearbox computer. In the event of faulty insulation, it is therefore necessary, using a wiring diagram, to check the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these computers.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-144

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET047 CONTINUED 2

Status 047 Inconsistency without depressing the pedal. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the brake pedal switch, with the pedal released. Replace the switch if faulty. Check the condition and connection of the UCH PE2 connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation to + 12 V of the connection between track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector and track 27 of the UCH PE2 connector. The line is shared with the ABS computer or the electronic stability program (ESP) relay (depending on equipment) and the brake lights. It is therefore necessary, in case of faulty insulation, to check, using a wiring diagram, the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these components. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-145

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET047 CONTINUED 3

Status 047 Undetermined with the pedal depressed. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake switch. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of 12 V on track 2 of the brake pedal switch connector. If not correct: – Check the condition and connection of fuse 1H in the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. – Check the condition and connection of the 18-track connector of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. – Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between the brake pedal switch connector track 4 and track 1H of the 18-track connector of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. Repair if necessary. Contact your Techline, if still faulty. Check the continuity of the connection between track 1 and track 2 of the brake switch in depressed position. Replace the switch if faulty. Check the condition and connection of the UCH PE2 connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: UCH PE2 connector Track 27

Track 1 of the brake pedal switch connector

Repair if necessary. Note: The line is shared with the ABS computer or the ESP relay (depending on equipment) and the brake lights. In the event of faulty insulation, it is therefore necessary, using a wiring diagram, to check the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these components.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-146

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION ET048

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: Switch on forced after ignition.

Status 048 Released with the pedal depressed.

Check the condition and connection of the clutch pedal switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 2 of the clutch pedal switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the clutch pedal switch in the pedal depressed position. If faulty, replace the clutch pedal switch. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Clutch switch on track 1

Track 5 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET048/UCH_V4C_ET048/UCH_V4D_ET048/ UCH_V4F_ET048/UCH_V50_ET048

87B-147

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET048 CONTINUED

Status 048 Depressed without depressing the pedal.

Check the condition and connection of the clutch pedal switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the clutch pedal switch in the pedal released position. If faulty, replace the clutch pedal switch. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Clutch switch on track 1

Track 5 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-148

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

TAILGATE/BOOT ET050

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the white 4-track connector of the tailgate lock (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Tailgate lock 4-track white connector track 3

Track 8 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH

Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in OFF position. The continuity of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in ON position. Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET050/UCH_V4C_ET050/UCH_V4D_ET050/ UCH_V4F_ET050/UCH_V50_ET050

87B-149

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REAR LEFT-HAND DOOR ET051

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track white connector of the rear left-hand door lock (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Rear left-hand 6-track lock track 4

Track 19 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH

Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 6 and 4 (door open). The continuity of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 6 and 4 (door closed). Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET051/UCH_V4C_ET051/UCH_V4D_ET051/ UCH_V4F_ET051/UCH_V50_ET051

87B-150

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REAR RIGHT-HAND DOOR ET052

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the rear left-hand door lock (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Rear right-hand 6-track lock track 3

Track 16 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 1 and 3 (door open). The continuity of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 1 and 3 (door closed). Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET052/UCH_V4C_ET052/UCH_V4D_ET052/ UCH_V4F_ET052/UCH_V50_ET052

87B-151

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

DRIVER'S DOOR ET053

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the rear left-hand door lock (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Rear right-hand 6-track lock track 4

Track 17 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH

Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 4 and 3 (door open). The continuity of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 4 and 3 (door closed). Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET053/UCH_V4C_ET053/UCH_V4D_ET053/ UCH_V4F_ET053/UCH_V50_ET053

87B-152

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

OPTICAL SENSOR POWERED ET054

NOTES

After 72 hours without an attempt to open the vehicle, the UCH cuts out the optical sensors' power supply. To restore the power supply to the optical sensors, pull the handle to wake-up the UCH.

The vehicle has been immobilised for fewer than 72 hours: Check that the UCH is in hands-free configuration by means of LC001 Hands-free function configuration reading. If everything is correct, contact the Techline.

The vehicle is immobilised after more than 72 hours: Check the insulation against 12 V of the following track (door handle pulled): track 23 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH, Verify the presence of earth on track 23 of the 40-track PE connector of the UCH by pulling a handle. Is it present?

YES Contact the Techline.

NO

Check the continuity between track 23 of the 40-track PE3 connector and track 2 of the black 3-track connector of the optical sensor. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on track 3 of the connector, and repair if necessary. Check for continuity of the handle pulled switch on tracks 1 and 2, and if there is insulation change the handle. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET054/UCH_V4C_ET054/UCH_V4D_ET054/ UCH_V4F_ET054/UCH_V50_ET054

87B-153

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET055 ET056 ET057

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

DRIVER'S SIDE FRONT OPTICAL SENSOR DRIVER'S SIDE REAR OPTICAL SENSOR PASSENGER SIDE FRONT/REAR OPTICAL SENSORS

There must be no present or stored faults. Switch the ignition on, then switch it off.

Check that the status ET054 Optical sensor supplied is YES. Place your hand behind the door handle; make sure the corresponding status is active. If the status is inactive, lock the vehicle and pull the handle. Is the status ACTIVE?

YES

NO

Check the condition of the reflective surface inside the handle (frost, dirt). Check the condition of the optical sensor. If necessary, replace the sensor.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver side front sensor track 3 Passenger side front sensor track 3 Passenger and driver's rear sensors track 3

Track 3 of the UCH PE3 40-track grey connector

Driver's side front sensor track 1

Track 21 of the UCH 40-track PE3 grey connector

Passenger side front sensor track 1

Track 23 of the UCH 40-track PE3 grey connector

Rear right-hand sensor track 1

Track 23 of the UCH 40-track PE3 grey connector

Rear left-hand sensor track 1

Track 22 of the UCH 40-track PE3 grey connector

Sensors track 2

Earth

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET055/UCH_V4C_ET055/UCH_V4D_ET055/UCH_V4F_ET055/UCH_V50_ET055/ UCH_V48_ET056/UCH_V4C_ET056/UCH_V4D_ET056/UCH_V4F_ET056/UCH_V50_ET056/ UCH_V48_ET057/UCH_V4C_ET057/UCH_V4D_ET057/UCH_V4F_ET057/UCH_V50_ET057

87B-154

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET058 ET059

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

LOCKING BUTTON ON DRIVER'S SIDE HANDLES LOCKING BUTTONS ON PASSENGER SIDE HANDLES

There must be no faults present.

Check the condition and connection of the 9-track blue connector of the door (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 4 of the door handle. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch on the driver's side door handles on track 3

Track 30 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH

Switch on the passenger side door handles on track 3

Track 6 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector

Switch on the door handles on track 4

Earth

Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation between tracks 3 and 4 of the handle (Released position) The continuity between tracks 3 and 4 of the handle (Pressed position) Replace the handle if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET058/UCH_V4C_ET058/UCH_V4D_ET058/UCH_V4F_ET059/UCH_V50_ET058/ UCH_V48_ET059/UCH_V4C_ET059/UCH_V4D_ET059/UCH_V4F_ET059/UCH_V50_ET059

87B-155

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

LOCKING BUTTON ON TAILGATE ET060

NOTES

There must be no faults present.

Check the condition and connection of the transparent 2-track connector of the tailgate locking button (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 2 of the tailgate locking button. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Tailgate locking button on track 1

Track 4 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH

Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the tailgate button (Released position). The continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the tailgate button (Pressed position). Replace the switch if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET060/UCH_V4C_ET060/UCH_V4D_ET060/ UCH_V4F_ET060/UCH_V50_ET060

87B-156

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

TAILGATE OPENING REQUEST ET061

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET061 Absent when the button is pressed.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 5 of the 40-track PE3 connector with the button pressed. Is earth present?

YES

NO

AFTER REPAIR

Contact the Techline.

Check the condition and connection of the switch's 2-track connector. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on track 2 of the switch's 2-track connector. Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2 (with the button pressed). If insulated, replace the switch. Check for continuity between the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH track 5 and track 2 of the tailgate opening switch 2-track connector. Repair if necessary.

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET061/UCH_V4C_ET061/UCH_V4D_ET061/ UCH_V4F_ET061/UCH_V50_ET061

87B-157

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET061 CONTINUED

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET061 Present when there is no request on the button.

Check for insulation against earth on track 5 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check for insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If there is continuity, replace the switch. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-158

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CARD BUTTON PRESS RECEIVED ET066

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. The status is declared as YES when one of the buttons is pressed.

ET066: NO despite pressing one of the buttons on the card.

Try pressing a button on a different card (card for the vehicle or another vehicle). If the status changes to YES, check the condition of the battery of the card in question. Replace it if necessary. If the status remains NO, check that there is no radio frequency interference in the area surrounding the vehicle. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET066/UCH_V4C_ET066/UCH_V4D_ET066/ UCH_V4F_ET066/UCH_V50_ET066

87B-159

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CARD BUTTON PRESS RECOGNISED ET067

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. The status is declared as YES when one of the buttons is pressed.

ET067: NO despite pressing one of the buttons on the card.

Resynchronise the cards by activating forced after ignition with the card in the card reader. If the fault is still present and ET066 Card button press received is YES, program the cards. If ET066 Card button press received is NO, check the condition of the card battery. Replace it if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET067/UCH_V4C_ET067/UCH_V4D_ET067/ UCH_V4F_ET067/UCH_V50_ET067

87B-160

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

SOURCE OF LAST LOCK ET068

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Indicates which mode is the source of the last locking or unlocking operation. AUTOMATIC: the UCH orders locking if the opening of a door or a hands-free or card unlocking request is not detected within 30 seconds after unlocking. Central door locking: the UCH orders locking of the whole vehicle following a press on the electric central door locking button. HANDS-FREE: detection of a close request by pressing of button in the handles or tailgate badge. RAID FUNCTION: the UCH controls locking according to the speed signal from the vehicle. RENAULT CARD: detection upon a button press. FAULT FINDING: Action requested by the Clip tool using the AC004 Opening element locking command.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET068/UCH_V4C_ET068/UCH_V4D_ET068/ UCH_V4F_ET068/UCH_V50_ET068

87B-161

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

SOURCE OF LAST UNLOCK ET069

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Makes it possible to know what mode is the source of the last unlocking operation. HANDS-FREE: detection of a hand in the handle. Central door locking: the UCH orders unlocking of the whole vehicle following a press on the electric central door locking button. RENAULT CARD: detection on button press. FAULT FINDING: Action requested by the Clip tool using the AC005 Opening element unlocking command IMPACT INFORMATION: following an impact signal detected. AIRBAG: following an impact signal detected.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET069/UCH_V4C_ET069/UCH_V4D_ET069/ UCH_V4F_ET069/UCH_V50_ET069

87B-162

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

START BUTTON ET070

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the engine ON/OFF button (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 2 of the ON/OFF button connector. Repair if necessary. Check: The continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the On/Off button in the Pressed position The insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the On/Off button in the Released position Replace the switch if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 white connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: On/Off control button on track 1

track 7 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH

On-off control button on track 4

track 13 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET070/UCH_V4C_ET070/UCH_V4D_ET070/ UCH_V4F_ET070/UCH_V50_ET070

87B-163

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

STEERING COLUMN LOCK BLANK ET071

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

If the steering column lock status remains YES, try to start the vehicle again. If the fault persists, verify that the card has been authenticated by the UCH. Check that when pressing on the disengaged clutch pedal or on the brake pedal or the ON/OFF button that the UCH issues an unlock signal (if the steering is locked). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET071/UCH_V4C_ET071/UCH_V4D_ET071/ UCH_V4F_ET071/UCH_V50_ET071

87B-164

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

STEERING COLUMN LOCK ET072

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

If the status is at INCONSISTENCY, refer to processing of the DF029 Steering column lock circuit fault.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET072/UCH_V4C_ET072/UCH_V4D_ET072/ UCH_V4F_ET072/UCH_V50_ET072

87B-165

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

STEERING COLUMN LOCK SENSOR SIGNAL ET073

There must be no present or stored faults. The status should be unlocked with after ignition feed present or semi activated to + accessories. NOTES Special note: Perform locking/unlocking. Check the power supply to the lock for 5 min after the locking-unlocking operation.

ET073 Faulty when the steering column is not unlocked. ET073 Short circuit when the steering column is not unlocked.

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering column lock (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black PE2 40-track connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the power supply on track 2 of the 6-track connector of the steering column lock. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity between vehicle track 1 of the 6-track connector of the steering column lock and the vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column lock on track 3

Track 10 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH

Steering column lock track 6

Track 20 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH

Steering column lock track 4

Track 1 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET073/UCH_V4C_ET073/UCH_V4D_ET073/ UCH_V4F_ET073/UCH_V50_ET073

87B-166

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET073 CONTINUED

ET073 Unlocked and + after ignition absent.

The status remains UNLOCKED, with the ignition off, in case of failure of the airbag system or the speed signal. If everything is OK, see dealing with fault DF029 Steering column lock circuit.

ET073 Semi-activated and + after ignition present.

In the semi-activated status, the lock bolt is pulled out, but the UCH cannot determine its position precisely. In case of inconsistency, contact the Techline.

ET073 Undetermined.

The status is UNDETERMINED in the event that neither the lock nor the lock sensor can inform the UCH regarding its position. Refer to processing of the DF029 Steering column lock circuit fault.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-167

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

+ ACCESSORIES PRESENT ET075

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: Check satisfactory operation of the start switch: ET070 Start button.

ET075 is YES but + accessories is absent.

Check the power-supply fuses. Check the + 12 V feed on track E1 and E17 of the passenger compartment fuse box and relay 1 (left-hand side of the centre console). Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track A2 of the fuse box by pressing the button. Is earth present?

YES

Check + 12 V before ignition feed on track A3 of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. Check on track A4 of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box for a + 12 V by pressing the start switch. If there is no 12 V, replace the relay. If there is 12 V, check the wiring harness.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET075/UCH_V4C_ET075/UCH_V4D_ET075/ UCH_V4F_ET075/UCH_V50_ET075

87B-168

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET075 CONTINUED

ET075 is NO but + accessories is present.

NO

Check at UCH output for 12 V on track 34 of the 40-track PE2 connector If NO, contact the Techline. If YES, check the continuity of the following connection: Track 34 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH

Track A2 the of passenger compartment fuse and relay box

Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-169

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WIPER STALK POSITION ET077

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

In the event of an inconsistency, check the steering column switch connectors. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: UCH PE2 black connector track 4

Track 2 15-track black connector of the steering column control

UCH PE2 black connector track 11

Track 14 15-track black connector of the steering column control

UCH black PE2 connector track 2

Track 9 15-track black connector of the steering column control

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET077/UCH_V4C_ET077/UCH_V4D_ET077/ UCH_V4F_ET077/UCH_V50_ET077

87B-170

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET078 ET079

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WINDSCREEN WASHER REQUEST REAR SCREEN WASHER REQUEST

There must be no faults present.

ET078 Absent when the control stalk is pressed. ET079 Absent when the control stalk is pressed.

Check the steering column control 6-track black connector. E.g. connector poorly connected, tabs bent, broken. Repair if necessary. Check the UCH 40-track PE1 connector. E.g. connector poorly connected, tabs bent, broken. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on track 6 of the steering column control connector. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control on track 1

Track 12 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector (front)

Steering column control on track 2

Track 28 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (rear)

Control earth on track 5

Vehicle earth

Repair if necessary. Check the steering column control black connector. Tracks 1 and 6, front windscreen washer control on, if insulated, change the control. Tracks 2 and 6, rear windscreen washer control on; if insulated, change the control. If continuity, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET078/UCH_V4C_ET078/UCH_V4D_ET078/UCH_V4F_ET078/UCH_V50_ET078/ UCH_V48_ET079/UCH_V4C_ET079/UCH_V4D_ET079/UCH_V4F_ET079/UCH_V50_ET079

87B-171

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REAR SCREEN WIPER REQUEST ET080

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET080 Rear screen wiper is Absent with stalk in 'rear screen wipe requested' position.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET082 Rear fog lights request: Set the lighting stalk to rear fog lights. ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the front wiper stalk to high speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET082 Rear fog lights request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET077 Wiper stalk position at high speed

High speed

Low speed

Low speed

High speed See ALP 10

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET080/UCH_V4C_ET080/UCH_V4D_ET080/ UCH_V4F_ET080/UCH_V50_ET080

87B-172

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET080 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 2

Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 9

Track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 9

Track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 2

Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-173

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

LIGHTING STALK POSITION ET081

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET081 Lighting stalk position is Dipped with stalk position on Off.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request: Place the control stalk in the right-hand direction indicator position. ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: Place the speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position 1

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET081/UCH_V4C_ET081/UCH_V4D_ET081/ UCH_V4F_ET081/UCH_V50_ET081

87B-174

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 3

Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 3

Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-175

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 2

ET081 "Lighting stalk position" is "Dipped" with stalk position on Side lights requested.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET080 Rear screen wiper request: Set control stalk to rear screen wiper. ET096 "Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent wipe speed ring position": Place the speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET080 "Rear screen wiper request"

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET096 Rear screen wiper speed ring position

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-176

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 3

Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 9

Track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 9

Track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 3

Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-177

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 4

ET081 "Lighting stalk position" is "Dipped" with stalk position on Main beam requested.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET098 Trip Computer button: Press the button at the end of the control stalk. ET096 "Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent wipe speed ring position": Place the speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET098 Trip Computer button

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET096 "Windscreen wiper intermittent ring position"

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-178

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 5

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 3

Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Control black 15-track, track 5

Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 2

Steering column control track 13

Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Steering column control track 18

Track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Steering column control track 9

Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Steering column control track 3

Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Steering column control track 9

Track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector.

Steering column switch track 5

Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-179

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

ET081 CONTINUED 6

ET081 "Lighting stalk position" is "Dipped" with stalk position on Flash requested.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the wiper stalk to Park position. ET096 "Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent wipe speed ring position": Place the speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET077 Wiper stalk position

Off

Intermittent facility

Intermittent facility

Off

ET096 "Windscreen wiper intermittent ring position"

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-180

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 7

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

Steering column control track 5

Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 2

Steering column control track 8

Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Steering column control track 5

Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Steering column control track 8

Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-181

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

ET081 CONTINUED 8

ET081 Lighting stalk position is Dipped with stalk position on Dipped beam requested.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the wiper stalk to Park position. ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: Place the speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET077 Wiper stalk position

Off

Intermittent facility

Intermittent facility

Off

ET096 "Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent ring position"

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-182

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 9

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

Steering column control track 5

Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 2

Steering column control track 8

Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Steering column control track 5

Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Steering column control track 8

Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-183

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REAR FOG LIGHTS REQUEST ET082

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET082 Rear fog lights request is Absent with stalk position on Rear fog lights.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand indicator request: Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator position. ET080 Rear screen wiper request: Place the wiper stalk in rear screen wiper position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET080 Rear screen wiper request

Absent

Present

Absent

Present See ALP 4

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET082/UCH_V4C_ET082/UCH_V4D_ET082/ UCH_V4F_ET082/UCH_V50_ET082

87B-184

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET082 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 2

Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 4

Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 4

Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 2

Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-185

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR REQUEST ET083

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET083 Left-hand indicator request is Absent with stalk position on left-hand indicator.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET084 Right-hand indicator request: place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator position, ET082 Rear fog lights request: set the lighting stalk to the rear fog lights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET082 Rear fog lights request

Absent

Present

Absent

Present See ALP 4

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET083/UCH_V4C_ET083/UCH_V4D_ET083/ UCH_V4F_ET083/UCH_V50_ET083

87B-186

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET083 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

15-track steering column control black connector, track 17

Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 13

Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-187

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR REQUEST ET084

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET084 Right-hand indicator request is Absent with stalk in right-hand indicator position.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand indicator request: Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator. ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position, position 3: place the lighting stalk in rear fog lights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position, position 3

4

3

4

3 See ALP 5

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET084/UCH_V4C_ET084/UCH_V4D_ET084/ UCH_V4F_ET084/UCH_V50_ET084

87B-188

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET084 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 13

Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 13

Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-189

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS BUTTON ET085

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET085 Hazard warning lights button is Absent after press on the button.

Check the F16 15A fuse of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box on the left-hand side of the centre console. Replace it if necessary. Check the 8-track grey connector of the door/warning switch (e.g. connector properly connected, tabs bent, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the 40-track PE2 and PE1 connectors (e.g. connector properly connected, tabs bent, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on track 3. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch track 6

Track 3 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector.

Switch track 7

Track 35 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the button (press): tracks 6 and 7, if there is insulation, replace the switch, if there is continuity, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET085/UCH_V4C_ET085/UCH_V4D_ET085/ UCH_V4F_ET085/UCH_V50_ET085

87B-190

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET085 CONTINUED

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET085 Hazard warning lights button is Present without press on the button.

Check the 8-track grey connector of the door/warning switch (e.g. connector properly connected, tabs bent, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the 40-track PE2 and PE1 connectors (e.g. connector properly connected, tabs bent, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch track 6

Track 3 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector.

Switch track 7

Track 35 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the button (press): tracks 6 and 7, if there is insulation, replace the switch, if continuity, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-191

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET087

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET087 One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation is Active and neither of the one touch window controls works.

Check for the presence of earth on track 6 of the connector on the electric window suspected as faulty. Is earth present?

NO

Check earth at UCH output on track 7 of the 40-track PE2 connector. If there is no earth, contact Techline. If earth is present, check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: 40-track PE2 connector on track 7

Track 6 of the window winder motor connector

Repair if necessary.

YES

AFTER REPAIR

Run complete fault finding on the electric window motor.

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET087/UCH_V4C_ET087/UCH_V4D_ET087/ UCH_V4F_ET087/UCH_V50_ET087

87B-192

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET087 CONTINUED

ET087 One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation is Inactive and neither of the one touch window controls works.

Verify that configuration LC070 ONE-TOUCH WINDOW(S)/SUNROOF is WITH. If LC070 is WITHOUT, configure using CF173 ONE-TOUCH WINDOW(S)/SUNROOF (configurable during configuration of the UCH using the SC008 UCH TYPE) command. Perform the AC025 One-touch window/sunroof authorisation command, and check for earth on track 6 of the electric window connector. Is earth present?

YES

NO

AFTER REPAIR

Operating conditions: Door open if fault, check the doors. + accessories level power supply raised at least once.

Perform a complete fault finding on the electric window motor.

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-193

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET088 ET090

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

SOURCE OF DEADLOCK ACTIVATION SOURCE OF DEADLOCK DEACTIVATION

There must be no present or stored faults.

Enables determination of what component is the source of the last locking or unlocking operation. ET088 Source of deadlock activation CARD: upon pressing the card for the second time. HANDS-FREE: on pressing the door handle button for the second time. DIAGNOSTIC: using the tool with ignition on by performing command AC004 Opening element locking. ET090 Source of deadlock deactivation Central door locking: on pressing the locking/unlocking button. CARD: press on card button. HANDS-FREE: placing a hand in the handle. DIAGNOSTIC: using the tool with ignition on by performing command AC005 Opening element unlocking. + after ignition feed: no deadlocking at this power supply level.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET088/UCH_V4C_ET088/UCH_V4D_ET088/UCH_V4F_ET088/UCH_V50_ET088/ UCH_V48_ET089/UCH_V4C_ET089/UCH_V4D_ET089/UCH_V4F_ET089/UCH_V50_ET089

87B-194

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WIPER STALK INTERMITTENT SPEED RING POSITION ET096

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position is Sensitivity 1 but with Sensitivity 2 requested.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand indicator request: Set the lighting stalk to the left-hand indicator. ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the front wiper stalk to the low speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET077 Wiper stalk position at high speed

Off

Low speed

Off

Low speed Change the steering column control

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET096/UCH_V4C_ET096/UCH_V4D_ET096/ UCH_V4F_ET096/UCH_V50_ET096

87B-195

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET096 CONTINUED 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 2

Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 13

Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 13

Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 2

Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-196

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET096 CONTINUED 2

ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position is Sensitivity 1 but with Sensitivity 3 requested.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request: Place the lighting stalk on the left-hand direction indicator. ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the front wiper stalk to the low speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET077 Wiper stalk position at high speed

Low speed

High speed

Low speed

High speed Change the steering column control

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-197

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET096 CONTINUED 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 13

Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 13

Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-198

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET096 CONTINUED 4

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position is Sensitivity 1 but with Sensitivity 4 requested.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position: set the windscreen wiper stalk to high speed. ET081 Lighting stalk position: set the lighting stalk to main beam headlights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET077 Wiper stalk position at high speed

High speed

Low speed

Low speed

High speed

ET081 Lighting stalk in the main beam headlights position

Dipped headlights

Main beam

Dipped headlights

Main beam Change the steering column control

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-199

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET096 CONTINUED 5

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 4

Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

15-track steering column control black connector, track 4

Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

15-track steering column control black connector, track 2

Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-200

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REAR SCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION ET097

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET097 Rear screen wiper park position is Absent

Check the condition and connection of the 3-track white connector of the rear screen wiper (tabs bent, broken). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs bent, broken). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Rear screen wiper motor on track 2

Track 37 of the PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity of the connection between connector track 3 and vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Check the rear screen wiper motor. Check fitting. If everything is OK, replace the wiper motor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET097/UCH_V4C_ET097/UCH_V4D_ET097/ UCH_V4F_ET097/UCH_V50_ET097

87B-201

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

TRIP COMPUTER BUTTON ET098

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This status must change to Pressed when the button is pressed.

ET098 Trip computer button is Released after press on the button.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET082 Rear fog lights request: Set the lighting stalk to the rear fog lights position. ET081 Lighting stalk position: Set the lighting stalk to dipped headlights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET082 Rear fog lights request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET081 Dipped headlights wiper stalk position

Off

Dipped headlights

Off

Dipped headlights Change the steering column control

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET098/UCH_V4C_ET098/UCH_V4D_ET098/ UCH_V4F_ET098/UCH_V50_ET098

87B-202

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET098 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

18-track steering column switch black connector, track 2

Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 2

18-track steering column switch black connector, track 11

Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

18-track steering column switch black connector, track 2

Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

18-track steering column switch black connector, track 11

Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-203

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX LEVER POSITION ET108

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ABSENT, no automatic gearbox, OTHERWISE "NOT IN NEUTRAL", with a gear shift to position D, NEUTRAL, gear selector lever on position N, REVERSE, gear selector lever on position R, P, gear selector lever on position R, If there is an incorrect position, run fault finding on the automatic gearbox. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET108/UCH_V4C_ET108/UCH_V4D_ET108/ UCH_V4F_ET108/UCH_V50_ET108

87B-204

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET109

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET109 Reverse gear engaged is NO when reverse gear is engaged.

Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET109/UCH_V4C_ET109/UCH_V4D_ET109/ UCH_V4F_ET109/UCH_V50_ET109

87B-205

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET110

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

UCH REQUEST TO INJECTION COMPUTER OR PROTECTION AND SWITCHING UNIT

There must be no present or stored faults.

This status gives information concerning the type of request made by the UCH to these computers.

ENGINE STOP: when an engine stop is requested. INACTIVE: without action on the vehicle. + AFTER IGNITION FEED: on pressing the start switch for more than 5 seconds. START: when starting is requested. If the status does not correspond to the current user request, carry out a test of the multiplex network. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET110/UCH_V4C_ET110/UCH_V4D_ET110/ UCH_V4F_ET110/UCH_V50_ET110

87B-206

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

FRONT FOG LIGHTS REQUEST ET111

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET111 Front fog lights request is Absent with stalk position on Front fog lights.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand indicator request: Set the control stalk to the left-hand indicator. ET080 Rear screen wiper request: Place control stalk on rear screen wiper request. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET080 Rear screen wiper request

Absent

Present

Absent

Present Change the steering column control

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET111/UCH_V4C_ET111/UCH_V4D_ET111/ UCH_V4F_ET111/UCH_V50_ET111

87B-207

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET111 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

18-track steering column switch black connector, track 2

Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 2

18-track steering column switch black connector, track 11

Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

18-track steering column switch black connector, track 2

Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

18-track steering column switch black connector, track 11

Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-208

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL ET112

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET112 Interior lighting control is Inactive when the interior lighting is on.

Check whether the footwell/floor switches operate correctly; if YES, contact the Techline. If NO, check for earth on track 10 of the PP3 connector of the UCH; if earth is present, check the continuity and insulation of the wiring harness between the UCH and the switch connectors (see wiring diagram). Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, replace the faulty switch.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET112/UCH_V4C_ET112/UCH_V4D_ET112/ UCH_V4F_ET112/UCH_V50_ET112

87B-209

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AUTOMATIC LIGHTING BUTTON ET113

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET113 Released with one press on the button.

Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand indicator request: Set the control stalk to the left-hand indicator. ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: set the stalk to the rear fog lights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent ring position

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET113/UCH_V4C_ET113/UCH_V4D_ET113/ UCH_V4F_ET113/UCH_V50_ET113

87B-210

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET113 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

18-track steering column switch black connector, track 9

Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 2

18-track steering column switch black connector, track 12

Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

18-track steering column switch black connector, track 14

Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

18-track steering column switch black connector, track 12

Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-211

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WIPER REQUEST BY RAIN SENSOR ET114

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Make sure that the vehicle is fitted with the rain and light sensor. The status should change to ACTIVE if there is any water on the windscreen on the sensor position. Make sure that the other positions of the wiper control are working properly.

Check the condition and connection of the rain and light sensor connector (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the + 12 V after ignition feed on track 1 of the rain and light sensor connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure that earth is present on track 3 of the rain and light sensor connector. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 24-track connector (broken, bent, oxidised tabs). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connection: 12-track UCH grey connector PP3, track 3

Track 2 of the rain and light sensor connector

Repair if necessary. Check configuration LC044 Rain/light sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET114/UCH_V4C_ET114/UCH_V4D_ET114/ UCH_V4F_ET114/UCH_V50_ET114

87B-212

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REQUEST FROM LIGHT SENSOR TO SWITCH ON HEADLIGHTS ET115

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Make sure that the vehicle is fitted with the rain and light sensor. The status should change to ACTIVE when the sensor is hidden from the surrounding light by placing a thumb over it or in darkness. Make sure that the other lighting control positions are working properly.

Check the condition and connection of the rain and light sensor connector (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the + 12 V after ignition feed on track 1 of the rain and light sensor connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure that earth is present on track 3 of the rain and light sensor connector. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 24-track connector (broken, bent, oxidised tabs). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connection: 12-track UCH grey PP3 connector, track 3

Track 2 of the rain and light sensor connector

Repair if necessary. Check configuration LC044 Rain/light sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET115/UCH_V4C_ET115/UCH_V4D_ET115/ UCH_V4F_ET115/UCH_V50_ET115

87B-213

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CARD CODE RECEIVED ET116

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET116 Inactive card belonging to the vehicle.

If the status remains INACTIVE, try the other card assigned to the vehicle before performing any other operation. If the status becomes Active using the second card of the vehicle, replace the faulty card. If status ET116 Card code received remains Inactive, carry out the following checks: Check the 8-track connector of the card-reader and the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (example: connector incorrectly connected, tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Ensure that earth is present on track 3 of the rain and light sensor connector. Repair if necessary. Check for continuity and insulation against earth on the following connections: Card reader track 3

Track 21 of the 40-track PE2 black connector of the UCH

Card reader track 4

Track 39 of the 40-track PE2 black connector of the UCH

Card reader track 6

Track 40 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH

Repair if necessary. Replace the card reader if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET116/UCH_V4C_ET116/UCH_V4D_ET116/ UCH_V4F_ET116/UCH_V50_ET116

87B-214

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CARD CODE VALID ET117

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET117 Inactive card belonging to the vehicle.

If the status remains Inactive, try the other card assigned to the vehicle before performing any other operation. If the status becomes Active using the second card of the vehicle, replace the faulty card. Assign the cards using the specific command SC006 Assign card. Replace the cards if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET117/UCH_V4C_ET117/UCH_V4D_ET117/ UCH_V4F_ET117/UCH_V50_ET117

87B-215

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET159 ET160

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REAR LEFT-HAND DOOR CHILD SAFETY LOCK REAR RIGHT-HAND DOOR CHILD SAFETY LOCK

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Ensure that configuration LC035 Childproof locks is WITH, otherwise perform configuration CF104 Electric childproof locks using the specific command SC016 Childproof locks (see Configuration and programming).

Check the condition and connection of the lock connector (broken, bent, oxidised tabs). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 12-track UCH black connector PP2 (tabs bent, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 5 (left-hand side) or on track 2 (right-hand side) of the rear door lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Rear left-hand door lock connector track 6

Track 11 of the 12-track PP2 black connector of the UCH

Rear right-hand door lock connector track 1 Repair if necessary. Replace the faulty lock. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET159/UCH_V4C_ET159/UCH_V4D_ET159/UCH_V4F_ET159/UCH_V50_ET159/ UCH_V48_ET160/UCH_V4C_ET160/UCH_V4D_ET160/UCH_V4F_ET160/UCH_V50_ET160

87B-216

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ENGINE ET169

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

In the event of an inconsistency, test the multiplex network (see 88B, Multiplex). Run fault finding on the injection system (see 13B, Diesel injection, or 17B, Petrol injection). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET169/UCH_V4C_ET169/UCH_V4D_ET169/ UCH_V4F_ET169/UCH_V50_ET169

87B-217

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

INJECTION IMMOBILISER CODE ET229

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

INCORRECT

Apply the checks only if the status remains INCORRECT after the ignition is switched off and back on.

Try to start the vehicle, ensuring that the steering column lock unlocks correctly and that after ignition + is correctly established. First check the operation of status ET046 Engine immobliser. Carry out a multiplex network test. Run fault finding on the injection system. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET229/UCH_V4C_ET229/UCH_V4D_ET229/ UCH_V4F_ET229/UCH_V50_ET229

87B-218

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CHILD SAFETY ET230

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET230 Childproof locks is Inactive although the childproof lock switch has been pressed.

Verify that ET233 Childproof lock switch is Pressed. If Inactive, refer to interpretation of ET233. If Press, check using configuration reading LC035 Childproof locks" that the UCH is correctly configured as WITH childproof locks. If WITHOUT, configuration WITH childproof locks is performed using specific command SC016 Childproof locks. If WITH, check that all the doors are correctly closed, using the following statuses: ET053: Driver's door. ET042: Passenger door. ET051: Rear left-hand door. ET052: Rear right-hand door. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET230/UCH_V4C_ET230/UCH_V4D_ET230/ UCH_V4F_ET230/UCH_V50_ET230

87B-219

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CHILDPROOF LOCK SWITCH ET233

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the UCH 40-track PE1 connector (broken, bent, oxidised tabs).1 Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track child safety lock switch black connector (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track A3 of the child safety lock switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Childproof switch connector track B1

Track 11 of the white 24-track PE1 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. Check: For insulation between tracks B1 and A3 of the switch (Released position). For continuity between tracks B1 and A3 of the switch (Pressed position). Replace the switch if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_ET233/UCH_V4C_ET233/UCH_V4D_ET233/ UCH_V4F_ET233/UCH_V50_ET233

87B-220

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Parameter summary table

Tool parameter

87B

Diagnostic tool title

PR001

Battery voltage

PR002

Exterior temperature

PR003

Front left-hand wheel pressure

PR004

Front right-hand wheel pressure

PR005

Rear right-hand wheel pressure

PR006

Rear left-hand wheel pressure

PR008

Vehicle speed

PR009

Front wheels low speed recommended pressure

PR010

Rear wheels low speed recommended pressure

PR011

Rear wheels high speed recommended pressure

PR012

Front wheel high speed recommended pressure

PR013

Number of cards programmed

PR014

Left/right pressure difference threshold

PR015

Low under-inflation threshold

PR017

Cold over-inflation threshold

PR018

Warm over-inflation threshold

PR019

Front left-hand tyre temperature

PR020

Front right-hand tyre temperature

PR021

Rear right-hand tyre temperature

PR022

Rear left-hand tyre temperature

PR023

Heat difference threshold between wheels

PR059

Puncture report threshold

87B-221

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87B

BATTERY VOLTAGE PR001

NOTES

Check for correct tightness of the battery terminals.

Check the battery voltage. If the voltage is less than 12 V, check for the possible presence of an electrical consumer. If no consumer is discharging the battery, test the charging circuit. If the charging circuit is not faulty, replace the battery. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_PR001/UCH_V4C_PR001/UCH_V4D_PR001/ UCH_V4F_PR001/UCH_V50_PR001

87B-222

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87B

EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE PR002

NOTES

None

Check the 2-track green connector of the temperature sensor (example: connector incorrectly connected, pins bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair it if necessary. Check 40-track black connector of the UCH (example: connector incorrectly connected, pins bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair it if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Temperature sensor Track 1

Track 3 of the black 40-track UCH connector

Temperature sensor Track 2

Track 13 of the 40-track UCH black connector

Repair if necessary. Check sensor resistance on tracks 1 and 2. Approximate temperature in °C

Sensor resistance (Ω)

Between 0 and 5

Between 5400 and 6200

Between 11 and 15

Between 3700 and 4400

Between 21 and 25

Between 2500 and 3000

Between 31 and 35

Between 1700 and 2100

Replace the sensor if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_PR002/UCH_V4C_PR002/UCH_V4D_PR002/ UCH_V4F_PR002/UCH_V50_PR002

87B-223

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87B

VEHICLE SPEED PR008

NOTES

None

Perform a complete fault finding of the ABS and the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V48_PR008/UCH_V4C_PR008/UCH_V4D_PR008/ UCH_V4F_PR008/UCH_V50_PR008

87B-224

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Command summary table

87B

Commands that can be viewed with the diagnostic tool: Tool command

Diagnostic tool title

AC003

Immobiliser warning light

AC004

Opening element locking

AC005

Opening elements unlocking

AC006

Driver's door unlocking

AC007

Rear screen wiper

AC008

Front fog lights

AC009

Rear fog lights

AC015

Air conditioning button indicator light

AC016

Passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1

AC017

Passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2

AC018

Passenger compartment heating resistor relay 3

AC019

Heated rear screen indicator light

AC020

Central door locking button indicator light

AC021

Interior lights

AC022

Left-hand direction indicator

AC023

Right-hand direction indicator

AC024

Card reader lighting

AC025

One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation.

AC026

Starter switch light

AC027

Footwell/floor lights

AC030

Headlight washer relay 1 (only if Vdiag 44 PSU)

AC031

Headlight washer relay 2 (only if Vdiag 44 PSU)

AC032

Driver's side exterior aerial test

AC033

Passenger side exterior aerial test

AC034

Luggage compartment exterior aerial test

AC036

Interior aerial test

AC037

Transmitter aerial fault finding

AC076

Childproof lock indicator light

87B-225

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Command summary table

87B

Specific commands that can be viewed with the diagnostic tool: List of specific commands

Description

SC001

Reading the valve set and the stored codes

SC002

Programming the 4 valve codes

SC003

Spare

SC004

UCH programming

SC005

Card check

SC006

Card allocation

SC008

Type of UCH

SC016

Child safety

Parameters that can be entered with the diagnostic tool: List of parameters to be set

Description

VP004

VIN entry

VP005

Entering recommended pressures

87B-226

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

IMMOBILISER INDICATOR LIGHT AC003

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. The instrument panel must be detected as present on the multiplex network. This command is for testing whether the immobiliser warning light is working. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The immobiliser indicator light does come on when the command is performed. Check the condition and connection of the instrument panel connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track 29 of the instrument panel. If okay, replace the instrument panel. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Instrument panel track 29

Track 29 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-227

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

OPENING ELEMENT LOCKING AC004

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing locking relay operation. The command lasts 7 seconds. Note: The driver's door circuit is shared with the fuel tank flap circuit.

One or more doors do not lock when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the PP2 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the connector on the faulty lock(s). Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks, tracks C and D. Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks, tracks A and B. Fuel tank flap lock motor, tracks 1 and 3. If faulty:

If OK: With the command activated, check for + 12 V: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks on track D, taking the earth on track C. Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks on track A, taking the earth on track B. Fuel tank flap lock motor on track 3, taking the earth on track 1. If OK, replace the faulty lock(s).

If faulty:

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-228

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC004 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver's door lock track C

Track 6 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2

Fuel tank flap bolt track 1 Driver's door lock track D

Track 5 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2

Fuel tank flap bolt track 3 Passenger and rear left-hand door locks track B

Track 8 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2

Rear right-hand door bolt track C Passenger and rear left-hand door locks track A

Track 7 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2

Rear right-hand door bolt track D Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-229

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

AC005 AC006

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

OPENING ELEMENTS UNLOCKING DRIVER'S DOOR UNLOCKING

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing unlocking relay operation. The driver's door circuit is shared with the fuel tank flap circuit. The command lasts 7 seconds.

One or more doors do not unlock when the commands are activated.

Check the condition and connection of the PP2 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the connector on the faulty lock(s). Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks, tracks C and D. Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks, tracks A and B. Fuel tank flap lock motor, tracks 1 and 3. If faulty:

If OK: With the command activated, check for + 12 V: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks on track C, taking the earth on track D. Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks on track B, taking the earth on track A. Fuel tank flap lock motor on track 1, taking the earth on track 3. If OK, replace the faulty lock(s).

If faulty:

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-230

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC005 AC006 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver's door lock track C

Track 6 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Fuel tank flap bolt track 1 Driver's door lock track C

Track 5 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Fuel tank flap bolt track 1 Passenger and rear left-hand door locks track B

Track 8 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Rear right-hand door bolt track C Passenger and rear left-hand door locks track A

Track 7 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Rear right-hand door bolt track D If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-231

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

REAR SCREEN WIPER AC007

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

The rear screen wiper does not operate when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the rear screen wiper motor connector. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 3 of the rear screen wiper connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for an + 12 V on track 1 of the rear screen wiper connector. If everything is correct, replace the rear screen wiper motor. Check the condition and connection of the PE3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Motor track 1

Track 3 of the PE2 connector of the UCH.

Motor track 2

Track 37 of the PP2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-232

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

FRONT FOG LIGHTS AC008

NOTES

Check: – the condition and connection of the front fog lights fuse, – the condition of the bulbs. Replace them if necessary.

The rear screen wiper does not operate when the command is activated. Check the condition and the connection of connector PPA of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the bulb connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on R9 connection then check the connections of the bulb connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on the fog light connectors they are being controlled by command AC004. If correct, replace the bulb(s). Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit PPA connector track 8

Track 1 of the front left-hand fog light connector

Protection and Switching Unit PPA connector track 7

Track 1 of the front right hand fog light connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-233

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

REAR FOG LIGHTS AC009

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing operation of the rear fog lights. Check the bulbs.

Left-hand drive Check the condition and connection of the connector for each rear light. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 1 of the black rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 2 of the rear light black connector. If OK, check the bulbs again, and if still not OK replace the rear light. Check the condition and connection of UCH connector PP3. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Track 2 of the rear light black connector

Track 6 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-234

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC009 CONTINUED

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing operation of the rear fog lights. Check the bulbs.

Right-hand drive Check the condition and connection of the connector for each rear light. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 4 of the rear light black connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 3 of the rear light black connector. If OK, check the bulbs again, and if still not OK replace the rear light. Check the condition and connection of UCH connector PP3. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Track 3 of the rear light black connector

Track 6 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-235

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AIR-CONDITIONING BUTTON INDICATOR LIGHT AC015

NOTES

Manual air conditioning only

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing operation of the air-conditioning indicator light. Apply the after ignition feed, and the air conditioning control panel should light up. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The indicator light does not come on when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the heater control panel connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 5 of the heater control panel connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of + 12 V on track 6 of the heater control panel connector. If OK, replace the control panel. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Control panel track 6

Track 26 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-236

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTOR 1 RELAY AC016

Check that the vehicle is fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors. There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors. The command lasts 7 seconds.

NOTES

Check for the presence of earth on tracks 2 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. Repair if necessary.

With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 3 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.

YES

Check that the resistances between tracks 2 and 3 and between tracks 3 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistor connector are equal to infinity. Replace the passenger compartment heating resistors if faulty.

YES

Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A5 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1 and track 3 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.

NO Check for + 12 V on track A3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1. NO

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-237

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC016 CONTINUED

Contact Techline. NO With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay.

NO

With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track 33 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. YES Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay and track 33 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

YES

Check for + 12 V on track A1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay.

NO

Check the presence, the condition and connection of the F7 fuse on the power supply fuse board. Repair if necessary. YES Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1 and track 7 of the power supply fuse board.

YES

With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay.

NO

Ensure insulation and continuity of the connection between track A2 of passenger compartment heating resistance relay 1 and track 33 of the PPH2 (Vdiag 44) or CN (Vdiag 48) connector of the PSU.

If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-238

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTOR 2 RELAY AC017

Check that the vehicle is fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors. There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors. The command lasts 7 seconds.

NOTES

Check for the presence of earth on tracks 2 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. Repair if necessary.

With the command activated, check for + 12 V on tracks 1 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.

YES

Verify that the resistances between tracks 1 and 2 and between tracks 4 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistor connector are equal to infinity. Replace the passenger compartment heating resistors if faulty.

YES

Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B5 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and tracks 1 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.

NO With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track B5 of passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2. NO

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-239

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC017 CONTINUED

Contact Techline. NO With the command activated, check for an earth on track B1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2.

NO

With the command activated, check for an earth on track 22 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. YES Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and track 22 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

YES

Check for + 12 V on track B3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2.

NO

Check the presence, the condition and connection of the F9 fuse on the power supply fuse board. Repair if necessary. YES Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and track 9 of the power supply fuse board.

YES

Check for + 12 V on track B2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2.

NO

Ensure insulation and continuity of the connection between track B2 of passenger compartment heating resistance relay 2 and track 11 of the PPH2 (Vdiag 44) or CN (Vdiag 48) connector of the PSU.

If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-240

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

HEATED REAR SCREEN INDICATOR LIGHT AC019

NOTES

Except with climate control.

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing operation of the heated rear screen indicator light. Apply after ignition feed. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The heated rear screen indicator light does not come on when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the heater control panel connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 5 of the heater control panel connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 4 of the heater control panel connector. If OK, replace the control panel. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Control panel track 4

Track 38 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-241

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

CENTRAL LOCKING BUTTON INDICATOR LIGHT AC020

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is used to test whether the button has a power supply. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The central door locking button light does not come on when the command is performed. Check the connection and condition of the central door locking button connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 4 of the central door locking button. Repair if necessary. When the command is performed, check for + 12 V on track 5 of the central door locking button connector. If OK, replace the button. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Central door locking button track 5

Track 14 of the PE1 connector of the UCH.

Central door locking button track 2

Track 6 of the PE1 connector of the UCH.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-242

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

INTERIOR LIGHTS AC021

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing interior lights operation. Check the bulbs.

The interior lights do not light when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the interior lights connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 3 of each interior light. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 2 of each interior light. If OK, check the bulbs again, and if still not OK replace the interior light(s). Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Track 2 of each interior light

Track 1 of the 12-track UCH connector PP3

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-243

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR AC022

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing direction indicator operation. Apply after ignition feed. Check the bulbs.

The direction indicators do not light when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the left-hand headlight, the left-hand repeater and the rear left-hand light. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb / Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light connector. If OK, check the bulbs again, and if still not OK replace the rear light(s). Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-244

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC022 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light connector.

Track 4 of the 12-track UCH connector PP3

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-245

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR AC023

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing direction indicator operation. Apply after ignition feed. Check the bulbs.

The direction indicators do not light when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the right-hand headlight, the right-hand repeater and the rear right-hand light. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 5 of the rear light connector. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb / Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 6 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. If OK, check the bulbs again, and if still not OK replace the rear light(s). Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-246

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC023 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 6 of the rear light connector.

Track 4 of the 12-track UCH connector PP3

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-247

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

CARD READER LIGHT AC024

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing card reader operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The card reader light does not come on when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the card reader connector. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 5 of the card reader connector. If OK:

If faulty: Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Card reader track 5

Track 25 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 2 of the card reader connector. If OK, replace the card reader. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Card reader track 2

Track 4 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-248

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

ONE-TOUCH WINDOW CONTROL/SUNROOF AUTHORISATION AC025

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command can activate operation of the electric window motors after replacement of the UCH or a harmless loss of authorisation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

After activation, take a reading of the ET087 One-touch window/sunroof authorisation status to verify a change of status. If there is a fault, see the procedure for this status.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-249

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

START SWITCH LIGHTING AC026

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing operation of the start button. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The button light does not come on when the command is activated. Check the connection of the start button connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 2 of the start button connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 4 of the start button connector. If OK, replace the button. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Start button track 4

Track 13 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-250

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

FOOTWELL LIGHTS AC027

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing footwell/floor lights operation. Check the bulbs.

Check the condition and connection of the footwell lighting connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on track 1 of each footwell light. If OK:

If faulty: Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Track 1 of each interior light

Track 9 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track 2 of each footwell light. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Track 2 of each interior light

Track 10 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-251

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

HEADLIGHT WASHER 1 RELAY AC030

NOTES

(ONLY IF VDIAG 44 PSU)

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing headlight washer 1 operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

Check for earth on tracks 1 and 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct?

Faulty on track 2.

Run the fault finding procedure for command AC031 Headlight washer relay 2

YES Faulty on track 1.

With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct?

NO

YES Replace the headlight washer pump.

Check the condition and connection of the headlight washer relay 1 connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track A4 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Headlight washer relay 1 track A3 Track 1 of the headlight washer pump. If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-252

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC030 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of headlight washer relay 1. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on tracks A2 and A5 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track A2 of the relay connector. Is it correct? NO Check the condition and connection of the PE3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. YES

Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Relay connector track A2 Track 13 of the UCH PE3 connector. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Headlight washer 1 relay track A3 Track 1 headlight washer pump Repair if necessary. If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-253

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

HEADLIGHT WASHER RELAY 2 AC031

NOTES

(ONLY IF VDIAG 44 PSU)

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing headlight washer 2 operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

Check for an earth on tracks 1 and 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct?

Faulty on track 2.

Run the fault finding procedure for command AC030 Headlight washer relay 1

YES Faulty on track 1.

With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct?

NO

YES Replace the headlight washer pump.

Check the condition and connection of the headlight washer relay 2 connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track B4 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Headlight washer relay 1 track B3 Track 2 headlight washer pump If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-254

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC031 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of headlight washer 2 relay. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on tracks B2 and A5 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track B2 of the relay connector. Is it correct? NO Check the condition and connection of the PE3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. YES

Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Relay connector track B2 Track 14 of the UCH PE3 connector. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Headlight washer relay 2 track B3 Track 1 headlight washer pump Repair if necessary. If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-255

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

DRIVER'S SIDE EXTERIOR AERIAL TEST AC032

Before performing this command, it is essential to perform command AC037 Transmitter aerial diagnostic to ensure there is no aerial fault. There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for checking the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and functions even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the driver-side external aerials. If the range exceeds 1.50 m, check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. This command takes 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

Front door Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 4-track aerial connector track 1

Track 27 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH

4-track aerial connector track 2

Track 39 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-256

Edition 2

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC032 CONTINUED

Rear door Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 4-track aerial connector track 1

Track 28 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

4-track aerial connector track 2

Track 38 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-257

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

PASSENGER SIDE EXTERIOR AERIAL TEST AC033

Before performing this command, it is essential to perform command AC037 Transmitter aerial diagnostic to ensure there is no aerial fault. There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for checking the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and functions even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the passenger-side external aerials. If the range exceeds 1.50 m, check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. This command takes 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

Front door Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 4-track aerial connector track 1

Track 31 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

4-track aerial connector track 2

Track 34 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-258

Edition 2

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC033 CONTINUED

Rear door Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: 4-track aerial connector track 1

Track 32 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

4-track aerial connector track 2

Track 33 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-259

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT EXTERIOR AERIAL TEST AC034

Before performing this command, it is essential to perform command AC037 Transmitter aerial diagnostic to ensure there is no aerial fault. There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for checking the hands-free luggage compartment access zone and works even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the external aerial on the tailgate side. If the range exceeds 1.50 m, check that there is no short circuit to the aerial earth. This command takes 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: 4-track aerial connector track 1

Track 29 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

4-track aerial connector track 2

Track 40 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-260

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

INTERNAL AERIAL TESTING AC036

Before performing this command, it is essential to perform command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding to ensure there is no aerial fault. There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for checking the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and functions even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle.

NOTES

Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the internal aerials. This command takes 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

FRONT INTERIOR AERIAL Check the condition and connection of the 3-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: 3-track aerial connector track 1

Track 25 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

3-track aerial connector track 3

Track 24 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-261

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC036 CONTINUED 1

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT INTERNAL AERIAL Check the condition and connection of the 3-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: 3-track aerial connector track 1

Track 35 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

3-track aerial connector track 3

Track 36 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-262

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC036 CONTINUED 2

CENTRE INTERIOR AERIAL Check the condition and connection of the 3-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: 3-track aerial connector track 1

Track 26 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

3-track aerial connector track 3

Track 37 of the 40-track UCH PE3 connector

Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-263

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

TRANSMITTER AERIAL FAULT FINDING AC037

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special Note This command is for running fault finding on the interior and exterior transmitter aerials on open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V. This command takes 1 minute.

After activating the command, perform fault reading. If one (or more) fault(s) concerning the aerials appear(s), refer to the processing of this (these) fault(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-264

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

CHILD SAFETY INDICATOR LIGHT AC076

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing child safety indicator light operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The child safety switch light does not come on when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on tracks A1 of the child safety lock switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of PE1 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Locking switch track A2

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-265

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Customer complaints

NOTES

87B

Only refer to these customer complaints after a full check with the diagnostic tool.

NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER

ALP 1

LIGHTING NO REAR FOG LIGHTS

ALP 2

NO RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR

ALP 3

NO LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR

ALP 4

NO SIDE LIGHTS (LIGHTS WITHOUT XENON BULB)

ALP 5

NO DIPPED BEAM LIGHTS (LIGHTS WITHOUT XENON BULB)

ALP 6

NO MAIN BEAM LIGHTS (LIGHTS WITHOUT XENON BULB)

ALP 7

NO FRONT FOG LIGHTS

ALP 8

WIPERS, WASHERS NO REAR SCREEN WIPER

ALP 9

NO REAR PARK POSITION

ALP 10

NO WINDSCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION

ALP 11

NO WINDSCREEN WIPER

ALP 12

NO FRONT AND REAR SCREEN WASHER

ALP 13

NO HEADLIGHT WASHERS (ONLY IF VDIAG 44 PSU)

ALP 14

87B-266

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Customer complaints

87B

ELECTRIC WINDOWS NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE PASSENGER'S WINDOW

ALP 15

NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE DRIVER'S WINDOW

ALP 16

NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE REAR LEFT-HAND WINDOW

ALP 17

NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE REAR RIGHT-HAND WINDOW

ALP 18

ELECTRIC WINDOWS DO NOT OPERATE

ALP 19

OPENING ELEMENTS NO SUNROOF OPENING AND CLOSING POSITION

ALP 20

NO SUNROOF OPENING POSITION 1, 2 OR 3

ALP 21

NO FOLDING-IN OR FOLDING-OUT OF ONE OR MORE DOOR MIRRORS

ALP 22

CANNOT ADJUST ONE OF THE TWO DOOR MIRRORS

ALP 23

DOOR MIRRORS

87B-267

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

Fault finding - Customer complaints

87B

SUPPLY NO + ACCESSORIES FEED

ALP 24

+ AFTER IGNITION FEED REMAINS BLOCKED

ALP 25

87B-268

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 1

87B

No dialogue with the computer

Check the condition and connection of the battery connections. Check the condition of the power fuses on the battery's positive terminal. Check the battery voltage. Repair if necessary.

NOTES

Is it possible to switch on the ignition or another power supply level?

YES

Refer to ALP 1 (see 88 B Multiplexing). Has the fault disappeared? NO

NO Perform locking/unlocking. Did locking/unlocking operate?

YES

Refer to the section Interpretation of faults, multiplex network out of service (see 88 B Multiplexing).

NO Check the condition and connection of the PP1 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 1 of the PP1 connector and on track 2 of the PP3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Verify the presence of + 12 V on tracks 3 and 4 of the PP1 connector of the UCH. Are the power supplies okay?

NO

Contact the Techline.

YES Repair the faulty connections and fuses up to the battery, checking the passenger compartment relay and fuse boxes and the power supply fuse board.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP1/UCH_V4C_ALP1/UCH_V4D_ALP1 /UCH_V4F_ALP1/ UCH_V50_ALP1

87B-269

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 2

NOTES

87B

No rear fog lights

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

NO

Apply interpretation of ET082 Rear fog light request.

NO

Apply interpretation of command AC009 Rear fog light.

YES Check status ET082 Rear fog lights request by actuating the control stalk. Is it present? YES Perform command AC009 Rear fog lights. Does the fog light come on? YES Check the UCH connectors. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP2/UCH_V4C_ALP2/UCH_V4D_ALP2 /UCH_V4F_ALP2/ UCH_V50_ALP2

87B-270

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 3

87B

No right-hand direction indicator

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Check the + 12 V supply and earth on the bulb connectors (see interpretation of DF012 Righthand direction indicator circuit). Is there a supply?

YES

Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. Repair if necessary.

NO Check status ET084 Right-hand indicator request by actuating the control stalk. Is it present?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET084 Righthand indicator request.

NO

Apply interpretation of command AC023 Right-hand indicator.

YES Perform command AC023 Right hand indicator. Does the right-hand indicator come on? YES Check the UCH connectors. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP3/UCH_V4C_ALP3/UCH_V4D_ALP3 /UCH_V4F_ALP3/ UCH_V50_ALP3

87B-271

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 4

87B

No left-hand direction indicator

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Check the + 12 V supply and earth on the headlight connectors (see interpretation of DF013 Left-hand direction indicator circuit). Is there a supply?

YES

Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. Repair if necessary.

NO Check status ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request by actuating the control stalk. Is it present?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET083 Left-hand indicator request.

NO

Apply interpretation of command AC022 Lefthand indicator.

YES Perform command AC022 Left-hand indicator. Does the left-hand indicator come on? YES Check the UCH connectors. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP4/UCH_V4C_ALP4/UCH_V4D_ALP4 /UCH_V4F_ALP4/ UCH_V50_ALP4

87B-272

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

No side lights (lights without xenon bulb)

ALP 5

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Test the + 12 V supply on track 5 of the headlights and earth on track 1. Is there a supply?

YES

Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. Repair if necessary.

NO Check status ET081 Lighting stalk position. Is the side lights request on side lights?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET081 Lighting stalk position.

YES Run fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP5/UCH_V4C_ALP5/UCH_V4D_ALP5 /UCH_V4F_ALP5/ UCH_V50_ALP5

87B-273

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

No dipped headlights (lights without xenon bulb)

ALP 6

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Test the + 12 V supply on track 2 of the headlights and earth on track 1. Is there a supply?

YES

Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. Repair if necessary.

NO Check status ET081 Lighting switch position. Is the dipped beam headlight request on dipped beam?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET081 Lighting stalk position.

YES Perform fault finding on the PSU and check the dipped headlight F8C fuses (Vdiag 44 PSU) and F3 and F4 fuses (Vdiag 48 PSU) on the PSU.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP6/UCH_V4C_ALP6/UCH_V4D_ALP6 /UCH_V4F_ALP6/ UCH_V50_ALP6

87B-274

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

No main beam headlights (lights without xenon bulb)

ALP 7

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Check the + 12 V supply on track 4 of the headlights and earth on track 1. Is there a supply?

YES

Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. Repair if necessary.

NO Check status ET081 Lighting switch position. Does the side light request occur on main beam?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET081 Lighting stalk position.

YES Run fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit. Check the F8A and F8B fuses (Vdiag 44 PSU) and F6 and F7 fuses (Vdiag 48 PSU).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP7/UCH_V4C_ALP7/UCH_V4D_ALP7 /UCH_V4F_ALP7/ UCH_V50_ALP7

87B-275

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 8

NOTES

87B

No front fog lights

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check status ET111 Front fog lights request with the stalk in the front fog lights position. Is the status Present?

NO

Apply interpretation of ET111 Front fog light request.

NO

Apply interpretation of command AC008 Front fog lights.

YES Perform command AC008 Front fog lights. Do the front fog lights come on? YES Check the UCH connectors. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP8/UCH_V4C_ALP8/UCH_V4D_ALP8 /UCH_V4F_ALP8/ UCH_V50_ALP8

87B-276

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 9

NOTES

87B

No rear screen wiper

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check status ET080 Rear screen wiper request with the stalk in the rear screen wiper position. Is the status present?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET080 Rear screen wiper request.

NO

Perform fault finding on command AC007 Rear screen wiper.

YES Perform command AC007 Rear screen wiper. Check the power supply of the wiper motor: On track 2 for + 12 V. On track 3 for earth. Is the rear wiper working? YES Check the UCH connectors. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP9/UCH_V4C_ALP9/UCH_V4D_ALP9 /UCH_V4F_ALP9/ UCH_V50_ALP9

87B-277

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 10

87B

No rear park position

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check status ET097 Rear screen wiper park position. Is the status absent?

YES

Apply interpretation of status ET097 Rear screen wiper park position.

NO Contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP10/UCH_V4C_ALP10/UCH_V4D_ALP10/ UCH_V4F_ALP10/UCH_V50_ALP10

87B-278

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 11

NOTES

87B

No windscreen wiper park position

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check status ET077 Wiper stalk position park position request. Is the status present?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET077 Wiper stalk position.

YES Contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP11/UCH_V4C_ALP11/UCH_V4D_ALP11/ UCH_V4F_ALP11/UCH_V50_ALP11

87B-279

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 12

NOTES

87B

No windscreen wiper

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the condition of the windscreen wiper motor connections (with battery disconnected) and the PSU connections. Check the continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Windscreen wiper motor connector track 5

Track 1 of the CN (Vdiag 48) or PPH2 (Vdiag 44) 12-track brown connector of the PSU

Windscreen wiper motor connector track 4

Track 2 of the CN (Vdiag 48) or PPH2 (Vdiag 44) brown 12-track connector of the PSU

Windscreen wiper motor connector track 2

Track 6 of the CN (Vdiag 48) or PPH2 (Vdiag 44) 12-track brown connector of the PSU

Check for the presence of earth on track 1 of the windscreen wiper motor connector. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP12/UCH_V4C_ALP12/UCH_V4D_ALP12/ UCH_V4F_ALP12/UCH_V50_ALP12

87B-280

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 13

NOTES

87B

No front and rear screen washer

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Windscreen washer Check status ET078 Front windscreen washer request by actuating the control stalk. Is it present?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET078 Front windscreen washer request.

NO

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between track 2 of the pump and track 1 of the steering wheel control on the 6track black connector. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between track 1 of the pump and track 2 of the steering wheel control on the 6track black connector. Repair if necessary.

YES Check for + 12 V between tracks 2 and 1 of the washer fluid pump when it is in operation. Is there + 12 V? YES Check the hoses. If everything is OK: Replace the washer fluid pump.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP13/UCH_V4C_ALP13/UCH_V4D_ALP13/ UCH_V4F_ALP13/UCH_V50_ALP13

87B-281

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 13 CONTINUED

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Rear screen washer Check status ET079 Rear windscreen washer request by actuating the control stalk. Is it present?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET079 Rear screen wiper request.

NO

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between track 2 of the pump and track 1 of the steering wheel control on the 6track black connector. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between track 1 of the pump and track 2 of the steering wheel control on the 6track black connector. Repair if necessary.

YES Check for + 12 V between tracks 2 and 1 of the washer fluid pump when it is in operation. Is there + 12 V? YES Check the hoses. If everything is OK: Replace the windscreen washer pump.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-282

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

No headlight washers (only if Vdiag 44 PSU)

ALP 14

NOTES

87B

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Place the stalk on side lights and check whether status ET081 Lighting stalk position is on Side lights.

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET081 Lighting stalk position.

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET078 Windscreen washer request.

NO

Apply interpretation of commands AC030 Headlight washer relay 1 and AC031 Headlight washer relay 2.

YES Check whether status ET078 Front windscreen washer request is "Present" when the stalk is operated. YES Perform commands AC030 Headlight washer relay 1 and AC031 Headlight washer relay 2 Do the commands work? YES Check the condition of the pipes and nozzles. Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP14/UCH_V4C_ALP14/UCH_V4D_ALP14/ UCH_V4F_ALP14/UCH_V50_ALP14

87B-283

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 15

87B

No raising or lowering of the passenger window

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check on the driver's control panel, whether the electric window operates.

NO

YES Check the condition and connection of the passenger switch. Is the switch the cause?

NO

Replace the switch.

YES Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Passenger switch on track A2

Track 2 of the motor

Passenger switch on track A1

Track 1 of the motor

Passenger switch on track A3

Track 2 of the driver's switch white connector

Passenger switch on track B1

Track 3 of the driver's switch black connector

Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP15/UCH_V4C_ALP15/UCH_V4D_ALP15/ UCH_V4F_ALP15/UCH_V50_ALP15

87B-284

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 15 CONTINUED

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the condition and connection of the driver's switch. Is the switch the cause?

NO

Replace the switch.

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET087 One touch window/sunroof authorisation.

YES Check status ET087 One touch window/sunroof. Is it active? YES Check for an earth on track 3 of the electric window motor connector and + 12 V on track 4 of the motor. Are the earth and feed OK? YES Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver's control panel white connector track 2

Passenger switch on track A3

Driver's control panel black connector track 3

Passenger switch on track B1

Driver control panel black connector track 2

Track 2 of the motor

Driver control panel white connector track 1

Track 1 of the motor

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, replace the motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-285

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 16

NOTES

87B

No raising or lowering of the driver's window

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the BP55 fuse in the passenger compartment fuse and relay box and replace it if necessary. YES Check the condition and connection of the driver's switch. Is the switch eliminated as the cause?

NO

Replace the driver side switch.

NO

Perform fault finding on status ET087 One touch window authorisation.

NO

Apply interpretation of command AC025 One touch window/sunroof authorisation.

YES Check status ET087 One touch window/sunroof. Is it active? YES Check for earth on track 6 of the motor connector. Perform command AC025 One touch window/ sunroof authorisation. YES

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP16/UCH_V4C_ALP16/UCH_V4D_ALP16/ UCH_V4F_ALP16/UCH_V50_ALP16

87B-286

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 16 CONTINUED

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check for + 12 V on track 4 of the electric window motor. Repair if necessary.

Check for an earth on track 3 of the electric window motor. Repair if necessary.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver's switch black connector track 5

Track 2 of the motor

Driver's switch white connector track 4

Track 1 of the motor

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, replace the motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-287

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 17

NOTES

87B

No raising or lowering of the rear left-hand window

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

On the driver's control panel, does the rear lefthand window operate correctly?

NO

YES Check the condition and connection of the rear left-hand switch. Is the switch the cause?

NO

Replace the rear left-hand switch.

YES Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Rear left-hand switch on track B2

Track 1 of the motor

Rear left-hand switch on track A1

Track 2 of the motor

Rear left-hand switch on track A3

Track 6 of the driver's switch black connector

Rear left-hand switch on track B1

Track 5 of the driver control panel white connector

Rear left-hand switch on track A2

Track B1 of the child safety switch connector.

Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP17/UCH_V4C_ALP17/UCH_V4D_ALP17/ UCH_V4F_ALP17/UCH_V50_ALP17

87B-288

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 17 CONTINUED

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the condition and connection of the driver's switch. Is the switch eliminated as the cause?

NO

Replace the driver side switch.

YES Check status ET087 One touch window/sunroof. Is it active?

Apply interpretation of status ET087 Onetouch window authorisation.

YES Check for an earth on track 3 of the motor connector and + 12 V on track 4 of the electric window motor. YES Check for an earth on track 3 of the electric window motor. Repair if necessary.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver control panel white connector track 6

Rear left-hand switch on track A3

Driver control panel white connector track 5

Rear left-hand switch on track B1

Driver control panel black connector track 5

Track 2 of the motor

Driver control panel white connector track 4

Track 2 of the motor

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, replace the motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-289

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 18

NOTES

87B

No raising or lowering of the rear right-hand window

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check, on the driver's control panel, whether the rear right-hand window winder operates.

NO

YES Check the condition and connection of the rear right-hand switch. Is the switch the cause?

NO

Replace the rear right-hand switch.

YES Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Rear left-hand switch on track B2

Track 1 of the motor

Rear left-hand switch on track A1

Track 2 of the motor

Rear left-hand switch on track A3

Driver's switch black connector track 2

Rear left-hand switch on track B1

Track 1 of the driver control panel white connector

Rear left-hand switch on track A2

Track B1 of the child safety switch connector.

Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP18/UCH_V4C_ALP18/UCH_V4D_ALP18/ UCH_V4F_ALP18/UCH_V50_ALP18

87B-290

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 18 CONTINUED

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the condition and connection of the driver's switch. Is the switch eliminated as the cause?

NO

Replace the driver side switch.

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET087 Onetouch window authorisation.

YES Check status ET087 One touch window/sunroof authorisation. Is it active? YES Check for an earth on track 3 of the motor connector and + 12 V on track 4 of the electric window motor.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver control panel white connector track 2

Rear left-hand switch on track A3

Driver control panel white connector track 1

Rear left-hand switch on track B1

Driver control panel black connector track 3

Track 2 of the motor

Driver control panel white connector track 2

Track 1 of the motor

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, replace the motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-291

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 19

NOTES

87B

Electric windows not working

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check for + 12 V on track 5 of the driver's side white connector. On tracks A1 and B2 of the brown connector on the passenger's side. Is there + 12 V?

NO

Check on the 40 A fuse of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection. Repair if necessary.

NO

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection. Repair if necessary.

YES Check for an earth on track 4 of the black connector. Is there an earth? YES Check the continuity and insulation of the connections. Repair if necessary. Check the runners. If everything is correct, contact the Techline. Check the runners. If everything is OK, replace the faulty electric motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP19/UCH_V4C_ALP19/UCH_V4D_ALP19/ UCH_V4F_ALP19/UCH_V50_ALP19

87B-292

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 20

NOTES

87B

No sunroof opening and closing

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check for + 12 V on track 7 of the motor. Is there + 12 V?

NO

Check the 20A motor power supply fuse. Replace it if necessary.

YES Check for an earth between track 10 of the motor and the body of the vehicle. Repair if necessary.

Replace the switch. If the fault is still present, change the sunroof motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP20/UCH_V4C_ALP20/UCH_V4D_ALP20/ UCH_V4F_ALP20/UCH_V50_ALP20

87B-293

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 21

NOTES

87B

No sunroof opening position 1, 2 or 3

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sunroof switch on track 3

Track 4 of the motor

Sunroof switch on track 2

Track 3 of the motor

Sunroof switch on track 5

Track 2 of the motor

Sunroof switch on track 1

Track 1 of the motor

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP21/UCH_V4C_ALP21/UCH_V4D_ALP21/ UCH_V4F_ALP21/UCH_V50_ALP21

87B-294

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 22

87B

No folding-in or folding-out of one or more door mirrors

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check for + 12 V on the mirror switch control. Is there + 12 V?

Check the mirror power supply fuse. Replace it if necessary.

Check for earth on the switch. Repair if necessary.

Check continuity on the switch between the following tracks: for folding-in: Tracks 5 and 1 Tracks 4 and 10 for folding-out: Tracks 4 and 1 Tracks 5 and 10

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Left-hand door mirror track 9 Right-hand door mirror track 7

Track 10 door mirror switch

Left-hand door mirror track 7 Right-hand door mirror track 9

Track 1 door mirror switch

Replace the door mirror(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP22/UCH_V4C_ALP22/UCH_V4D_ALP22/ UCH_V4F_ALP22/UCH_V50_ALP22

87B-295

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 23

87B

Cannot adjust one of the two door mirrors

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Non-retractable door mirror. Left-hand door mirror. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks A3/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting upward. Tracks A3/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting downward. Tracks A1/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting leftward. Tracks A1/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track A3

Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror

Door mirror switch track A1

Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror

Door mirror switch track B4

Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror

Replace the door mirror.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP22/UCH_V4C_ALP23/UCH_V4D_ALP23/ UCH_V4F_ALP23/UCH_V50_ALP23

87B-296

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 23 CONTINUED 1

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Non-retractable door mirror. Right-hand door mirror. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks B2/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting upward. Tracks B2/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting downward. Tracks B1/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting leftward. Tracks B1/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track B2

Track 2 of the right-hand door mirror

Door mirror switch track B1

Track 4 of the right-hand door mirror

Door mirror switch track B4

Track 3 of the right-hand door mirror

Replace the door mirror.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-297

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 23 CONTINUED 2

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Retractable door mirror. Left-hand door mirror. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 7/5 and 4/3 Slanting upward. Tracks 7/4 and 5/3 Slanting downward. Tracks 9/5 and 4/3 Slanting leftward. Tracks 9/4 and 5/3 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 7

Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror

Door mirror switch track 9

Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror

Door mirror switch track 3

Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror

Replace the door mirror.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-298

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 23 CONTINUED 3

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Retractable door mirror. Right-hand door mirror. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 6/5 and 4/3 Slanting upward. Tracks 6/4 and 5/3 Slanting downward. Tracks 8/5 and 4/3 Slanting leftward. Tracks 8/4 and 5/3 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 7

Track 2 of the right-hand door mirror.

Door mirror switch track 8

Track 4 of the right-hand door mirror.

Door mirror switch track 6

Track 3 of the right-hand door mirror.

Replace the door mirror.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-299

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 24

NOTES

87B

No + accessories feed

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check status ET070 Start button; is Pressed when the button is pressed?

NO

Perform fault finding on status ET070 Start button.

YES Check that the card is not perceived as absent by means of the messages on the instrument panel.

Run fault finding on, and check the condition of, the connectors of the + battery housing (Power fuses), of the power plate (maxi fuses), of the Protection and Switching Unit (PSU), of the Passenger Compartment Fuse and Relay Box, of the Passenger Compartment Fuse and Relay Box option, of the relay plate.

Check the condition and connection of the connectors on the UCH and the connectors on the PSU. Check for + 12 V on tracks 3 and 10 of the PP3 12-track connector of the UCH. Check for an earth on track 1 of the PP3 2-track connector of the UCH.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP24/UCH_V4C_ALP24/UCH_V4D_ALP24/ UCH_V4F_ALP24/UCH_V50_ALP24

87B-300

Edition 2

UCH Vdiag No: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 25

NOTES

87B

+ after ignition feed remains blocked

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check status ET070 Start button; is the status Pressed when the button is pressed?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET070 Start button.

YES Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V48_ALP25/UCH_V4C_ALP25/UCH_V4D_ALP25/ UCH_V4F_ALP25/UCH_V50_ALP25

87B-301

Edition 2

187C

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

VSC Vdiag No: 04

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION 1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): Mégane II Function concerned: Keyless vehicles

VDIAG No.: 04

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault Finding Procedures (this document and the Technical Notes for the injection fitted to the vehicle, the UCH and the Protection and Switching Unit: – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP Special tooling required

Special tooling required Multimeter Elé. 1681 Universal bornier

3. RECAP Procedure To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed). Proceed as follows: – Renault card in the card reader (keyless vehicle scenario 1, entry level, not hands-free and scenario 2, top of the range, hands-free), – press and hold the Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not met, – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. Note: The left-hand and right-hand xenon bulb computers are supplied when the dipped headlights are lit. Fault finding procedures can only be carried out on them after the ignition has been switched on in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed) and the dipped headlights are on.

VSC84 1.0

87C-1

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

87C

Proceed as follows to cut off the + after ignition feed: – disconnect the diagnostic tool, – Press the Start button twice briefly (less then 3 seconds), – Ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer indicator lights on the instrument panel have gone out.

Faults Faults are declared either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain situation and have disappeared since, or whether they remain but have not been diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is switched on after the + after ignition feed (without any system components being active). For a present fault, apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the notes are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors for these lines (for oxidation, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the component detected as defective, – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation, wear).

Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check statuses and parameters that do not produce a fault display on the diagnostic tool when they are inconsistent. Therefore, this stage is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint, – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not operating normally or a parameter is outside permitted tolerance values, you should consult the corresponding fault finding page.

Special notes on checking the conformity of the keyless vehicle function The keyless vehicle function conformity check is divided into three parts. These parts represent the three subsystems of the keyless vehicle function: door locking system, antitheft and starting. The statuses and parameters related to these sub-functions are listed with their respective computers.

Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the diagnostic tool check is in order, but the customer complaint is still present, the fault should be dealt with as a customer complaint. A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flowchart. VSC84 1.0

87C-2

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

VSC Vdiag No: 04

87C

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and the condition of the fuses

Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with Electronic Control Unit?

no See ALP 1

yes Read the faults

Faults present

no

Conformity check

yes The cause is still present

Deal with present faults

no

Fault solved

no

Fault solved

Deal with stored faults Use fault finding charts (ALPs) The cause is still present

no

Fault solved The cause is still present

yes

Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log

VSC84 1.0

87C-3

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

VSC Vdiag No: 04

87C

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

IMPORTANT!

IMPORTANT Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the procedure, enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG FOR EACH FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE. You will always be asked for this log: ● when requesting technical assistance from the Techline. ● for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory. ● to be enclosed when returning monitored parts on request. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement, and enables better analysis of the parts removed.

6. SAFETY ADVICE All work on components requires that the safety rules be obeyed to prevent damage or injury: – Make sure that the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load. – Avoid the use of a booster battery (prohibited with 24 V). – Make sure there is no problem with the clutch switch to prevent unwanted starts. – Do not smoke. – Use the appropriate tools.

VSC84 1.0

87C-4

Edition 3

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Door locking

Page 1/2

List of monitored parts: Computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

Update version ●

Customer complaint 875

Door locking/unlocking fault

1072

Interior lighting faults

Other

●

Card or remote control fault

881

Warning light comes on

004

Intermittently

Your comments:

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 005

While driving

009

Sudden fault

Other

●

1473

010

Gradual deterioration

Your comments:

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of diagnostic manual:

Workshop Repair Manual

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault finding manual no.: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.: Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 18 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Door locking ●

Page 2/2

Computer identification and system parts exchanged

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the Diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Fault name

Specification

Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no.

●

Stored

Parameter name

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description: ●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments:

FD 18 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

VSC Vdiag No: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

87C

GENERAL OPERATION The keyless vehicle function is divided into three subsystems: door locking system, antitheft and starting. Using the diagnostic tool, there are two ways of running keyless function fault finding. ● The first procedure is by computer fault finding which makes it possible to communicate with just one computer (select the computer concerned). ● The second procedure consists of performing fault finding by function which allows communications to be established with the three (or four) computers of the keyless vehicle function.

DESCRIPTION OF THE SUBSYSTEMS Door locking system subfunction This subsystem encompasses everything involved in opening and closing the vehicle opening elements. The UCH alone provides this subfunction. Note: – Locking is impossible if the ignition is on or the card is in the reader. – The ABS provides the vehicle speed signal for the Renault Anti-Intruder Device (RAID) function. – Airbag system failure blocks the RAID function and the "airbag triggered" signal unlocks the vehicle. Protection subfunction This subfunction includes everything used to protect the vehicle from theft. The computers concerned are the UCH, injection for the engine immobiliser, and the steering lock. Note: – An airbag system and/or ABS (speed signal) failure inhibits locking of the steering column. – A malfunction of the Protection and Switching Unit can lead to failure of the steering lock. Starting subfunction This subfunction covers everything used to start the vehicle. The computers concerned are the UCH, injection, Protection and Switching Unit and (if fitted to the vehicle) automatic or sequential gearbox computer. Note: – A speed signal > 0 mph inhibits engine switch-off. – Airbag triggering stops the engine.

VSC84 1.0

87C-7

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

VSC Vdiag No: 04

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION EXCHANGES BETWEEN THE MAIN COMPONENTS OF THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION – lock or unlock request

UCH

Steering column lock – lock status signal

– request for after ignition feed – starting conditions met – request to activate starter

Protection and Switching Unit

UCH – after-ignition feed present signal

– engine immobiliser software lock exchange

UCH

Injection computer – starting conditions met signal

UCH

UCH

– Speed signal

ABS computer

– absence or presence of fault

Airbag computer

Injection computer – card response

Card reader

Card – card present and allocated to vehicle interrogation

VSC84 1.0

87C-8

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

VSC Vdiag No: 04

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF COMPONENTS CONTROLLED OR MANAGED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION TO CONTROL THE DOORS

Deadlocking Front left-hand door status switch/lock motor UCH Front right-hand door status switch/lock motor Rear right-hand door status switch/lock motor

Radio frequency receiver aerial

Rear left-hand door status switch/lock motor Luggage compartment status switch/lock motor

Central door locking button

ABS system

open luggage compartment request switch

Card reader

Vehicle multiplex network

Card

Speed signal Instrument panel AIRBAG Only in the event of a fault Protection and Switching Unit

Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections = VSC84 1.0

87C-9

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

VSC Vdiag No: 04

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF CONTROLS OR COMPONENTS CONTROLLED OR MANAGED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION TO CONTROL THE DOORS (HANDS-FREE)

Deadlocking

Front right-hand door lock button

Central door locking button

Front right-hand door lock button

Front right-hand door lock button

Front right-hand door lock button

Front left-hand door status switch/lock motor

Front right-hand door lock button

Front righthand door aerial

Front right-hand door status switch/ lock motor

Front lefthand door aerial

UCH

Rear right-hand door status switch/ lock motor

Rear left-hand door aerial

Rear left-hand door status switch/lock motor

Rear righthand door aerial

Luggage compartment status switch/lock motor

Radio Frequency Receiver aerial

Luggage compartment aerial Interior aerials

Card reader

Switch/optical sensor

Switch/optical sensor

Switch/optical sensor

Switch/optical sensor

open luggage compartment request switch

Card

ABS Speed signal

Vehicle multiplex network

Instrument panel AIRBAG Only in the event of a fault Protection and Switching Unit

Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections = VSC84 1.0

87C-10

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

VSC Vdiag No: 04

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF COMPONENTS CONTROLLED OR MANAGED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION FOR ANTITHEFT UCH

Start button Immobiliser warning light

Lock power supply

Lock position signal Card reader

Vehicle multiplex network

Card

Steering column lock

Switch at rest supply

ABS Safety line

Speed signal

Protection and Switching Unit

AIRBAG Instrument panel

Only in the event of a fault

After ignition feed supply

Injection computer

Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections =

VSC84 1.0

87C-11

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

VSC Vdiag No: 04

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF ANTITHEFT CONTROLS OR COMPONENTS USED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION (HANDS-FREE) UCH

Start button Immobiliser warning light

Lock power supply

Lock position signal Front interior aerial

Central interior aerial

Rear interior aerial

Vehicle multiplex network

Hands-free card

Steering column lock

Switch at rest supply

ABS Safety line

Speed signal

Protection and Switching Unit

AIRBAG Instrument panel

Only in the event of a fault

After ignition feed supply

Injection computer

Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections =

VSC84 1.0

87C-12

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

VSC Vdiag No: 04

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF COMPONENTS CONTROLLED OR MANAGED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION FOR STARTING UCH Brake pedal switch Clutch pedal switch Start button

Vehicle multiplex network

Luggage compartment door switch

Automatic or sequential gearbox (if fitted to the vehicle)

Gear selector Starter motor After ignition feed supply

ABS

Speed signal

Protection and Switching Unit AIRBAG After ignition feed supply

Only in the event of a fault

Reverse gear switch (and neutral switch for manual gearbox)

Injection

Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections =

VSC84 1.0

87C-13

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Repairs

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION REPAIR MODE In the diagnostic tool, repair mode provides access to: – special commands, – reading and writing various system configurations.

IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIR MODE It is essential to check the consistency of system configurations, because this could be the origin of the fault or customer complaint. After replacing a computer, be sure to properly enter all configurations to avoid operational inconsistencies.

VSC84 1.0

87C-14

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Diagnostics - Special commands

VSC Vdiag No: 04

NOTES

N°

87C

After configuring the instrument panel, switch off the ignition and wait for a minute, then disconnect and reconnect the battery for the new configurations to take effect.

Configuration

Note

SC004

UCH programming

Allows a blank UCH to be programmed.

SC006

Card allocation

Allows blank cards to be programmed for the vehicle, or those already allocated to the vehicle to be reprogrammed. All cards to be allocated to the vehicle must be submitted.

SC005

Card check

Allows the conformity of the card and its allocation to the vehicle to be checked.

SC003

Spare

VSC84 1.0

87C-15

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Configuration reading

VSC Vdiag No: 04

NOTES

87C

After configuring the instrument panel, turn off the ignition and wait for a minute, then disconnect and reconnect the battery for the new configurations to take effect.

N°

Configuration

Note

LC001

Hands-free function

WITH or WITHOUT Depending on vehicle equipment. The presence of the hands-free option can be determined visually by looking for optical sensors on the door handles.

LC003

Deadlocking

WITH or WITHOUT WITH depending on country.

LC029

Selective opening element opening

WITH or WITHOUT

LC012

Automatic relocking

WITH or WITHOUT Customer's choice. Allows the vehicle to lock up after 30 seconds, if no opening element has been opened since the vehicle was unlocked.

LC026

Electric child safety lock

WITH or WITHOUT Depending on vehicle equipment. Whether or not the switch is present can be determined visually on the driver's door.

LC014

Driving layout

RIGHT or LEFT Depending on the dashboard, steering wheel on the right or left.

LC011

Vehicle type

ALL EXCEPT E84 or E84 ALONE (E84 corresponds to the cabriolet model).

VSC84 1.0

87C-16

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Configuration

VSC Vdiag No: 04

NOTES

87C

After configuring the instrument panel, switch off the ignition and wait for a minute, then disconnect and reconnect the battery for the new configurations to take effect.

N°

Configuration

Note

CF010

Hands-free function

WITH or WITHOUT Depending on vehicle equipment. The presence of the hands-free option can be determined visually by looking for optical sensors on the door handles.

CF009

Deadlocking

WITH or WITHOUT WITH depending on country where used.

CF036

Selective opening element opening

CF018

Automatic relocking

WITH or WITHOUT Customer's choice. Allows the vehicle to lock up after 30 seconds, if no opening element has been opened since the vehicle was unlocked.

CF033

Electric child safety lock

WITH or WITHOUT Depending on vehicle equipment. Whether or not the switch is present can be determined visually on the driver's door.

CF020

Driving layout

RIGHT or LEFT Depending on the dashboard, steering wheel on the right or left.

CF017

Vehicle type

ALL EXCEPT E84 or E84 ALONE (E84 corresponds to the cabriolet model)

VSC84 1.0

87C-17

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag No: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

NOTES

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subsection. Test conditions: card in vehicle, engine off, ignition on.

Access Order

Function

0

UCH

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

PR013:

Number of cards programmed

ET045:

Radiofrequency signal received

YES

ET066:

Press on card button received

YES

ET067:

Press on card button recognised

YES

Fault finding

2 (maximum 4)

ET053:

Driver's door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET042:

Passenger door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET051:

Rear left-hand door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET052:

Rear right-hand door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET061:

Open tailgate request

PRESENT (button pressed)

ET050:

Tailgate

ET062:

Open rear screen request

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

OPEN or CLOSED PRESENT (button pressed)

VSC84 1.0

87C-18

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subsection. Test conditions: card in vehicle, engine off, ignition on.

NOTES

Access Order

Function

0 (continued)

UCH (continued)

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

ET041:

Opening rear window

ET044:

Electric central door locking button Button depressed

PRESSED

ET089:

Child safety lock button Button pressed

PRESSED

ET086:

Electric child safety lock

ACTIVE

ET087:

One-touch electric window authorisation

ET068:

Most recently locked by

Fault finding

OPEN or CLOSED

ACTIVE or INACTIVE CENTRAL LOCKING or CARD or FAULT FINDING

ET069:

Most recently unlocked by

CENTRAL LOCKING or AIRBAG or CARD or FAULT FINDING

ET088:

Central locking system activated

CARD or FAULT FINDING

ET090:

Deadlocking system inactive

ET043:

RAID function authorisation by central locking button

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

+ AFTER IGNITION FEED or ELECTRIC CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING or CARD or FAULT FINDING ACTIVE

VCS84 1.0

87C-19

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subsection. Test conditions: card in vehicle, engine off, ignition on.

NOTES

Access Order

Function

0 (continued)

UCH (continued)

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

AC004:

Central door locking

The opening elements lock

AC006:

Unlock driver's door

The driver's door unlocks

AC005:

Unlock opening elements

The opening elements unlock

AC020:

Central door locking button indicator light

The indicator light should come on

AC029:

Child safety lock indicator light

The indicator light should come on

AC025:

One-touch electric window authorisation

Activates or deactivates pushbutton operation

Fault finding

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

VSC84 1.0

87C-20

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

NOTES

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subsection. Test conditions: card in vehicle, engine off, ignition on.

Access with hands-free Order

Function

0

UCH

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

PR013:

Number of cards programmed

2 (maximum 4)

ET045:

Radiofrequency signal received Press on one of the card buttons

YES

ET066:

Press on card button received Press on one of the card buttons

YES

ET067:

Press on card button recognised Press on one of the card buttons

YES

ET054:

Optical sensor supplied

YES

ET055:

Front driver side optical sensor Hand in front of the sensor

ACTIVE

ET056:

Rear driver side optical sensor Hand in front of the sensor

ACTIVE

ET057:

Front/rear passenger side optical sensor Hand in front of the sensor

ACTIVE

ET058:

Locking button on driver's handle Button pressed

ACTIVE

Fault finding

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

VSC84 1.0

87C-21

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subsection. Test conditions: card in vehicle, engine off, ignition on.

NOTES

Access with hands-free Order

Function

0 (continued)

UCH (continued)

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

ET059:

Locking button on passenger handle Button pressed

PRESSED

ET060:

Luggage compartment locking button on tailgate

PRESSED

ET053:

Driver's door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET042:

Passenger door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET051:

Rear left-hand door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET052:

Rear right-hand door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET061:

Open tailgate request

PRESENT (button pressed)

ET050:

Tailgate

OPEN or CLOSED

ET062:

Open rear screen request

PRESENT (button pressed)

ET041:

Opening rear window

OPEN or CLOSED

ET044:

Electric central door locking button Button pressed

PRESSED

ET089:

Child safety lock button Button pressed

PRESSED

ET086:

Electric child safety lock

ACTIVE

ET087:

One-touch electric window authorisation

Fault finding

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

ACTIVE or INACTIVE

VSC84 1.0

87C-22

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subsection. Test conditions: engine stopped, ignition on.

NOTES

Access with hands-free Order

Function

0 (continued)

UCH (continued)

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

ET068:

Most recently locked by

HANDS-FREE or CENTRAL LOCKING or CARD or FAULT FINDING

ET069:

Most recently unlocked by

HANDS-FREE or CENTRAL LOCKING or AIRBAG or CARD or FAULT FINDING

ET088:

Central locking system activated

CARD or HANDSFREE or FAULT FINDING

ET090:

Central locking system inactive

+ AFTER IGNITION FEED or ELECTRIC CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING or CARD or HANDS-FREE or FAULT FINDING

ET043:

RAID function authorisation by central locking button

AC037:

Aerial fault finding

Switches on aerial fault finding (interior and exterior) and reports a fault if one of the aerials fails.

AC032:

Driver-side exterior aerial test

The card reader light flashes as soon as a hands-free card is detected within range of the driver's side aerials.

Fault finding

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

ACTIVE

VSC84 1.0

87C-23

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subsection. Test conditions: card in vehicle, engine off, ignition on.

NOTES

Access with hands-free Order

Function

0 (continued)

UCH (continued)

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

AC033:

Passenger side exterior aerial test

The card reader light flashes as soon as a handsfree card is detected within range of the passenger side aerials.

AC034:

Luggage compartment exterior aerial test

The card reader light flashes as soon as a handsfree card is detected within range of the luggage compartment aerial.

AC004:

Central door locking

The opening elements lock.

AC006:

Unlock driver's door

The driver's door unlocks.

AC005:

Unlock opening elements

The opening elements unlock.

AC020:

Central door locking button indicator light

The indicator light should come on.

AC029:

Child safety lock indicator light

The indicator light should come on.

AC025:

One-touch electric window authorisation

Allows or blocks push-button operation.

Fault finding

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

VSC84 1.0

87C-24

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

NOTES

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subsection. Test conditions: card in vehicle, ignition on, engine off.

Protection Order

Function

0

UCH

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

ET008:

UCH blank

ET046:

Engine immobiliser

INACTIVE

ET070:

Ignition switch pressed

PRESSED

ET116:

Card code received

ET117:

Valid card code

ET045:

RF signal received

ET071:

Unprogrammed steering lock

ET072:

Steering lock

UNLOCKED

ET073:

Steering lock sensor signal

UNLOCKED

PR008:

Vehicle speed

PR013:

Number of cards programmed

AC037:

Transmitter aerial fault finding

AC036:

Interior aerial test

Fault finding

NO

NO

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

0 mph 2 (maximum 4) Switches on aerial fault finding (interior and exterior) and reports a fault if one of the aerials fails. The card reader light flashes as soon as a handsfree card is detected within range of the luggage compartment aerial.

VSC84 1.0

87C-25

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subsection. Test conditions: card in vehicle, ignition on, engine off.

NOTES

Protection Order

Function

0 (continued)

UCH

1

2

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

AC003:

Immobiliser warning light

The warning light should come on.

AC026:

Starter switch light

The switch should light up.

AC024:

Card reader

Protection and Switching Unit

ET008:

Starting authorised

S3000/ EDC16 injection

ET006:

Code programmed

YES

ET003:

Engine immobiliser

INACTIVE

ET077:

Impact detected

ET076:

Starting

ET003:

Engine immobiliser

INACTIVE

ET006:

Code programmed

YES

PR074:

Battery voltage

DDCR Injection

Fault finding

The card reader should light up. YES If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

NO AUTHORISED

>11 volts

VSC84 1.0

87C-26

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subsection. Test conditions: card in vehicle, ignition on, engine off.

NOTES

Starting Order

Function

0 (continued)

Protection and switching unit

1

2

UCH

S3000 injection

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

ET003:

After ignition relay power

PRESENT

ET005:

Manual gearbox selector lever

NEUTRAL

ET008:

Authorisation to start

YES

ET075:

+ Accessories feed present

YES

ET110:

UCH request to injection or UPC

INACTIVE (STARTING or request for starting)

ET108:

Automatic transmission selector position

PARK or NEUTRAL

ET047:

Brake pedal position Pedal depressed

DEPRESSED

ET048:

Clutch pedal position Pedal depressed

DEPRESSED

ET092:

Engine stopped

YES

ET094:

Engine started

NO (YES with starter on)

ET091:

Engine running

NO (YES engine running)

ET093:

Engine stalled

NO (YES if engine stalled)

ET076:

Starting

AUTHORISED

ET048:

Actuator relay control

PR071:

Computer supply voltage

Fault finding

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

ACTIVE > 11 V

VSC84 1.0

87C-27

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subsection. Test conditions: card in vehicle, ignition on, engine off.

NOTES

Starting Order 2 (continued)

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Function

EDC16 injection

DDCR injection

Display and Notes

ET001:

+ after ignition computer feed

ET076:

Starting

AUTHORISED

ET038:

Engine

STOPPED

ET001:

+ after ignition computer feed

PRESENT

ET076:

Starting

AUTHORISED

ET038:

Engine

STOPPED

PR074:

Battery voltage

Fault finding

PRESENT

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

> 11 V

VSC84 1.0

87C-28

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Customer complaints

87C

Check the battery voltage. Test the multiplex network. No faults must be present; otherwise, deal with them before starting this procedure. Hands-free features: When a card is left in the vehicle, its hands-free operation is blocked. Activate after ignition feed with the card to restore it.

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM FAULTS NOTED

PROBLEM LOCKING/UNLOCKING BY PRESSING BUTTON ON CARD

ALP 1

PROBLEM LOCKING/UNLOCKING LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT BY PRESSING BUTTON ON CARD

ALP 2

PROBLEM OPENING LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT (NOT HANDS-FREE)

ALP 3

PROBLEM OPENING REAR SCREEN (NOT HANDS-FREE)

ALP 4

PROBLEM LOCKING/UNLOCKING FUEL FILLER FLAP

ALP 5

UNLOCKING PROBLEM IN HANDS-FREE MODE

ALP 6

LOCKING PROBLEM IN HANDS-FREE MODE

ALP 7

PROBLEM OPENING THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT IN HANDS-FREE MODE

ALP 8

PROBLEM OPENING THE REAR SCREEN IN HANDS-FREE MODE

ALP 9

PROBLEM LOCKING/UNLOCKING ONE OR MORE DOORS

ALP 10

PROBLEM WITH RAID FUNCTION

ALP 11

WINDOWS FAIL TO CLOSE AFTER TWO ATTEMPTS TO LOCK

ALP 12

VSC84 1.0

87C-29

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Customer complaints

87C

Check the battery voltage. Test the multiplex network. No faults must be present; otherwise, deal with them before starting this procedure. Hands-free features: When a card is left in the vehicle, its hands-free operation is blocked. Activate after ignition feed with the card to restore it.

ANTITHEFT AND STARTING FAULTS NOTED

NO + ACCESSORIES FEED

ALP 13

FORCED AFTER-IGNITION FEED FAILS

ALP 14

THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND AFTER IGNITION FEED FAILS, CARD IN READER

ALP 15

THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND AFTER IGNITION FEED FAILS IN HANDSFREE MODE, BUT WORKS WITH CARD IN READER

ALP 16

THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND GOES INTO AFTER IGNITION FEED

ALP 17

THE STARTER BRIEFLY RUNS BUT THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND GOES INTO AFTER IGNITION FEED

ALP 18

IMPOSSIBLE TO STOP ENGINE

ALP 19

STEERING LOCK FAILS

ALP 20

STARTING ERRATIC

ALP 21

VSC84 1.0

87C-30

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

ALP 1

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

Problem locking/unlocking by pressing button on card

Check for absence of after ignition feed and of card in card reader. First carry out a function fault finding check. Test with another card. Check the condition of the batteries.

Check that statuses ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised are YES after pressing on the card's lock or unlock button. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for those statuses. Run commands AC004 Lock opening elements and AC005 Unlock opening elements to find out if the locks work and the UCH can control them. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for those commands. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-31

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

ALP 2

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

Problem locking/unlocking luggage compartment by pressing button on card

Check for absence of after ignition feed and of card in card reader. First carry out a function fault finding check. Test with another card. Check the condition of the batteries.

Check if the direction indicator lights flash once on unlocking and twice on locking. No Check that statuses ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised are YES after pressing on the card's lock or unlock button. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for those statuses.

Yes

Make sure the tailgate is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET050 Tailgate. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status.

See ALP 3 (non-hands-free model) or 8 (hands-free model).

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-32

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

ALP 3

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

Problem opening luggage compartment (Not hands-free)

First carry out a function fault finding check. The vehicle or luggage compartment must be unlocked.

Check that status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Make sure the tailgate is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET050 Tailgate. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-33

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP) Problem opening rear screen. (Not hands-free)

ALP 4

NOTES

87C

First carry out a function fault finding check. The vehicle or luggage compartment must be unlocked.

Make sure status ET062 Open rear screen request becomes PRESENT when the rear screen opening button is pressed. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Make sure the rear screen is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET041 Opening rear screen. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-34

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

ALP 5

NOTES

87C

Problem locking/unlocking fuel filler flap

First carry out a function fault finding check. The locking/unlocking should function on the driver's door.

With the flap open, try locking and unlocking to make sure the lock bolt slides properly. If okay, make sure the flap is properly position in relation to the motion of the lock bolt. Check the condition and connection of the fuel filler flap lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the earth on both tracks of the flap lock connector. Check while: Locking, earth present on track 3 and + 12 V on track 1 of the flap lock connector. Unlocking, earth present on track 1 and + 12 V on track 3 of the flap lock connector. If okay, replace the fuel filler flap lock. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: UCH connector PP2 track 6

Track 1 of the fuel filler flap lock connector

UCH connector PP2 track 5

Track 3 of the fuel filler flap lock connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-35

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

ALP 6

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

Unlocking problem in hands-free mode

Check for absence of after ignition feed and of card in card reader. Tests must be conducted with the other cards allocated to the vehicle. First carry out a function fault finding check. Carry out a conformity check before using this procedure. Make sure one of the cards was not crippled (locked in the vehicle), activate after ignition feed with the card and try unlocking again with the card.

Make sure the optical sensors are receiving power by checking status ET054 Optical sensors supplied. Unless the vehicle has not been opened for over 72 hours, pulling the handle wakes it up. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Check that status ET055, ET056 or ET057 become active when a hand is passed in front of the corresponding sensor. Test on all the doors. If any status fails to change, apply the fault finding procedure associated with that status. Note: One of these conditions becomes active if the vehicle has not been opened for 72 hours and the corresponding door handle is pulled! Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program them. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, refer to the procedure for it. Run the following commands and check the card coverage zone on each side of the vehicle: AC032 Driver's side exterior aerial test AC033 Passenger's side exterior aerial test The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1.5 m. If not correct, use the faultfinding procedure associated with each command. IMPORTANT This mode allows a Mégane hands-free type card to be detected, but does not allow its recognition. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-36

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

ALP 7

Locking problem in hands-free mode

NOTES

Check for absence of after ignition feed and of card in card reader. Tests must be conducted with the other cards allocated to the vehicle. First carry out a function fault finding check. Make sure all the doors are fully closed (check that the interior lights are off or switch on the ignition to check that no door is open from the instrument panel symbol). Visually check that the lock buttons are not stuck in the down position. Make sure one of the cards was not crippled (locked in the vehicle), activate after ignition feed with the card and try unlocking again with the card.

Make sure statuses ET058, ET059 and ET060 indicating a press on the locking button for each door or the luggage compartment become active when the button is pressed. Test all the lock buttons. See the section for dealing with the status(es) concerned. Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program them. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, see the procedure for it. Run the following commands and check the card coverage zone on each side of the vehicle: AC032 Driver's side exterior aerial test AC033 Passenger side exterior aerial test AC034 Luggage compartment exterior aerial test The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1.5 m. If not correct, use the fault finding procedure associated with each command. IMPORTANT This mode allows a Mégane hands-free type card to be detected, but does not allow its recognition. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-37

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

VSC Vdiag no: 04

ALP 8

87C

Problem opening the luggage compartment in hands-free mode

First carry out a function fault finding check. Vehicle locked. Test with another card.

NOTES

Make sure status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opener button is pressed. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. When the tailgate opening button is pressed, if the card is present and recognised, the direction indicator lights should flash to indicate that the luggage compartment is being unlocked. Yes Check the condition and connection of the tailgate lock connector. Repair if necessary. No

Check for the earth on track 1 of the lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check, when pressing on the opening button, for +12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. If correct, replace the tailgate lock. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program them. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, see the procedure for it. Run command AC034 Luggage compartment exterior aerial test and check the card coverage zone. The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1.5 m. If not correct, use the fault finding procedure associated with each command. IMPORTANT This mode allows a Mégane hands-free type card to be detected, but does not allow its recognition. If everything is okay, reprogram the card(s). If the system still does not work, replace them. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-38

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

ALP 8 CONTINUED

NOTES

First carry out a function fault finding check. Vehicle unlocked.

Check that status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. If not correct, use the fault finding procedure associated with this status. Make sure the tailgate is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET050 Tailgate opener". If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Check the condition and connection of the tailgate lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the earth on track 1 of the lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check, when pressing on the opening button, for +12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. If correct, replace the tailgate lock. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-39

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

VSC Vdiag no: 04

ALP 9

NOTES

87C

Problem opening the rear screen in hands-free mode

First carry out a function fault finding check. Vehicle locked. Test with another card.

Make sure status ET062 Open rear screen request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. If not, use the pertinent fault finding procedure. When the rear screen opening button is pressed, if the card is present and recognised, the direction indicator lights should flash to indicate that the luggage compartment is being unlocked. Yes Check the connection and condition of the rear screen lock connector. Repair if necessary. No

Check for the earth on track 1 of the lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check, when pressing the opening button, for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. If okay, replace the rear screen lock. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program them. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, see the procedure for it. Run command AC034 Luggage compartment exterior aerial test and check the card coverage zone. The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1.5 m. If not, use the fault finding procedure for this command. IMPORTANT This mode allows a Mégane hands-free type card to be detected, but does not allow its recognition. If everything is okay, reprogram the card(s). If the system still does not work, replace them. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-40

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

ALP 9 CONTINUED

NOTES

First carry out a function fault finding check. Vehicle unlocked.

Make sure status ET062 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Make sure the tailgate is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET050 Tailgate. If not correct, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Check the connection and condition of the rear-screen lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the earth on track 1 of the lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check, when pressing on the opening button, for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. If okay, replace the rear screen lock. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-41

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

ALP 10

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

Problem locking/unlocking one or more doors

First carry out a function fault finding check. Check whether configuration LC029 Selective opening element opening is WITH. Reconfigure with command CF036 Selective opening element opener, if necessary.

Use commands AC004 Central door locking, AC005 Central door unlocking and AC006 Unlocking by driver, to confirm the fault. Apply the fault finding procedure associated with these commands. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-42

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

ALP 11

NOTES

87C

Problem with RAID function

First carry out a function fault finding check. Make sure the RAID function is active by checking status ET043 RAID function authorised by central door looking. Make sure no door is considered open by the UCH. Check the validity of the vehicle speed signal. Check for faults in the ABS system. Check for faults in the airbag system.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-43

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

ALP 12

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

Windows fail to close after two attempts to lock

Make sure the vehicle is really equipped with a sequential-control window lift. Make sure status ET087 One-touch electric window authorisation is ACTIVE. See the treatment for this status if necessary.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-44

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

ALP 13

NOTES

87C

No + Accessories feed

Check the battery voltage. Begin the fault finding with the ignition off and the vehicle locked. When the vehicle is unlocked, the instrument panel should light up for a moment. If not, carry out the fault finding procedure for the multiplex network and instrument panel.

The vehicle should switch to timed power (approximately 20 minutes) after the driver's door is opened (ET053 Driver's door). If nothing happens, try by: – pushing the Start button (ET070 Ignition switch), or – switching on the hazard warning lights (ET085 Hazard warning lights button), or – switching on the side lights (ET081 Lighting switch position). If okay, run fault finding on the faulty component's status. If not okay, use ALP "No dialogue with UCH" in the UCH section. The vehicle goes into accessories feed mode when the Start button is pressed (timed power active). If not okay, check Start button operation with status ET070 Ignition switch and use the fault finding procedure associated with this status if necessary. If the Start button works properly, use the fault finding procedure for status ET075 "+ accessories feed present". If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-45

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

ALP 14

Forced after-ignition feed fails

NOTES

Check the battery voltage. Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. Test with another card. Switching to + accessories feed should work. If not, first use ALP 13. It can be checked while trying to activate after ignition feed if the verlog indicator light: – Glows steadily, meaning that the steering lock is not recognised. – Glows steadily for 3 seconds and flashes at 4 Hz, meaning the card is not recognised. Review of the procedure for forcing after ignition feed: + accessories feed off, card in reader, starting conditions not met, followed by a long (approximately 5 seconds) press on the Start button.

Make sure there is no "Insert card" message on the instrument panel. Make sure statuses: ET008 Blank central unit is NO. ET011 Blank card is PROGRAMMED. ET012 Card allocated is YES. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary. Make sure status ET110 UCH request to UPC or injection becomes + after ignition feed after a request for forced after ignition feed. If everything is okay, run Protection and Switching Unit fault finding. Make sure the steering lock functions properly by checking in particular that: – status ET071 Unprogrammed steering lock is NO, ET072 Steering lock is UNLOCKED and ET073 Steering lock signal is UNLOCKED. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-46

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

ALP 15

The vehicle fails to start and after ignition feed fails, card in reader

NOTES

Check the battery voltage. First carry out a function fault finding check. Switching to + accessories feed should work. If not, apply ALP 13 UCH first. Check that the start-up conditions are met: It can be checked while attempting to start if the immobiliser warning light: – Glows steadily, meaning that the steering lock is not recognised. – Glows steadily for 3 seconds and flashes at 4 Hz, meaning the card is not recognised. It can also be checked while trying to start; if the Start button flashes, the card has not been detected or recognised.

If the message "Insert card" is displayed on the instrument panel. Check the following statuses: – ET116 Card code received must be ACTIVE. If it is inactive, run a test with the 2 nd vehicle card (if the vehicle only has one card, take a card from another MEGANE II vehicle and try to start the vehicle). – If ET116 becomes ACTIVE, reallocate the card SC006 Card allocation. If the fault is still present, replace the faulty card. – If ET116 remains INACTIVE, apply the fault finding for F014 CC.0. If the message "Insert card" is not displayed on the instrument panel. Make sure statuses: – ET008 Blank central unit is NO. – ET011 Card blank is PROGRAMMED. – ET012 Card allocated is YES. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary. Make sure status ET110 UCH request to UPC or injection becomes START after a request to start. If everything is okay, run Protection and Switching Unit fault finding. Make sure the steering lock functions properly by checking in particular that: – status ET071 Unprogrammed steering lock is NO, ET072 Steering lock is UNLOCKED and ET073 Steering lock signal is UNLOCKED. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-47

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

ALP 16

The vehicle fails to start and after ignition feed fails in hands-free mode, but works with card in reader

NOTES

First carry out a function fault finding check. Test with another card. Switching to + accessories feed should work. If not, apply ALP 13 first. Check that the start-up conditions are met: Make sure the luggage compartment is considered closed by the UCH with status ET050 Tailgate. Conduct the tests with the other cards associated with the vehicle.

Make sure the UCH is properly configured for hands-free operation. Reconfigure if necessary. Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program them. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, see the procedure for it. Run command AC036 Interior aerial test and check the card coverage zone. The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone. When the card is outside the vehicle, it should not be detected by the interior aerials. If not okay, use the pertinent fault finding procedure for each command. IMPORTANT This mode allows a Mégane hands-free type card to be detected, but does not allow its recognition. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-48

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

ALP 17

Vehicle fails to start and goes into after ignition feed

NOTES

Check the voltage of the battery. Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. Make sure the start-up conditions are met (no gear engaged). The engine immobiliser warning light can be used to see if the injection is still protected (steady glow). Check the conformity of the antitheft and starting components.

Make sure status ET110 UCH request to injection or UPC is START if the start-up conditions are met when the button is pressed. If there is a fault, see the procedure for this status. If everything is okay, run fault finding on the ignition circuit in the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-49

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

ALP 18

The starter briefly runs but the vehicle fails to start and goes into after ignition feed

NOTES

Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. Check the conformity of the antitheft and starting components. The engine immobiliser warning light can be used to see if the injection is still protected (steady glow).

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-50

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

ALP 19

NOTES

87C

Impossible to stop engine

Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function.

See whether the engine shuts off if the Start button is pressed twice. If it does, make sure the card is not considered absent by the UCH, particularly by checking for messages on the instrument panel. Make sure the button presses are properly perceived by the UCH with status ET070 Ignition switch. If not, see the treatment for this status. Make sure status ET110 UCH request to injection or UPC is STOP after when the button is pressed. If there is a fault, see the treatment for this status. Check the consistency of parameter PR008 Vehicle speed with the vehicle at rest. If not, run fault finding on the ABS. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-51

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

87C

ALP 20

Steering lock fails

NOTES

Make sure there are no steering lock faults. Check the battery voltage. It should be between 9 V and 16 V. Check the consistency of parameter PR008 Vehicle speed. Make sure there are no airbag computer faults. Remember: With hands-free, the steering locks the instant the ignition is switched off. With card in reader, the steering locks after the ignition is switched off as soon as the card is removed.

Check the consistency of statuses ET072 Steering lock and ET073 Steering lock signal. In the event of a fault, see the procedure for these statuses in the UCH section. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-52

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag no: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

ALP 21

NOTES

87C

Starting erratic

Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function.

Manual gearbox Make sure the clutch pedal switch works properly. Particularly by checking the consistency of status ET048 Clutch pedal position in the UCH. In the event of a fault, use fault finding procedure DF003 Clutch switch circuit. Make sure that the brake pedal switch is working correctly. Particularly by checking the consistency of status ET047 Brake pedal position in the UCH. In the event of a fault, use fault finding procedure DF004 Brake light switch circuit. Make sure that the gear selector lever is working correctly. Particularly by checking the consistency of status ET005 Manual gearbox gear lever position in the Protection and Switching Unit. In the event of a fault, use fault finding procedure for status ET005. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. Automatic transmission Make sure that the brake pedal switch is working correctly. Particularly by checking the consistency of status ET047 Brake pedal position in the UCH. In the event of a fault, use fault finding procedure DF004 Brake light switch circuit. Make sure the clutch pedal switch works properly. Particularly by checking the validity of status ET108 Automatic transmission lever position in the UCH. In the event of a fault, use fault finding procedure for status ET108. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-53

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Help

VSC Vdiag no: 04

87C

Diagram of the hands-free function

1 2 3 4

: range of the door aerials : range of the luggage compartment aerial : range of the interior aerials : range of two aerials that may not be covered if a phase inversion occurs in either one. Note: In the event of an aerial earth short-circuit, the range may double. If an interior aerial has a short circuit to earth, its range can cover the exterior aerials (risk of locking/unlocking impossible but starting possible with the card outside the vehicle). If an exterior aerial has a short circuit to earth, the vehicle can be locked/ unlocked with the card approximately 2 m or more from the vehicle.

VSC84 1.0

87C-54

Edition 3

187F

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Introduction

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

87F

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): Mégane II

Name of computer: AAP

Function concerned: Parking proximity sensor

Program No: 0000 Vdiag No.: 04

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP Special tooling required Special tooling required Multimeter Elé. 1681

Universal bornier

3. RECAP Procedure To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed). Proceed as follows: – Put the vehicle card in the card reader. – press and hold Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled, – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. To cut off + after ignition, proceed as follows: – disconnect the diagnostic tool, – press the Start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds), – Ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer indicator lights on the instrument panel have gone out.

AAP_V04_PRELI

AAPX84ph21.0

87F-1

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Introduction

87F

Faults Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since, or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is switched on after the + after ignition feed (without any system components being active). For a present fault, apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the instructions in the Notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors for these lines (for oxidation, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the component detected as faulty, – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation, wear). Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check data that does not produce a fault on the diagnostic tool because the data is inconsistent. Therefore, this phase is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint, – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values, consult the corresponding fault finding page. Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK but the customer complaint is still present, the fault should be processed by customer complaint. A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart.

AAPX84ph21.0

87F-2

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Introduction

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

87F

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Perform a pre-diagnostic on the system

Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with computer?

no See Fault Finding Chart no. 1

yes Read the faults

Faults present

no Conformity check

yes The cause is still present

Deal with present faults

no

Fault solved

Deal with stored faults Use fault finding charts (ALPs)

The cause is still present

no

Fault solved The cause is still present

no

Fault solved

yes

Contact the Techline with the completed fault finding log

AAPX84ph21.0

87F-3

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Introduction

87F

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE (continued) Wiring check Fault finding problems Disconnecting the connectors and/or manipulating the wiring harness may temporarily remove the cause of a fault. Electrical measurements of voltage, resistance and insulation are generally correct, especially if the fault is not present when the analysis is made (stored fault). Visual inspection Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. Carefully check the fuses, insulators and wiring harness routing. Look for signs of oxidation. Tactile inspection While manipulating the wiring harness, use the diagnostic tool to note any change in fault status from stored to present. Make sure that the connectors are properly locked. Apply light pressure to the connectors. Twist the wiring harness. If there is a change in status, try to locate the source of the fault. Inspection of each component Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and tabs, as well as the crimping (no crimping on the insulating section). Make sure that the clips and tabs are properly locked in the sockets. Check that no clips or tabs have been dislodged during connection. Check the clip contact pressure using an appropriate model of tab. Resistance check Check the continuity of entire lines, then section by section. Look for a short circuit to earth, to + 12 V or to another wire. If a fault is detected, repair or replace the wiring harness.

AAPX84ph21.0

87F-4

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Introduction

87F

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

IMPORTANT!

NOTE Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the procedure, enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT You will always be asked for this log: ● when requesting technical assistance from the Techline, ● for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory, ● to be enclosed when returning monitored parts on request. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement, and enables better analysis of the parts removed. 6. SAFETY ADVICE Safety rules must be observed during any work on a component to prevent any damage or injury: – make sure that the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load, – use the appropriate tools.

AAPX84ph21.0

87F-5

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Parking proximity sensor

Page 1/2

List of monitored parts: Computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

Update version ●

Customer complaint 1198

Other

●

1173

Continuous buzzer

1172

The system does not detect obstacles

004

Intermittently

Your comments:

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 011

When the ignition is switched on

005

While driving

009

Sudden fault

999

When reverse gear is engaged

Other

●

No buzzer

Your comments:

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of diagnostic manual:

Workshop Repair Manual Assisted fault finding

Technical Note

Fault finding manual no: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No: Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 24 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Parking proximity sensor ●

Page 2/2

Computer identification and system parts replaced

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Fault name

Specification

Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no.

●

Stored

Parameter name

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description:

●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments:

FD 24 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - System operation

87F

OPERATION The system consists of four sensors built into the rear bumper, a computer and a buzzer. The system assists the driver during parking manoeuvres by warning him of any obstacles to the rear of the vehicle. – The sensors and the computer calculate the distance between the vehicle and any obstacles. The sensors operate over a distance range from 20 - 30 cm minimum to 150 cm maximum. – The driver is informed of the distances by a buzzer. – The system only works when the vehicle is in reverse gear. Activation is indicated by a brief 0.5 second activation sound. The buzzer is activated when the vehicle is 150 cm from the obstacle. As the distance diminishes, the frequency of the buzzer increases. When the distance reaches 20 - 30 cm, the buzzer becomes continuous. – The system can only be activated in + after ignition feed.

DEACTIVATING THE SYSTEM The parking proximity sensor system can be deactivated in two ways: – Temporary deactivation: briefly pressing (1 second) the parking proximity sensor switch on the centre console deactivates the system (the red indicator light on the switch comes on). The function can be switched on again by pressing briefly for a second time (the red indicator light on the switch goes out) or by switching the ignition off and back on. – Permanent deactivation: the parking proximity sensor system can be deactivated for a longer period by pressing and holding (for approximately 3 seconds) the parking proximity switch on the centre console (the red indicator light on the switch comes on). The function can only be reactivated by pressing and holding for a second time (the red indicator light on the switch goes out); switching the ignition off and on again will not be sufficient to reactivate the function. Note: The status screen of the diagnostic tool can be used to determine the status of the system (ready, detecting, suspended or deactivated) with status ET003 Parking proximity sensor (see conformity check or status interpretation). Fault finding A low pitch 5-second continuous warning sound informs the driver that a system fault has occurred when the ignition is switched on.

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-8

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Replacement of components

87F

REPLACING THE PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR COMPUTER BEFORE REPLACING ANY COMPUTER IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT YOU CONTACT TECHLINE. When replacing the computer, apply the following procedure: ● switch off the ignition, ● replace the computer, ● configure the vehicle identification using command CF005 Vehicle identification (refer to Configuration and Programming), ● configure the volume of the buzzer and adjust the pitch using commands CF001 Buzzer volume and CF006 Adjusting the pitch (refer to Configuration and Programming), ● enter the Vehicle Identification Number using command VP001 Write VIN, ● check that the system is operating correctly and make sure that there are no faults.

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-9

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Configurations and programming

87F

CONFIGURATION AFTER REPLACING THE COMPUTER After replacing the computer, reconfigure the parking proximity sensor computer with the vehicle type using configuration CF005 Vehicle identification (repair mode menu, diagnostic tool configuration function). The configuration adapts the sensors' detection field to the type of vehicle. The type of gearbox (automatic or manual) associated with the type of vehicle determines when the parking proximity sensor will come on. Activation of the parking proximity sensor is indicated by a brief 0.5 second activation sound (reverse gear engaged). On vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the 3-second delay prevents the activation tone from sounding every time the driver shifts from position P to position D. After configuring the computer, check that the configurations have been registered correctly using configuration reading LC005 Vehicle identification (repair mode menu, diagnostic tool configuration function).

SETTING OPTIONS At the customer's request, the volume and tone of the buzzer may be adjusted (repair mode menu, diagnostic tool configuration function). Configuration CF001 Buzzer volume is used to adjust the volume of the buzzer. There are five selections: – NONE – LOW – MEDIUM – LOUD – MAXIMUM Configuration CF006 Pitch adjustment is used to adjust the pitch of the buzzer. There are three selections: – 800 Hz – 1000 Hz – 2000 Hz (high-pitch) After configuring the computer, check that the configurations have been registered correctly using configuration readings LC001 Buzzer volume and LC006 Pitch adjustment (repair mode menu, diagnostic tool configuration reading function).

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-10

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Fault summary table

Tool fault

DTC

DF002

9001

Left-hand outer sensor

DF003

9002

Left-hand inner sensor

DF004

9004

Right-hand outer sensor

DF005

9003

Right-hand inner sensor

DF006

9006

Buzzer

DF007

9007

Sensor supply voltage

DF008

9005

Computer fault

DF012

9009

Parking proximity sensor switch indicator light

87F

Diagnostic tool title

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-11

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

DF002 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

LEFT-HAND OUTER SENSOR CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1.DEF: Internal electronic fault

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse gear if the parking proximity sensor is ACTIVE (READY): parking proximity sensor switch indicator light off, consult the interpretation of status ET003 Parking proximity sensor. Special notes: This fault is indicated by the buzzer (a 5-second warning sound) and the system shuts down.

Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector. With the 16-track connector disconnected, measure the computer internal resistances: The computer resistance between track 15 and track 9 should be 215 kΩ ± 10 kΩ. The computer resistance between track 15 and track 10 should be 100 kΩ ± 5 kΩ. If the readings do not match the above values, or if there is a short circuit between the specified tracks, contact the Techline. Remove the rear bumper and disconnect the 3-track connector on the left-hand outer sensor. Check the condition of the sensor connector. Replace the connector if necessary. Measure the resistance between track 2 (signal) and track 1 (supply) of the sensor. Replace the sensor if its resistance is not 240 kΩ ± 15 kΩ. Then measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 3 (earth). Replace the sensor if its resistance is not 39 kΩ ± 5 kΩ (wait a few seconds for the reading to stabilise). Switch off the ignition, and disconnect the parking proximity sensor computer to check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 9

Track 1 of the left-hand outer sensor

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 15

Track 2 of the left-hand outer sensor

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 10

Track 3 of the left-hand outer sensor

Repair if necessary (see vehicle wiring diagram). If the fault is still present, replace the left-hand outer sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the stored faults. Follow the instructions to confirm the repair. Deal with any other faults.

AAP_V04_DF002

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-12

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

DF003 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

LEFT-HAND INNER SENSOR CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1.DEF: Internal electronic fault

Condition for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse gear if the parking proximity sensor is ACTIVE (READY): parking proximity sensor switch indicator light off, consult the interpretation of status ET003 Parking proximity sensor. Special notes: This fault is indicated by the buzzer (a 5-second warning sound) and the system shuts down.

Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector. With the 16-track connector disconnected, measure the computer internal resistances: The computer resistance between track 14 and track 9 should be 215 kΩ ± 10 kΩ. The computer resistance between track 14 and track 10 should be 100 kΩ ± 5 kΩ. If the readings do not match the above values, or if there is a short circuit between the specified tracks, contact the Techline. Remove the rear bumper and disconnect the 3-track connector on the left-hand inner detection sensor. Check the condition of the sensor connector. Replace the connector if necessary. Measure the resistance between track 2 (signal) and track 1 (supply) of the sensor. Replace the sensor if its resistance is not 240 kΩ ± 15 kΩ. Then measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 3 (earth). Replace the sensor if its resistance is not 39 kΩ ± 5 kΩ (wait a few seconds for the reading to stabilise). Switch off the ignition, and disconnect the parking proximity sensor computer to check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 9

Track 1 of the left-hand inner sensor

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 14

Track 2 of the left-hand inner sensor

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 10

Track 3 of the left-hand inner sensor

Repair if necessary (see vehicle wiring diagram). If the fault is still present, replace the left-hand inner detection sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the stored faults. Follow the instructions to confirm the repair. Deal with any other faults.

AAP_V04_DF003

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-13

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

DF004 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

RIGHT-HAND OUTER SENSOR CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1.DEF: Internal electronic fault

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse gear if the parking proximity sensor is ACTIVE (READY): parking proximity sensor switch indicator light off, consult the interpretation of status ET003 Parking proximity sensor. Special notes: This fault is indicated by the buzzer (a 5-second warning sound) and the system shuts down.

Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector. With the 16-track connector disconnected, measure the computer internal resistances: The computer resistance between track 16 and track 9 should be 215 kΩ ± 10 kΩ. The computer resistance between track 16 and track 10 should be 100 kΩ ± 5 kΩ. If the readings do not match the above values, or if there is a short circuit between the specified tracks, contact the Techline. If the above check fails to solve the fault, remove the rear bumper and disconnect the right-hand outer proximity sensor's 3-track connector. Check the condition of the sensor connector. Replace the connector if necessary. Measure the resistance between track 2 (signal) and track 1 (supply) of the sensor. Replace the sensor if its resistance is not 240 kΩ ± 15 kΩ. Then measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 3 (earth). Replace the sensor if its resistance is not 39 kΩ ± 5 kΩ (wait a few seconds for the reading to stabilise). Switch off the ignition, and disconnect the parking proximity sensor computer to check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 9

Track 1 of the right-hand outer sensor

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 16

Track 2 of the right-hand outer sensor

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 10

Track 3 of the right-hand outer sensor

Repair if necessary (see vehicle wiring diagram). If the fault is still present, replace the right-hand outer detection sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the stored faults. Follow the instructions to confirm the repair. Deal with any other faults.

AAP_V04_DF004

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-14

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

DF005 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

RIGHT-HAND INNER SENSOR CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1.DEF: Internal electronic fault

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse gear if the parking proximity sensor is ACTIVE (READY): parking proximity sensor switch indicator light off, consult the interpretation of status ET003 Parking proximity sensor. Special notes: This fault is indicated by the buzzer (a 5-second warning sound) and the system shuts down.

Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector. With the 16-track connector disconnected, measure the computer internal resistances: The computer resistance between track 13 and track 9 should be 215 kΩ ± 10 kΩ. The computer resistance between track 13 and track 10 should be 100 kΩ ± 5 kΩ. If the readings do not match the above values, or if there is a short circuit between the specified tracks, contact the Techline. If the above check fails to solve the fault, remove the rear bumper and disconnect the right-hand inner proximity sensor's 3-track connector. Check the condition of the sensor connector. Replace the connector if necessary. Measure the resistance between track 2 (signal) and track 1 (supply) of the sensor. Replace the sensor if its resistance is not 240 kΩ ± 15 kΩ. Then measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 3 (earth). Replace the sensor if its resistance is not 39 kΩ ± 5 kΩ (wait a few seconds for the reading to stabilise). Switch off the ignition, and disconnect the parking proximity sensor computer to check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 9

Track 1 of the right-hand inner sensor

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 13

Track 2 of the right-hand inner sensor

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 10

Track 3 of the right-hand inner sensor

Repair if necessary (see vehicle wiring diagram). If the fault is still present, replace the right-hand inner detection sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the stored faults. Follow the instructions to confirm the repair. Deal with any other faults.

AAP_V04_DF005

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-15

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

DF006 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

BUZZER CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse gear if the parking proximity sensor is ACTIVE (READY): parking proximity sensor switch indicator light off, consult the interpretation of status ET003 Parking proximity sensor. Special notes: The fault is indicated by the absence of the 1-second sound normally emitted by the buzzer when reverse gear is selected.

Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector. With the 16-track connector disconnected, measure the resistance inside the computer between track 2 and track 6. If the value measured is not 314 Ω or if there is a short circuit across the tracks specified, contact the Techline. Check the connection and condition of the connector on the buzzer. Replace the connector if necessary. Switch off the ignition, and disconnect the parking proximity sensor computer to check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 2

Track 2 of the buzzer

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 6

Track 1 of the buzzer

Repair if necessary (see vehicle wiring diagram). Measure the resistance of the buzzer between track 1 and track 2. Replace the buzzer if its resistance is not approximately 48 Ω. If the fault is still present, replace the buzzer.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the stored faults. Follow the instructions to confirm the repair. Deal with any other faults.

AAP_V04_DF006

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-16

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

DF007 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault appears as present or stored again after: – clearing the fault, switching the ignition off and on, and shifting into reverse. Special notes: The sensors receive a 12-volt power supply directly from the computer.

With the parking proximity sensor computer 16-track connector connected and the ignition on, measure the sensor power supply coming from the computer. The voltage should be equal to the battery voltage (± 0.5 V) when measuring between track 9 (+ 12 V) and track 10 (earth). If there is not a 12-V power supply between the tracks specified above, remove the rear bumper to access the sensors. Switch off the ignition and disconnect the parking proximity sensor computer to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 9

Track 1 of the four sensors

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 10

Track 3 of the four sensors

Repair if necessary. If the sensor power supply is correct (no short circuit), reconnect the computer connector and four sensor connectors. Switch on the ignition and disconnect the sensors, one at a time, to see if any of the sensors causes the power supply to drop. Replace the defective sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the stored faults. Follow the instructions to confirm the repair. Deal with any other faults.

AAP_V04_DF007

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-17

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

DF008 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

COMPUTER FAULT 1.DEF: Electric fault inside computer 2.DEF: Electric fault inside computer 3.DEF: Electric fault inside computer

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault appears as present or stored again after: – clearing the fault, switching the ignition off and on, and shifting into reverse. Special notes: If the fault is present and the buzzer does not emit a beep, contact the Techline.

After following the instructions, if the fault recurs, switch off the ignition and disconnect the parking proximity sensor computer supply fuse (see vehicle diagram). Reconnect the fuse, switch the ignition back on, and perform a fault reading. If the fault recurs, check the connections and condition of the parking proximity sensor computer connector (no damage to the connections). Repair if necessary. With the ignition switched off, disconnect the parking proximity sensor computer connector to check the conformity of the supplies and check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Only with "Lear" Vdiag 48 UPC or later Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 1

+ After ignition feed (track 1 of the UPC CM connector)

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 3

Earth

Only with "Siemens" Vdiag 44 UPC Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 1

+ After ignition feed (track 11 of the UPC PPH2 connector)

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 3

Earth

Repair if necessary (see vehicle wiring diagram). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the stored faults. Follow the instructions to confirm the repair. Deal with any other faults.

AAP_V04_DF008

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-18

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

DF012 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR SWITCH INDICATOR LIGHT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth CO.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault appears after: – shifting to reverse gear and pressing the parking proximity sensor deactivation switch.

Remove the parking proximity sensor switch and check the connections and condition of its connector. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track B3 of the parking proximity sensor switch connector. Repair if necessary. With the ignition off, disconnect the parking proximity sensor computer to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 5

Track B2 of the parking proximity sensor switch

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, replace the parking proximity sensor switch.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the stored faults. Follow the instructions to confirm the repair. Deal with any other faults.

AAP_V04_DF012

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-19

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

NOTES

Order

Function

1

Parking proximity sensor system status

2

Parking proximity sensor deactivation switch

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Conformity check

Only check conformity after a thorough check with the diagnostic tool. Conditions for applying fault finding procedure: Engine stopped, ignition on.

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Fault finding

For more information or in the event of a fault consult the interpretation of status ET003 Parking proximity sensor.

ET003:

Parking proximity sensor function

ET004:

Parking proximity sensor switch

PRESS DETECTED when the switch is pressed, RELEASED when released.

If the switch does not operate as indicated, replace the switch.

10.5 V < X < 14.4 V

In the event of a fault, apply the interpretation of DF007 Sensor supply voltage.

10.5 V < X < 14.4 V

If there is a fault with this parameter, check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the computer power supply and earth (see wiring diagrams). If the fault is still present, carry out fault finding on the charge circuit.

YES or NO

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET001 Reverse gear engaged.

Sensor supply voltage

Feeds PR020:

4

Display and notes READY (system operational and ready to detect) DETECTING (if the system is detecting) SUSPENDED (if the system is temporarily deactivated) DEACTIVATED (if the system is completely deactivated)

PR006:

3

Reverse gear selection

87F

ET001:

Computer supply voltage

Reverse gear engaged

AAPX84ph2V1.0

AAP_V04_CCONF

87F-20

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

NOTES

Order

5

Function

Buzzer control

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Conformity check

Only check conformity after a thorough check with the diagnostic tool. Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure: Engine stopped, ignition on.

Parameter or Status checked or Action

ET002:

PR001:

Display and notes

Fault finding

Buzzer control

ACTIVE if the buzzer sounds. INACTIVE otherwise.

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET002 Buzzer control.

Left-hand outer sensor distance

20 cm < X < 150 cm depending on the proximity of the obstacle (out of detection range: 255).

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of parameter PR001 Left-hand outer sensor distance.

20 cm < X < 150 cm PR002:

Left-hand inner sensor distance

depending on the proximity of the obstacle (out of detection range: 255).

20 cm < X < 150 cm 6

Proximity sensors

87F

PR003:

Right-hand outer sensor distance

depending on the proximity of the obstacle (out of detection range: 255).

20 cm < X < 150 cm PR004:

Right-hand inner sensor distance

depending on the proximity of the obstacle (out of detection range: 255).

20 cm < X < 150 cm PR005:

Shortest distance calculated

depending on the proximity of the obstacle (out of detection range: 255).

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of parameter PR002 Left-hand inner sensor distance. In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of parameter PR003 Right-hand outer sensor distance. In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of parameter PR004 Right-hand inner sensor distance. In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of parameter PR005 Shortest distance calculated.

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-21

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Status summary table

Tool status

87F

Diagnostic tool title

ET001

Reverse gear engaged

ET002

Buzzer control

ET003

Parking proximity sensor function

ET004

Parking proximity sensor switch

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-22

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87F

REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET001

NOTES

Special note: Only carry out the checks if statuses YES and NO are inconsistent with the position of the gear lever.

Check that the reversing lights are operating correctly: they come on when reverse gear is engaged and go out when it is disengaged. If the reversing lights fail to function as specified: With the ignition switched off, disconnect the parking proximity sensor computer connector to check the insulation (against + 12 V), continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Only for 3 and 5-door hatches Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 4

Track 5 of the rear left-hand lights connector

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 4

Track 1 of the rear right-hand lights connector

Only for 4-door hatches Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 4

Track 5 of the rear left-hand lights connector

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 4

Track 2 of the rear right-hand lights connector

Only for cabriolets Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 4

Track 6 of the rear left-hand lights connector

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 4

Track 1 of the rear right-hand lights connector

Only for estates Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 4

Track 5 of the rear left-hand lights connector

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 4

Track 5 of the rear right-hand lights connector

Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

AAP_V04_ET001

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-23

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87F

BUZZER CONTROL ET002

NOTES

ET002 Remains INACTIVE

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check that the parking proximity sensor system is operating correctly using status ET003 Parking proximity sensor (parking proximity sensor switch indicator light not lit). If this status is showing "suspended" or "deactivated", reboot the system by pressing the button for 1 or 3 seconds; consult interpretation of status ET003. Check that the parking proximity sensor is correctly configured in relation to the vehicle type on which it is fitted (LC005 Vehicle identification: Body type, Automatic gearbox or manual gearbox). If necessary, reconfigure the computer using command CF005 Vehicle identification. With the vehicle near an obstacle (20 to 150 cm), make sure the real distance matches the value displayed by the diagnostic tool (PR001 to PR004). If the distance is incorrect or if the distance parameters remain at 255, make sure nothing is interfering with the reading (sticker, mud, snow etc. on the rear bumper).

ET002 ACTIVE but buzzer fails to sound.

Make sure that the buzzer volume is not set at ZERO (LC001: ZERO). If the configured volume is ZERO, reconfigure the computer using command CF001 Buzzer volume. Select the volume setting preferred by the customer (low, medium, high, maximum). With the ignition switched off, disconnect the parking proximity sensor computer to check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 2

Track 2 of the buzzer

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 6

Track 1 of the buzzer

Repair if necessary (see vehicle wiring diagram). Measure the resistance of the buzzer across the two tracks. Replace the buzzer if its resistance is not approximately 48 Ω. If the fault is still present, replace the buzzer.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

AAP_V04_ET002

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-24

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87F

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR FUNCTION ET003

NOTES

Special notes: If the parking proximity sensor system is suspended or deactivated, the parking proximity sensor switch indicator light is on.

This status indicates whether the parking proximity sensor system is on or off: – ET003: READY This means that, when reverse gear is selected, the parking proximity sensor system detects obstacles and the buzzer sounds (the parking proximity sensor switch indicator light is off). – ET003: DETECTING This information is displayed when in reverse gear and indicates that the parking proximity sensor has detected an obstacle. – ET003: SUSPENDED This means the parking proximity sensor system is switched off (no detection possible). The suspension is temporary because the parking proximity system comes back on after + after ignition feed is switched off and on. The system can be suspended and switched back on manually by briefly pressing (one second) the parking proximity sensor switch. – ET003: OFF This means the parking proximity sensor system is switched off (no detection possible). This suspension is permanent (switching the + after ignition feed off and on does not reactivate the system). The system can be deactivated or reactivated by pressing and holding (3 seconds) the parking proximity sensor switch. If the status is not as specified, check for an earth on track A2 of the parking proximity sensor switch. Repair if necessary. With ignition switched off, disconnect the parking proximity sensor switch connector to check the insulation (against earth and to + 12 V), the continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Parking proximity sensor switch track B1

Track 12 of the parking proximity sensor computer white connector

Repair if necessary. If the connection just checked is okay (no open or short circuit), and there is an earth on track A2 of the switch but the fault is still present, check switch operation with an ohmmeter. Switch not pressed: insulation between track A2 and B1. Switch pressed: continuity between track A2 and B1. Replace the parking proximity sensor switch if it fails to function as specified.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

AAP_V04_ET003

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-25

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87F

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR SWITCH ET004

NOTES

Special notes: Only apply the interpretation of this status if the position of the parking proximity sensor switch is inconsistent with the information supplied by the status (Press Detected or Released). There must be no present or stored faults.

If the status is not as specified, check for an earth on track A2 of the parking proximity sensor switch. Repair if necessary. With ignition switched off, disconnect the parking proximity sensor switch connector to check the insulation (against earth and to + 12 V), the continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Parking proximity sensor switch track B1

Track 12 of the parking proximity sensor computer white connector

Repair if necessary. If the connection just checked is okay (no open or short circuit), and there is an earth on track A2 of the switch but the fault is still present, check switch operation with an ohmmeter. Switch not pressed: insulation between track A2 and B1. Switch pressed: continuity between track A2 and B1. Replace the parking proximity sensor switch if it fails to function as specified.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

AAP_V04_ET004

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-26

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Parameter summary table

Tool parameter

87F

Diagnostic tool title

PR001

Left-hand outer sensor distance

PR002

Left-hand inner sensor distance

PR003

Right-hand outer sensor distance

PR004

Right-hand inner sensor distance

PR005

Shortest distance calculated

PR006

Sensor supply voltage

PR020

Computer supply voltage

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-27

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

PR001 PR002 PR003 PR004

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87F

LEFT-HAND OUTER SENSOR DISTANCE LEFT-HAND INNER SENSOR DISTANCE RIGHT-HAND OUTER SENSOR DISTANCE RIGHT-HAND INNER SENSOR DISTANCE

Special notes: Before searching for a fault with these parameters, make sure no fault is present or stored. If there is one, use the fault finding procedure associated with the fault detected by the diagnostic tool. If one of the sensors shows a value of 255, this means that it is not detecting any obstacle within its range. Note: The ultrasonic sensors are very fragile. Therefore, when removing the rear bumper, be careful not to scratch them.

Check that the parking proximity sensor is correctly configured in relation to the vehicle type on which it is fitted (LC005 Vehicle identification: Body type, Automatic gearbox or manual gearbox). If necessary, reconfigure the computer using command CF005 Vehicle identification. With the vehicle near an obstacle (20 to 150 cm), make sure the real distance matches the value displayed by the diagnostic tool (PR001 to PR004). If the distance is incorrect or if the distance parameters remain at 255 (which means that the sensor is not detecting an obstacle), make sure nothing is interfering with the reading (sticker, mud, snow etc. on the rear bumper). If the distances displayed by the sensors seem incorrect or if 255 is displayed continuously, check the condition of the sensor(s). There must be no scratches on the detection component (outer metal section) of the sensors. Replace the defective sensor. If the fault is still present, apply the interpretation of the fault associated with the sensor for which the distance parameter seems incorrect (even if the diagnostic tool does not report a fault).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

AAP_V04_PR001/AAP_V04_PR002/AAP_V04_PR003/AAP_V04_PR004

87F-28

AAPX84ph2V1.0

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87F

SHORTEST DISTANCE CALCULATED PR005

Special notes: Before searching for a fault with this parameter, make sure that no fault is present or stored. If there is one, use the fault finding procedure associated with the fault detected by the diagnostic tool. NOTES

Note: When removing the rear bumper, be careful not to scratch them. This parameter is an average calculated by the computer when an obstacle is placed between two sensors. Under 30 cm, the calculated distance is displayed as 0 cm (critical detection circle with intermittent or continuous warning sound).

Using the diagnostic tool's configuration reading screen check that the parking proximity system is properly configured for the type of vehicle to which it is fitted (LC005 Vehicle identification: Body type, Automatic or Manual gearbox). If necessary, reconfigure the computer using command CF005 Vehicle identification. With the vehicle near an obstacle (0 to 150 cm), see if the calculated distance is accurate. If the distance is incorrect or if the distance parameters remain at 255 (which means that the sensor is not detecting an obstacle), make sure nothing is interfering with the reading (sticker, mud, snow etc. on the rear bumper). If the calculated distance is still incorrect or displaying 255 continuously, check the condition of the sensors, which must not have any scratches on the detection component (outer metal part). Replace the defective sensor. If the fault is still present, apply the interpretation of the fault associated with the sensor for which the distance parameter seems incorrect (even if the diagnostic tool does not report a fault).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

AAP_V04_PR005

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-29

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Customer complaints

87F

Only refer to these customer complaints after performing a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER

ALP 1

NO BUZZER

ALP 2

BUZZER SOUNDS CONTINUOUSLY (no obstacle detected)

ALP 3

BUZZER SOUNDS CONTINUOUSLY (with caravan attachment)

ALP 4

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-30

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 1

NOTES

87F

No dialogue with the computer

None

Try the diagnostic tool on another vehicle. Check: – the connection between the diagnostic tool and the diagnostic socket (wiring in good condition), – the injection, engine and passenger compartment fuses. Check for the presence of + 12 V battery feed on track 16, and + 12 V after ignition feed on track 1 and an earth on track 5 and on track 4 of the diagnostic socket. Repair if necessary. With the ignition off, disconnect the parking proximity sensor computer to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 1

+ After ignition feed (see vehicle diagram)

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 3

Earth

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 8

Track 7 of the diagnostic socket (line K)

Repair if necessary (see vehicle wiring diagram).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

AAP_V04_ALP1

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-31

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87F

ALP 2

No buzzer

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a full check with the diagnostic tool (no fault should be present or stored).

Check that the parking proximity sensor system is operating: Status ET003 Parking proximity sensor should be READY (and the red indicator light on the parking proximity sensor switch must not be lit). Is status ET003 Parking proximity sensor "READY"?

NO

Activate the parking proximity sensor by pressing the switch for 1 or 3 seconds (the red indicator light should go out). Note: For more information concerning the activation of the system, consult the interpretation of status ET003 Parking proximity sensor.

NO

Apply the interpretation of status ET001 Reverse gear engaged.

YES

Check that reverse gear is engaged. Status ET001 Reverse gear engaged should be "YES". Also make sure the reversing lights come on when reverse is engaged. Is status ET001 Reverse gear engaged "YES"? YES

AFTER REPAIR

Check that the system is operating correctly.

AAP_V04_ALP2

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-32

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87F

ALP 2 CONTINUED 1

Check that the buzzer volume function is on (LC001 Buzzer volume should not be ZERO). YES

Is the LC001 function "ZERO"

Reconfigure the buzzer volume using the diagnostic tool (command CF001 Buzzer volume).

NO

Check the connection and condition of the connector on the buzzer (located in the rear left-hand wing). Replace the connector if necessary.

Check that the sensors are correctly detecting obstacles (between 20 and 150 cm) (PR001 Lefthand outer sensor distance, PR002 Left-hand inner sensor distance, PR003 Right-hand outer sensor distance, PR004 Right-hand inner sensor distance). Do the parameters specified above display distance values (with an obstacle in front of the rear bumper)?

NO

YES

AFTER REPAIR

Apply the interpretation of parameters PR001 Left-hand outer sensor distance, PR002 Left-hand inner sensor distance, PR003 Right-hand outer sensor distance, PR004 Right-hand inner sensor distance.

Check that the system is operating correctly.

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-33

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87F

ALP 2 CONTINUED 2

Place an obstacle in front of the rear bumper to make the tool display a distance reading. During the detection process, make sure the buzzer has the correct power supply by taking a reading between track 1 and 2 of the buzzer. During this test, is the buzzer receiving power? YES

NO

Measure the resistance of the buzzer across its two tracks. Replace the buzzer if its resistance is not approximately 48 Ω.

With the ignition switched off, disconnect the parking proximity sensor computer connector to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections:

Is the fault still present?

YES

Parking proximity sensor computer

Buzzer

Track 2

Track 2

Track 6

Track 1

NO

Replace the buzzer.

Repair if necessary (see vehicle wiring diagram). Is the fault still present?

NO

End of fault finding procedure.

AFTER REPAIR

YES

Contact the Techline.

Check that the system is operating correctly.

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-34

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87F

ALP 3

Buzzer sounds continuously (no obstacle detected)

NOTES

Only deal with this customer complaint after a full check using the diagnostic tool (no faults must be present or stored).

Switch off the ignition, and disconnect the parking proximity sensor computer to check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 2

Track 2 of the buzzer

Parking proximity sensor computer white connector track 6

Track 1 of the buzzer

Note: The line coming from track 6 of the computer must be insulated against + 12 V and the line coming from track 2 of the computer must be insulated against earth. Repair if necessary (see vehicle wiring diagram). Is the fault still present? YES

NO End of fault finding.

With no obstacle in front of the rear bumper (less than 150 cm away), check that the distance parameters on the diagnostic tool display 255 for the "out of detection range" (PR001 Left-hand outer sensor distance, PR002 Lefthand inner sensor distance, PR003 Right-hand outer sensor distance, PR004 Right-hand inner sensor distance). If the parameters display a setting even though there is no obstacle in front of the rear bumper, make sure nothing is interfering with the reading (sticker, mud, snow etc. on the rear bumper). Also check that the sensors are correctly positioned in the bumper (Sensors set back in or dislodged from their housing). Repair if necessary. Also check that the parking proximity sensor configuration is correct for the vehicle on which it is fitted (LC005 Vehicle identification). IMPORTANT If heavy rain falls directly on to the head of the sensor (membrane), or if the sensor encounters certain noises (pneumatic drill/hammer), the sensor may pick up these vibrations/waves and this may lead to random beeps. Do not replace the sensor but inform the customer. End of fault finding.

AFTER REPAIR

Check that the system is operating correctly.

AAP_V04_ALP3

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-35

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR

AAP Program No.: 0000 Vdiag no: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

87F

ALP 4

Buzzer sounds continuously (with caravan attachment)

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a full check with the diagnostic tool (no fault should be present or stored).

Check that the cover is correctly aligned with the caravan towing hitch. If it is incorrectly aligned, realign it or remove it. Is the fault still present?

NO

End of fault finding procedure.

YES Contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Check that the system is operating correctly.

AAP_V04_ALP4

AAPX84ph2V1.0

87F-36

187G

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): MEGANE II, SCENIC II Function concerned: UPC

Name of computer: UPC VDIAG No.: 44

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), Dialogys. Wiring diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP Special tooling required

Special tooling required Multimeter Universal bornier 3. RECAP Procedure To run diagnostics on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed). Proceed as follows: – insert the vehicle card in the card reader, – press and hold Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start conditions not fulfilled, – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the desired operations. Note: The left-hand and right-hand xenon lamp computers are powered when the dipped beam headlights light up. It will therefore not be possible to run fault finding on them until the ignition has been switched on in fault finding mode (forced + APC) and the dipped beam headlights have been switched on. To turn off the + APC feed proceed as follows: – disconnect the diagnostic tool, – press the Start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds), – check that the + APC has been turned off by the computer indicator lights on the instrument panel being switched off.

UPC84 2.0

87G-1

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

Faults Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since, or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored status of the fault should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used after the + after ignition feed has been connected (without any of the system components being activated). For a present fault, apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the instructions in the Notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors on these lines (corrosion, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the component detected as faulty, – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation, wear).

Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check statuses and parameters that do not produce a fault display on the diagnostic tool when they are inconsistent. Therefore, this phase is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repair. This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values, consult the corresponding fault finding page.

Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK but the customer complaint is still present, the fault should be dealt with by customer complaints.

A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart.

UPC84 2.0

87G-2

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and the condition of the fuses

Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP or in the Workshop Repair Manual or the Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with computer?

no See Fault Finding Chart no. 1

yes Read the faults

no Conformity check

Faults present

yes The cause is still present

Deal with present faults

no

Fault solved

Deal with stored faults Use the fault finding charts The cause is still present

no

Fault solved The cause is still present

yes

no

Fault solved

Contact the Techline with the completed fault finding log

UPC84 2.0

87G-3

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

Wiring check: Fault finding problems: Disconnecting the connectors and/or manipulating the wiring harness may temporarily remove the cause of a fault. Electrical measurements of voltage, resistance and insulation are generally correct, especially if the fault is not present when the analysis is made (stored fault). Visual inspection: Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. Carefully check the protective parts, insulators and wiring harness routing. Look for signs of oxidation. Tactile inspection: While manipulating the wiring harness, use the diagnostic tool to note any change in fault status from stored to present. Make sure that the connectors are properly tightened, Apply light pressure to the connectors, Twist the wiring harness. If there is a change in status, try to locate the source of the fault. Inspection of each component: Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and tabs, as well as their crimping (no crimping on the insulating section). Make sure that the clips and tabs are properly locked in the sockets. Check that no clips or tabs have been dislodged during connection. Check the clip contact pressure using an appropriate model of tab. Resistance check: Check the continuity of entire lines, then section by section. Look for a short circuit to earth, the +12 V feed or with another wire. If a fault is detected, repair or replace the wiring harness.

UPC84 2.0

87G-4

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

5. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE

WARNING!

IMPORTANT Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the procedure, enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG FOR EACH FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE. You are always asked for this log: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline, – for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory, – to be enclosed when returning monitored parts on request. The log is needed for warranty compensation, and enables better analysis of the parts removed.

6. SAFETY ADVICE All work on components requires that the safety rules be obeyed to prevent damage or injury: – Make sure that the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load. – Use the appropriate tools.

UPC84 2.0

87G-5

Edition 5

FAULT FINDING LOG System: All types

Page 1 / 2

List of monitored parts: Computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

Update version ●

Customer complaint

Please specify:

●

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs

Please specify:

●

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of diagnostic manual:

Workshop Repair Manual

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault finding manual no.: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.: Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 97 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: All types ●

Page 2 / 2

Computer identification and system parts replaced

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the Diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Fault name

Specification

Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no.

●

Stored

Parameter name

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description:

●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other faulty functions? Please specify:

FD 97 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87G

1. GENERAL FUNCTIONING The UPC particpates in the following functions: – distributing and protecting the electrical power, – keyless vehicles, – wipers, – lighting, – de-icing, – air conditioning, – oil pressure detection. Distributing and protecting electrical power The main function of the UPC is to switch on and distribute part of the power in order to supply the vehicle systems, actuators or computers. Another part of the power supply distribution is housed in the Engine Interconnection Unit but is not controlled electronically by the computer. +12 V battery feed The UPC receives energy from the battery via the 1 track screwed connector and redistributes +12 V around the vehicle. + after ignition feed The UCH requests the + APC via the multiplex network. When the UPC receives this request, it controls the APC relay unconditionally. Energy management The computer transmits the signal to load the alternator on the multiplex network. Keyless vehicle In the Keyless vehicle function, the UPC participates in the start-up sub-function. The computer: – receives the request to start up the UCH via the multiplex network, – check that the start-up conditions have been met then controls the starter relay, – can inhibit or turn off the starter relay command by means of a forbid start-up signal transmitted by the injection computer on the multiplex network. Air conditioning For the operation of this function and the role of the UPC in setting up this function (see 62A, Air conditioning, Function architecture and General functioning mode). Cold loop The computer receives the compressor switch-on request from the injection via the multiplex network. The computer controls the compressor clutch activation relay. Heating The computer also controls the de-icing of the rear tailgate window and the electric rear view mirrors. Fan assembly When prompted for the engine check request, the UPC supplies the GMV with power.

UPC84 2.0

87G-8

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87G

Front wipers The UPC receives the wiping requests from the UCH via the multiplex network. The computer then controls the following requests: – low or high speed windscreen wiper, – windscreen wiper park position. Lights The UPC receives the lighting requests from the UCH via the multiplex network. The computer then controls the following requests: – side lights, – dipped beam headlights, – main beam headlights, – front fog light. Detecting the oil pressure The UPC receives the signal from the oil pressure sensor and makes it available on the multiplex network.

2. UPC LEVELS 3 UPC levels can be fitted on vehicles: – Entry level UPC, – Top of the range UPC N2, – Top of the range UPC N3. Only the top of the range N2 and N3 UPCs are available as spare parts. The N2 and N3 versions can be distinguished in the extent to which they control the high speed blower: – on the N2, the UPC controls an external relay, – on N3, the relay is integrated into the UPC.

UPC84 2.0

87G-9

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

87G

The UPC is located in the Engine Interconnection Unit (engine compartment). Refer to the NT electrical diagrams for the vehicle on which the fault finding was run for the track allocations and to consult the electrical diagrams.

UPC84 2.0

87G-10

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Replacing components

87G

1. REPLACING THE COMPUTER See Workshop repair Manual 364 Mechanics, 87G, Engine interconnection unit (Mégane) or Workshop Repair Manual 370 Mechanics, 87G, Engine interconnection unit (Scénic). After replacing: ● Configure the alternator type using command CF001 Alternator type (see Configurations and programming). ● Enter the vehicle VIN using command VP003 Enter VIN.

UPC84 2.0

87G-11

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

NOTES

No.

Ignition on, engine off.

Related configuration reading

Configuration

ALTERNATOR TYPE: CF001

87G

TG11 110 VALEO SG12 VALEO LIE8 150 BOSCH SG15L VALEO MELCO 8GM

LC001

Note:

Find out which type of alternator is fitted on the vehicle then confirm. (MELCO = Mitsubishi Electronics Corporation)

No.

Different settings

Note:

VP003

ENTERING THE VIN:

Find out what the vehicle VIN is then confirm.

UPC84 2.0

87G-12

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Summary of faults

87G

Tool fault

Associated DTC

Diagnostic tool title

DF002

9210

HIGH SPEED FAN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT

DF005

920E

INTERNAL ELECTRONIC FAULT

DF009

920D

+ IGNITION CIRCUIT

UPC84 2.0

87G-13

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

HIGH SPEED FAN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT DF002 PRESENT

NOTES

CC.1 : Short circuit to +12 V

Special notes: The function is inhibited when the fault is present. Reactivating the function via a new ignition request.

Measure the resistance between tracks 1 and 2. If the resistance is not 65 Ω ± 10 Ω, replace the relay. Take the relay out and make sure that it is insulated from the +12 V for the connection: UPC connector PPM2 track 2 Track 2 of the fan relay connector Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, check for the absence of +12 V on track 2 of the UPC connector PPM2. If +12 V is present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory. Turn the ignition off and then on again, then run a new check using the fault finding tool UPC84 2.0

87G-14

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

INTERNAL ELECTRONIC FAULT D F005 PRESENT

NOTES

DEF : Internal electronic fault

None.

Disconnect the battery for 30 seconds then reconnect it. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory. Turn the ignition off and then on again, then run a new check using the fault finding tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-15

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

+ APC CIRCUIT DF009 PRESENT

NOTES

DEF : Consistency

None.

Check the voltage of the battery. Check that ET026 + ignition status is consistent Check the condition of the fuses on the battery positive terminal. Repair if necessary. Check the status and the connection of the + battery on the UPC mounting and on the P2 connector. Repair if necessary. With the ignition turned off, check that there is no +12 V supply on track 6 of UPC connector PPM2 If the +12 V feed is present, disconnect the following fuses one by one in order to isolate the faulty track: – fuse 5C (track 6 connector PPM2), – fuse 5D (track 1 connector PEH), – fuse 5E (track 10 connector PPH2), – fuse 5F (track 11 connector PPH2), – fuse 5G (track 7 connector PPM2), – fuse 5H (track 10 connector PPM2). Using an electrical diagram, check the insulation against +12 V, of the connection between the track which the UPC detected as faulty and the computers or consumers linked to this track. With the ignition on, check for the presence of +12 V on one of the following UPC tracks: – track 1 of connector PEH – tracks 6, 7 and 10 of connector PPM2 – tracks 10 and 11 of connector PPH2 If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory. Turn the ignition off and then on again, then run a new check using the fault finding tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-16

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Test conditions: Engine stopped, ignition on.

MAIN SCREEN

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Order

Function

Display and notes

1

Charging circuit

ET001:

Battery warning light

LIT

2

Oil pressure contact

ET027:

Oil pressure contact

CLOSED

3

Gearbox

ET004:

Reverse gear engaged

YES NO

Fault finding

In the event of a fault, refer to the relevant fault finding method.

UPC84 2.0

87G-17

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Test conditions: Engine stopped, ignition on.

KEYLESS VEHICLE: Starting the engine

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action ET004:

1

2

Reverse gear engaged

YES NO

Manual gearbox lever

NEUTRAL OUT OF NEUTRAL NOT SUPPORTED, if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox

Conditions for engine start satisfied.

YES, if the conditions for engine start have all been satisfied and after pressing the start button NO, if the engine start conditions have not all been satisfied or if the engine start button has not been pressed

Gearbox ET005:

Starting

ET010:

Display and notes

Fault finding

In the event of a fault, refer to the relevant fault finding procedure.

UPC84 2.0

87G-18

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Test conditions: Engine stopped, ignition on.

AIR CONDITIONING: Heating

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

PR010:

1

Alternator

In % The value must be fixed and greater than 98%

Rear windscreen de-icing

The rear window heating resistors and the door mirrors (if the vehicle is fitted with heated door mirrors) must be supplied with power and heated.

Starting AC011:

Display and notes

Fault finding

Refer to the relevant fault finding procedure in the event of a fault.

AIR CONDITIONING: Cold loop

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

AC009:

1

Fan assembly AC010:

2

Low speed fan unit

Air conditioning

AC008:

High speed fan unit

Compressor command

Display and notes

Fault finding

It must be possible to hear the fan running at low speed. It must be possible to hear the fan running at high speed This command cannot be used on vehicles not fitted with climate control

Refer to the relevant fault finding procedure in the event of a fault.

The compressor clutch must be heard (the compressor command is not permitted when the engine is running)

UPC84 2.0

87G-19

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Test conditions: Engine stopped, ignition on.

WIPERS: Wiper power

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes The front windscreen wiper must run for a single sweep and return to its initial position.

1

Park position

AC012:

Windscreen wiper park position test

2

Wiper protection

ET002:

Front windscreen wiper protection

INACTIVE

AC005:

Low-speed windscreen wiper

The windscreen wiper must work at low speed.

AC006:

High-speed windscreen wiper

The windscreen wiper must work at high speed.

3

Fault finding

Refer to the relevant fault finding procedure in the event of a fault.

Wipers

UPC84 2.0

87G-20

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Test conditions: Engine stopped, ignition on.

LIGHTING: Lighting power

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Side lights

The front and rear side lights and the number plate lights as well as the controls and switches in the passenger compartment must light up.

AC002:

Dipped beam headlights

The dipped beam headlights must come on.

AC001:

Main beam headlights

The main beam headlights must come on.

AC004:

Front fog lights

The front fog lights must come on.

AC003:

1

Display and notes

Lighting

Fault finding

Refer to the relevant fault finding procedure in the event of a fault.

UPC84 2.0

87G-21

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Condition for carrying out this operation: the engine must be running.

MAIN SCREEN

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Order

Function

Display and notes

1

Charging circuit

ET001:

Battery warning light

OFF

2

Oil pressure contact

ET027:

Oil pressure contact

OPEN

3

Gearbox

ET004:

Reverse gear engaged

YES NO

Fault finding

Refer to the relevant fault finding procedure in the event of a fault.

UPC84 2.0

87G-22

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Condition for carrying out this operation: the engine must be running.

KEYLESS VEHICLES: Starting the engine

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action ET004:

1

2

Reverse gear engaged

YES NO

Manual gearbox lever

NEUTRAL OUT OF NEUTRAL NOT SUPPORTED, if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox

Conditions for starting the engine satisfied.

YES, if the conditions for starting the engine have been met and after a press on the engine start button NO, if the conditions for starting the engine have not been met or if the engine start button has not been pressed

Gearbox ET005:

Starting

ET010:

Display and Notes

Fault finding

Refer to the relevant fault finding procedure in the event of a fault.

UPC84 2.0

87G-23

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Condition for carrying out the operation: the engine must be running.

AIR CONDITIONING: Heating

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

PR010:

1

Alternator

In % The value varies according to electricity consumption.

Rear windscreen deicing

The heating resistance for the rear window and the door mirrors (if the vehicle is fitted with door mirrors) must be supplied with power and supply heat

Starting AC011:

Display and notes

Fault finding

Refer to the relevant fault finding method in the event of a fault.

AIR CONDITIONING: Cold loop

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action AC009:

1

2

Low speed fan unit

Fan assembly

Air conditioning

AC010:

High speed fan unit

AC008:

Compressor control

Display and notes

Fault finding

The fan must be heard running at low speed The fan must be heard running at a high speed This command cannot be used on vehicles which are not fitted with climate control

Refer to the relevant fault finding procedure in the event of a fault.

(this command is not permitted when the engine is running)

UPC84 2.0

87G-24

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Condition for carrying out this operation: the engine is running.

WIPERS: Wiper power

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes The windscreen wiper must perform a single sweep and stop at its initial position

Park position

AC012:

Windscreen wiper park position test

Wiper protection

ET002:

Windscreen wiper protection

INACTIVE

AC005:

Low-speed windscreen wiper

The windscreen wiper must function at low speed

AC006:

Front highspeed windscreen wiper

The front windscreen wiper must function at high speed

1

Wipers

Fault finding

Refer to the relevant fault finding procedure in the event of a fault.

UPC84 2.0

87G-25

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Condition for carrying out the operation: the engine must be running.

LIGHTING: Lighting power

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Side lights

The front and rear side lights and the number plate lights as well as the controls and switches inside the passenger compartment must light up.

AC002:

Dipped beam headlights

The dipped beam headlights must come on.

AC001:

Main beam headlights

The main beam headlights must come on.

AC004:

Front fog lights

The front fog lights must come on.

AC003:

1

Display and notes

Lighting

Fault finding

Refer to the relevant fault finding procedure in the event of a fault.

UPC84 2.0

87G-26

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Status and parameter summary table

87G

Tool status

Diagnostic tool title

ET001

BATTERY WARNING LIGHT

ET002

WINDSCREEN WIPER PROTECTION

ET004

REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED

ET005

MANUAL GEARBOX GEAR LEVER POSITION

ET010

START CONDITIONS SATISFIED

ET013

HIGH SPEED FAN ASSEMBLY RELAY CONTROL

ET026

+ AFTER IGNITION FEED

ET027

OIL PRESSURE CONTACT

Tool parameter

Diagnostic tool title

PR010

ALTERNATOR

UPC84 2.0

87G-27

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

BATTERY WARNING LIGHT ET001

NOTES

Check that the status is OUT with the engine running and LIT with the engine stopped and the ignition on. Check consistency with the instrument panel warning light.

With the engine running, check that the battery voltage is much higher than +12 V. Perform a fault finding procedure on the charge circuit if necessary. Check the status and the connection of connector PEM on the UPC and of the connections on the alternator. Repair if necessary. Turn off the ignition and ensure that there is insulation against +12 V and continuity in the connection: UPC connector PEM track 8 Track 1 of the alternator 2-track connector Repair if necessary. With the ignition on, ensure that there is insulation against earth and the continuity in the connection: UPC connector PEM track 8 Track 1 of the alternator 2-track connector Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-28

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

WINDSCREEN WIPER PROTECTION ET002

Before starting, check the operation of the windscreen wiper motor by running commands AC005 Windscreen wiper at low speed and AC006 Windscreen wiper at high speedand then check the park position using command AC012 Windscreen wiper park position.

NOTES

These statuses are listed in the order of severity or persistance of incorrect wiper operation. – if the status is INACTIVE, the wiper function is normal. – If the status is LOW SPEED, the UPC has detected an abnormal wiper operation on the higher speed setting for more than 6 seconds (the wiper has stuck or is blocked); windscreen wiping is therefore forced to operate on the lower speed setting when the higher speed setting is requested, – If the status is INTERMITTENT, the wiper function is stopped for 10 seconds following the detection and persistence of the fault (restrained or blocked), – If the status is BLOCKED, wiping stops 30 seconds after the malfunction has lasted for more than 2 minutes. The status returns to INACTIVE, once the UCH requests a new wiping instruction (by following the movement of the wiper stalk or by request from the rain sensor).

Make sure that nothing is mechanically blocking movement of the wiper blades (blades stuck, condition and assembly of the wiper mechanism linkage and no object interfering with the motion of the device). Check that the wiper mechanism is not seized. Repair if necessary. Check the status and the connection of connectors PPH2 and PEH on the UPC and of the windscreen wiper motor. Repair if necessary.

UPC84 2.0

87G-29

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

ET002 (continued)

Check the insulation against earth and the continuity of the connections: UPC connector PEH track 6 Track 2 of the windscreen wiper motor connector UPC PPH2 connector track 1 Track 5 of the windscreen wiper motor connector UPC connector PPH2 track 2 Track 4 of the windscreen wiper motor connector Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-30

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET004

NOTES

Check, and if necessary, replace fuse 5C on the UPC.

Manual gearbox Check the status and the connection of the reverse gear switch connector and connector PPM2 on the UPC. Repair if necessary. With the ignition on and reverse gear selected, check the presence of +12 V on track 9 of connector PPM2. If there is a fault, check the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: UPC connector PPM2 track 9 Track 1 (track 3 on the ND0 gearbox) of the switch UPC connector PPM2 track 6 Track 2 (track 1 on gearbox ND0) of the switch Repair if necessary. With reverse gear selected, check the continuity between tracks 1 and 2 (or tracks 1 and 3 on gearbox NDO) of the switch. Replace the reverse gear switch if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

UPC84 2.0

87G-31

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

ET004 (continued)

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX Check the status and the connection of the multifunction switch connector and connector PPM2 on the UPC. Repair if necessary. With the ignition on and reverse gear selected, check the presence of +12 V on track 9 of connector PPM2. If there is a fault, check the insulation against earth and the continuity of the connections: UPC connector PPM2 track 9 Track 1 of the multifunction switch UPC connector PPM2 track 6 Track 2 of the multifunction switch Repair if necessary. With reverse gear engaged, check the continuity of tracks 1 and 2 of the switch. Replace the multifunction switch if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-32

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

POSITION OF GEAR LEVER IN MANUAL GEARBOX ET005

NOTES

Check, and if necessary, replace fuse "5C" on the UPC. Applicable on vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox only.

Check the status and the connection of the neutral switch connector and connectors PPM2 and PEM on the UPC. Repair if necessary. With the ignition on and in neutral, check the presence of +12 V on track 6 of connector PEM. If there is a fault, check the insulation against earth and the continuity of the connection between the switch and track 6 of connector PEM on the UPC. Check the operation of the switch: There is continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the switch when the gearbox is in neutral. There is an open circuit between tracks 1 and 2 of the switch when a gear is selected. If faulty, replace the switch. With the ignition on, check the presence of +12 V on track 2 (track 1 on gearbox ND0) of the neutral switch connector. If there is a fault, check the insulation against earth and the continuity of the connection between the switch and track 6 of connector PPM2 on the UPC. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-33

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

OIL PRESSURE CONTACT ET009

NOTES

CLOSED engine stopped, OPEN engine running.

Check the status and the connection of connectors PEM on the UPC and the oil pressure sensor. Repair if necessary. Make sure that the sensor is securely mounted on the engine. Check the insulation against +12 V and the continuity of the connection between: UPC connector PEM track 12 Track 1 pressure sensor Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-34

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

CONDITIONS FOR STARTING THE ENGINE SATISFIED ET010

NOTES

No particular instructions.

In the Keyless vehicle function, check that the starting conditions are met. The UPC participates in the engine start function by managing the switches on the gearbox. Check the operation of the gearbox switches using statuses ET004 Reverse gear selected and ET005 Manual gearbox gear lever position then run fault finding on UCH start and engine management functions. If the conditions have been satisfied and the starter does not work, refer to ALP 2. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-35

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87G

ALTERNATOR LOAD PR010

NOTES

Check in the configuration readings that the alternator type has been configured correctly. When the engine has stopped, the value must be constant and greater than 98%. With the engine running, the value varies according to the electricity consumption. The value must not be constant.

Carry out fault finding on the charging circuit. Disconnect the 2 track connector from the alternator. With the ignition on, check the presence of +12 V on track 2 of the alternator. With the ignition turned off, check the presence of earth on track 2 of the alternator. Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-36

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS AC001

NOTES

Check: – the status and the connection of fuses 8A and 8B on the UPC, – the status of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Without xenon lights Check the status and the connection of connector PPA and the fuses on the UPC. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check the presence of earth on the connection R9 and then on track 1 of the headlight connector. Repair if necessary. Check the presence of +12 V on track 4 of the headlights when these are controlled by command AC001. If everything is fine, replace the bulbs. If there is a problem, check the insulation against earth and the continuity between the connections: UPC connector PPA track 3 Left headlight track 4 UPC connector PPA track 4 Right headlight track 4 Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

UPC84 2.0

87G-37

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

AC001 (continued)

With xenon lights Check the status and the connection of connector PPA and the fuses on the UPC. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check the presence of earth on connection R9 then on tracks 4 and 10 of the headlights. Repair if necessary. Check the presence of +12 V on track 5 (for Mégane vehicles) or on track 4 (for Scénic type vehicles) for the headlights when controlled by command AC001. If everything is fine, run the fault finding procedure (see 80C, Discharge bulbs). If there is a problem, check the insulation against earth and the continuity of the connections: UPC connector PPA track 3 Track 5 or track 4 (depending on vehicle type) for the left-hand headlight UPC connector PPA track 4 Track 5 or track 4 (depending on vehicle type) right-hand headlight Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-38

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS AC002

NOTES

Check: – the status and the connection of fuses 8C and 8D on the UPC, – the status of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Without xenon lights Check the status and connection of connector PPA and the fuses on the UPC. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check the presence of earth on connection R9 then on track 1 of the headlight connector. Repair if necessary. Check the presence of +12 V on track 2 of the headlights when controlled by command AC002. If everything is find, replace the bulb or bulbs. If there is a fault, check the insulation against earth and the continuity of the connections: UPC connector PPA track 6 Left headlight track 2 UPC connector PPA track 5 Right headlight track 2 Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

UPC84 2.0

87G-39

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

AC002 (continued)

With xenon lights Check the status and the connection for connector PPA and the fuses on the UPC. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on connection R9 then on tracks 4 and 10 of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check that there is a +12 V supply on track 3 of the headlights when controlled by command AC002. If everything is fine, apply the fault finding procedure (see 80C, Discharge bulbs). If there is a fault, check the insulation against earth is in place and continuity on the connections: UPC connector PPA track 6 Left headlight track 3 UPC connector PPA track 5 Right headlight track 3 Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-40

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

SIDE LIGHTS AC003

NOTES

Check: – the status and connection of fuses 7A and 7B on the UPC, – the status of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Without xenon lights Check the condition and connection of connectors PPA and PPH2 and the fuses in the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the headlights and rear lights. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on connection R9 then on track 1 of the headlights and on track 2 of the rear lights and the vehicle number plate lights. Repair if necessary. Check that there is a +12 V supply on track 5 of the headlights and track 1 of the rear lights and the number plate when controlled by command AC003. If everything is fine, replace the bulb or bulbs. If there is a fault, check the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: UPC connector PPH2 track 6 Left rear light track 1 UPC connector PPH2 track 7 Track 1 right-hand rear light and number plate lights UPC connector PPA track 1 Left headlight track 5 UPC connector PPA track 2 Right headlight track 5 Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

UPC84 2.0

87G-41

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

AC003 (continued)

With xenon lights Check the status and connection of connectors PPA and PPH2 and the fuses on the UPC. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the headlights and rear lights. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on connection R9 then on tracks 4 and 10 of the headlights and on track 2 of the rear lights and the number plate lights. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V supply on track 9 of the headlights and track 1 of the rear lights and the number plate lights when controlled by command AC003. If everything is fine, replace the bulb or bulbs. If there is a problem, check the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: UPC connector PPH2 track 6 Left rear light track 1 UPC connector PPH2 track 7 Track 1 right-hand rear light and number plate lights UPC connector PPA track 1 Left headlight track 9 UPC connector PPA track 2 Right headlight track 9 Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-42

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

FRONT FOG LIGHTS AC004

NOTES

Check: – the condition and the connection of fuse 10, – the condition of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Check the condition and connection of connector PPA on the UPC. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the bulb connectors. Repair if necessary. Check the presence of earth on connection R9 and then on the bulb connectors. Repair if necessary. Check the presence of +12 V on the fog light connectors while controlled by command AC004. If everything is correct, replace the bulb or bulbs. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: UPC connector PPA track 8 Track 1 of the left-hand front fog light connector UPC connector PPA track 7 Track 1 of the right-hand front fog light Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-43

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

LOW-SPEED WINDSCREEN WIPER AC005

NOTES

Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 9. Replace it if necessary.

Check the condition and connection of connector PPH2 on the UPC. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the front windscreen wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 1 of the windscreen wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of a +12 V supply on track 4 of the windscreen wiper motor while controlled by command AC005. If correct, replace the motor. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: UPC connector PPH2 track 2 Track 4 of the windscreen wiper motor Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-44

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

HIGH-SPEED WINDSCREEN WIPER AC006

NOTES

Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 9 Replace it if necessary.

Check the condition and connection of connector PPH2 on the UPC. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the windscreen wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 1 of the windscreen wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of a +12 V supply on track 5 of the windscreen wiper motor while controlled by AC006. If correct, replace the motor. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: UPC connector PPH2 track 1 Track 5 of the windscreen wiper motor Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-45

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

COMPRESSOR CONTROL AC008

NOTES

This command is not permitted when the engine is running. Check: – the condition and the connection of fuse 4. Replace it if necessary.

Check the condition and connection of connector PPM2 on the UPC. Repair if necessary. Check the cindition and connection of the air conditioning compressor. Repair if necessary. Make sure that the compressor is properly earthed. Check for the presence of a +12 V supply on the compressor connector while controlled by command AC008. If there is a fault, check the insulation against earth and continuity of the connection: UPC connector PPM2 track 5 Air conditioning compressor connector Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-46

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

LOW-SPEED FAN UNIT AC009

NOTES

Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 11. Replace it if necessary. The fans must have stopped. Make sure nothing is mechanically blocking the blade rotation.

Check the condition and connection of the fan connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure that there is a good earth connection on track 2 of the fan. Check that the resistor in the fan unit (if it exists) is not in open circuit with a resistance equal to 0.69 Ω ± 20%. If not correct, replace it. Check that there is a +12 V supply on the fan while controlled by command AC009. If everything is correct, replace the fan. If there is a problem, check the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: UPC connector PPM1 track 4 Track 1 of the fan OR UPC connector PPM1 track 4 Resistor in the fan unit (if it exists) Resistance in the fan unit (if it exists) Track 1 of the fan Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-47

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

HIGH-SPEED FAN UNIT AC010

NOTES

This command is only applicable on versions fitted with air conditioning. Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 11 (UPC level N3 only). Replace it if necessary.

UPC type N2 Check the condition and connection of the fan connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure that the fan is properly earthed. Check the resistance of the external high-speed fan control relay: 65 Ω ± 10 Ω. Replace it if necessary. Check the presence of +12 V on track 1 of the high-speed fan external control relay when controlled by command AC010. If there is a fault, check the insulation against earth and continuity of the connection UPC connector PPM2 track 3 Track 1 of the high-speed fan external control relay Repair if necessary. Check that there is earthing on track 2 of the high-speed fan external control relay. If there is a fault, check the insulation against +12 V and continuity of the connection: UPC connector PPM2 track 2 Track 2 of the high-speed fan external control relay Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V supply on track 1 of the fan while controlled by command AC010. If there is a problem, check the insulation against earth and continuity of the connection: Fan track 1 Track 5 of the high-speed fan external control relay Repair if necessary.

UPC84 2.0

87G-48

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

AC010 (continued 1)

Check for the presence of a +12 V supply battery on track 3 of the high-speed fan external control relay. If there is a fault, check the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: High-speed fan external relay track 3 Track 1 of the power supply fuse plate Repair if necessary. Check fuse F1 on the power supply fuse plate. Replace it if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

UPC84 2.0

87G-49

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

AC010 (continued 2)

UPC type N3 Check the condition and the connection of the fan connector. Repair if necessary. Make sure that the fan earth connection is correct. Check for the presence of a +12 V supply on the fan when controlled by command AC010. If everything is correct, replace the fan. If there is a fault, check the insulation against earth is in place and continuity of the connection: UPC connector P1 Fan Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-50

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

HEATED REAR SCREEN AC011

NOTES

Ignition on Check: – the condition and the connection of fuse 6 and fuse W located in the passenger compartment. Replace it if necessary.

Rear screen Check the condition and the connection of connector PPH1 on the UPC. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the rear screen connectors. Repair if necessary. Check that the resistance value of the rear screen is between 0.5 Ω and 1 Ω. Replace the rear screen if necessary. Check the earth of the rear screen heater. Check for the presence of a +12 V supply on the rear screen terminal while controlled by command AC011. If there is a fault, check the insulation against earth and continuity of the connection: UPC connector PPH1 track 2 Rear screen Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

UPC84 2.0

87G-51

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

AC011 (continued)

Rear-view mirrors (if equipped with heaters) Check the condition and connection of connector PPH1 on the UPC. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the rear-view mirror connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 5 of the rear view mirror connectors. Check for the presence of a +12 V supply on track 1 of the rear view mirror connector while controlled by command. If there is a fault, check the insulation against earth and continuity of the connection: UPC connector PPH1 track 2 Track 1 of the rear view mirror passing via the fuse box and the passenger compartment relay Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-52

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

WINDSCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION TEST AC012

NOTES

Commands AC005 Low-speed windscreen wiper and AC006 High-speed windscreen wiper must operate for this command to be activated. If this is not the case, refer to the interpretation of these commands. This step must be applied if the windscreen wipers do not stop in their initial position.

Check the condition and the connection of connector PEH on the UPC. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and the connection of the windscreen wiper motor connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: UPC connector PEH track 6 Track 2 of the wiper motor Repair if necessary. Check, using an indicator light placed between track 2 of the windscreen wiper motor + battery, that the lamp lights up briefly at the end of the wiping cycle. If not correct, replace the wiper motor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-53

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Customer complaints

87G

Carry out a fault finding procedure on the multiplex network. Carry out fault finding on the UPC.

NOTES

RECORDED FAULTS

NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER

ALP 1

THE STARTER DOES NOT WORK

ALP 2

VARIOUS PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FUNCTIONS DO NOT LIGHT UP

ALP 3

UPC84 2.0

87G-54

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

ALP 1

NOTES

87G

No dialogue with the computer

Test the multiplex network.

Check the voltage of the battery. Check the condition and connection of the battery terminals and power fuses. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 3 of connector PPH2. If necessary, repair the defective connection and/or connector. Check for the presence of +12 V battery on connector P2. If necessary, repair the defective connection and/or connector. Check the condition and connection of connector PEH. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-55

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

ALP 2

NOTES

87G

The starter does not work

Check for any faults in the multiplex network by running the network test. Refer to the Starting function to check that the starting conditions are met. Check that status ET010 Conditions for starting the engine satisfied is YES after a press of the start button, if not refer to the relevant status interpretation procedure. Check: – the condition and connection of fuse F3. Replace it if necessary.

Check the starter cabling (terminal tightness, continuity). Check the condition and connection of starter power supply fuse. Replace it if necessary. Check the condition and connection of connector PPM1 in the Protection and Switching Unit and the control terminal on the starter motor. Repair if necessary. If everything is correct, check, by running the starter, for a +12 V supply on the control terminal on the starter. If correct, carry out a fault finding procedure on the starter. Check that the insulation against earth and continuity of the connection: UPC connector PPM1 track 3 The control terminal on the starter. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-56

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart (ALP)

ALP 3

NOTES

87G

Various passenger compartment functions do not light up

The side lights must not be faulty, if they are, refer to the interpretation of command AC003 Side lights.

Check the condition and connection of the faulty function(s). Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on the defective function(s). Repair if necessary. With the side lights on, check for the presence of a +12 V supply on the defective function or functions. If it is in order, replace the defective component. Check the insulation against earth and continuity between the defective function and the UPC: Cigar lighters, air conditioning control panel, radio, multifunction display, rear view mirror controls, front and rear window riser commands and window riser locking, door locking switch, instrument panel command and in-situ control of headlights command.

Track 6 of connector PPH2 on the UPC

Heated seat switches, rigid roof switches, petrol or LPG selector switch, electronic stability program switch, simultaneous window control, automatic gearbox display and speed limiter / cruise control commands.

Track 7 connector PPH2 of the UPC

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-57

Edition 5

187G UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): Mégane II, Scénic II

Name of computer: Protection and Switching Unit

Function concerned: Protection and Switching

Program No.: C54 Vdiag No.: 48

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type: Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Type of diagnostic tools: – CLIP + CAN sensor Type of special tooling required: Special tooling required Multimeter, oscilloscope Elé. 1681

Universal bornier

3. REMINDER To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed). Depending on the type of vehicle equipment, proceed as follows: with the vehicle card in the card reader, press and hold the Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not met, connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. To cut off + after ignition feed, proceed as follows: press the Start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds), Ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer indicator lights on the instrument panel have gone out.

USM_V48_PRELI

UPC84 V1.1

87G-1

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

Faults Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since, or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used following the + after ignition supply being switched on (without acting on the system components). For a present fault, apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the instructions in the Notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors on these lines (corrosion, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the component detected as faulty, – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation, wear).

Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check data that does not produce a fault on the diagnostic tool because the data is inconsistent. Therefore, this phase is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values, consult the corresponding fault finding page.

Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK but the customer complaint is still present, the fault should be dealt with by customer complaint. A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-2

Edition 2

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

87G

Fault finding - Introduction

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Perform a pre-diagnostic on the system

Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with computer?

no See ALP No. 1

yes Read the faults

Faults present

no Conformity check

yes The cause is still present

Deal with present faults

no

Fault solved

Deal with stored faults Use fault finding charts (ALPs)

The cause is still present

no

Fault solved

The cause is still present

no

Fault solved

yes

Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log

UPC84 V1.1

87G-3

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE (continued) Wiring check Fault finding problems Disconnecting the connectors and/or manipulating the wiring harness may temporarily remove the cause of a fault. Electrical measurements of voltage, resistance and insulation are generally correct, especially if the fault is not present when the analysis is made (stored fault). Visual inspection Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. Carefully check the fuses, insulators and wiring harness routing. Look for signs of oxidation. Tactile inspection While manipulating the wiring harness, use the diagnostic tool to note any change in fault status from stored to present. Make sure that the connectors are properly locked. Apply light pressure to the connectors. Twist the wiring harness. If there is a change in status, try to locate the source of the fault. Inspection of each component Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and tabs, as well as the crimping (no crimping on the insulating section). Make sure that the clips and tabs are properly locked in the sockets. Check that no clips or tabs have been dislodged during connection. Check the clip contact pressure using an appropriate model of tab. Continuity, insulation and resistance check Check the continuity of entire lines, then section by section. Look for a short circuit to earth, to + 12 V or to another wire. If a fault is detected, repair or replace the wiring harness.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-4

Edition 2

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

Fault finding - Introduction

87G

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

IMPORTANT!

IMPORTANT Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the procedure, enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT You will always be asked for this log: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline, – for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory, – to be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement, and enables better analysis of the parts removed.

6. SAFETY ADVICE Safety rules must be observed during any work on a component to prevent any damage or injury: – make sure that the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load, – use the appropriate tools, – do not touch the xenon bulbs, and do not work on the COSLAD system when it is in operation, as the voltage can be more than 20,000 V.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-5

Edition 2

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit

Page 1/2

List of monitored parts: Computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

OPTIMA 5800

NXR

Update version ●

Customer complaint 875

Door locking/unlocking fault

1194

Warning light on

Other

●

Lighting fault

1075

Wiper fault

004

Intermittently

Your comments:

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 005

While driving

009

Sudden fault

Other

●

1070

010

Gradual deterioration

Your comments:

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of fault finding manual:

Workshop Repair Manual Assisted fault finding

Technical Note

Fault finding manual no: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No: Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 15 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit ●

Page 2/2

Computer identification and parts exchanged for the system

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the Diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Fault name

Specification

Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no.

●

Stored

Parameter name

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description:

●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments:

FD 15 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87G

General operation The Protection and Switching Unit is involved in the following functions: – Access - Safety. – Air conditioning. – Lighting. – Wipers. – Charging circuit. – Oil pressure detection. – Electric power distribution.

1 - Electric power distribution The main function of the Protection and Switching Unit is to switch and distribute the power supply to the vehicle's systems, actuators or computers. Part of this function is handled within the unit, but it is not electronically controlled by the computer. + 12 V battery supply The Protection and Switching Unit receives energy from the battery via the Busbar and MM connectors (tracks 6 and 4) and redistributes the + 12 V supply. + 12 V after ignition supply The UCH sends the Protection and Switching Unit the + 12 V after ignition supply request via the multiplex network. When the Protection and Switching Unit receives this request, it actuates the after ignition relay unconditionally. The signal is distributed to the sensors, actuators and computers.

2 - Charge circuit One of the main functions of the Protection and Switching Unit is managing the charge circuit. a) Battery – PR008 Battery voltage after rest represents the battery charge status. If PR008 is below 12.1 V in the first miles, a Recharge Battery message is displayed on the instrument panel if the battery needs charging. Depending on the battery charge status, the operating phase and the battery temperature, the Protection and Switching Unit determines what the voltage across the battery terminals should be. To obtain this voltage, the Protection and Switching Unit actuates the alternator. b) Alternator The Protection and Switching Unit is linked to the alternator by a serial connection. The Protection and Switching Unit and the alternator communicate via this connection. The alternator sends the Protection and Switching Unit the following signals: – Type of alternator: the Protection and Switching Unit configures itself according to the alternator specifications. – ET023 Alternator thermal fault.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-8

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87G

The Protection and Switching Unit sends the alternator the following information: – PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage. The Protection and Switching Unit can detect electrical or communication faults on this connection and signal them using the fault DF007 UPC-Alternator connection. When the battery charge drops and PR008 Battery voltage after rest declines, the Protection and Switching Unit can temporarily increase PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage by 1 V for a period of 30 minutes after starting. Before and during starting, PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage is fixed at 10.6 V. A maximum of 30 seconds after the engine has started, the Protection and Switching Unit sets PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage to the calculated optimum value. Only on vehicles with M9R injection: The injection computer also acts on the alternator regulation voltage. The injection computer sends the maximum authorised power delivered by the engine, to the UPC computer via the multiplex network. If the power available from the engine is less than the power consumed by the alternator, the UPC computer reduces PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage. For vehicles with any injection type except M9R: The UPC sends the alternator charge to the injection to regulate the idling speed.

3 - Keyless vehicle Under the keyless vehicle function, the Protection and Switching Unit is involved in the starting sub-function. The computer: – receives the supply request from the passenger compartment starter via the multiplex network, as well as the clutch pedal position, – controls the starter relay, – disables or cuts off control of this relay if there is a start inhibition signal sent by the injection or gearbox computer via the multiplex network.

4 - Air conditioning For the operation of the air conditioning and the role of the Protection and Switching Unit in the control of this function, see 62A, Air conditioning. Cold loop: The computer receives the compressor switch-on request from the injection via the multiplex network. The computer controls the compressor clutch engagement relay. Heating: The computer manages the alternator charge and sends back the signal over the multiplex network. The computer also controls the rear screen de-icing.

USM_V48_SSFON

UPC84 V1.1

87G-9

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87G

5 - Exterior lighting The Protection and Switching Unit receives lighting requests from the UCH via the multiplex network. The computer then switches the power relays: – side lights, – dipped headlights, – main beam headlights, – front fog light.

6 - Wipers The Protection and Switching Unit receives wiping requests from the UCH via the multiplex network. The computer then switches the power relays: – low or high-speed windscreen wiper, – headlight washers pump relay. – The Protection and Switching Unit also receives the windscreen wiper park position signal. Using this signal the computer can determine whether the blade is jammed, and decide whether to stop the wiper motor to protect it.

7 - Oil pressure detection The Protection and Switching Unit receives the oil pressure sensor signal and distributes it over the multiplex network.

8 - Reverse gear engaged signal The Protection and Switching Unit receives the reverse gear engaged position sensor signal and distributes it over the multiplex network. 9. Injection The Protection and Switching Unit plays a part in the injection operation, in relation to the computer supply voltage and its sensors (see the different components that are supplied in Allocation of computer tracks). Supply malfunctions may lead to engine management customer complaints (rough idle, etc.).

UPC84 V1.1

87G-10

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87G

9 - Fuse fault finding The Protection and Switching Unit can detect the condition of its fuses and indicate faults using: DF016 DF017 DF014 DF015 DF030 DF023 DF018 DF019 DF020 DF022 DF031 DF036 DF029 DF024 DF025 DF026 DF021 DF032

LEFT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT RIGHT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT LEFT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT RIGHT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT CLIMATE CONTROL COMPRESSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT WINDSCREEN WIPER CIRCUIT LEFT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT RIGHT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT FRONT FOG LIGHT CIRCUIT HEATED REAR SCREEN CIRCUIT HEADLIGHT WASHER SUPPLY CIRCUIT STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY CIRCUIT ENGINE MANAGEMENT/COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY LPG COMPUTER SUPPLY ELECTRIC POWER ASSISTED STEERING/AIRBAG SUPPLY AUTOMATIC GEARBOX SUPPLY REVERSING LIGHT(S) CIRCUIT +12 V RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT

To carry out fault finding on the fuses, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. If a fuse is faulty, the associated fault becomes STORED. Once the fuse has been replaced or the repair completed, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits again to clear the fault.

Protection and Switching Unit Version There are 4 Protection and Switching Unit versions: – N1: vehicles with a 340 W fan assembly. – N2: vehicles with a 460 W fan assembly. – N3: vehicles with a 550 W fan assembly (external relay). – N4: vehicles with 340 W, 460 W or 550 W fan assemblies + automatic gearbox and/or LPG and/or headlight washers.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-11

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

87G

Protection and Switching Unit computer tracks Computer track

Function

Sensor - actuator track Busbar connector

1

Protected + battery supply Connector CM

1

+ Protected after ignition supply fuse

Track A1 additional heater relay 1 black connector Track B2 additional heater relay 2 black connector Track B2 additional heater relay 3 black connector Track 1A passenger compartment fuse and relay box black connector Track 1 diagnostic socket black connector Track 1 parking proximity sensor computer white connector

2

Not used

3

Earth

front left-hand side member

4

Rear screen de-icer + control supply

rear screen connector track 1

5

ABS computer + protected battery supply

ABS/ABS + ESP computer connector track 3

6

Earth

UPC84 V1.1

87G-12

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

Computer track

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

Function

87G

Sensor - actuator track Connector CN

1

+ fuel pump supply

Fuel pump and sender unit connector track 1

2

Reversing light + control supply

Rear right-hand light track 2, rear left-hand light track 5

3

Headlight beam adjustment + control supply

Track 7 headlight beam adjustment rheostat switch

4

Windscreen wiper high-speed + control supply

Windscreen wiper motor connector track 5

5

+ right-hand side light supply

Track 4 rear right-hand light, track 1 number plate lights

6

+ injection supply, protection relay

Injection computer black connector track G1

7

Right-hand headlight washer motor + control supply

Track 2 headlight washer pump black connector

8

Electric power assisted steering/airbag + protected after ignition supply

Track 8 electric power assisted steering black connector track 7 airbag computer black connector

9

Windscreen wiper low speed + control supply

Windscreen wiper motor connector track 4

10

Steering column lock + protected after ignition supply

Track 2 UCH connector PP2

11

Left-hand headlight washer pump motor + control supply

Track 1 headlight washer pump black connector

12

+ left-hand side light supply

Rear left-hand light

UPC84 V1.1

87G-13

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

Computer track

Function

87G

Sensor - actuator track Connector CT1

1

CAN L

Track 16 UCH connector PE2

2

ABS CAN L

Track 15 airbag computer black connector Track 14 ABS/ESP computer black connector

3

ABS CAN H

Track 26 airbag computer black connector Track 35 ABS/ESP computer black connector

4

Injection/steering column lock + after ignition supply

Track D1 injection computer black connector Track 5 steering column lock

5

Oil level sensor signal 1

Track 8 instrument panel black connector

6

Oil level sensor signal 2

Track 7 instrument panel black connector

7

Injection CAN L

Track A3 injection computer black connector

8

CAN H

Track 6 UCH connector PE2

9

Injection CAN H

Track A4 injection computer black connector

10

Windscreen wiper park position control supply

Track 2 windscreen wiper motor orange connector

11

Water in diesel detection sensor signal

Track B3 injection computer grey connector

12

+ accessories supply

Track 1G passenger compartment fuse and relay box black connector Connector AN

1

+ front right-hand side light supply

Track 5 front right-hand side light

2

+ front left-hand fog light supply

Front left-hand fog light track 1

3

+ front right-hand fog light supply

Front right-hand fog light track 1

4

+ left-hand dipped headlight supply

Left-hand headlight

5

+ front left-hand side light supply

Track 5 front left-hand side light

6

+ front right-hand dipped beam headlight supply

Right-hand headlight

7

+ left-hand main beam headlight supply

Track 4 left-hand headlight

8

+ right-hand main beam headlight supply

Track 4 right-hand headlight

UPC84 V1.1

87G-14

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

Computer track

Function

87G

Sensor - actuator track Connector MT1

1

Alternator synchronous bit signal

Track 2 alternator black connector

2

Not used

3

Not used

4

Not used

5

Fuel pump relay coil control supply

6

Water in diesel detection sensor signal

Track 2 water in diesel sensor black connector

7

Oil pressure warning light control supply

Pressure switch track 1

8

+ alternator excitation supply

Track 1 alternator black connector

9

High-speed fan assembly relay - control

Track 2 fan assembly relay white connector

10

+ accessories supply

Track A1 diesel fuel heater relay cyan connector

11

Oil level sensor signal 1

Track 2 oil level sensor black connector

12

Oil level sensor signal 2

Track 1 oil level sensor black connector Connector MM

1

High-speed fan assembly supply

Track 1 fan assembly black connector if climate control Track 2 fan assembly black connector if manual or regulated heating

2

Fan assembly + control supply

Track 1 fan assembly resistor

3

+ starting supply

Starter solenoid

4

Protected + battery supply

Track 1 + Protected battery supply fuse F3

5

Not used

6

Fan assembly fuse + protected battery supply

Track 1 power and supply fuse board orange connector

UPC84 V1.1

87G-15

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

Computer track

Function

87G

Sensor - actuator track Connector MN

1

Injection + supply

2

Injection + supply

3

Injection + supply

Track 4 air flowmeter black connector (with RH connections)

4

LPG computer + after ignition supply

Track C2 LPG computer blue connector

5

Power latch relay coil - control

– track D4 injection computer brown connector (K4J, K4M, F4R) – track E1 injection computer brown connector (F9Q) – track F1 injection computer grey connector (K9K)

6

Protected + battery supply

Track A1 diesel fuel heater relay cyan connector

7

Not used

8

Automatic gearbox computer or LPG computer + battery supply

9

Ignition coil control

10

Air conditioning clutch + control

Track A air conditioning compressor clutch

11

Reversing lights + after ignition supply

Reversing lights switch track 2, neutral sensor/reversing lights track 1

12

Automatic gearbox neutral + signal

13

Automatic gearbox computer + after ignition supply

Automatic gearbox computer connector A track 27

14

Reversing lights + after ignition supply

Reversing lights switch track 1, neutral sensor/reversing lights track 2

15

Injection power + battery supply

Track A3 fuel pump relay

16

Not used

Track 56 automatic gearbox computer connector A tracks A1 and A3 of the LPG solenoid valve relays

UPC84 V1.1

87G-16

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Replacement of components

87G

Once a component is replaced, run VP004 Vehicle parameters (see Configuration and programming). Switch the ignition off and on again for the configurations to be recognised. IMPORTANT Removing or replacing the Protection and Switching Unit computer relays is forbidden.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-17

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87G

Fault finding - Configurations and programming

Equipment required CLIP diagnostic tool This operation is used to configure the Protection and Switching Unit to the equipment present in the vehicle. Configuration

Configuration reading

Name of configuration

Choice of configuration

LC008

Gearbox type

Manual/Automatic

LC007

Front fog lights

WITH/WITHOUT

LC013

Headlight washers

WITH/WITHOUT

VP004

Procedure to follow for modifying these configurations: ● Establish dialogue with the UPC. ● Select the repair mode menu. ● Select the write configuration menu. ● Select line VP004 vehicle parameters. ● Select the line corresponding to the vehicle equipment from the drop-down menus. ● Confirm the configurations selected then click on confirm. ● Switch the ignition off and then back on for the configurations to be recognised by the computer. ● In the configuration reading menu, check that each configuration has been performed. Make sure that all the vehicle's equipment is working.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-18

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault summary table

87G

Summary of faults on which fault finding can be performed by the Protection and Switching Unit. (with corresponding design office codes). Tool fault

Associated DTC

Diagnostic tool title

DF006

920E

COMPUTER

DF034

9212

ALTERNATOR TYPE

DF016

9215

LEFT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT

DF017

9216

RIGHT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT

DF014

9217

LEFT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT

DF015

9218

RIGHT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT

DF030

9219

CLIMATE CONTROL COMPRESSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT

DF023

921A

WINDSCREEN WIPER CIRCUIT

DF018

921B

LEFT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT

DF019

921C

RIGHT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT

DF020

921D

FRONT FOG LIGHT CIRCUIT

DF035

9213

COMPUTER SUPPLY

DF022

921E

REAR SCREEN DE-ICER CIRCUIT

DF031

921F

HEADLIGHT WASHER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

DF036

9220

STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY CIRCUIT

DF029

9221

INJECTION/STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY

DF024

9222

GAS COMPUTER SUPPLY

DF025

9223

ELECTRIC POWER ASSISTED STEERING/AIRBAG SUPPLY

DF026

9224

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX SUPPLY

DF021

9226

REVERSING LIGHT(S) CIRCUIT

DF032

9227

+12 V RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT

DF033

9229

FAN ASSEMBLY SUPPLY CIRCUIT

DF007

9211

UPC - ALTERNATOR CONNECTION

DF013

920F

VOLTAGE REGULATION

DF012

9210

ALTERNATOR

DF027

9225

ACCESSORIES SUPPLY

UPC84 V1.1

87G-19

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF006 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

COMPUTER 1.DEF: Internal electrical fault

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults; The fault is declared present after the ignition is switched off and back on.

If the fault is present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF006

UPC84 V1.1

87G-20

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF007 PRESENT OR STORED

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

UPC - ALTERNATOR CONNECTION CO : Open circuit CC : Short circuit to earth or to + 12 V 1.DEF: Communication disrupted

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: The fault is declared present after the engine has been running for 10 minutes. NOTES Special notes: If the Protection and Switching Unit connection is correct, its voltage is above 3 V.

CO

NOTES

None

Disconnect the UPC-Alternator connection from the alternator and the Protection and Switching Unit. Check the condition of the UPC - Alternator connection at the alternator end. Check the condition of the UPC - Alternator connection at the Protection and Switching Unit end. Check the condition of Protection and Switching Unit connector MT1. Check the continuity on the UPC-Alternator connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector MT1 track 1

alternator

Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF007

UPC84 V1.1

87G-21

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF007 CONTINUED 1

Connect the UPC-Alternator connection to the Protection and Switching Unit, and disconnect the alternator-side connection. 1 st procedure Using an oscilloscope, check for a square pulse signal on the UPC-alternator connection. The test must not be carried out until the engine has been running for at least 10 minutes. Connect the oscilloscope between the UPC-alternator connection connector (on the alternator side) and a body earth. Adjust the oscilloscope as follows: – calibration: 5 V/div – Time base: 500 µs/div Check for a square pulse signal on the oscilloscope, as shown in the diagram below:

If the signal obtained is similar, the USM is communicating with the alternator; contact Techline. If the signal obtained is different, contact Techline. 2 nd procedure Measure the connection voltage on the alternator side with the multimeter. If the voltage is less than 3 V, contact Techline.

1.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the connections on the alternator. Check the connections on Protection and Switching Unit 12-track connector MT1. Check that the alternator earth is connected (straps, etc.). With the engine running, switch on the heated rear screen. Measure the voltage between the alternator body earth and the vehicle earth. If the difference is greater than 1 V, check the vehicle earths. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF007

UPC84 V1.1

87G-22

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF007 CONTINUED 2

CC

NOTES

None

Check the connections on the alternator. Check the connections on the 12-track Protection and Switching Unit MT1 connector. Disconnect the UPC-Alternator connection from the alternator and the Protection and Switching Unit. Make sure that the UPC-Alternator connection is insulated against the + 12 V supply and earth: Protection and Switching Unit connector MT1 track 1

alternator

Replace the connection if necessary. Measure the voltage on track 1 of Protection and Switching Unit connector MT1. If the voltage is 12 V, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-23

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF008 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

MULTIPLEX NETWORK

None.

Apply the multiplex network fault finding procedure (see 88B, Multiplexing).

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF008

UPC84 V1.1

87G-24

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF012 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

1.DEF

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

ALTERNATOR 1.DEF: Alternator electrical fault 2.DEF: Alternator mechanical fault

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to present faults: The fault is declared present when: the engine is running.

NOTES

None

Check the fitting, condition and tension of the accessories drive belt. Check the conformity of the connections and tightness of the alternator earth. Check that the alternator is not clogged. Carry out command AC014 Alternator Regulation, and check its interpretation. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

2.DEF

– – – – –

NOTES

None

Check the fitting, condition and tension of the accessories drive belt. Check the conformity of the connections and tightness of the alternator earths. Check that the alternator is not clogged. Carry out command AC014 Alternator Regulation, and check its interpretation. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF012

UPC84 V1.1

87G-25

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF013 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

VOLTAGE REGULATION 1.DEF : Voltage too low 2.DEF: Voltage too high

Deal with fault DF012 Alternator if it is present or stored first. Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to present faults: The fault is declared present after: when the engine is running.

Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between the alternator and the battery. Check that the alternator earth is sound. Check command PR004 Battery voltage and carry out fault finding on the battery and charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014A, Check the charging circuit) if not correct. Run command AC014 Alternator regulation. In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC014. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF013

UPC84 V1.1

87G-26

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF014 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

LEFT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that the front left-hand side light bulb is sound. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 2-track connector on the front left-hand side light (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that earth on track 2 of the front left-hand side light connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 5

track 5 of the front left-hand side light connector

Repair if necessary. Check the fitting and switch on the front left-hand side light. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF014

UPC84 V1.1

87G-27

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF014 CONTINUED

CCO

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F1 (7.5A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 5

track 2 of the front left-hand side light connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-28

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF015 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

RIGHT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that the front right-hand side light bulb is sound. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 2-track connector on the front right-hand side light (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 2 of the front right-hand side light connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 1

track 5 of the front right-hand side light connector

Repair if necessary. Check the fitting and switch on the front right-hand side light. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF015

UPC84 V1.1

87G-29

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF015 CONTINUED

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F2 (7.5A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 1

track 5 of the front right-hand side light connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-30

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF016 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

LEFT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that the left-hand dipped beam headlight bulb is sound. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the left-hand headlight 4 track connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 1 of the left-hand headlight connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4

track 2 of the left-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. Check the fitting and switch on the left-hand headlight. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF016

UPC84 V1.1

87G-31

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF016 CONTINUED

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F4 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4

track 2 of the left-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-32

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF017 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

RIGHT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that the right-hand dipped beam headlight bulb is sound. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the right-hand headlight 4-track connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 1 of the right-hand headlight connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 6

track 2 of the right-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. Check the fitting and switch on the right-hand headlight. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF017

UPC84 V1.1

87G-33

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF017 CONTINUED

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F3 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 6

track 2 of the right-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-34

Edition 2

UPC Program no.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF018 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

LEFT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that the left-hand main beam headlight bulb is sound. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the left-hand headlight 4 track connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 1 of the left-hand headlight connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 7

track 4 of the left-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. Check the fitting and switch on the left-hand headlight. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF018

UPC84 V1.1

87G-35

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF018 CONTINUED

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F6 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 7

track 4 of the left-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-36

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF019 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

RIGHT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that the right-hand main beam headlight bulb is sound. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the right-hand headlight 4-track connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 1 of the right-hand headlight connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 8

track 4 of the right-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. Check the fitting and switch on the right-hand headlight. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF019

UPC84 V1.1

87G-37

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF019 CONTINUED

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F7 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 8

track 4 of the right-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-38

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF020 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

FRONT FOG LIGHTS CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that the front fog light bulbs are sound. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the front fog light 2-track connectors (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 1 of the front right-hand fog light connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 1 of the front left-hand fog light connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 2

track 1 of the front left-hand fog light connector

UPC track 3

track 1 of the front right-hand fog light connector

Repair if necessary. Check the fitting and switch on the front fog lights. Repair if necessary or replace the light(s) if faulty. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF020

UPC84 V1.1

87G-39

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF020 CONTINUED

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F5 (20A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 2

track 1 of the front left-hand fog light connector

UPC track 3

track 1 of the front right-hand fog light connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-40

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF021 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

REVERSING LIGHT(S) CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F19 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 2

track 5 of the rear left-hand light connector track 2 of the rear right-hand light connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF021

UPC84 V1.1

87G-41

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF022 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

REAR SCREEN DE-ICER CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check the condition and connection of the heated rear screen (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 1 of the rear right-hand light connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track Protection and Switching Unit CM connector (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4

track 1 of the heated rear screen connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF022

UPC84 V1.1

87G-42

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF022 CONTINUED

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F23 (30A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4

track 1 of the heated rear screen connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-43

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF023 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

WINDSCREEN WIPER CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F9 (25A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 4

track 5 of the windscreen wiper motor orange connector

UPC track 9

track 4 of the windscreen wiper motor orange connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF023

UPC84 V1.1

87G-44

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF024 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

GAS COMPUTER SUPPLY CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F16 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4

track C2 of the LPG computer connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF024

UPC84 V1.1

87G-45

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF025 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

ELECTRIC POWER ASSISTED STEERING/AIRBAG SUPPLY CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F10 (5A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 8

track 7 of the airbag computer black connector track 8 of the electric power assisted steering black connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF025

UPC84 V1.1

87G-46

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF026 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX SUPPLY CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F15 (5A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 13

track 27 of the automatic gearbox computer connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF026

UPC84 V1.1

87G-47

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF029 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

ENGINE MANAGEMENT/STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F18 (5A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 4

track 5 of the steering column lock 6-track black connector track D1 of the injection computer black connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF029

UPC84 V1.1

87G-48

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF030 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

CLIMATE CONTROL COMPRESSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F22 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 10

track A of the climate control clutch 2-track grey connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF030

UPC84 V1.1

87G-49

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF031 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

HEADLIGHT WASHER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F21 (15A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 11

track 1 of the headlight washer pump 2-track black connector

UPC track 7

track 2 of the headlight washer pump 2-track black connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF031

UPC84 V1.1

87G-50

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF032 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

+12 V RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuses F8 (25A), F12 (20A) and F20 (20A) are correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC connector MN track 8

track 56 of automatic gearbox computer connector A track A1 and A3 of the LPG solenoid valve relays

UPC connector MN track 6

track A1 of the diesel heater relay connector

UPC connector CM track 5

track 3 ABS computer connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF032

UPC84 V1.1

87G-51

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF033 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

FAN ASSEMBLY SUPPLY CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check the condition and connection of the fan assembly 2 -track black connector (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track Protection and Switching Unit MM connector (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 1

track 2 of the fan assembly 2-track black connector (heating) track 1 of the fan assembly 2-track black connector (climate control)

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 1

track 2 of the fan assembly 2-track black connector (heating) track 1 of the fan assembly 2-track black connector (climate control)

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF033

UPC84 V1.1

87G-52

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF034 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

ALTERNATOR TYPE 1.DEF: inconsistency

None.

Check, by reading configuration LC001 ALTERNATOR TYPE, that the alternator type corresponds to that fitted to the vehicle. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF034

UPC84 V1.1

87G-53

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF035 PRESENT OR STORED

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

COMPUTER SUPPLY VOLTAGE 1.DEF: voltage too low

The fault is declared present after: a drop in the UPC voltage to less than 8 V for longer than 10 seconds. NOTES

The fault is declared stored following: a drop in the UPC voltage to less than 8 V for longer than 10 seconds followed by a rise in the voltage to more than 8 V.

Contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF035

UPC84 V1.1

87G-54

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF036 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F11 (15A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 10

track 2 of UCH connector PP2

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF036

UPC84 V1.1

87G-55

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

NOTES

Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine stopped, + after ignition feed active.

Main screen

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

Fault finding

1

Battery voltage

PR004:

Battery voltage

11 V < X < 13.5 V

If there is a fault, refer to the procedure for dealing with parameter PR004 Battery voltage.

2

Reverse gear

ET004:

Reverse gear engaged

YES NO

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET004.

3

Oil pressure

ET027:

Oil pressure contact

OPEN CLOSED

None

4

+ 12 V after ignition feed

ET003:

+ 12 V after ignition feed relay control

INACTIVE ACTIVE

None

USM_V48_CCONF

UPC84 V1.1

87G-56

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

NOTES

Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine stopped, + after ignition feed active.

Keyless vehicle Sub-function: starting

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

Fault finding

1

+ 12 V after ignition feed

AC015:

+ 12 V after ignition feed

This command is used to activate the + after ignition feed

In the event of a fault, run fault finding on the battery and the charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014A, Checking the charge circuit, 16A, Starting-charging).

2

Reverse gear

ET004:

Reverse gear engaged

YES NO

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET004.

NOT IN NEUTRAL NEUTRAL

Normal statuses.

UNAVAILABLE INVALID

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation for status ET005.

STATUS 1 STATUS 2 STATUS 3

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation for status ET010.

YES

Normal status.

INACTIVE ACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of fault DF032.

3

4

5

Manual gearbox gear lever position

Starting conditions met

+ 12 V after ignition feed relay control

ET005:

ET010:

ET003:

Manual gearbox gear lever position

Starting conditions met

+ 12 V after ignition feed relay control

UPC84 V1.1

87G-57

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

NOTES

Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine stopped, + after ignition feed active.

FUNCTION: AIR CONDITIONING Sub-function: HEATING

Order

1

2

Function

Alternator

Rear screen de-icer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

PR010:

AC011:

Display and Notes

Fault finding

Alternator

0 < X < 99 % Switch on the heated rear screen and check that the value increases

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of parameter PR010.

Rear screen de-icer

This command supplies the rear screen and door mirror heating resistors, if fitted to the vehicle. They should be warm.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC011.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-58

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Sub-function: Cold loop

Order

Function

1

Compressor control

2

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

Fault finding

AC008:

Compressor control

You should be able to hear the compressor clutch (stops the motor running).

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC008.

AC009:

Low-speed fan assembly

This command is used to activate the fan assembly at low speed.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC009.

AC010:

High-speed fan assembly

This command is used to activate the fan assembly at high speed.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC010.

ET014:

Low-speed engine fan assembly relay control

INACTIVE ACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation for status ET014.

ET013:

High-speed engine fan assembly relay control

INACTIVE ACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation for status ET013.

Fan assembly

3

Low-speed engine fan assembly relay control

4

High-speed engine fan assembly relay control

UPC84 V1.1

87G-59

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

NOTES

Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine stopped, + after ignition feed active.

FUNCTION: WIPING Sub-function: WIPING POWER

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

AC004: 1

Wiper

2

Windscreen wiper protection

3

Windscreen wiper park position

4

Low-speed wiper

Headlight washer

Display and Notes This command is used to activate the windscreen wiper motor at low speed. This command is used to activate the windscreen wiper motor at high speed.

Fault finding

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for commands AC005 and AC006

AC006:

High-speed wiper

ET002:

Windscreen wiper protection

INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation for status ET002.

ET018:

Windscreen wiper park position

PRESENT (if the wiper is not active) ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET018.

Headlight washers relay

This command is used to activate the headlight washers relay on the right and left-hand side alternately.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC013.

AC013:

UPC84 V1.1

87G-60

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

NOTES

Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine stopped, + after ignition feed active.

FUNCTION: LIGHTING Sub-function: LIGHTING POWER

Order

Function

1

Side lights

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

Fault finding

AC003:

Side lights

This command switches on the side lights.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC003.

2

Dipped headlights

AC002:

Dipped headlights

This command switches on the dipped beam headlights.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC002.

3

Main beam headlights

AC001:

Main beam headlights

This command switches on the main beam headlights.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC001.

4

Front fog lights

AC004:

Front fog lights

This command switches on the front fog lights.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC004.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-61

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

NOTES

Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine running.

FUNCTION: CHARGE CIRCUIT Sub-function: ALTERNATOR

Order

Function

1

Alternator fault

3

4

Alternator

Alternator regulation

Parameter or Status checked or Action

ET023:

PR010:

AC014:

Display and Notes

Fault finding

Alternator thermal fault

ABSENT

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET023.

Alternator

0 < X < 99 % Switch on the heated rear screen and check that the value increases

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command PR010 Alternator Charge.

Alternator regulation

Run this command with the engine running. When the command is run, the Protection and Switching Unit sets a regulation voltage setpoint for the alternator: – Alternator voltage = 15 V for 30 seconds – Alternator voltage = 13 V for 30 seconds

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC014.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-62

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

NOTES

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine stopped, + after ignition feed active.

FUNCTION: CHARGE CIRCUIT Sub-function: BATTERY

Order

1

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

PR004:

Battery voltage

PR008:

Battery voltage after rest

Display and Notes

Fault finding

11 < X < 13.5 V

If there is a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command PR004 Battery voltage.

12.1 V < X < 13.5 V

If there is a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command PR008 Battery voltage after rest.

Voltages

UPC84 V1.1

87G-63

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Status summary table

Tool status

87G

Diagnostic tool title

ET002

Windscreen wiper protection

ET003

+ 12 V after ignition feed relay control

ET004

Reverse gear engaged

ET010

Starting conditions met

ET021

Alternator electrical fault

ET022

Alternator mechanical fault

ET023

Alternator thermal fault

ET013

High-speed fan assembly relay control

ET014

Low-speed fan assembly relay control

ET005

Manual gearbox gear lever position

ET018

Windscreen wiper park position

ET027

Oil pressure contact

UPC84 V1.1

87G-64

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

WINDSCREEN WIPER PROTECTION ET002

NOTES

Special notes: Only apply the checks if the status is ACTIVE or LOCKED. If the status is ACTIVE, this means that after a wiping request, the UPC detected abnormal operation for more than 6 seconds (restricted or jammed). If the status is LOCKED, this means that the total duration of pauses is greater than 2 minutes. The status returns to INACTIVE as soon as the UCH requests another wiping setpoint (wiper control adjusted or request by the rain sensor).

Make sure that nothing is mechanically blocking the movement of the wiper arms (blades stuck, condition and assembly of the wiper mechanism linkage and no object that could impair the movement of the mechanism). Check that the windscreen wiper mechanism is not seized. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of connectors CT1 and CN on the UPC and the windscreen wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector CT1 track 10

track 2 of the windscreen wiper motor connector

UPC connector CN track 4

track 5 of the windscreen wiper motor connector

UPC connector CN track 9

track 4 of the windscreen wiper motor connector

Repair if necessary. If everything is in order but the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ET002

UPC84 V1.1

87G-65

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET004

NOTES

Special notes: Only apply the checks if: – + after ignition feed is active. – There must be no faults present.

5-speed manual gearbox Check the condition and connection of the reverse gear switch connector and UPC connector MN. Repair if necessary. With the ignition on and reverse gear engaged, check for + 12 V on tracks 11 and 14 of UPC connector MN. If this is not correct, check for insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 14

track 2 neutral sensor

Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 11

track 1 neutral sensor

Reverse gear engaged: Switch track 1

track 2 of the switch

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ET004

UPC84 V1.1

87G-66

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

ET004 CONTINUED

6-speed manual gearbox Check the condition and connection of the reverse gear switch connector and UPC connector MN. Repair if necessary. With the ignition on and reverse gear engaged, check for + 12 V on tracks 11 and 14 of UPC connector MN. If this is not correct, check for insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 11

track 2 neutral sensor

Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 14

track 1 neutral sensor

Reverse gear engaged: Switch track 1

track 2 of the switch

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. Automatic gearbox Check the condition and connection of the reverse gear switch connector and UPC connector MN. Repair if necessary. With the ignition on and reverse gear engaged, check for + 12 V on tracks 11 and 14 of UPC connector MN. If this is not correct, check for insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 14

track A2, multifunction switch

Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 11

track A1 multifunction switch

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-67

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

STARTING CONDITIONS MET ET010

NOTES

Special notes: Apply the checks if the status is STATUS 1, STATUS 2 OR STATUS 3, with the ignition on.

STATUS 1 The UCH is preventing the Protection and Switching Unit from activating the starter. Run fault finding on this computer (see 87B, UCH). STATUS 2 The injection is preventing the Protection and Switching Unit from running the starter. Run fault finding on this computer (see 13B, Diesel injection and 17B, Petrol injection). STATUS 3 The automatic gearbox computer is preventing the Protection and Switching Unit from running the starter. Make sure that the selector lever is in position P or N. Run fault finding on this computer (see 23A, automatic gearbox). If the conditions are met and the starter does not work, refer to ALP 2. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ET010

UPC84 V1.1

87G-68

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

ALTERNATOR ELECTRICAL FAULT ET021

NOTES

Special notes: Apply the checks if the status is PRESENT with the engine running.

Check the condition and connection of the alternator connector and Protection and Switching Unit connector MT. If status ET022 Alternator mechanical fault is PRESENT, check the condition and tension of the accessories belt. Replace the belt if necessary. If status ET022 Alternator mechanical fault is ABSENT, check the charging circuit (see Technical Note 6014A, Checking the charging circuit, 16A, Starting-charging). Replace the alternator if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ET021

UPC84 V1.1

87G-69

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

ALTERNATOR MECHANICAL FAULT ET022

NOTES

Special notes: Apply the checks if the status is PRESENT with the engine running.

Check the condition and tension of the accessories belt. Replace the belt if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ET022

UPC84 V1.1

87G-70

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

ALTERNATOR THERMAL FAULT ET023

NOTES

Special notes: Apply the checks if the status is PRESENT, with the engine running.

Stop the engine Check the general condition of the alternator: Make sure that there are no foreign bodies that could impair the alternator cooling. Clean the alternator if necessary. With the engine stopped, let the alternator cool down with the bonnet open for at least 1 hour. Start the engine with the bonnet closed. Switch on the main beam headlights and rear screen de-icer. If the status returns to PRESENT, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ET023

UPC84 V1.1

87G-71

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Parameter summary table

Tool parameter

87G

Diagnostic tool title

PR004

Battery voltage

PR008

Battery voltage after rest

PR006

Alternator setpoint voltage

PR010

Alternator charge

UPC84 V1.1

87G-72

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87G

BATTERY VOLTAGE PR004

NOTES

None

Check the consistency between the battery voltage measurement from the multimeter and the value of PR004 Battery voltage. Engine stopped: 11 V < X < 13.5 V. Engine running: 10.5 V < X < 16 V. If the voltage values are not consistent (greater than 0.3 V difference between the 2 values), check the connection between the + battery feed and the Protection and Switching Unit. If the values are consistent, carry out fault finding on the battery and the charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014, Checking the charging circuit, 16A, Starting-charging).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_PR004

UPC84 V1.1

87G-73

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87G

ALTERNATOR SETPOINT VOLTAGE PR006

NOTES

Priority in dealing with fault: – if fault DF007 UPC-alternator connection is declared present, deal with this fault first. – if one of statuses ET021 Alternator electrical fault, ET022 Alternator mechanical fault, ET023 Alternator thermal fault is present, deal with these statuses first. Special notes: Only apply the checks if: – the engine is running, – the parameter value is inconsistent with the voltage value measured between the alternator B+ terminal and the alternator chassis earth.

Wait for 10 minutes with the engine running. After 10 minutes, if fault DF007 UPC-alternator connection is declared present, deal with the fault. Measure the voltage at the alternator terminals, between the B+ terminal and the alternator chassis earth. Run AC014 Alternator regulation. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 15 V ± 0.2. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 13 V ± 0.2. Switch on the heated rear screen and the main beam headlights. Run AC014 Alternator regulation again. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 15 V ± 0.2. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 13 V ± 0.2. If the values obtained are not correct, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_PR006

UPC84 V1.1

87G-74

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87G

BATTERY VOLTAGE AFTER REST PR008

NOTES

This value can only be interpreted after the engine and electrical consumers have been stopped for at least 8 hours.

Check the consistency between the battery voltage measurement from the multimeter and the value of PR008 Battery voltage after rest. This value must be between 12.1 V < X < 13.5 V If the voltage values are not consistent (greater than 0.3 V difference between the 2 values), check the connection between the + battery feed and the Protection and Switching Unit. If the voltage values are consistent, carry out fault finding on the battery and the charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014, Checking the charging circuit, 16A, Starting-charging).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_PR008

UPC84 V1.1

87G-75

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87G

ALTERNATOR CHARGE PR010

NOTES

If fault DF007 UPC-alternator connection is declared present, deal with this fault first.

Is parameter PR008 Battery voltage after rest greater than 12.2 V?

YES Start the engine and let it idle for 5 minutes. Deactivate the climate control request. Check that the fan assemblies are not running. Without electrical consumers running, check that PR010 Alternator Charge is below 50 %. Switch on the heated rear screen and the main beam headlights. Wait 20 seconds and check that PR010 Alternator charge has increased but remains below 100 %. If PR010 Alternator charge is locked at 100 %, contact the Techline. NO Start the engine and let it idle for 30 minutes. Deactivate the climate control request. Check that the fan assemblies are not running. Switch on the heated rear screen and the main beam headlights. Wait 20 seconds and check that PR010 Alternator charge has increased but remains below 100 %. If PR010 Alternator charge is locked at 100 %, contact the Techline. If the fault is still present, carry out fault finding on the battery and charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014; Checking the charging circuit, 16A, Starting-charging).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_PR010

UPC84 V1.1

87G-76

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Command summary table

Tool command

87G

Diagnostic tool title

AC001

Main beam headlights

AC002

Dipped headlights

AC003

Side lights

AC004

Front fog lights

AC005

Windscreen wiper low speed

AC006

Windscreen wiper high-speed

AC008

Compressor control

AC009

Low-speed fan assembly

AC010

High-speed fan assembly

AC011

Rear screen de-icer

AC013

Headlight washer relay

AC014

Alternator regulation

AC015

+ 12 V after ignition feed

AC016

Test electrical supply circuits

UPC84 V1.1

87G-77

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS AC001

NOTES

Check the condition and connections of fuses 6 (10A) and 7 (10A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace them, if necessary. Check the condition and connections of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on track 1 of the headlight. Repair if necessary. Check for +12 V on track 4 of the headlight while the command is running. If the value is correct, check the continuity and insulation between the bulb and the headlight connector. Check the condition and connection of connector AN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 7

track 4 left-hand headlight connector

Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 8

track 4 right-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-78

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

DIPPED HEADLIGHTS AC002

NOTES

Check the condition and connections of fuses 3 (10A) and 4 (10A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace them, if necessary. Check the condition and connections of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on track 1 of the headlight. Repair if necessary. Check for +12 V feed on track 2 of the headlight while the command is running. If the value is correct, check the continuity and insulation between the bulb and the headlight connector. Check the condition and connection of connector AN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 4

track 2 of the left-hand headlight connector

Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 6

track 2 of the right-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-79

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

SIDE LIGHTS AC003

NOTES

Check the condition and connections of fuses 1 (7.5A) and 2 (7.5A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace them, if necessary. Check the condition and connections of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on track 1 of the headlight. Repair if necessary. Check for +12 V on track 5 of the headlight while the command is running. If the value is correct, check the continuity and insulation between the bulb and the headlight connector. Check the condition and connection of connector AN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 5

track 5 left-hand headlight connector

Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 1

track 5 right-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-80

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

FRONT FOG LIGHTS AC004

NOTES

Use this command only for vehicles fitted with front fog lights. Check the condition and connection of fuse 5 (20A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace it if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Check the condition and connection of the bulb connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on the bulb connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the + 12 V feed on the bulb connectors while the command is running. If the value is correct, replace the bulb(s). Check the condition and connection of connector AN on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check for insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 2

track 1 left-hand fog light connector

Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 3

track 1 right-hand fog light connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-81

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

WINDSCREEN WIPER LOW SPEED AC005

NOTES

Check the condition and connection of fuse 9 (25A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace it if necessary. Make sure that status ET002 Windscreen wiper protection remains INACTIVE.

Check the condition and connections of the wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check the earth of track 1 of the wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check for the + 12 V feed on track 4 of the wiper motor while the command is running. If the value is correct, replace the motor. Check the condition and connection of connector CN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector CN track 9

track 4 windscreen wiper motor

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-82

Edition 2

UPC Program No. C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

WINDSCREEN WIPER HIGH SPEED AC006

NOTES

Check the condition and connection of fuse 9 (25A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace it if necessary. Make sure that status ET002 Windscreen wiper protection remains INACTIVE.

Check the condition and connections of the wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check the earth of track 1 of the wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on track 5 of the wiper motor while the command is running. If the value is correct, replace the motor. Check the condition and connection of connector CN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector CN track 4

track 5 windscreen wiper motor

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-83

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

COMPRESSOR CONTROL AC008

NOTES

Activating the command with the engine running is prohibited. Check the condition and connection of fuse 22 (10A) on the Protection and Switching Unit.

Check the condition and connection of the climate control compressor connector. Repair if necessary. Make sure that the compressor is earthed. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on track A of the compressor while the command is running. If not correct: Check the condition and connection of connector MN on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 10

track A compressor connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-84

Edition 2

UPC Program No. C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

LOW-SPEED FAN ASSEMBLY AC009

NOTES

Make sure nothing is hindering the rotation of the blades.

Check the condition and connection of the engine cooling fan connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure that track 2 of the engine cooling fan is earthed. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V feed on the fan assembly while the command is running. If correct, replace the fan assembly. If this is not correct, check for insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector MM track 2

track 1 of the engine cooling fan

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-85

Edition 2

UPC Program No. C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

HIGH-SPEED FAN ASSEMBLY AC010

NOTES

Make sure nothing is hindering the rotation of the blades.

Check the condition and connection of the engine cooling fan connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure that track 2 of the engine cooling fan is earthed. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V feed on the fan assembly while the command is running. If correct, replace the fan assembly. If not correct, check the continuity and insulation on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector MM track 1

track 1 of the fan assembly

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-86

Edition 2

UPC Program No. C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

REAR SCREEN DE-ICER AC011

NOTES

Check the condition and connection of fuse 23 (30A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace it if necessary.

REAR SCREEN

Check the condition and connection of the rear screen connectors. Repair if necessary. Check that the resistance of the rear screen is neither zero nor infinity. Make sure that the rear screen is earthed. Check for + 12 V feed on the rear screen terminal while the command is running. If not correct: Check the condition and connection of connector CM and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check for insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector CM track 4

track 1 rear screen connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-87

Edition 2

UPC Program No. C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

HEADLIGHT WASHER RELAY AC013

NOTES

Check the condition and connection of fuse 21 (15A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace it if necessary. The headlight washer pump operates if the dipped headlights are lit and the windscreen washer switch is pressed and held.

Check the condition and connection of the connectors on the headlight washer pump. Repair if necessary. To check that the pump is working properly, supply the pump's tracks directly in one direction and then the other. If the pump does not rotate, replace it. Check for + 12 V alternately on track 2 of the headlight washer pump connector. If not correct: Check the condition and connection of connector CN. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity, insulation and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector CN track 7

track 2 of the headlight washer pump black connector

Protection and Switching Unit connector CN track 11

track 1 of the headlight washer pump black connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-88

Edition 2

UPC Program No. C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

ALTERNATOR REGULATION AC014

NOTES

Conditions for the application of the command: – engine running at idling speed and warm engine, – Climate control off, – check that the fan assembly is not in operation. – check that PR010 Alternator charge is below 50 % without electrical consumers and below 90 % with the main beam headlights lit and rear screen de-icer activated. Effect of command: – for 30 seconds, the Protection and Switching Unit imposes a regulation voltage of 15 V ± 0.2 on the alternator. – then for another 30 seconds, the Protection and Switching Unit imposes a regulation voltage of 13 V ± 0.2 on the alternator.

Switch off all the electrical consumers (fans, main beam headlights, etc.). Measure the voltage across the alternator terminals between the B+ alternator terminal and the body of the alternator for the earth. Run AC014 Alternator regulation. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 15 V ± 0.2. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 13 V ± 0.2. Switch on the heated rear screen and the main beam headlights. Run AC014 Alternator regulation again. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 15 V ± 0.2. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 13 V ± 0.2. If the values obtained are not correct, carry out fault finding on the battery and the charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014, Checking the charging circuit, 16A, Starting-charging).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-89

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

TEST ELECTRICAL SUPPLY CIRCUITS AC016

NOTES

Switch off the ignition.

This command activates several electrical circuits run by the Protection and Switching Unit, and so carry out fault finding on the fuses in open circuit or short circuit. Switch on the ignition again. Read the faults. Deal with present faults,

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits again.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-90

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Customer complaints

87G

Run complete fault finding on the multiplex network (see 88B, Multiplex). Carry out fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.

NOTES

RECORDED FAULTS

NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER

ALP 1

THE STARTER DOES NOT WORK

ALP 2

NO BACKLIGHTING OF THE VARIOUS FUNCTIONS IN THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

ALP 3

UPC84 V1.1

87G-91

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87G

ALP 1

No dialogue with the computer

NOTES

Run a complete multiplex network check using the diagnostic tool. Check the condition and connection of the connectors and fuses on the UPC. Check the connection, condition and operation of relay 9 (+ after ignition feed) on the UPC.

Try the tool on another vehicle. Check the voltage of the battery. Check the condition and connection of the battery fuse box fuses and terminals. Replace any faulty fuses. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V feed on the Protection and Switching Unit bolted power terminal. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on tracks 3 and 6 of connector CM. Repair if necessary. Check for a + 12 V battery feed on track 16, a + 12 V after ignition supply on track 1, an earth on track 5 and on track 4 of the diagnostic socket. Repair if necessary. If dialogue with the computer is still not possible, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ALP1

UPC84 V1.1

87G-92

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87G

ALP 2

The starter does not work

NOTES

Run a complete multiplex network check using the diagnostic tool. Using status ET010 Starting conditions satisfied, check that all the starting conditions have been fulfilled; the status should be YES.

Check the condition and connection of connector MM on the Protection and Switching Unit, and of the starter control terminal. Repair if necessary. With the starter activated, check for 12 V feed on the starter control terminal. If correct, carry out fault finding on the starter. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the connection between UPC connector MM track 3 and the starter control terminal. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ALP2

UPC84 V1.1

87G-93

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87G

ALP 3

No backlighting of the various functions in the passenger compartment

NOTES

Make sure that the side lights are working; if not, refer to the procedure for command AC003 Side lights.

Check the condition and connection of the faulty function(s). Repair if necessary. Check for earth on the faulty function(s). Repair if necessary. With the side lights lit, check for 12 V feed on the faulty function(s). If correct, replace the defective component. Check for insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance between the faulty function and the Protection and Switching Unit: Rear right-hand light, right-hand heated seat control, righthand window winder controls, central locking switch, climate control computer, CD changer, cruise control/speed limiter control, door mirrors control.

track 5 of Protection and Switching Unit connector CN.

Rear left-hand light, left-hand heated seat control, number plate lighting, left-hand window winder controls, electric door mirrors control, cigarette lighter, radio, automatic gearbox display, traction control switch.

track 12 of Protection and Switching Unit connector CN.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ALP3

UPC84 V1.1

87G-94

Edition 2

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF 187D Electric sunroof: List of components and their locations

87D

UCH located under the dashboard on the left-hand side.

Moving roof glass.

Sunroof motor/computer, mounted at the rear of the roof.

Roof opening and closing switch.

87D-1

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Electric sunroof: List of components and their locations

ABS mounted in the engine compartment.

87D-2

87D

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Electric sunroof: Component functions

87D

The operation of the sunroof is authorised by the UCH.

Gives increased air circulation and lets more light into the vehicle.

The computer (incorporated in the motor) receives the request to open or close from the switch. The motor (controlled by the computer) drives a mechanism to make the glass roof slide.

The electric sunroof switch allows the customer to select any one of four open positions. One tilted position and three sliding positions.

87D-3

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Electric sunroof: Component functions

The ABS sends the speed signal to the sunroof computer.

87D-4

87D

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Electric sunroof: Operating diagram

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Fuse and relay unit UCH ABS computer Roof opening and closing switch. Sunroof computer Sunroof electric motor Sunroof motor and computer supply voltage Authorisation to operate Vehicle speed Request to open or close

87D-5

87D

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Sunroof: Operation The electric sunroof has four open positions (one tilted position and three sliding positions) controlled by the same motor. The electric sunroof also has an antipinch function. The sunroof motor requires a feed to operate it. The feed is supplied via the computer. The computer receives signals from the switch and the authorisation from the UCH (0 V authorisation and 12 V no authorisation). The computer also receives information about the motor's speed of rotation and direction of rotation.

Remote closing of the sunroof (vehicles fitted with one touch windows). To close the sunroof remotely, lock the doors with the RENAULT card by pressing the locking button twice. In hands-free mode, the button on one of the door handles or the boot handle should be pressed twice.

87D

ANTI-PINCH Anti-pinch is a safety function that stops the roof closing when it detects a point of resistance (distorted rail, presence of a hand, etc.). The detection of an obstacle is based on an analysis of the sunroof motor's speed of rotation. During the initialisation phase, the motor computer stores the speed curve. The computer compares the sunroof's speed of movement (motor's speed of rotation) with the stored speed of movement. The computer also receives information about the vehicle speed, so that at high speed the wind pressure working against the closing movement of the roof is taken into account. Depending on the speed variation detected, the system decides whether or not to trigger the anti-pinch function. IMPORTANT The anti-pinch function only operates if the sunroof has been correctly initialised (see Initialisation).

After closing the sunroof remotely, pressing button (1) once allows the sunroof to recall the position it was in before it was closed.

87D-6

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Sunroof: Defect mode and safe mode

If so desired, the anti-pinch function can be inhibited when there is an obstacle (rail distortion, foreign body in the runners, etc.).

87D

If the sunroof motor breaks down, it is possible to move the roof manually using an Allen key at (2).

Procedure: 1: Start the engine. 2: Move the sunroof control to the closed position (control turned fully to the left). 3: Press and hold the switch (1) just after the anti-pinch function is triggered. The sunroof will close 5 cm at a time. The anti-pinch becomes active again when the control is released.

87D-7

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Electric sunroof: Initialisation

87D

IMPORTANT The anti-pinch function is only operational if the sunroof has been correctly initialised. Before starting the initialisation, read through the whole procedure.

Start the vehicle. Move the sunroof control to the closed position (control turned fully to the left). After the sunroof switch has been moved, is the anti-pinch function triggered (the sunroof closes then opens a few centimetres)?

NO

YES Wait at least 10 seconds before proceeding.

NO

Is the sunroof open? YES Press and hold the switch. The roof gradually returns to the closed position without anti-pinch. Wait for the "click-click" noise of the motor switching* and then release the switch. Immediately press the switch again and hold it until the roof opens and closes completely. The roof will not normally move immediately, only after a 5 second delay.

Press and hold the switch. Wait for the "clickclick" noise of the motor switching* and then release the switch. Immediately press the switch and hold it until the roof opens and closes completely. The roof will not normally move immediately, only after a 5 second delay.

Release the switch. Wait at least 5 seconds before proceeding with an initialisation check (see Initialisation check).

IMPORTANT Wait at least 5 seconds before carrying out another initialisation procedure. If the procedure is interrupted during the cycle, start again from the beginning, otherwise the sunroof will no longer operate.

87D-8

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Electric sunroof: Initialisation check INITIALISATION CHECK

1 2 3 4 5 6

Start the engine. Set the sunroof control to the fully open position. Wait for the sunroof to open completely. Set the sunroof control to the fully closed position. Wait for the sunroof to close completely. Turn the engine off.

If the opening and closing of the sunroof have proceeded correctly (without triggering the anti-pinch function), the sunroof is initialised. If the anti-pinch function triggers when the sunroof is closing, see Sunroof, Customer complaints.

87D-9

87D

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Sunroof fault finding: Customer complaints

Mégane II ph2

NOTES

87D

Only refer to these customer complaints after a full check with the diagnostic tool.

THE SUNROOF The sunroof does not operate at all

ALP 1

The sunroof does not operate in certain positions on the control

ALP 2

The sunroof does not close when driving (anti-pinch is triggered)

ALP 3

The sunroof is difficult to close or the anti-pinch is triggered without any apparent obstacles

ALP 4

The sunroof cannot be closed remotely

ALP 5

87D-10

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Mégane II ph2

87D

ALP 1

The sunroof does not operate at all

NOTES

Use Technical Note Wiring diagram, Mégane II ph2. Carry out the various checks with the battery charged and + after ignition feed switched on. Check that the fuses are sound. Use a multimeter and a 55 W test bulb. Use the diagnostic tool.

Carry out UCH configuration reading and check that command LC070 (ONE-TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS/SUNROOF) is configured WITH. Is command LC070 correctly configured?

NO

Modify the configuration (see 87B, Passenger compartment connection unit).

NO

Check the feeds using a test bulb at connector R301, connection code BP93 and MAM. Examine fuse E 20A (component code 260).

YES Move the sunroof control to the Closed position and press and hold the central part of the control. After pressing the central part of the control for approximately 10 seconds, does the roof move smoothly?

Does the bulb light up correctly?

YES See ALP 4

YES

NO

Check the continuity of connection BP 93 between component 260 and connector R301and connection MAM between connector R301 and the chassis earth. If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it.

87D-11

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Mégane II ph2

87D

ALP 1 CONTINUED 1

Use the diagnostic tool to read the faults in the UCH. Is fault (DF031) present?

NO

YES Is the fault (DF031 CC.1)?

Is the fault (DF031 CC.0)?

Line 21K is cut in the passenger compartment wiring, if there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it

Disconnect connector R3. Switch off the + after ignition feed then switch it on again. Does fault (DF031 CC.1) become a stored fault?

YES

Line 21K has a short circuit to + 12 V in the driver's door wiring, if there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it

YES

Line 21K has a short circuit to + 12 V in the rear lefthand door wiring, if there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it

YES

Line 21K has a short circuit to + 12 V in the rear right-hand door wiring, if there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it

NO Reconnect connector R3 and disconnect connector R13. Switch off the + after ignition feed then switch it on again. Does fault (DF031 CC.1) become a stored fault?

NO Reconnect connector R13 and disconnect connector R243. Switch off the + after ignition feed then switch it on again. Does fault (DF031 CC.1) become a stored fault?

NO

87D-12

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Mégane II ph2

87D

ALP 1 CONTINUED 2

Reconnect connector R243 and disconnect connector R4. Switch off the + after ignition feed then switch it on again. Does fault (DF031 CC.1) become a stored fault?

YES

Line 21K has a short circuit to + 12 V in the passenger door wiring, if there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it

YES

Line 21K has a short circuit to + 12 V in the sunroof wiring, if there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it

NO Disconnect connector R301. Switch off the + after ignition feed then switch it on again. Does fault (DF031 CC.1) become a stored fault? NO Line 21K has a short circuit to + 12 V in the passenger compartment wiring, if there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it

87D-13

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Mégane II ph2

87D

ALP 1 CONTINUED 3

Disconnect the control connector (component 317) from the sunroof (see MR 364 Mechanical, 87D Electric windows & Sunroof, Sunroof switch: Removal Refitting). Connect an ohmmeter to connection 52D of component 317 and the chassis earth. Is the value shown less than 30 Ohms?

YES

Check the conformity and correct operation of the control using an ohmmeter and the table below.

NO

If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it

NO Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR 364 Mechanical, 87D, Electric windows & Sunroof, Sunroof opening motor: Removal Refitting) and check the continuity of connection 52D between components 317 and 304. Is the connection correct?

YES Connect a test bulb between connections BP93 and MAM of component 304. Does the bulb light up correctly?

NO

YES Replace the sunroof motor (see MR 364, 87D Electric windows & Sunroof: Removal Refitting).

Check the continuity of connection MAM between component 304 and connector R301, and the continuity of connection BP 93 between component 304 and connector R301. Examine intermediate connector R339. If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it. When the wiring has been repaired, carry out the initialisation (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation).

Control position

Tracks 1 and 2

Tracks 1 and 3

Tracks 1 and 5

Closed

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

∝

Tilt position

∝

100 Ω Max.

∝

Sliding position 1

∝

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

Sliding position 2

∝

∝

100 Ω Max.

Sliding position 3

100 Ω Max.

∝

100 Ω Max.

Pressed

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

87D-14

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Mégane II ph2

87D

ALP 1 CONTINUED 4

Is the control correct?

NO

Replace the control.

NO

Check the continuity of connection BP 93 between component 304 and connector R301, and connection MAM between component 304 and connector R301. Examine intermediate connector R339. If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it.

YES

Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR 364 Mechanical, 87D Electric windows & Sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal - Refitting). Connect a test bulb between connections BP93 and MAM of component 304. Does the bulb light up correctly?

YES

Check the authorisation sent by the UCH. Is the voltage between connections 21K and BP93 on component 304 approximately 12 V?

NO

YES

Check the continuity and insulation of connections 52J, 52H, and 52G between components 317 and 304. Are the continuity and insulation correct?

NO

YES

Replace the sunroof motor (see MR 364 Mechanical, 87D Electric windows & Sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal Refitting)

87D-15

Continuity fault on connection 21K between component 304 and component 645. Examine the intermediate connector R339 and R301. If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it. After repair, carry out the initialisation (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation).

If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it. When the wiring has been repaired, carry out the initialisation (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation).

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Mégane II ph2

ALP 2

87D

The sunroof does not operate in certain positions on the control

Use Technical Note Wiring diagram, Mégane II ph2. Carry out the various checks with a multimeter.

NOTES

Does the sunroof operate in at least one of the control positions?

NO

See ALP 1

YES Disconnect the sunroof control and check its conformity and correct operation using an ohmmeter and the table below.

Control position

Tracks 1 and 2

Tracks 1 and 3

Tracks 1 and 5

Closed

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

∝

Tilt position

∝

100 Ω Max.

∝

Sliding position 1

∝

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

Sliding position 2

∝

∝

100 Ω Max.

Sliding position 3

100 Ω Max.

∝

100 Ω Max.

Pressed

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

87D-16

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Mégane II ph2

87D

ALP 2 CONTINUED

NOTES

Use Technical Note Wiring diagram, Mégane II ph2. Carry out the various checks with the battery charged and + after ignition feed switched on. Use a multimeter.

Is the control correct?

NO

YES Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR 364 Mechanical, 87D, Electric windows & Sunroof, Sunroof opening motor: Removal Refitting) and use an ohmmeter to check the continuity and insulation of connections 52J, 52H, and 52G between components 317 and 304. Examine intermediate connector R339. Are the continuity and insulation correct?

NO

YES Replace the sunroof motor (see MR 364 Mechanical, 87D Electric windows & Sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal - Refitting)

87D-17

Replace the control (see MR 364 Mechanical, 87D Electric windows & Sunroof, Sunroof switch: Removal - Refitting).

If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it. When the wiring has been repaired, carry out the initialisation (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation).

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Mégane II ph2

87D

ALP 3

The sunroof does not close when driving (anti-pinch is triggered)

NOTES

Use the Technical Note Wiring diagram, Mégane II ph2. Carry out the various checks with the battery charged and + after ignition feed switched on.

Does the sunroof operate when the vehicle is stationary?

NO

See ALP 1

NO

Fault solved

YES Initialise the sunroof (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation). Is the fault still present? YES Measure the vehicle speed signal (frequency), on connection 47F, at connector R301. This can be done in various ways (See ALP 3 Procedure). Is the vehicle speed signal correct?

NO

YES Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR 364 Mechanics, 87D Electric windows & Sunroof, Sunroof opening motor: Removal Refitting) and measure the vehicle speed signal (frequency), on connection 47F, of component 304. This can be done in various ways (See ALP 3 Procedure).

YES

Continuity fault on connection 47F between component 304 and connector R301. Examine intermediate connector R339. Try disconnecting the other components connected to this connection before working on the wiring (e.g. radio).

Replace the sunroof motor (see MR 364 Mechanical, 87D Electric windows & Sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal - Refitting).

If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it.

Is the vehicle speed signal correct?

NO

87D-18

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Mégane II ph2

87D

ALP 3 CONTINUED 1

Check the insulation and continuity of connection 47F between component 118 (or 1094 with ESP or 953 with wheel speed ECU) and connector R301. Is the connection in good condition?

NO

YES Run a fault finding check on the ABS (see 38C, Anti-lock braking system, Introduction).

87D-19

If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it. When the wiring has been repaired, carry out the initialisation (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation). Remember to disconnect other components connected to this connection before working on the wiring (e.g. radio).

Mégane II ph2

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87D

ALP 3 CONTINUED 2

Checking procedure

NOTES

Use the Technical Note Wiring diagram, Mégane II ph2. Check that the sunroof works properly when the vehicle is stationary. Use the diagnostic tool and/or a multimeter.

NOTE To make the ABS send a signal on connection 47F, run command AC195 using the diagnostic tool. This command generates a speed signal on the wire connection (approximately 100 Hz) sent to all consumers of this signal (radio, roof, etc.). This command (AC195) has no visible effect on the instrument panel speedometer. For vehicles without ABS, carry out a road test.

87D-20

Mégane II ph2

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87D

ALP 3 CONTINUED 3 When using the oscilloscope (CLIP) 1 - Set the oscilloscope with a time base of 5 ms/div and a calibration of 5 V/div (as shown in the illustration). 2 - Convert the signal into time in seconds. E.g.: T = 12 ms = 0.012 s. 3 - Convert this time into frequency. E.g. F: 1/T = 1/0.012 = 83.333 Hz Oscilloscope or multimeter in frequency meter mode. To convert frequency to km/h, multiply the frequency by 18 and divide by 25. To convert the result into miles, multiply by 0.6. E.g.: 0.6 X (83.333 (Hz) X 18/25) = 36 (mph) The frequency of the measured signal gives the approximate speed on the instrument panel.

87D-21

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Mégane II ph2

87D

ALP 4

The sunroof is difficult to close or the anti-pinch is triggered without any apparent obstacles

NOTES

Carry out the various checks with the battery charged and + after ignition feed switched on.

Initialise the sunroof (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation). Is the fault still present?

NO

Fault solved

YES Open the sunroof fully (if not possible, see Defect mode and safe mode). Remove the sunroof motor (see MR 364 Mechanical, 87D Electric windows & Sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal Refitting). Slide the moving panel of the sunroof manually.

NO

Remove the moving sunroof panel (see MR 365 Bodywork, 52A, Non-side opening element mechanisms, Sunroof mobile panel: Removal Refitting). Visually check that no foreign bodies (sand, leaves, etc.) are present in the rails.

Does the moving panel slide without a point of resistance? YES Replace the sunroof motor (see MR 364 Mechanical, 87D Electric windows & Sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal Refitting). NO

Are there any foreign bodies? YES Clean the mechanism and the rails with an air gun. Refit the sunroof mobile panel (see MR 365 Bodywork, 52A, Non-side opening element mechanisms, Moving sunroof panel: Removal - Refitting). Initialise the sunroof (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation).

87D-22

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Mégane II ph2

87D

ALP 4 CONTINUED 1

Manually check that all of the linkages (front and rear) slide correctly.

Lubricate the rails, linkages and mechanisms (see MR 365 Bodywork, 52A, Non-side opening element mechanisms, Moving sunroof panel: Removal Refitting). Refit the moving sunroof panel. Initialise the sunroof (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation). Is the fault still present?

NO

Fault solved

NO

Replace the sunroof (see MR 365 Bodywork, Non-side opening element mechanisms, Sunroof: Removal Refitting).

YES Is the anti-pinch triggered when the sunroof reaches the deflector? YES

87D-23

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Mégane II ph2

87D

ALP 4 CONTINUED 2

Remove the sunroof deflector (see MR 365 Bodywork, 52A Non-side opening element mechanisms, Sunroof deflector: Removal Refitting). Initialise the sunroof (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation). Does the anti-pinch still trigger?

NO

YES Replace the sunroof (see MR 364 Mechanical, 87D Electric windows & Sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal - Refitting).

87D-24

Replace the sunroof deflector (see MR 365 Bodywork, 52A Non-side opening element mechanisms, Sunroof deflector: Removal Refitting). Initialise the sunroof (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation).

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Mégane II ph2

87D

ALP 5

The sunroof cannot be closed remotely

NOTES

Use the Technical Note Wiring diagram, Mégane II ph2. Check that the vehicle is fitted with one touch windows. Check that the one touch windows and the sunroof are correctly initialised and that they are operating correctly in normal mode (if not, refer to the relevant ALP). Use the diagnostic tool.

Apart from central locking, is the sunroof operating correctly?

NO

See Customer complaints.

YES Measure the signal sent by the UCH on connection 21K, at connector R301 (See ALP 5 Procedure). Is the signal correct?

YES

NO Using the diagnostic tool, check that the configuration (LC070) is with (see 87B Passenger compartment connection unit, Configuration and programming). Is the UCH correctly configured?

NO

Configure the UCH, command CF173 (see 87B Passenger compartment connection unit, configuration and programming).

NO

If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it. Try disconnecting the other components which are connected to this connection before working on the wiring (e.g. the door connectors for one touch windows).

YES Check the insulation against earth and the continuity of connection 21K between component 645 and connector R301. Is the insulation and continuity of connection 21K correct? YES Run fault finding on the UCH (see 87B, Passenger compartment connection unit).

87D-25

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Mégane II ph2

87D

ALP 5 CONTINUED 1

Disconnect the sunroof motor (See MR 364 Mechanical, 87D Electric windows & Sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal - Refitting). Measure the signal sent by the UCH on connection 21K, at component 304 (See ALP 5 Procedure). Is the signal correct?

NO

YES Replace the sunroof motor (see MR 364 Mechanical, 87D Electric windows & Sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal - Refitting).

87D-26

Insulation or continuity fault on connection 21K between component 304 and connector R301. If there is a repair procedure (See NT 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for the repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it.

Mégane II ph2

ELECTRIC WINDOWS - SUNROOF Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87D

ALP 5 CONTINUED 2

Procedure

NOTES

Use Technical Note Wiring diagram, Mégane II ph2. Use the diagnostic tool.

Procedure: Set the oscilloscope (CLIP) as shown below (time base 50 ms/div, calibration 5 V/div, trigger in normal mode with a trailing edge of 5 V see point 1). Connect the negative probe to chassis earth and the positive probe to connection 21K. Lock the doors by pressing the locking button on the RENAULT card twice, or by pressing the button on one of the door handles. The signal sent by the UCH must match that shown below (bottom of trace is 150 ms).

87D-27

188B

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Introduction

88B

INTRODUCTION Description of the multiplex network: The multiplex network consists of a twisted pair of wires connected to several vehicle computers. These two wires are called CAN H and CAN L. There may be two multiplex networks, depending on the vehicle's equipment. – the CAN V (vehicle: injection, ABS, instrument panel, etc.) is always present, – the CAN M (multimedia: navigation, radio, hands-free telephone) depending on the vehicle's equipment. Note: The RENAULT tool can only perform fault finding on the CAN V multiplex network. Data is exchanged by the computers on the CAN V network at a communication speed of 500 kbit/s. The CAN V network has two computers, each with an internal resistance of 120 Ω (network termination resistances): – the injection computer, – the airbag computer.

PURPOSE – The purpose of the multiplex network test is to determine the computers present on the vehicle's multiplex network as well as the cause of possible inter-computer communication faults. – It also serves to determine the functions installed in the vehicle, which are sometimes housed in various computers (distributed functions). – The test also checks the condition of multiplex network segments. – The multiplex network test can also run fault finding on computers disconnected from the multiplex network; this provides an overview of the vehicle's electronic layout.

88B-1

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Introduction

88B

MONITORING MULTIPLEX NETWORK OPERATION Vehicle computer power supply for fault finding: With the vehicle card in the card reader, press and hold Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled, connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. To cut off + after ignition feed, proceed as follows: press the Start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds), ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer indicator lights on the instrument panel have gone out.

This step is the essential starting point for any computer fault finding procedure. It ensures that the network is correctly connected at the terminals of each computer and that the signal is correctly sent to it and received by it. This function also reads the number of faults present in the computers. The Test multiplex network function is started after the vehicle is selected, followed by confirming the Test computers icon. After the network check, the other functions become accessible.

88B-2

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Introduction

88B

MULTIPLEX NETWORK TEST PROCEDURE: – Establish dialogue with the computers storing the vehicle configuration (read identification). – Vehicle configuration read in the two computers that store the multiplex network configuration (UCH and Airbag). – List of computers which support fault finding read from the two configuration computers. – Computer interrogation. – Physical (electrical) measurements on the CAN network. NOTE Fault finding is run on all the computers connected to the multiplex network via the CAN V network, except the steering column lock computer and the driving school unit which cannot support fault finding. Fault finding is run by other networks on just two computers that are not connected to the CAN V multiplex network - Proximity sensor by line K. – Central communication unit by the CAN M (multimedia) network. If the following error messages appear during a multiplex network test: – Communication cannot be established with some computers: check their supply and diagnostic lines before rerunning the test: network topology is visible. Check to see if there are many computers that have not been configured: update the multiplex network according to the computers on the vehicle (see Multiplex network configuration). – Incorrect computer configuration which support fault finding: check the configuration before rerunning test: network topology is not visible, network configuration is requested (see Multiplex network configuration). – Correct configuration: check the computer configuration before rerunning test: network topology is not visible, network configuration is requested (see Multiplex network configuration). ACQUISITION AND DISPLAY OF THE RESULTS The acquisition screen is made up of a bar graph which changes when the various initialisation, acquisition and data analysis stages are updated. At the end of the test, the tool displays a screen with the test result. How to read the topological diagram: The results display screen consists of three zones: – the upper zone: fault finding procedure result message, – the left-hand centre zone: topological diagram (not always available), – the right-hand centre zone: interpretation of the results from the various vehicle computers and list.

88B-3

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Introduction

88B

COMPUTERS – – – –

Valid: green border, green lettering. Not detected: red border, red lettering. Do not support fault finding: black border, black lettering. Not recognised: red border, red lettering + exclamation mark.

SEGMENTS – Valid: green dash. – Faulty: red dash. – Cannot support fault finding: black dash.

Interpreting test result charts On the Faults tab, the computers are organised into the following groups: – Not detected if the computer failed to respond to the tool's identification request. Within the not detected category, the computers are subdivided into Stores multiplex network configuration and Does not store multiplex network configuration. – Not recognised if the computer is detected but cannot be identified from its response.

On the Information tab, the computers are organised and listed as follows: – Cannot support fault finding, if the computer cannot support fault finding with the tool and therefore was not queried. – Valid if the computer responded correctly to the tool's request.

If the Proceed icon in the bottom right-hand corner is selected, a new screen will appear with the following tab:

Under the Results tab the computers are organised into the following groups: – Faulty if the computer is recognised and has a non-zero number of faults. – OK if the computer was detected, recognised and has no faults. – Not recognised if the computer was detected but could not be identified from its response. – Not detected if the computer can support fault finding but failed to respond.

88B-4

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Introduction

88B

FUNCTION TESTING The function test can be accessed by clicking on the List of functions icon. – The vehicle function tests screen resembles the multiplex network test screen with a diagram of the network layout if this is known and displayed. – The Function tab displays the various computers involved in the functions whether distributed or not distributed over the various computers. – The Info tab displays the other possible functions found on the vehicle concerned. – Selecting a function from the list of functions enables computers not involved in this function to be greyed out, thus indicating the computers involved in this function. – The Fault finding button runs fault finding on the function selected from the list.

REPAIR HELP ●

Help with detecting computer or faulty segment: If the multiplex network is completely frozen, this command can isolate multiplex network segments and thereby rule out those that respond correctly to the tool. This makes it easier to pinpoint the cause of the fault. The algorithm for help with locating faults is intended for dealing with electrical faults present solely in the CAN; it is therefore essential that connectors and computers not attached to the CAN V are not taken into consideration.

●

A test for multiplex network faults by using physical measurements: When a multiplex network segment has a short circuit, the computers can no longer communicate with each other or with the diagnostic tool. At this point, the network test is not operational. The CLIP tool can identify several types of faults by taking electrical measurements on the CAN H and CAN L multiplex network. It can detect a CAN L/CAN H short circuit, a CAN L/+ 12 V short circuit, a CAN H/ + 12 V short circuit, and a CAN H/earth short circuit. By disconnecting the connectors then the computers, it is possible to determine or indicate the segment causing the fault on the multiplex network.

88B-5

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Configuration

88B

MULTIPLEX NETWORK CONFIGURATION

NOTES

The configuration is entered with the ignition on; apply the forced + after ignition feed procedure (see Introduction). It can be run from the multiplex network test results screens.

The tool displays the UCH and Airbag configurations. The Configuration screen consists of two tabs for displaying and modifying: – The first tab: Multiplex network configuration on the multiplex network version and the list of computers defined as present on the multiplex network. – The second tab: Configuration of computers supporting fault finding indicates the relevant diagram number, and the list of defined computers which can support fault finding with the RENAULT tool. IMPORTANT Enter the correct diagram version number, – Mégane II phase 1: version 1 – Mégane II phase 2: version 2 and above The number increases with each change to the multiplex network wiring in the vehicle. First repair the computers containing the multiplex network configuration (Airbag and UCH) in order to display the screen with the multiplex network configuration diagram for the vehicle on which fault finding is being run. NOTE A computer connected to the multiplex network but not declared as being among the computers containing the multiplex network configuration will not be checked in the multiplex network test. Correct the configuration by declaring the computer as present if it is absent in the Airbag and UCH computer. Carry out the multiplex network test again after modifying the configurations.

88B-6

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Configuration

88B

Configuration screen Make sure that the information displayed on the tabs is correct. The same configuration information for the two computers is essential for displaying the network topology.

Multiplex network configuration

Configuration of computers that can support fault finding

Injection

PRESENT

YES

ABS

PRESENT

YES

UCH

PRESENT

YES

PRESENT or ABSENT (option)

YES or NO (option)

Instrument panel

PRESENT

YES

Airbag/pretensioners

PRESENT

YES

Steering lock

PRESENT

NO (cannot support fault finding)

PRESENT or ABSENT (option)

YES or NO (option)

ABSENT

YES or NO (option)

Power assisted steering

PRESENT

YES

UPC (protection and switching unit)

PRESENT

YES

PRESENT or ABSENT (option)

NO (cannot support fault finding)

ABSENT

YES or NO (option)

Roof control unit

PRESENT or ABSENT (option)

YES or NO (option)

Gas injection

PRESENT or ABSENT (option)

YES or NO (option)

Hands-free kit

ABSENT

NO

Computer

Automatic transmission

Climate control Proximity sensor

Driving school unit Central Communication Unit

NOTE

Mégane II phase 1 Mégane II phase 2

Xenon bulb

PRESENT or ABSENT (option)

YES or NO (option)

Left COSLAD

PRESENT or ABSENT (option)

YES or NO (option)

Right COSLAD

PRESENT or ABSENT (option)

YES or NO (option)

Lighting (xenon bulb)

PRESENT or ABSENT (option)

YES or NO (option)

Option: depending on equipment level * Manual climate control is not on the multiplex network and fault finding on it cannot be run with the CLIP tool.

88B-7

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88B

MULTIPLEX NETWORK NOT OPERATIONAL

NOTES

First check that the computer at the end of the faulty segment is properly powered (earth, + battery, + accessories or + after ignition). Always check the computer conformity. NOTE Switch off the ignition or remove the RENAULT card from the card reader, check that the side lights are off and wait for 1 minute.

Finding the fault type

NOTES

Obtain a copy of the multiplex network diagram for the vehicle. (Diagnostic socket diagram).

Measure the resistance between tracks 6 and 14 of the diagnostic socket. What is the resistance? 0Ω

The two lines are in short circuit (see Introduction - Repair advice).

60 Ω ± 10 Ω

Check that there is earth, + battery feed, + accessories feed or + after ignition feed at the airbag computer and UCH terminals.

Between 70 Ω and 110 Ω

Check that there is no interference resistance on tracks 6 and 14, and then check that there is no short circuit to earth or + battery feed.

120 Ω ± 10 Ω

Open circuit on one or two lines. Disconnect the airbag and check the multiplex connection between the diagnostic socket and the airbag. Is the multiplex connection correct? YES

Check that the resistance is approximately 120 Ω between the two network tracks on the airbag computer: – If the resistance is not approximately 120 Ω, contact Techline. – If the resistance is 120 Ω, check the continuity and absence of interference resistance on the multiplex connection between the diagnostic socket and the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check that the resistance is approximately 120 Ω between the two network tracks on the UCH computer: – If the resistance is not approximately 120 Ω, contact Techline.

NO

AFTER REPAIR

Repair the multiplex connection between the diagnostic socket and the airbag. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

Run the multiplex network test again using the diagnostic tool. Clear the stored faults on all the computers connected to the network. Deal with any other faults.

88B-8

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88B

FAULTY SEGMENT ON THE MULTIPLEX NETWORK

First check that the computer at the end of the faulty segment is properly powered (earth, + battery, + accessories or + after ignition). Always check the computer conformity. NOTES

NOTE It may be that the tool cannot exactly determine which segment(s) are faulty. It will then suggests several segments that could be faulty. In this event, repair the segment closest to the diagnostic socket.

Isolate the faulty segment by disconnecting both ends of the segment. Check the condition of the connectors. Check the continuity and insulation of the CAN H and CAN L lines between the two connectors on the isolated segment. Refer to the vehicle's multiplex network diagrams for the allocation of tracks on the computers and connections. Perform the necessary operations to check the continuity of the two lines (for example, replacing the wiring). Make sure that the computer present in the vehicle is compatible and that the data it is producing is correct. Reconnect the segment. Carry out the multiplex network test again using the diagnostic tool. Is the segment still declared faulty? NO

End of fault finding.

YES

Are there other faulty segments?

AFTER REPAIR

NO

Repeat the multiplex network tests to check the continuity and insulation of the CAN H and CAN L lines between the end of the faulty segment and the diagnostic socket.

YES

Apply the same procedure to each segment.

Run the multiplex network test again using the diagnostic tool. Clear the stored faults on all the computers connected to the network. Deal with any other faults.

88B-9

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88B

FAULTY COMPUTER

NOTES

Make sure that the computers installed in the vehicle are the correct type and are compatible with the vehicle. Check the power supply to the computers (earth, + battery, + accessories or + after ignition).

Make sure that the computer wake-up mode is in full working order on the vehicle and is properly assimilated by the computers. The wake-up mode is: – Timed power supply: UCH, instrument panel. – + accessories feed: air conditioning, Protection and Switching Unit, central communication unit. – + after ignition feed: injection, airbag/pretensioners, ABS/ESP, automatic transmission, xenon bulbs, electric power-assisted steering, steering column lock, UCT, proximity sensor. In + accessories feed these computers will not appear. NOTE To establish dialogue with the xenon bulbs of the Mégane II Phase 1 model, the dipped headlights and + after ignition feed must be activated. – Switch to computer fault finding mode. Attempt to establish dialogue with computers. ● No dialogue from computers to diagnostic tool: see ALP 1 No dialogue with the computer or computers not communicating with the diagnostic tool. Check the connections to the computers and that there are no open circuits. Repair if necessary. ●

Computers are not displaying all the information on their identifications: Check in the Workshop Repair Manual or the World Vehicle Database that the computer is compatible with the vehicle. Check that the CLIP diagnostic tool update is recent enough to be able to deal with faults on the vehicle.

If no faults or open or short circuits have been detected after these checks, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run the multiplex network test again using the diagnostic tool. Clear the stored faults on all the computers connected to the network. Deal with any other faults.

88B-10

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88B

UNRECOGNISED COMPUTERS ON THE NETWORK

NOTES

– Check computer compatibility with the vehicle.

Check that the CLIP diagnostic tool update is recent enough to be able to deal with faults on the vehicle. – Switch to computer fault finding mode. Attempt to establish dialogue with computers. ● No dialogue between computers and diagnostic tool: see ALP 1. No dialogue with the computers or computers not communicating with the diagnostic tool. Check the connections to the computers and that there are no open circuits. Repair if necessary. ●

If there is communication with computers: Make sure that the computer identification information is correct and matches the vehicle in fault finding.

– Check that the following computer information is correct: – Vdiag: – Program No.: (injection computer) If no faults or open or short circuits have been detected after these tests, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run the multiplex network test again using the diagnostic tool. Clear the stored faults on all the computers connected to the network. Deal with any other faults.

88B-11

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Customer complaints

88B

NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTERS

ALP 1

NO TOPOLOGY DIAGRAM OR CONFIGURATION TABLE DISPLAY AT THE END OF THE MULTIPLEX NETWORK TEST

ALP 2

CONFIGURATION TABLE DISPLAY AT THE END OF THE MULTIPLEX NETWORK TEST

ALP 3

88B-12

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Fault finding chart

ALP 1

NOTES

88B

No dialogue with the computers

Vehicle computer power supply for fault finding: Engine stopped, ignition on. Connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations.

Try the diagnostic tool on another vehicle. Check that the tool version is CD V60 or a more recent version. Check: – the connection between the diagnostic tool and diagnostic socket (connection and cable in good condition), – the computers' power supply, – the engine and passenger compartment fuses. Check that the CLIP sensor is supplied by tracks 16 (+ 12 V), 4 and 5 (earth) of the diagnostic socket, which can be seen by the two red diodes on the sensor lighting up. Check that the CLIP sensor is supplied by the computer's USB port (red diode). Make sure that the CLIP sensor is communicating properly with the vehicle's computers; this can be seen by the two green diodes on the sensor lighting up. green LEDs

red LEDs

CAN ISO

Vehicle supply through diagnostic socket Sensor supply through USB port

Check the following tracks on the diagnostic socket: Track 1 + after ignition Track 16 + battery feed Tracks 4 and 5 Earth Repair if necessary. Computer connected to CAN V If the fault is still present, check the continuity and insulation of the lines: CAN H (diagnostic socket track 6) CAN L (diagnostic socket track 14) With a multimeter, make sure that the voltages at the diagnostic socket terminals are: – 2.5 V across CAN H (track 6) and earth (tracks 4 and 5) (average values) – 2.5 V across CAN L (track 14) and earth (tracks 4 and 5) (average values) Refer to Introduction - Repair advice to detect a short circuit on the vehicle's multiplex network.

88B-13

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Fault finding chart

ALP 2

88B

No topology diagram or configuration table display at the end of the multiplex network test.

The topology cannot be displayed under the following conditions: 1 The two computers storing the multiplex network configuration have failed to respond. 2 The multiplex network is not operational; therefore dialogue is impossible. 3 The two computers storing the multiplex network configuration do not have the same configurations. 4 On the Multiplex network tab on the configuration screen, an incorrect diagram version number has been entered into one of the two computers that store the network configuration. 5 No diagram version has been entered into the two computers that store the network configuration. 1 – The two computers storing the multiplex network configuration have failed to respond. Check first that the computers storing the configuration (Airbag and UCH) are correctly supplied (earth, + battery, + accessories or + after ignition). Check the condition of the multiplex network and the continuity and insulation of the CAN H and CAN L lines between the computers storing the configuration. 2 – The multiplex network is not operational, therefore dialogue is impossible (see fault Multiplex network not operational). 3 – The two computers storing the multiplex network configuration do not have the same configurations (see the Multiplex network configurations configuration). 4 – On the multiplex network tab of the configuration screen, an incorrect diagram version number has been entered on one of the two computers storing the network configuration (see the Network configuration configuration). 5 – No diagram version has been entered on the two computers storing the configuration. (see the Network configuration configuration).

88B-14

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Fault finding chart

88B

ALP 3

Configuration table display at the end of the multiplex network test

NOTES

ALP to use if the tool loads the configuration screen at the end of the multiplex network test. The configuration chart is always accessible through the Configuration icon. Update the vehicle configuration then run the multiplex network test again. Check that the two tabs are consistent before running the test again.

The RENAULT diagnostic tool loads the configuration screen directly under the following conditions: ● MULTIPLEX NETWORK tab – Inconsistent diagram version numbers entered into the two computers that store the multiplex network configuration. If the numbers are inconsistent, the following error message is displayed when the multiplex network test is being run: Inconsistent configuration of computers supporting fault finding: check configuration before rerunning test. – Inconsistent list of computers entered into the computers that store the multiplex network configuration. – The diagram version number is incorrect for at least one of the two computers that store the multiplex network configuration (see the Network configuration configuration). In this instance, the following message is displayed when the multiplex network test is being run: Unknown vehicle configuration: check tool update. – One of the two computers that store the network version is blank (case of replaced airbag or UCH computer). ●

COMPUTERS SUPPORTING FAULT FINDING tab – Inconsistent diagram numbers entered into the two computers that store the configuration. – The list of computers that can support fault finding entered into the two computers that store the list of computers that can support fault finding is inconsistent. – Inconsistency between the list of computers entered and the computers actually detected on the vehicle. Some computers are entered as absent in the computer that stores the network configuration even though they are present on the vehicle (see the Multiplex network configuration configuration). In this instance, the following error message is displayed when the multiplex network test is being run: Some computers respond to the diagnostic tool even if they are not listed in the computer configuration.

88B-15

Edition 2

188C

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

88C

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Name of computer: AUTOLIV - ACU 4

Vehicle: MEGANE II TYPE BMXX, CMXX AND SMXX

Program no.:

Function concerned: AIRBAG

Vdiag No.: 04

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP Special tooling required

SPECIAL TOOLING REQUIRED – Multimeter – Set of adapters and borniers for using the "Airbag and pretensioner wiring harness check" function of CLIP and XRBAG tools for updates including the borniers listed below. – Modifying the series of new airbag ignition module connectors entails modifying the dummy ignition module. LOCAL MODIFICATION OF THE DUMMY IGNITION MODULE: – Remove the ignition module from its red mounting and remove one of the brown locking positions. – – – –

22-track computer bornier: Elé. 1685 64-track computer bornier: Elé. 1686 22-track seat bornier: Elé. 1687 10-track rotary switch bornier: Elé. 1617

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-1

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

3. RECAP Faults Procedure To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed): – vehicle card in card reader. – press and hold start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled, – then connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. IMPORTANT The left-hand and right-hand xenon bulb computers are powered when the dipped headlights are lit. Fault finding can only be carried out on them after the ignition has been switched on in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed) and the dipped headlights are on. + After ignition feed cut-out is performed as follows: – Disconnect the diagnostic tool, – Press the start button twice briefly (less then 3 seconds), – Ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out. Faults are declared either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain situation and have disappeared since, or whether they remain but have not been diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored status of faults must be taken into account when using the diagnostic tool after switching on the + after ignition (without activating the system components). Deal with present faults according to the procedure specified in the Interpretation of faults section. For stored faults, note the faults displayed and follow the instructions in the Notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the notes are applied, the fault is present. In this case, deal with the fault. If the fault is not confirmed, carry out basic checks. Check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors for these lines (for oxidation, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the component detected as faulty, – the condition of the cables (melted or cut insulation, wear), or use the fault finding procedure to check the circuit of the faulty component. Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check statuses and parameters that do not produce a fault display on the diagnostic tool when they are inconsistent. Therefore, this phase is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint, – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. This section features the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters, and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values, consult the corresponding fault finding page. Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the diagnostic tool check is correct, but the customer complaint persists, it should be dealt with according to the customer complaint.

A summary of the general procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart.

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-2

Edition 3

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

88C

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and the condition of the fuses

Print the system fault finding log (available in CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with Electronic Control Unit?

no See ALP 1

yes Read the faults

no Faults present

Conformity check

yes

no The cause is still present

Deal with present faults

Fault solved

Deal with stored faults Use Fault finding charts (ALPs) no The cause is still present

Fault solved

no The cause is still present

Fault solved

yes

Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-3

Edition 3

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

88C

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

IMPORTANT!

IMPORTANT: A properly documented fault finding log is required for all monitored part (computer-type) reimbursements or Techline calls.

IT IS THEREFORE COMPULSORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EVERY TIME A FAULT FINDING OPERATION IS PERFORMED. All faults requiring replacement of a computer must be subject to a complete fault finding procedure with the appropriate tools. The fault finding log must be filled out during the process and indicate the findings for the warranty refund.

6. SAFETY ADVICE Safety rules must be observed whenever work is carried out on a component to prevent physical damage or human injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load. During operations on the airbag/seat belt pretensioner systems it is vital that you lock the computer using the diagnostic tool to prevent any risk of accidental triggering (all the ignition lines will be inhibited). The locked mode is signalled when the Instrument panel warning light comes on. If it is impossible to connect the diagnostic tool, switch off the ignition, remove the system power fuse, and wait at least 2 seconds for the reserve power capacity to discharge. Never measure the airbag or pretensioner trigger lines with any device other than XRBAG or CLIP's "Airbag and pretensioner wiring harness check". Before using a dummy ignition module, ensure that its resistance is between 1.8 and 2.5 Ω. While working, make sure the computer power supply does not drop below 10 V. NOTE Airbag and pretensioner destruction and disposal is subject to national legislation.

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-4

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM (FRONT section)

AR To rear wiring

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-5

Edition 3

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

88C

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM (REAR section)

AR A B C D E

G

H

I

To rear wiring Central unit Driver’s seat Front passenger seat Buckle pretensioner Driver's frontal airbag ignition module Passenger's frontal airbag ignition module Front chest level side airbag ignition module Lap belt pretensioner or seat base airbag

J/K L/M N/O

Curtain airbag ignition modules Rear side airbag ignition modules Rear seat belt retractors

FRONTAL AIRBAGS

Driver Passenger

CT

Rotary switch

P

+ 12 V/earth Warning light/Fault finding lines Impact sensors/ Impact information Passenger airbag lock switch

Measuring point

Correct value

C0, C2 and C4

1.8 to 6.2 Ω

C0 andC4

1.8 to 4 Ω

SIDE AIRBAGS AND PRETENSIONERS Measuring point

Correct value

C0, C1 and C3

1.8 to 4 Ω

Correct insulation value: display ≥ 100.h or 9999 flashing.

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-6

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

DEFINITION OF THE TRIGGER LINES

L1:

Driver's lap belt/seat base airbag circuit (cable B of 64-track bornier Elé. 1686)

L2:

Passenger's lap belt/seat base airbag circuit (cable D of 64 track bornier Elé. 1686)

L3:

Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 1 (cable B of 22-track bornier Elé. 1685)

L4:

Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 2 (cable A of 22-track bornier Elé. 1685)

L5:

Driver's frontal airbag circuit 1 (cable C of 22-track bornier Elé. 1685)

L6:

Driver's frontal airbag circuit 2 (cable D of 22-track bornier Elé. 1685)

L7:

Driver's side curtain airbag circuit (cable I of 64-track bornier Elé. 1686)

L8:

Passenger's side curtain airbag circuit (cable G of 64-track bornier Elé. 1686)

L9:

Driver's chest front side airbag circuit (cable H of 64-track bornier Elé. 1686)

L10:

Passenger chest front side airbag circuit (cable F of 64-track bornier Elé. 1686)

L11:

Driver's chest rear side airbag circuit (cable N of 64-track bornier Elé. 1686)

L12:

Passenger chest rear side airbag circuit (cable L of 64-track bornier Elé. 1686)

L13:

Front buckle pretensioner circuit (cables A and C of 64-track bornier Elé. 1686)

L14:

Rear seat belt retractors (cables E and J of 64-track bornier Elé. 1686)

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-7

Edition 3

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - System operation

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

88C

PASSIVE SAFETY EQUIPMENT

The MEGANE II has equipment also found on the LAGUNA II and VEL SATIS, namely: – Front seat chest side airbag. – Front seat BMXX-type double pretensioner. – Driver's seat position sensor for adaptive airbag. – Three-point rear centre seat belt. – Front and rear Isofix mountings.

INNOVATIONS: – Passenger airbag inhibition switch. – Anti-submarining airbag in the seat base along with a buckle pretensioner on the front seat in CMXX-type MEGANE II vehicles.

In the text, this airbag is referred to as the: DRIVER'S SEAT LAP BELT/SEAT BASE AIRBAG.

Via the same trigger line, the ACU 4 Vdiag 04 computer controls either the seat base (antisubmarining) airbag or the driver's seat lap belt pretensioner: The configuration for type B is: Driver's seat lap belt pretensioner. The configuration for type C is: Driver's seat base airbag. Both features are never found on the same vehicle because they use the same ignition line.

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-8

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS

88C

Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

AIRBAG COMPUTER 22-track connector: Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Description

Track

+ Passenger frontal airbag level 2 + Passenger frontal airbag level 1 + Driver's frontal airbag level 1 + Driver's frontal airbag level 2 Not used Not used + After ignition feed Not used Not used CAN L CAN H

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Description - Passenger frontal airbag level 2 - Passenger frontal airbag level 1 - Driver's frontal airbag level 1 - Driver's frontal airbag level 2 Not used Not used Earth Not used Not used - Passenger airbag inhibition switch + Passenger airbag inhibition switch

64-track connector: Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Description

Track 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

+ Driver's buckle pretensioner - Driver's buckle pretensioner + Driver's lap belt pretensioner - Driver's lap belt pretensioner Not used Not used Not used Not used - Driver's seat position sensor + Driver's seat position sensor + Driver's seat belt buckle contact - Driver's seat belt buckle contact Not used Not used + Driver's front side chest airbag - Driver's front side chest airbag + Driver's side curtain airbag - Driver's side curtain airbag + Driver's rear seat belt inertia reel - Driver's rear seat belt inertia reel Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used + Driver's side impact sensor - Driver's side impact sensor + Rear chest side airbag, driver's side - Rear chest side airbag, driver's side Not used Not used

Description Not used Not used Not used Not used + Passenger buckle pretensioner - Passenger buckle pretensioner + Passenger lap belt pretensioner - Passenger lap belt pretensioner + Passenger rear seat belt inertia reel - Passenger rear seat belt inertia reel + Passenger's front chest side airbag - Passenger's front chest side airbag + Passenger's side curtain airbag - Passenger's side curtain airbag Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used + Passenger's rear chest side airbag - Passenger's rear chest side airbag Not used Not used + Passenger's side impact sensor - Passenger's side impact sensor Not used Not used

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-9

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS

88C

Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

SIDE IMPACT SENSORS CONNECTIONS

2-track connector Track 1

Description

Track

+ Signal

2

Description - Signal

Note: The front belt pretensioners, front chest side airbags, lap belt pretensioners or seat base airbags and seat position sensor functions run through a black 22-track R341 or R342 intermediate connector located under each seat and attached to the vehicle floor.

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-10

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Replacement of components

88C

REPLACING THE AIRBAG COMPUTER

BEFORE REPLACING ANY COMPUTER, YOU ARE REQUIRED TO CONTACT YOUR TECHLINE. So that the failure of the returned computer can be analysed, the use of command RZ001 "erase fault memory" when DF001 "Computer" is present or stored is officially prohibited. The airbag computers are sold in locked mode to avoid all risk of accidental triggering (all ignition lines are inhibited). The locked mode is signalled when the airbag fault warning indicator lights up on the instrument panel. Follow this procedure to replace an airbag computer: – – – – – – – –

Ensure that the ignition is switched off. Replace the computer. Modify the computer configuration if necessary. Enter the VIN into the computer with diagnostic tool command VP010 Enter VIN. Switch off the ignition. Carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Enter the After Sales service date with diagnostic tool command VP008 Enter last After Sales service date. Unlock the computer only if no faults are indicated by the diagnostic tool.

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-11

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Configuration and programming

88C

CLEARING RZ001:

fault memory. This command is used to clear stored faults from the computer's memory.

CONFIGURATION/CONFIGURATION READINGS – To make it easier to configure airbag computer ACU4, the diagnostic tool has five automatic configuration commands for the trigger lines and sensors installed in the vehicles (BMXX, CMXX, SMXX). The commands in the table on the next page, however, are used to configure each system component individually to adapt the computer configuration to the actual equipment in the vehicle. – The read-configuration commands (LCXXX) are used to display the current computer configuration in relation to the trigger lines and sensors installed in the vehicle. – The configuration commands (CFXXX) are used to adjust computer configuration to the equipment actually installed in the vehicle. – - STANDARD CONFIGURATION COMMANDS: – CF297:

B/C NO SIDE AIRBAGS. Vehicle types B, C WITH NO FRONT AND REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAGS AND NO SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (SABLAT/SSABCS).

– CF298:

B/C WITH FRONT CHEST + CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Vehicle types B, C with FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAGS + SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (ABLAVI / SSABCS).

– CF299:

B/C WITH FRONT/REAR CHEST + CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Vehicle types B, C with FRONT AND REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAGS + SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (ABLAT / SSABCS).

– CF300:

VAN WITH CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Type S vehicles (vans) equipped with CURTAIN SIDE AIRBAGS (ABLAT/SSABCS).

– CF301:

VAN WITH NO CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Type S vehicles (vans) WITHOUT CURTAIN SIDE AIRBAGS (ABLAVI/SSABCS).

Because of probable computer part number unification in the Parts Department, some sensors or trigger lines may have to be deconfigured after using standard configuration commands. For this, use the individual configuration commands for system components. After configuration, check the display configuration screen to make sure that the information entered is correct.

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-12

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Configuration and programming

88C

CONFIGURATION/READ CONFIGURATION: – CONFIGURABLE FEATURES: Trigger lines WITH or WITHOUT: The front buckle pretensioners are serially wired. The rear seat belt retractors are serially wired.

TITLE SEAT BASE AIRBAG/DRIVER'S SEAT LAP BELT SEAT BASE AIRBAG/PASSENGER'S SEAT LAP BELT PASSENGER'S FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 PASSENGER'S FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DRIVER FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DRIVER'S FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DRIVER'S SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG PASSENGER'S SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG DRIVER'S FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAG PASSENGER'S FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAG DRIVER'S REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAG PASSENGER'S REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAG FRONT BUCKLES PRETENSIONER REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTORS

CONFIGURATION READING

CONFIGURATION

LC080 LC079 LC052 LC047 LC048 LC049 LC040 LC041 LC042 LC043 LC044 LC045 LC081 LC078

CF283 CF282 CF236 CF229 CF230 CF231 CF221 CF222 CF223 CF224 CF225 CF226 CF284 CF278

CONFIGURATION READING

CONFIGURATION

LC086 LC025 LC026 LC073

CF289 CF207 CF208 CF273

Sensors WITH or WITHOUT:

TITLE DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR PASSENGER'S SIDE SENSOR DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-13

Edition 3

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

88C

CONFIGURATION/READ CONFIGURATION (continued):

Passenger airbag lock mode WITH KEY or WITHOUT:

TITLE PASSENGER AIRBAG LOCKING MODE

CONFIGURATION READING

CONFIGURATION

LC060

CF248

Read type of vehicle: LC034 MEGANE II OTHER COMMANDS: – VP006:

Lock computer. This command is used whenever servicing the system. It shuts down all trigger lines.

– VP007:

Unlock computer. This command unlocks the computer after it was locked.

– VP008:

Write last After Sales service date. This command is used to enter the date the system was serviced.

– VP010:

Write VIN. This command is for entering the vehicle identification number (VIN) into the computer.

– SC004:

Read impact context. This command is used during repair of the vehicle following an impact. It obtains, from the computer that is to be replaced, a list of the trigger lines controlled and the system's status at the moment of impact.

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-14

Edition 3

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Airbags and pretensioners

Page 1/2

List of monitored parts: Airbag computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by Dealership name or no./ Country Vehicle model VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

Update version ●

Customer complaint 1192

Other

●

Your comments:

When the fault appears 011

When ignition is switched on

005

While driving

Other

●

Airbag warning light lit

004

Intermittently

999

When starting the engine

Your comments:

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of fault finding manual:

Workshop Repair Manual

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault finding manual no: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No: Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 16 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Airbag and pretensioners ●

Page 2/2

Identification of the computer and parts replaced for the system

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration number VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Stored

Fault name

Specification

System-specific information

Total vehicle mileage when the customer complaint occurred: How often does it occur? How long after the engine starts? ●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions?

CAN Wiring harness Seats

Instrument panel Battery Others

Rotary switch Fuse

Your comments:

FD 16 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault summary table

Tool fault

Associated DTC

DF001 DF002 DF010 DF028 DF034 DF039 DF040 DF051 DF052 DF053 DF060 DF065 DF066 DF067 DF068 DF069 DF070 DF071 DF072 DF074 DF075 DF077 DF091 DF187 DF193 DF194 DF210 DF214 DF232 DF239 DF240 DF241

9080 9042 9040 9041 907E 9035 9036 9035 9036 9031 9050 9031 900E 900D 900C 900A 9009 9008 9007 9006 9005 900B 9034 9044 907C 907F 9014 9034 9051 9017 9001 9002

88C

Diagnostic tool title Computer Computer supply voltage Fault warning light circuit Passenger's airbag status warning light circuit Computer locked Driver's side sensor circuit Passenger's side sensor circuit Driver's side sensor configuration Passenger side sensor configuration Driver's seat position sensor configuration Multiplex network Driver's front seat position sensor circuit Passenger's rear chest side airbag circuit Driver's rear chest side airbag circuit Passenger's front side airbag circuit Passenger's curtain side airbag circuit Driver's curtain side airbag circuit Driver's frontal airbag circuit 2 Driver's frontal airbag circuit 1 Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 2 Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 1 Driver's chest front side airbag circuit Airbag locking switch circuit Trigger lines configuration Change of status of passenger airbag locking Computer to be replaced following impact Front buckles pretensioner circuit Airbag lock switch configuration Driver's seat belt buckle sensor circuit Rear seat belt retractors circuit Driver's seat base/lap belt circuit Passenger's seat base/lap belt circuit

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-17

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

DF001 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

COMPUTER

Special notes: So that the failure of the returned computer can be analysed, the use of command RZ001 "Erase fault memory" when DF001 "Computer" is present or stored is officially prohibited.

Replace the airbag computer (see the replacing components section for this procedure).

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-18

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

COMPUTER SUPPLY VOLTAGE DF002 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: Micro-cut 2.DEF: Values outside the permitted tolerance values

Special notes: Use the 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685) to work on the computer connector (cable 1).

Carry out the operations necessary to obtain the correct voltage supply to the computer: 10.5 volts ± 0.1 < correct voltage < 16 volts ± 0.1. – – – – –

Check the battery charge. Check the charge circuit. Check the tightness and the condition of the battery terminals. Check the computer earth. Check the condition of the computer + locking connections.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-19

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

FAULT WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT DF010 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: External diagnostics (instrument panel signal) 2.DEF: Consistency (dashboard indicator light status signal/airbag request)

Special notes: None.

Apply the fault finding procedure relevant to this fault in the instrument panel fault finding information section.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-20

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER AIRBAG CONDITION INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT DF028 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: External diagnostics (instrument panel signal) 2.DEF: Consistency (dashboard indicator light status signal/airbag request)

Special notes: None.

Apply the fault finding procedure relevant to this fault in the instrument panel fault finding information section.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-21

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

COMPUTER LOCKED DF034 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

Use diagnostic tool command VP007 to unlock the airbag computer.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-22

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR CIRCUIT DF039 PRESENT

NOTES

CO - CC.0 - 1.DEF

CO : CC.0 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Communication disrupted Sensor internal electrical fault External diagnostics

Special notes: Use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter for working on the computer connector.

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Check that the driver's side sensor is connected correctly and check its connections. Check the condition of the connections on the computer (tracks 27 and 28). Check the condition of the 64-track connector (locking system, connections, etc.) Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier (Elé. 1686) terminal 27 Track 1 sensor connector Bornier (Elé. 1686) terminal 28 Track 2 sensor connector

2.DEF - 3.DEF

NOTES

None

Replace the driver's side sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-23

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER SIDE SENSOR CIRCUIT DF040 PRESENT

NOTES

CO - - CC.0 1.DEF

CO : CC.0 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Communication disrupted Sensor internal electrical fault External diagnostics

Special notes: Use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter for working on the computer connector.

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Check that the driver's side sensor is connected correctly and check its connections. Check the condition of the connections on the computer (tracks 61 and 62). Check the condition of the 64-track connector (locking system, connections, etc.). Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier (Elé. 1686) terminal 61 Track 1 sensor connector Bornier (Elé. 1686) terminal 62 Track 2 sensor connector

2.DEF - 3.DEF

NOTES

None

Replace the passenger side sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-24

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR CONFIGURATION DF051 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

This fault corresponds to an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of a component additional to its configuration. Read configuration LC025 under the heading read configuration. Use command CF207 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-25

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER SIDE SENSOR CONFIGURATION DF052 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

This fault corresponds to an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of a component additional to its configuration. Read configuration LC026 under the heading read configuration. Use command CF208 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-26

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION DF053 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

This fault corresponds to an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of a component additional to its configuration. Read configuration LC086 under the heading read configuration. Use command CF289 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-27

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

MULTIPLEX NETWORK DF060 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: Carry out the multiplex network fault finding procedure

None

Apply the fault finding procedure for the multiplex network.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-28

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT DF065 PRESENT

CO : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Below minimum threshold Values out of range

Priorities when dealing with a number of faults: If DF065 is present with at least one of DF077, DF210, DF232, or DF240, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. NOTES Special notes: use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter for working on the computer connector.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1686) test adapter and measure the resistance between track 9 and track 10 with the seat fully forward and fully back. When the seat is forward, the resistance should be: 400 Ω (275 < X < 545 Ω) When the seat is back, the resistance should be: 100 Ω (65 < X < 145 Ω) If the resistances are correct, check the connections of the 64-track computer connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat and measure the resistance between tracks 3 and 4 with the seat fully forward and fully back. When the seat is forward, the resistance should be: 400 Ω (275 < X < 545) When the seat is back, the resistance should be: 100 Ω (65 < X < 145) Are the values correct?

NO

Check the connection and the condition of the sensor connectors. Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier Track 3 Track 2 sensor connector Bornier Track 4 Track 1 sensor connector If the checks are correct, replace the seat position sensor.

YES

Check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 3 and 4) and 64-track connector (tracks 9 and 10). If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, the seat position sensor, and the under-seat connector, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-29

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER REAR CHEST LEVEL SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF066 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter to work on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear side airbags.

Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger's rear side airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger's rear side airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 57 and 58). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1686) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable L. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's rear chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-30

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF066 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 57 and 58). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1686) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable L. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's rear chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-31

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S REAR CHEST LEVEL SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF067 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter to work on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear side airbags.

Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's chest level rear side airbag is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the driver's rear chest level side airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's rear chest level side airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 29 and 30). Repair if necessary Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1686) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable N. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's rear chest level side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's rear chest level side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-32

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF067 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 29 and 30). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1686) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable N. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's rear chest level side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-33

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER CHEST LEVEL FRONT SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF068 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration.

NOTES

Priorities when dealing with a number of faults: If DF068 is present with at least one of DF210 or DF241, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with passenger front chest side airbags.

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1686). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure resistance in the adapter wire marked F. If the value obtained is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Only use the CLIP or XRBAG tools to measure the resistance of cable A. Is the value obtained correct? NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12). Strip the passenger seat and check that the airbag ignition module is connected correctly. Disconnect the side airbag ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector and again measure the resistance of cable A. – If the value obtained is correct, replace the passenger's front chest side airbag module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the front passenger seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's front chest side airbag module then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the chest level side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-34

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF068 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1686). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in the adapter cable marked F. If the value obtained is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Only use the CLIP or XRBAG tools to measure the insulation appropriately for the type of fault on cable A. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

YES

Passenger's seat wiring fault (C1/C3). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the front passenger seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's front chest side airbag module then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the chest level side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-35

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER CURTAIN AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF069 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter to work on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger side curtain airbag.

Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger side curtain airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger side curtain airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 45 and 46). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1686) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in cable G. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and the passenger side curtain airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the passenger side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-36

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF069 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 45 and 46). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1686) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable G. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and the passenger side curtain airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the passenger side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-37

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF070 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter to work on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver side curtain airbag.

Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and make sure the ignition module of the driver side curtain airbag is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the driver side curtain airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver side curtain airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 17 and 18). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1686) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance of cable I. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver side curtain airbag connector (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the driver's side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-38

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF070 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 17 and 18). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1686) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable I. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver side curtain airbag connector (C0/C1) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the driver's side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-39

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DF071 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and remove the driver's frontal airbag. Check that it is correctly connected. Disconnect the driver's frontal airbag and attach 2 dummy ignition modules to the ignition module connectors. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's frontal airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). With the ignition switched off, disconnect and reconnect the connector of the rotary contact beneath the steering wheel. Check the connections if the fault has become stored (fault no longer declared present). Attach the 10-track (Elé. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 9 and 10). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch beneath the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connections of the 22-track (tracks 4 and 15) connector Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable D. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's frontal airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-40

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF071 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and unclip the driver's frontal airbag. Check the condition and correct connection of the trigger lines. Attach the 10-track test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 9 and 10). Only use the CLIP or XRBAG tools to measure the insulation appropriately for the type of fault on cable A (driver's frontal airbag connected). If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch beneath the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections (tracks 4 and 15). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable D. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's frontal airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-41

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DF072 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and remove the driver's frontal airbag. Check that it is correctly connected. Disconnect the driver’s frontal airbag and connect 2 dummy ignition modules to the ignition module connectors. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's frontal airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). With the ignition switched off, disconnect and reconnect the connector of the rotary contact beneath the steering wheel. Check the connections if the fault has become stored (fault no longer declared present). Attach the 10-track (Elé. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 6 and 7). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch beneath the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch beneath the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections (tracks 3 and 14). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's frontal airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-42

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF072 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and unclip the driver's frontal airbag. Check the condition and correct connection of the trigger lines. Attach the 10-track (Elé. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 6 and 7). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in cable B (driver's frontal airbag connected). If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch beneath the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections (tracks 3 and 14). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's frontal airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-43

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER'S FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DF074 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and make sure the passenger's frontal airbag is properly connected (access the connectors through the glovebox). Disconnect the passenger’s frontal airbag ORANGE connector and attach a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). If the value is incorrect: Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1 and 12). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used for checking resistance in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring harness if necessary. If the value obtained is correct, check the computer connections again.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-44

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF074 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1 and 12). Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-45

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DF075 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and make sure the passenger's frontal airbag is properly connected (access the connectors through the glovebox). Disconnect the passenger's frontal airbag BLUE connector and attach a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). If the value is incorrect: Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 2 and 13). Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). The CLIP or XRBAG must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable B. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring harness if necessary. If the value obtained is correct, check the computer connections again.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-46

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF075 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 2 and 13). Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in the adapter cable marked B. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-47

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF077 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration.

NOTES

Priorities when dealing with a number of faults: If DF077 is present with at least one of DF065, DF210, DF232, or DF240, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver's front chest side airbag.

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1686). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked H. If the value indicated is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Only use the CLIP or XRBAG tools to measure the resistance of cable A. Is the value obtained correct? NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12). Remove the trim from the driver's seat and check that the chest side airbag ignition module is properly connected. Disconnect the chest side airbag ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector and again measure the resistance in cable A. – If the value obtained is correct, replace the driver's front chest side airbag module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's front side chest airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the chest level side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-48

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF077 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1686). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the insulation appropriately for the type of fault in the adapter wire marked H. If the value indicated is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Only use the CLIP or XRBAG tools to measure the insulation appropriately for the type of fault on cable A. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

– Driver's seat wiring fault (C1/C3). – Replace the wiring harness between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring) if necessary.

YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's front side chest airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-49

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

AIRBAG LOCKING SWITCH CIRCUIT DF091 PRESENT

NOTES

CO : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Below minimum threshold Values out of range

Special notes: Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool.

Check that the lock switch is properly connected and check its connections. Check the condition and connections of the 22-track computer connector (lock system, wiring etc.). Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier Elé. 1685 terminal 21 Bornier Elé. 1685 terminal 22

Track 6 lock switch connector Track 3 lock switch connector

Replace the locking switch if the fault is still present.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the locking switch, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-50

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

TRIGGER LINES CONFIGURATION DF187 PRESENT

NOTES

None

This fault corresponds to an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of a component additional to its configuration. Carry out a reading of the configuration under the heading READING THE CONFIGURATION. Modify the computer configuration, adapting it to the equipment level of the vehicle.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool.

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-51

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER AIRBAG LOCKING CHANGE OF STATUS DF193 STORED

NOTES

Special notes: the vehicle user has 10 seconds after switching on + after ignition feed to inhibit the passenger airbag with the switch. After this time, the computer will store this fault and light up the instrument panel warning light.

Clear the computer memory. Switch off the ignition, and wait a few seconds. Set the locking switch to the desired setting. Switch the ignition back on and check that the fault is gone.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there is no fault, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-52

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

COMPUTER TO BE REPLACED FOLLOWING IMPACT DF194 PRESENT

NOTES

None

Contact your Techline (see the Replacing components section for this procedure).

AFTER REPAIR

None

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-53

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

FRONT BUCKLE PRETENSIONNERS CIRCUIT DF210 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: the front buckle pretensioners are serially wired. Never carry out measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter to work on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

None

Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's seat buckle pretensioner is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's seat buckle pretensioner if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger's seat buckle pretensioner is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger seat buckle pretensioner ignition module if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1, 2, 37 and 38). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1686). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used for checking resistance in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat buckle pretensioner ignition module (C0/C3). See next page. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat buckle pretensioner (C0/C3). See next page.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-54

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF210 CONTINUED 1

Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat (tracks 7 and 8). Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable C. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Check seat side seat connector connections again (tracks 7 and 8). If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the 22-track seat connector and the buckle pretensioner of the faulty seat (C1/C3).

YES

Again check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 7 and 8) on the passenger compartment wiring side and of the 64-track (driver's seat tracks 1 and 2 or passenger seat tracks 37 and 38) connector. If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the seat displaying the fault (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-55

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF210 CONTINUED 2

CC.0 - CC.1

NOTES

None

Lock the computer. Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1, 2, 37 and 38). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1686). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat buckle pretensioner ignition module (C0/C3). See interpretation A. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat buckle pretensioner (C0/C3). See interpretation A.

Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat (tracks 7 and 8). Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Only use the CLIP or XRBAG tools to measure the insulation appropriately for the type of fault on cable C. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the 22-track seat connector and the buckle pretensioner of the faulty seat (C1/C3). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

YES

Faulty wiring between the computer and the seat displaying the fault (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-56

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

AIRBAG LOCK SWITCH CONFIGURATION DF214 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

This fault corresponds to an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of a component additional to its configuration. Read configuration LC060 under the heading Read configuration. Use command CF248 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-57

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR CIRCUIT CO : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF:

DF232 PRESENT

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Below minimum threshold Values outside the limits

If 1.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration.

NOTES

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CO - CC.0 - CC.1 2.DEF - 3.DEF

NOTES

Special notes: None.

Check the condition and connections of the 64-track computer connector (locking system, connections, etc.). Make sure the driver's seat belt buckle sensor is properly connected and test its connections. Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier Elé. 1686 terminal 11 Track 2 buckle sensor connector Bornier Elé. 1686 terminal 12 Track 1 buckle sensor connector If the connection is OK, replace the driver's seat belt buckle sensor. If the connection is faulty: Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat, seat side (tracks 5 and 6). Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier Elé. 1687 terminal 5 Track 2 buckle sensor connector Bornier Elé. 1687 terminal 6 Track 1 buckle sensor connector Repair if necessary. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat, computer side (tracks 5 and 6). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1686) test adapter to the computer (point C0). Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier Elé. 1686 terminal 11 Track 5 22-track connector Bornier Elé. 1686 terminal 12 Track 6 22-track connector If the connection is faulty, repair or replace the harness.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool.

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-58

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

REAR SEAT BELT INERTIA REEL CIRCUIT DF239 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: the rear seat belt retractors are serially wired. Never carry out measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter to work on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: Correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear seatbelt retractors.

Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the rear seat belt retractor, driver's side is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the inertia reel and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the rear seat belt retractor, driver's side, if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the rear seat belt retractor on the passenger side is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the seat belt retractor and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger side rear seat belt retractor if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the computer and check the connections of the connector (tracks 19, 20, 41 and 42). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1686). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable J. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the driver's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring harness if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable E. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the passenger's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and seat belt retractors, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any retractors that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-59

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF239 CONTINUED

CC.0 - CC.1

NOTES

None

Lock the computer. Disconnect the computer and check the connections of the connector (tracks 19, 20, 41 and 42). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1686). The CLIP or XRBAG must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable J. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the driver's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring harness if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable E. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the passenger's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and seat belt retractors, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any retractors that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-60

Edition 3

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT BASE AIRBAG/LAP BELT CIRCUIT CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

DF240 PRESENT

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. Priorities when dealing with a number of faults: If DF240 is present with at least one of DF077, DF065, DF210 or DF232, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. NOTES Special notes: depending on the type of vehicle body, this is either a lap belt pretensioner circuit fault or seat base airbag (anti-submarining airbag) fault. Never carry out measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver's seat base airbag/lap belt.

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1686). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked B. If the value indicated is correct, check the connections of the 64-track connector (tracks 3 and 4). Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 9 and 10). Make sure the driver's seat base/lap airbag ignition module is properly connected. Disconnect the driver's seat base airbag/lap belt ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector, then again measure the resistance in cable B. – If the value indicated is correct, replace the driver's lap belt/seat base airbag module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Again check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 9 and 10) and of the 64-track (tracks 3 and 4) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat base airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat base airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-61

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF240 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Seat wiring fault. Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3.

YES

AFTER REPAIR

Wiring fault between the computer and driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat base airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat base airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-62

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER'S SEAT BASE AIRBAG/LAP BELT CIRCUIT DF241 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. Priorities when dealing with a number of faults: If DF241 is present with at least one of DF068, DF210 or DF232, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. NOTES Special notes: depending on the type of vehicle body, this is either a lap belt pretensioner circuit fault or seat base airbag (anti-submarining airbag) fault. Never carry out measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger seat base airbag/lap belt.

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1686). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked D. If the value obtained is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 39 and 40) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. Is the value obtained correct? NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 9 and 10). Make sure the passenger seat base/lap airbag ignition module is properly connected. Disconnect the passenger seat base airbag/lap belt ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector, then again measure the resistance in cable B. – If the value indicated is correct, replace the passenger seat base/lap airbag module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Again check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 9 and 10) and of the 64-track (tracks 39 and 40) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the front passenger seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the passenger seat base airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat base airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-63

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF241 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Seat wiring fault. Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3.

YES

AFTER REPAIR

Wiring fault between the computer and passenger's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

Reconnect the computer and the passenger seat base airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat base airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-64

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Diagnostic - Summary table of statuses and parameters

88C

ACU4 AIRBAG STATUSES SUMMARY TABLE:

TOOL STATUSES ET010 ET072 ET073 ET074 ET076 ET103 ET105 ET108 ET143 ET144

DIAGNOSTIC TOOL HEADINGS Impact detected Passenger airbag status indicator light commanded Computer locked by tool Fault warning light commanded Computer to be replaced Type of passenger airbag locking Locked diagnostics power supply out of limits Passenger airbag locking mode Passenger airbag(s) locked Fault present or stored

ACU4 AIRBAG PARAMETERS SUMMARY TABLE: TOOL PARAMETERS PR001 PR002 PR104 PR105 PR106 PR107 PR108 PR109 PR110 PR111 PR112 PR113 PR114 PR115 PR116 PR117 PR118 PR140 PR147

DIAGNOSTIC TOOL HEADINGS Computer supply voltage Vehicle type Driver's seat sensor impedance Line 1 impedance (Driver's seat lap belt/seat base airbag circuit). Line 2 impedance (Passenger's lap belt/seat base airbag circuit). Line 3 impedance (Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 1). Line 4 impedance (Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 2). Line 5 impedance (Driver's frontal airbag circuit 1). Line 6 impedance (Driver's frontal airbag circuit 2). Line 7 impedance (Driver's side curtain airbag circuit). Line 8 impedance (Passenger's side curtain airbag circuit). Line 9 impedance (Driver's chest front side airbag circuit). Line 10 impedance (Passenger's chest front side airbag circuit). Line 11 impedance (Driver's rear frontal side airbag circuit). Line 12 impedance (Passenger's rear chest level side airbag circuit). Line 13 impedance (Front belt pretensioners circuit). Line 14 impedance (Rear seat belt retractors). Number of memory zone deletions Airbag locking circuit impedance

The trigger line or sensor impedance is 99.9 Ω when the component is disconnected or not controlled by the computer.

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-65

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

NOTES

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Conformity check

88C

Only carry out conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool.

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

1

Diagnostic tool dialogue

-

Airbag

ACU 4

ALP 1

2

Computer conformity

Parameter PR002 Vehicle type

MEGANE II:

48

DF001

3

Computer configuration

Computer initialisation check

Fault finding

Using READ CONFIGURATION commands

Ensure that the computer configuration defined in the "Current" column corresponds to the vehicle equipment.

None

Ignition on

Warning light comes on for 3 seconds when the ignition is switched on

None

Warning light operation 4

Display and notes

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-66

Edition 3

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag:04

AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

88C

ALP 1

No communication with the airbag computer

NOTES

Special note: To perform fault finding on the vehicle computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed), i.e. proceed as follows: – Vehicle card in card reader, press and hold the Start button for more than 5 seconds outside of starting conditions.

Check that the diagnostic tool is not causing the fault by trying to establish dialogue with a computer on another vehicle. If the tool is not the problem and communication cannot be established with any other computer in the same vehicle, check the battery voltage and do the work required to obtain the proper reading (10.5 V < battery voltage < 16 V).

Check the presence and condition of the airbag computer supply fuse. Check that the computer connector is properly connected and check the condition of its connections. Check that the supply to the computer is correct: – Disconnect the airbag computer and attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). – Check and ensure the presence of + after ignition feed between the terminals marked earth and + after ignition feed.

Check that the supply to the diagnostic socket is correct: – + before ignition feed on track 16 – + after ignition feed on track 1 – Earth on tracks 4 and 5. With 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685), check the continuity and insulation of the airbag computer/diagnostic socket connection between: Bornier track CAN H Track 6 of the diagnostic socket Bornier track CAN L Track 14 of the diagnostic socket

If communication is still not established after these various tests, contact your Techline (see the Help section for details).

AFTER REPAIR

When communication is established, deal with any faults indicated.

ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-67

Edition 3

188C ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle: MEGANE II, SCENIC II

Name of computer: AUTOLIV - ACU 4

Function concerned: AIRBAG

Program no.: Vdiag No.: 08, 10 and 0C

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), paper version (Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) and Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP Special tooling required Special tooling required – Multimeter – Set of adapters and borniers for using the airbag and pretensioner wiring harness check function of CLIP and XRBAG tools for updates including the borniers listed below. – The standard modification of the new airbag ignition module connectors requires modification of the dummy ignition module. LOCAL MODIFICATION OF THE DUMMY IGNITION MODULE – Remove the ignition module from its red support and remove one of the two brown locking notches. Elé. 1685

Computer bornier 22 tracks

Elé. 1686

Computer bornier 64 tracks

Elé. 1687

Seat bornier 22 tracks

Elé. 1617

Rotary switch bornier 10 tracks

ABGACU4_V08_PRELI/ABGACU4_V10_PRELI/ABGACU4_V0C_PRELI

88C-1

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

3. RECAP Faults Procedure To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed): – vehicle card in reader, – press and hold Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with startup conditions not fulfilled, – then connect the diagnostic tool and perform the desired operations. IMPORTANT The left-hand and right-hand xenon bulb computers are supplied when the dipped headlights are lit. Therefore fault finding can only be carried out on them after the ignition has been switched on in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed) and the dipped headlights have been switched on. Cutting off the + after ignition feed is performed as follows: – Disconnect the diagnostic tool. – Press the Start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds). – Ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out. Faults are displayed as present or stored (they appeared in a certain context and have since disappeared, or they are still present but cannot be diagnosed in the current context). The present or stored status of faults must be considered when using the diagnostic tool after switching on + after ignition feed (without activating any system components). Deal with present faults according to the procedure specified in the Interpretation of faults section. For stored faults, note the faults displayed and follow the instructions in the "Notes" section. If the fault is confirmed when the notes are applied, the fault is present. In this case, deal with the fault. If the fault is not confirmed, carry out basic checks. Check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors for these lines (for oxidation, bent pins, etc), – the resistance of the component detected as faulty, – the condition of the wires (insulation melted or cut, wear), or use the fault finding procedure to check the circuit for the component concerned.

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-2

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check statuses and parameters that do not produce a fault display on the diagnostic tool when they are inconsistent. Therefore, this stage is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. This section features the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters, and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values, consult the corresponding fault finding page.

Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the diagnostic tool check is correct, but the customer complaint persists, it should be dealt with according to the customer complaint. A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart.

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-3

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

88C

Fault finding - Introduction

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and condition of the fuses

Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with Electronic Control Unit?

no See ALP No. 1

yes Read the faults

no

Faults present

Conformity check

yes Deal with present faults

The cause is still present

Deal with stored faults

yes

no

Fault solved

Use fault finding charts (ALPs)

The cause is still present

no

Fault solved

The cause is still present

no

Fault solved

yes yes Contact the Techline with the completed fault finding log

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-4

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Wiring check: Fault finding problems: Disconnecting the connectors and/or manipulating the wiring harness may temporarily remove the cause of a fault. Electrical measurements of voltage, resistance and insulation are generally correct, especially if the fault is not present (stored) when testing is carried out. Visual inspection: Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. Carefully check the fuses, insulators and wiring harness routing. Look for signs of oxidation. Tactile inspection: While manipulating the wiring harness, use the diagnostic tool to note any change in fault status from stored to present. Make sure that the connectors are properly locked. Apply light pressure to the connectors. Twist the wiring harness. If there is a change in status, try to locate the source of the fault. Inspection of each component: Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and tabs, as well as their crimping (no crimping on the insulating section). Make sure that the clips and tabs are properly locked in the sockets. Make sure that no clips or tabs have been dislodged during connection. Check the clip contact pressure using an appropriate model of tab. Resistance check: Check the continuity of entire lines, then section by section. Look for a short circuit to earth, to + 12 V or to another wire. If a fault is detected, proceed with the repairs or replacement.

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-5

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

Fault finding - Introduction

88C

5. FAULT FINDING LOG NOTE All faults requiring replacement of a computer for thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The fault finding log must be filled out during the process and indicate the findings for the warranty refund. IMPORTANT!

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT. You will always be asked for this log: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline. – To be enclosed when returning monitored parts on request. The log is needed for warranty compensation, and enables better analysis of the removed parts.

6. SAFETY ADVICE Safety rules must be observed whenever work is carried out on a component to prevent physical damage or human injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load. It is vital that you lock the computer using the diagnostic tool to prevent any risk of accidental triggering during operations on the airbag and seat belt pretensioner systems (all the trigger lines will be inhibited). The locked mode is indicated when the instrument panel warning light comes on. If it is impossible to connect the diagnostic tool, switch off the ignition, remove the system power fuse, and wait at least 2 seconds for the reserve power capacity to discharge. Never measure the airbag or pretensioner trigger lines with any device other than XRBAG or CLIP's "Airbag and pretensioner wiring harness check" function. Before using a dummy ignition module, check that its resistance is between 1.8 and 2.5 Ω. During the procedure, check that the computer feed voltage does not drop below 10 V. NOTE Airbag and pretensioner destruction and disposal is subject to national legislation.

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-6

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM (FRONT section)

AR To rear wiring

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-7

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

Fault finding - Introduction

88C

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM (REAR section)

Rear A B C D E G H I

To rear wiring harness Central unit Driver’s seat Front passenger seat Buckle pretensioner Airbag ignition module Passenger's frontal airbag ignition module Front chest level side airbag ignition module Lap belt pretensioner or seat base airbag

J/K L/M N/O R/S CT P

Curtain airbag ignition modules Rear chest level side airbag ignition modules Rear seat belt retractors Rear frontal airbag triggers Driver's front rotary switch + 12 V/Earth Warning light/Fault finding lines Impact sensors/seat impact signal Passenger airbag lock switch

FRONTAL AIRBAGS Measuring point

Correct value

Driver

C0, C2 and C4

1.8 to 6.2 Ω

Passenger

C0 and C4

1.8 to 4 Ω

SIDE AIRBAGS AND PRETENSIONERS Measuring point

Correct value

C0, C1 and C3

1.8 to 4 Ω

Correct insulation value: display >100 h or 9999 flashing. ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-8

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

DEFINITION OF THE TRIGGER LINES L1:

Driver's seat lap belt/seat base airbag circuit (cable B of 64-track bornier Elé. 1717)

L2:

Passenger seat lap belt/seat base airbag circuit (cable D of 64-track bornier Elé. 1717)

L3:

Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 1 (cable B of 22-track bornier Elé. 1685)

L4:

Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 2 (cable A of 22-track bornier Elé. 1685)

L5:

Driver's frontal airbag circuit 1 (cable C of 22-track bornier Elé. 1685)

L6:

Driver's frontal airbag circuit 2 (cable D of 22-track bornier Elé. 1685)

L7:

Driver's side curtain airbag circuit (cable I of 64-track bornier Elé. 1717)

L8:

Passenger's side curtain airbag circuit (cable G of 64-track bornier Elé. 1717)

L9:

Driver's front chest level side airbag circuit (cable H of 64-track bornier Elé. 1717)

L10:

Passenger's front chest level side airbag circuit ((cable F of 64-track bornier Elé. 1717)

L11:

Driver's rear chest level side airbag circuit (cable N of 64-track bornier Elé. 1717)

L12:

Passenger's rear chest level side airbag circuit (cable L of 64-track bornier Elé. 1717)

L13:

Front buckle pretensioner circuit (cables A and C of 64-track bornier Elé. 1717)

L14:

Rear seat belt retractors (cables E and J of 64-track bornier Elé. 1717)

L15:

Driver's side rear frontal airbag circuit (cable O of 64-track bornier Elé. 1717)

L16:

Passenger's side rear frontal airbag circuit (cable M of 64-track bornier Elé. 1717)

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-9

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Airbags and pretensioners

Page 1/2

List of monitored parts: Airbag computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by No./Dealership name/ Country Vehicle model VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

Update version ●

Customer complaint 1192

Other

●

Your comments:

When the fault appears 011

When the ignition is switched on

005

While driving

Other

●

Airbag warning light lit

004

Intermittently

999

When starting the engine

Your comments:

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of fault finding manual:

Workshop Repair Manual

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault finding manual no: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No: Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 16 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Airbag and pretensioners ●

Page 2/2

Identification of the computer and parts replaced for the system

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration number VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Stored

Fault name

Specification

System-specific information

Total vehicle mileage when the customer complaint occurred: How often does it occur? How long after the engine starts? ●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions?

CAN Wiring Seats

Instrument panel Battery Others

Rotary switch Fuse

Your comments:

FD 16 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

Fault finding - System operation

88C

PASSIVE SAFETY EQUIPMENT The MEGANE II has equipment also found on the LAGUNA II and VEL SATIS, namely: – – – – –

Front seat chest level side airbag. Double pretensioner on the front seat (except for type CMXX and SMXX). Driver's seat position sensor for adaptive airbag. Three-point rear centre seat belt. Front and rear Isofix mountings.

INNOVATIONS: – Passenger airbag inhibition switch. – Anti-submarining airbag in the seat base along with a buckle pretensioner on the front seat for type CMXX and SMXX MEGANE II vehicles. In the text, this airbag is referred to as the: DRIVER'S SEAT LAP BELT/SEAT BASE AIRBAG. Via the same trigger line, the ACU 4 Vdiag 08, 10 computer controls either the seat base (anti-submarining) airbag or the driver's seat lap belt pretensioner: For versions other than CMXX and SMXX, the configuration is: Driver's seat lap belt pretensioner. For the CMXX and SMXX versions, the configuration is: Driver's seat base airbag. The features are never found simultaneously on the same vehicle because they use the same trigger line.

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-12

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - System operation

88C

Special feature of the airbag locking switch operation: Vdiag 08: The vehicle user has 10 seconds after + after ignition feed to inhibit the passenger airbag via the switch. After this time, the computer will store the DF193 fault, and light up the instrument panel warning light. Switching the ignition off and on again will block this fault.

Vdiag 10: The deactivation of the passenger airbag via the switch can be authorised even when the engine is running with a vehicle speed below 4 mph (7 km/h). If the switch status is changed above 4 mph (7 km/h), the system status remains unchanged in relation to is status before the speed threshold was exceeded, nevertheless the fault warning light will light up and DF193 will be stored. If the speed signal is unavailable, the change in status of the switch will not be taken into account.

Note on Vdiag 10: In this case the two warning lights are dissociated and the passenger airbag status signal is maintained while the airbag fault warning light is lit. Two distinct impact levels are transmitted on the CAN network: – level 1 unlocks the doors and lights the hazard warning lights, – level 2 cuts off the fuel pump in addition to the level 1 actions.

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-13

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

88C

AIRBAG COMPUTER 22-track connector: Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Track

Description

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

+ Passenger frontal airbag level 2 + Passenger frontal airbag level 1 + Driver's frontal airbag level 1 + Driver's frontal airbag level 2 Not used Not used + After ignition feed Not used Not used CAN L CAN H

Description - Passenger frontal airbag level 2 - Passenger frontal airbag level 1 - Driver's frontal airbag level 1 - Driver's frontal airbag level 2 Not used Not used Earth Not used Not used - Passenger airbag inhibition switch + Passenger airbag inhibition switch

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-14

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

88C

AIRBAG COMPUTER (continued) 64-track connector: Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Description + Buckle pretensioner: driver - Buckle pretensioner: driver + Lap belt pretensioner: driver - Lap belt pretensioner: driver Not used Not used Not used Not used - Driver's seat position sensor + Driver's seat position sensor + Driver's seat belt buckle contact - Driver's seat belt buckle contact Not used Not used + Driver's front side chest airbag - Driver's front side chest airbag + Driver's side curtain airbag - Driver's side curtain airbag + Driver's rear seat belt inertia reel - Driver's rear seat belt inertia reel Not used Not used + Driver's side rear strap sensor - Driver's side rear strap sensor Not used Not used + Driver's side lateral impact sensor - Driver's side impact sensor + Rear chest side airbag driver's side - Rear chest side airbag driver's side + Driver's side rear frontal airbag - Driver's side rear frontal airbag

Track

Description

33

Reserved (+ passenger's seat belt buckle contact) Reserved (- passenger's seat belt buckle contact) Reserved (+ passenger's seat base sensor) Reserved (- passenger's seat base sensor) + Buckle pretensioner: passenger - Buckle pretensioner: passenger + Lap belt pretensioner: passenger - Lap belt pretensioner: passenger + Passenger rear seat belt inertia reel - Passenger rear seat belt inertia reel + Passenger's front chest side airbag - Passenger's front chest side airbag + Passenger's side curtain airbag - Passenger's side curtain airbag Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used + Passenger's rear chest side airbag - Passenger's rear chest side airbag + Passenger side rear frontal airbag - Passenger side rear frontal airbag + Passenger's side impact sensor - Passenger's side impact sensor + Passenger's side rear strap sensor + Passenger's side rear strap sensor

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-15

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

88C

SIDE IMPACT SENSORS CONNECTIONS 2-track connector Track 1

Track

Description

2

+ Signal

Description - Signal

Note: The front buckle pretensioners, front chest side airbags, lap pretensioners or seat base airbags and seat position sensor functions run through a black 22-track R341 or R342 intermediate connector located under each seat and attached to the vehicle floor.

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-16

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Replacement of components

88C

REPLACING THE AIRBAG COMPUTER BEFORE REPLACING ANY COMPUTER, YOU ARE REQUIRED TO CONTACT YOUR TECHLINE.

So that the failure of the returned computer can be analysed, the use of command RZ001 "Clear fault memory" when DF001 "Computer" is present or stored is officially prohibited.

The airbag computers are sold in locked mode to avoid any risk of accidental triggering (all trigger lines are inhibited). The "locked" mode is indicated when the airbag fault warning light on the instrument panel lights up. Observe the following procedure to replace an airbag computer: – – – – – – – –

Ensure that the ignition is switched off. Replace the computer. Modify the computer configuration if necessary. Enter the VIN into the computer with diagnostic tool command VP010 Enter VIN. Switch off the ignition. Carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Enter the After Sales service date with diagnostic tool command VP008 Enter last After Sales service date. Unlock the computer only if no fault is reported by the diagnostic tool and see if the indicator light is out. NOTE During work on the airbag/seat belt pretensioner systems it is vital that you lock the computer using the diagnostic tool to prevent any risk of accidental triggering (all the trigger lines will be disabled). This "locked" mode is obtained using command VP006 "Lock computer" and is indicated by the instrument panel warning light being lit.

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-17

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Configurations and programming

88C

CLEARING RZ001: fault memory. This command is used for clearing the computer's stored faults. CONFIGURATION/CONFIGURATION READINGS: – To make it easier to configure the ACU4 AIRBAG computer, the diagnostic tool has automatic configuration commands for the trigger lines and sensors based on the equipment installed in the various models. However, the commands in the table on the next page are used to configure each system component individually to adapt the computer configuration to the actual equipment in the vehicle. – The configuration reading commands (LCXXX) are used to display the current computer configuration in relation to the trigger lines and sensors installed in the vehicle. – The configuration commands (CFXXX) are used to adjust computer configuration to the equipment actually installed in the vehicle. – STANDARD CONFIGURATION COMMANDS: – CF297: B/C NO SIDE AIRBAGS. Vehicle types B, C WITH NO FRONT AND REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAGS AND NO SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (SABLAT/SSABCS). – CF298: B/C WITH FRONT CHEST LEVEL + CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Vehicle types B, C with FRONT CHEST LEVEL SIDE AIRBAGS + SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (ABLAVI/ SSABCS). – CF299: B/C WITH FRONT/REAR CHEST LEVEL + CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Vehicle types B, C with FRONT AND REAR CHEST LEVEL SIDE AIRBAGS + SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (ABLAT/SSABCS). – CF300: G/S WITH CURTAIN AIRBAGS. S-type vehicles (vans) equipped with CURTAIN SIDE AIRBAGS (ABLAT/SSABCS). – CF301: G/S NO CURTAIN AIRBAGS. S vehicle types (vans) WITHOUT CURTAIN SIDE AIRBAGS (ABLAVI/SSABCS). – CF302: J NO SIDE AIRBAGS. Type J vehicles. Command for automatic configuration of the igniter and sensors in SCENIC type vehicles with no chest side airbags or curtain airbags (SABLAT/SSABCS). – CF303: J WITH SIDE AIRBAGS AND NO REAR FRONTAL AIRBAGS. Type J vehicles. Command for automatic configuration of the igniter and sensors in SCENIC type vehicles with front chest side airbags, curtain airbags and no rear seat belt airbag (ABLAVI/SSABCS).

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-18

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Configurations and programming

88C

– STANDARD CONFIGURATION COMMANDS (continued): – CF304: J WITH SIDE AIRBAGS + REAR FRONTAL AIRBAGS. Type J vehicles. Command for automatic configuration of the igniter and sensors in SCENIC type vehicles with front chest side airbags, curtain airbags and rear seat belt airbags (ABLAVI/ABCAR – CF305: E WITH SIDE AIRBAGS. Type E vehicles. Command for automatic configuration of the igniter and sensors in CABRIOLET type vehicles with front chest side airbags (ABLAV/SSABCS). – CF306: E WITH NO SIDE AIRBAGS Type E vehicles. Command for automatic configuration of the igniter and sensors in CABRIOLET type vehicles with no front chest side airbags (SABLAT/SSABCS). – CF307: K/L WITH NO SIDE AIRBAGS. Type K and L vehicles: Command for automatic configuration of the igniter and sensors in 4-door ESTATE and SALOON type vehicles with neither front chest side airbags nor curtain airbags (SABLAT/SSABCS). – CF308: K/L WITH FRONT CHEST AND CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Type K and L vehicles: Command for automatic configuration of the igniter and sensors in 4-door ESTATE and SALOON type vehicles with front chest side airbags and curtain airbags (ABLAVIT/SSABCS). – CF309: K/L WITH FRONT/REAR CHEST AND CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Type K and L vehicles: Command for automatic configuration of the igniter and sensors in 4-door ESTATE and SALOON type vehicles with front and rear chest side airbags and curtain airbags (ABLAT/SSABCS). Because of probable computer part number unification in the Parts Department, some sensors or trigger lines may have to be deconfigured after using standard configuration commands. For this, use the individual configuration commands for system components. After configuration, check the display configuration screen to make sure that the information entered has registered.

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-19

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Configurations and programming

88C

CONFIGURATION/CONFIGURATION READINGS: – CONFIGURABLE FEATURES: Trigger lines WITH or WITHOUT: The front buckle pretensioners are serially wired. The rear seat belt retractors are serially wired.

TITLE DRIVER'S SEAT LAP BELT/SEAT BASE AIRBAG PASSENGER SEAT LAP BELT/SEAT BASE AIRBAG PASSENGER FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 PASSENGER FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DRIVER'S FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DRIVER'S FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DRIVER'S SIDE REAR FRONTAL AIRBAG PASSENGER'S SIDE REAR FRONTAL AIRBAG DRIVER'S SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG PASSENGER'S SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG DRIVER'S FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAG PASSENGER'S FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAG DRIVER'S REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAG PASSENGER REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAG FRONT BUCKLE PRETENSIONERS REAR INERTIA REELS

CONFIGURATION READING

CONFIGURATION

LC080 LC079 LC052 LC047 LC048 LC049 LC091 LC092 LC040 LC041 LC042 LC043 LC044 LC045 LC081 LC078

CF283 CF282 CF236 CF229 CF230 CF231 CF294 CF295 CF221 CF222 CF223 CF224 CF225 CF226 CF284 CF278

CONFIGURATION READING

CONFIGURATION

LC086 LC025 LC026 LC073 LC074 LC090 LC089 LC075

CF289 NONE NONE CF273 CF274 CF293 CF292 CF275

Sensors WITH or WITHOUT:

TITLE DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR PASSENGER'S SIDE SENSOR DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR DRIVER'S SIDE BELT BUCKLE SENSOR PASSENGER SIDE SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR PASSENGER PRESENCE DETECTION SENSOR

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-20

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

Fault finding - Configurations and programming

88C

CONFIGURATION/CONFIGURATION READINGS (continued): "Left-hand"/"right-hand" drive configuration

TITLE STEERING SIDE

CONFIGURATION READING

CONFIGURATION

LC088

CF291

CONFIGURATION READING

CONFIGURATION

LC060

CF248

Passenger airbag locking mode WITH KEY or WITHOUT:

TITLE PASSENGER AIRBAG LOCKING MODE

Read type of vehicle: LC034 MEGANE II OTHER COMMANDS – VP006: Lock computer. This command should be used for any operation on the system. It permits inhibition of all trigger lines. – VP007: Unlock computer. This command is used to unlock a computer when it has been blocked by command VP006. – VP008: Enter last After Sales service date. This command is used to enter the date the system was serviced. – VP010: Enter VIN. This command is for entering the vehicle identification number (VIN) into the computer. – SC004: Read impact context. This command is used during repair of the vehicle following an impact. It obtains, from the computer that is to be replaced, a list of the trigger lines activated and the system's status at the moment of impact.

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-21

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault summary table

Tool fault

Associated DTC

DF001 DF002 DF010 DF028 DF034 DF039 DF040 DF053 DF060 DF065 DF066 DF067 DF068 DF069 DF070 DF071 DF072 DF074 DF075 DF077 DF091 DF193 DF194 DF210 DF212 DF213 DF214 DF227 DF228 DF232 DF233 DF234 DF239 DF240 DF241 DF242

9080 9042 9040 9041 907E 9035 9036 9031 9050 9031 900E 900D 900C 900A 9009 9008 9007 9006 9005 900B 9034 907C 907F 9014 901A 901B 9034 9026 9027 9051 9052 9053 9017 9001 9002 907B

88C

Diagnostic tool title Computer Computer supply voltage Fault warning light circuit Passenger airbag status warning light circuit Computer locked Driver's side sensor circuit Passenger side sensor circuit Driver's seat position sensor configuration Multiplex network Driver's front seat position sensor circuit Passenger's rear chest level side airbag circuit Driver's rear chest level side airbag circuit Passenger's chest front side airbag circuit Passenger's side curtain airbag circuit Driver's side curtain airbag circuit Driver's frontal airbag circuit 2 Driver's frontal airbag circuit 1 Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 2 Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 1 Driver's front side chest airbag circuit Airbag locking switch circuit Passenger airbag locking status change Computer to be replaced following impact Front buckle pretensioner circuit Driver's side rear frontal airbag circuit Passenger side rear frontal airbag circuit Airbag locking switch configuration Driver's side rear strap sensor circuit Passenger's side rear strap sensor circuit Driver's seat belt buckle sensor circuit Passenger's seat belt buckle sensor circuit Passenger presence detection sensor circuit Rear seat belt inertia reel circuit Driver's seat lap belt/seat base circuit Passenger seat lap belt/seat base circuit Left-hand/right-hand drive configuration

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-22

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

DF001 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

COMPUTER

Special notes: So that the failure of the returned computer can be analysed, the use of command RZ001 "Clear fault memory" when DF001 "Computer" is present or stored is officially prohibited.

Replace the airbag computer (see the Replacement of components section for this procedure).

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. Carry out a road test followed by another check with the diagnostic tool.

ABGACU4_V08_DF001/ABGACU4_V10_DF001/ABGACU4_V0C_DF001

88C-23

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

COMPUTER SUPPLY VOLTAGE DF002 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: Micro-cut 2.DEF: Values beyond tolerance

Special notes: Use the 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685) to work on the computer connector (cable 1).

Carry out the operations necessary to obtain the correct voltage supply to the computer: 10.5 volts ± 0.1 < correct voltage < 16 volts ± 0.1. – – – – –

Check the battery charge. Check the charge circuit. Check the tightness and the condition of the battery terminals. Check the computer earth. Check the condition of the computer connections and the locking.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory.

ABGACU4_V08_DF002/ABGACU4_V10_DF002/ABGACU4_V0C_DF002

88C-24

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

FAULT WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT DF010 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: External diagnostics (instrument panel signal) 2.DEF: Consistency (instrument panel indicator light status signal/airbag request)

Special notes: None.

Apply the fault finding procedure relevant to this fault in the instrument panel fault finding information section.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer.

ABGACU4_V08_DF010/ABGACU4_V10_DF010/ABGACU4_V0C_DF010

88C-25

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER AIRBAG CONDITION INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT DF028 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: External diagnostics (instrument panel signal) 2.DEF: Coherence (instrument panel indicator light status/airbag request signal)

Special notes: None.

Apply the fault finding procedure relevant to this fault in the instrument panel fault finding information section.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer.

ABGACU4_V08_DF028/ABGACU4_V10_DF028/ABGACU4_V0C_DF028

88C-26

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

COMPUTER LOCKED DF034 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

Using the diagnostic tool run command VP007 to unlock the airbag computer.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer.

ABGACU4_V08_DF034/ABGACU4_V10_DF034/ABGACU4_V0C_DF034

88C-27

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR CIRCUIT CO : CC.0 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF: 4.DEF:

DF039 PRESENT

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Configuration Disrupted communication Sensor internal electronic fault Values outside limits

If 1.DEF contact the Techline. NOTES

Special notes: Use the 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717) to work on the computer connector.

CO CC.0 2.DEF

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Check that the driver's side sensor is connected correctly and check its connections. Check the condition of the connections on the computer (tracks 27 and 28). Check the condition of the 64-track connector (locking system, connections, etc.) Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier (Elé. 1717) terminal 27

Track 1 sensor connector

Bornier (Elé. 1717) terminal 28

Track 2 sensor connector

3.DEF 4.DEF

NOTES

None

Replace the driver's side sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer.

ABGACU4_V08_DF039/ABGACU4_V10_DF039/ABGACU4_V0C_DF039

88C-28

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER SIDE SENSOR CIRCUIT CO : CC.0 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF: 4.DEF:

DF040 PRESENT

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Configuration Disrupted communication Sensor internal electronic fault Values outside limits

If 1.DEF contact the Techline. NOTES

Special notes: Use the 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717) to work on the computer connector.

CO CC.0 2.DEF

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Check that the driver's side sensor is connected correctly and check its connections. Check the condition of the connections on the computer (tracks 27 and 28). Check the condition of the 64-track connector (locking system, connections, etc.) Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier (Elé. 1686) terminal 61

Track 1 sensor connector

Bornier (Elé. 1686) terminal 62

Track 2 sensor connector

3.DEF 4.DEF

NOTES

None

Replace the passenger side sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer.

ABGACU4_V08_DF040/ABGACU4_V10_DF040/ABGACU4_V0C_DF040

88C-29

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION DF053 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

This fault corresponds to an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of a component additional to its configuration. Read configuration LC086 under the heading Configuration reading. Use command CF289 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults displayed by the diagnostic tool. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer.

ABGACU4_V08_DF053/ABGACU4_V10_DF053/ABGACU4_V0C_DF053

88C-30

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

MULTIPLEX NETWORK DF060 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF: 4.DEF: 5.DEF:

Carry out the multiplex network fault finding procedure Invalid vehicle speed Vehicle speed too high Instrument panel multiplex signal No ABS multiplex signal

Special notes: None.

Apply the fault finding procedure for the multiplex network.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out another check using the diagnostic tool.

ABGACU4_V08_DF060/ABGACU4_V10_DF060/ABGACU4_V0C_DF060

88C-31

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S FRONT SEAT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT DF065 PRESENT

CO : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Values outside the limits

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration.

NOTES

Priorities when dealing with a number of faults: If DF065 is present with at least one of DF077, DF210, DF232, or DF240, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working under the seat.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter and measure the resistance between track 9 and track 10 with the seat fully forward and fully back. When the seat is forward, the resistance should be: 400 Ω 275 < X < 545 Ω When the seat is back, the resistance should be: 100 Ω 65 < X < 145 Ω If the resistances are correct, check the connections of the 64-track computer connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat and measure the resistance between tracks 3 and 4 with the seat fully forward and fully back. When the seat is forward, the resistance should be: 400 Ω 275 < X < 545 When the seat is back, the resistance should be: 100 Ω 65 < X < 145 Are the values correct? NO

Check the connection and the condition of the sensor connectors. Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier Track 3

Track 2 sensor connector

Bornier Track 4

Track 1 sensor connector

If the checks are correct, replace the seat position sensor. YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 3 and 4) again, as well as those of the 64track (tracks 9 and 10) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1).

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, the seat position sensor, and the under-seat connector, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer.

ABGACU4_V08_DF065/ABGACU4_V10_DF065/ABGACU4_V0C_DF065

88C-32

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER REAR CHEST LEVEL SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF066 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1686) adapter to work on the computer connector.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1686) test adapter and measure the resistance between track 9 and track 10 with the seat fully forward and fully back. When the seat is forward, the resistance should be: 400 Ω 275 < X < 545 Ω When the seat is back, the resistance should be: 100 Ω 65 < X < 145 Ω If the resistances are correct, check the connections of the 64-track computer connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat and measure the resistance between tracks 3 and 4 with the seat fully forward and fully back. When the seat is forward, the resistance should be: 400 Ω 275 < X < 545 When the seat is back, the resistance should be: 100 Ω 65 < X < 145 Are the values correct?

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, the seat position sensor, and the under-seat connector, then switch on the ignition again. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's rear chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ABGACU4_V08_DF066/ABGACU4_V10_DF066/ABGACU4_V0C_DF066

88C-33

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF066 CONTINUED

CC CO

NOTES

Special notes correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear side airbags.

Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger's rear chest side airbag is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger's rear chest side airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger's rear chest side airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 57 and 58). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable L. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

Special notes: None.

Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 57 and 58). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable L. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, the seat position sensor, and the under-seat connector, then switch on the ignition again. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's rear chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-34

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S REAR CHEST LEVEL SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF067 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CC CO

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

Special notes correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear side airbags.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's rear chest side airbag is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the driver's rear chest side airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's rear chest side airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 29 and 30). Repair if necessary Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable N. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, the seat position sensor, and the under-seat connector, then switch on the ignition again. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's rear chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ABGACU4_V08_DF067/ABGACU4_V10_DF067/ABGACU4_V0C_DF067

88C-35

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF067 CONTINUED

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's rear chest side airbag is correctly connected. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 29 and 30). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable N. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, the seat position sensor, and the under-seat connector, then switch on the ignition again. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's rear chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-36

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER CHEST FRONT SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF068 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration.

NOTES

Priorities when dealing with a number of faults: If DF068 is present with at least one of DF210 or DF241, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CC CO

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with passenger front chest side airbags.

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure resistance in the adapter wire marked F. If the value obtained is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in cable A. Is the value correct?

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's front chest level side airbag module if it has been replaced (Elé. 1287 tool).

ABGACU4_V08_DF068/ABGACU4_V10_DF068/ABGACU4_V0C_DF068

88C-37

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF068 CONTINUED 1

NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12). Strip the passenger seat and check that the airbag ignition module is connected correctly. Disconnect the side airbag ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector and again measure the resistance of cable A. – If the value obtained is correct, replace the passenger's front chest side airbag module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's front chest level side airbag module if it has been replaced (Elé. 1287 tool). ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-38

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF068 CONTINUED 2

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in the adapter cable marked F. If the value obtained is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Only use the CLIP or XRBAG tools to measure the insulation appropriately for the type of fault on cable A. Is the value obtained correct? NO

Passenger's seat wiring fault (C1/C3). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's front chest level side airbag module if it has been replaced (Elé. 1287 tool). ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-39

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER CURTAIN AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF069 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

open circuit short circuit

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger side curtain airbag.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger side curtain airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger side curtain airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 45 and 46). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in cable G. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and the passenger side curtain airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the passenger side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ABGACU4_V08_DF069/ABGACU4_V10_DF069/ABGACU4_V0C_DF069

88C-40

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF069 CONTINUED

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 45 and 46). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable G. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and the passenger side curtain airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the passenger side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-41

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF070 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

open circuit short circuit

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver's side curtain airbag.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and make sure the ignition module of the driver's side curtain airbag is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the driver's side curtain airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's side curtain airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 17 and 18). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance of cable I. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's side curtain airbag connector (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the driver's side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ABGACU4_V08_DF070/ABGACU4_V10_DF070/ABGACU4_V0C_DF070

88C-42

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF070 CONTINUED

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 17 and 18). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable I. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's side curtain airbag connector (C0/C1) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the driver's side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-43

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DF071 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CC CO

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and remove the driver's frontal airbag. Check that it is correctly connected. Disconnect the driver's frontal airbag and attach 2 dummy ignition modules to the ignition module connectors. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's frontal airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). With the ignition switched off, disconnect and reconnect the connector of the rotary contact beneath the steering wheel. Check the connections if the fault has become stored (fault no longer declared present). Attach the 10-track (Elé. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 9 and 10). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch beneath the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connections of the 22-track (tracks 4 and 15) connector Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable D. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's frontal airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. 1287).

ABGACU4_V08_DF071/ABGACU4_V10_DF071/ABGACU4_V0C_DF071

88C-44

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF071 CONTINUED

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and unclip the driver's frontal airbag. Check the condition and correct connection of the trigger lines. Attach the 10-track test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 9 and 10). Only use the CLIP or XRBAG tools to measure the insulation appropriately for the type of fault on cable A (driver's frontal airbag connected). If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch beneath the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections (tracks 4 and 15). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable D. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's frontal airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-45

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DF072 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CC CO

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and remove the driver's frontal airbag. Check that it is correctly connected. Disconnect the driver's frontal airbag and attach 2 dummy ignition modules to the ignition module connectors. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's frontal airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). With the ignition switched off, disconnect and reconnect the connector of the rotary contact beneath the steering wheel. Check the connections if the fault has become stored (fault no longer declared present). Attach the 10-track (Elé. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 6 and 7). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch beneath the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections (tracks 3 and 14). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's frontal airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. 1287).

ABGACU4_V08_DF072/ABGACU4_V10_DF072/ABGACU4_V0C_DF072

88C-46

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF072 CONTINUED

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and unclip the driver's frontal airbag. Check the condition and correct connection of the trigger lines. Attach the 10-track (Elé. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 6 and 7). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in cable B (driver's frontal airbag connected). If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch beneath the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections (tracks 3 and 14). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's frontal airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-47

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER'S FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DF074 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CC CO

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and make sure the passenger's frontal airbag is properly connected (access to connectors through the glovebox). Disconnect the passenger's frontal airbag ORANGE connector and attach a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). If the value is incorrect: Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1 and 12). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used for checking resistance in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring harness if necessary. If the value obtained is correct, check the computer connections again.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and passenger frontal airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ABGACU4_V08_DF074/ABGACU4_V10_DF074/ABGACU4_V0C_DF074

88C-48

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF074 CONTINUED

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1 and 12). Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and passenger frontal airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-49

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DF075 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CC CO

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and make sure the passenger's frontal airbag is properly connected (access to connectors through the glovebox). Disconnect the passenger's frontal airbag BLUE connector and attach a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). If the value is incorrect: Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 2 and 13). Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). The CLIP or XRBAG must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable B. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring harness if necessary. If the value obtained is correct, check the computer connections again.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and passenger frontal airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ABGACU4_V08_DF075/ABGACU4_V10_DF075/ABGACU4_V0C_DF075

88C-50

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF075 CONTINUED

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 2 and 13). Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in the adapter cable marked B. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and passenger frontal airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger frontal airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-51

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF077 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration.

NOTES

Priorities when dealing with a number of faults: If DF077 is present with at least one of DF065, DF210, DF232 or DF240, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CC CO

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver's front chest side airbag.

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked H. If the value indicated is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Only use the CLIP or XRBAG tools to measure the resistance of cable A. Is the value obtained correct? If the value is incorrect: Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 2 and 13). Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). The CLIP or XRBAG must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable B. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring harness if necessary. If the value obtained is correct, check the computer connections again.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's front side chest airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front chest level side airbag module if it has been replaced (Elé. 1287 tool).

ABGACU4_V08_DF077/ABGACU4_V10_DF077/ABGACU4_V0C_DF077

88C-52

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF077 CONTINUED 1

NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12). Remove the trim from the driver's seat and check that the chest side airbag ignition module is properly connected. Disconnect the chest side airbag ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector and again measure the resistance in cable A. – If the value obtained is correct, replace the driver's front chest side airbag module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's front side chest airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front chest level side airbag module if it has been replaced (Elé. 1287 tool). ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-53

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF077 CONTINUED 2

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach the 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the insulation appropriately for the type of fault in the adapter wire marked H. If the value indicated is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Only use the CLIP or XRBAG tools to measure the insulation appropriately for the type of fault on cable A. Is the value obtained correct? NO – Driver's seat wiring fault (C1/C3). – Replace the wiring harness between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring) if necessary. YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's front side chest airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front chest level side airbag module if it has been replaced (Elé. 1287 tool).

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-54

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

AIRBAG LOCKING SWITCH CIRCUIT CO : CC : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF:

DF091 PRESENT

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Values outside the limits

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

Special notes: Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool.

Check that the lock switch is properly connected and check its connections. Check the condition and connections of the 22-track computer connector (lock system, wiring etc.). Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier Elé. 1685 terminal 21

Track 6 locking switch connector

Bornier Elé. 1685 terminal 22

Track 3 locking switch connector

Replace the locking switch if the fault is still present.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the locking switch, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer.

ABGACU4_V08_DF091/ABGACU4_V10_DF091/ABGACU4_V0C_DF091

88C-55

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER AIRBAG LOCKING CHANGE OF STATUS DF193 PRESENT

NOTES

Special features: the vehicle user has 10 seconds after switching on + after ignition feed to inhibit the passenger airbag with the switch. After this time, the computer will store this fault and light up the warning light on the instrument panel.

Clear the computer memory. Set the locking switch to the desired position, switch the ignition off and wait for a few seconds. Switch the ignition on again and check that the fault is gone.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer.

ABGACU4_V08_DF193

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-56

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 10

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER AIRBAG LOCKING CHANGE OF STATUS DF193 PRESENT

Special notes: The deactivation of the passenger airbag via the switch can be authorised even when the engine is running with a vehicle speed below 4 mph (7 km/h). NOTES

If the switch status is changed above 4 mph (7 km/h), the system status remains unchanged in relation to its status before the speed threshold was exceeded, nevertheless the fault warning light will light up and DF193 will be stored. If the speed signal is unavailable, the change in status of the switch will not be taken into account.

Clear the computer memory. Set the locking switch to the desired position, switch the ignition off and wait for a few seconds. Switch the ignition on again and check that the fault is gone.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer.

ABGACU4_V10_DF193

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-57

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

COMPUTER TO BE REPLACED FOLLOWING IMPACT DF194 PRESENT

NOTES

None

Contact the Techline (see the Replacement of components section for this procedure).

AFTER REPAIR

None.

ABGACU4_V08_DF194/ABGACU4_V10_DF194/ABGACU4_V0C_DF194

88C-58

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

FRONT BUCKLE PRETENSIONERS CIRCUIT DF210 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CC CO

Special notes: the front buckle pretensioners are serially wired. Never carry out measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's seat buckle pretensioner is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's seat buckle pretensioner if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger's seat buckle pretensioner is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger seat buckle pretensioner ignition module if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present).' Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1, 2, 37 and 38). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used for checking resistance in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat buckle pretensioner ignition module (C0/C3). See next page.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ABGACU4_V08_DF210/ABGACU4_V10_DF210/ABGACU4_V0C_DF210

88C-59

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF210 CONTINUED 1

The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat buckle pretensioner (C0/C3). Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat (tracks 7 and 8). Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable C. Is the value obtained correct? NO

Check the seat-side seat connector connections again (tracks 7 and 8). If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the 22-track seat connector and the buckle pretensioner of the faulty seat (C1/C3).

YES

Again check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 7 and 8) on the passenger compartment wiring side and of the 64-track (driver's seat tracks 1 and 2 or passenger seat tracks 37 and 38) connector. If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the seat displaying the fault (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-60

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF210 CONTINUED 2

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1, 2, 37 and 38). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat buckle pretensioner ignition module (C0/C3). See interpretation A. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat buckle pretensioner (C0/C3). See interpretation A.

Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat (tracks 7 and 8). Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Only use the CLIP or XRBAG tools to measure the insulation appropriately for the type of fault on cable C. NO

If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the 22-track seat connector and the buckle pretensioner of the faulty seat (C1/C3). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

YES

Faulty wiring between the computer and the seat displaying the fault (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-61

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SIDE REAR FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF212 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CC CO

Special notes: Never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver's side rear frontal airbag.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's rear frontal airbag is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the driver's rear frontal airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's rear frontal airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 31 and 32). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable O. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's side rear frontal airbag (C0/C3) is faulty. Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side rear frontal airbag module, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory. Switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new module. Destroy the driver's side rear frontal airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ABGACU4_V08_DF212/ABGACU4_V10_DF212/ABGACU4_V0C_DF212

88C-62

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF212 CONTINUED

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 31 and 32). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the insulation appropriately for the type of fault in cable O. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's side rear frontal airbag (C0/C1) is faulty. Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side rear frontal airbag module, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory. Switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new module. Destroy the driver's side rear frontal airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-63

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER SIDE REAR FRONTAL AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF213 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CO CC

Special notes: Never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger side rear frontal airbag.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger rear frontal airbag is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger rear frontal airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger rear frontal airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 59 and 60). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable M. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and passenger side rear frontal airbag (C0/C3) is faulty. Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger side rear frontal airbag module, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory. Switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new module. Destroy the passenger side rear frontal airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ABGACU4_V08_DF213

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-64

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF213 CONTINUED

CC.0 CC.1

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 59 and 60). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the insulation appropriately for the type of fault in cable M. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and passenger side rear frontal airbag (C0/C1) is faulty. Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger side rear frontal airbag module, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory. Switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new module. Destroy the passenger side rear frontal airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-65

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

AIRBAG LOCKING SWITCH CONFIGURATION DF214 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

This fault corresponds to an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of a component additional to its configuration. Read configuration LC060 under the heading Configuration reading. Use command CF248 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool.

ABGACU4_V08_DF214

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-66

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SIDE REAR STRAP SENSOR CIRCUIT DF227 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Value out of range

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

Special notes: Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Make sure the black 2-track connector under the driver's side rear retractor is properly connected. Disconnect the black 2-track connector and measure the sensor's resistance on the retractor side: In the fully retracted position, the resistance is approximately: 100 ohms In the fully extended position, the resistance is approximately: 400 ohms If the resistance is incorrect, replace the driver's side rear retractor. If the resistance is okay, check the condition of the sensor connections. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 23 and 24). Repair if necessary. Fit the 64-track Elé. 1717 test adapter. Check and ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier track 23

track 1 sensor connector

Bornier track 24

track 2 sensor connector

Also check insulation across these two connections.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the rear strap sensor, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory. Switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer.

ABGACU4_V08_DF227

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-67

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER'S SIDE REAR STRAP SENSOR CIRCUIT DF228 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Value out of range

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

Special notes: Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Make sure the black 2-track connector under the passenger side rear retractor is properly connected. Disconnect the black 2-track connector and measure the sensor's resistance on the retractor side: In the fully retracted position, the resistance is approximately: 100 ohms In the fully extended position, the resistance is approximately: 400 ohms If the resistance is incorrect, replace the passenger side rear retractor. If the resistance is okay, check the condition of the sensor connections. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 63 and 64). Repair if necessary. Fit the 64-track Elé. 1717 test adapter. Check and ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier Track 63

Track 1 sensor connector

Bornier Track 64

Track 2 sensor connector

Also check insulation across these two connections.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the rear strap sensor, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory. Switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer.

ABGACU4_V08_DF228

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-68

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR CIRCUIT CO : CC : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF:

DF232 PRESENT

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Values outside the limits

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

Special notes: Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

Check the condition and connections of the 64-track computer connector (locking system, connections, etc.). Make sure the driver's seat belt buckle sensor is properly connected and test its connections. Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier Elé. 1717 terminal 11

Track 2 buckle sensor connector

Bornier Elé. 1717 terminal 12

Track 1 buckle sensor connector

If the connections are OK, replace the driver's seat belt buckle sensor. If a connection is faulty: Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat, on the seat side (tracks 5 and 6). Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier Elé. 1687 terminal 5

Track 2 buckle sensor connector

Bornier Elé. 1687 terminal 6

Track 1 buckle sensor connector

Repair if necessary. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat, computer side (tracks 5 and 6). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the computer (point C0). Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Bornier Elé. 1717 terminal 11

Track 5 22-track connector

Bornier Elé. 1717 terminal 12

Track 6 22-track connector

If a connection is faulty, repair or replace the harness.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool.

ABGACU4_V08_DF232

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-69

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTORS CIRCUIT DF239 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CC CO

Special notes: Never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

Special notes: Correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear seat belt retractors.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the rear seat belt retractor, driver's side is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the seat belt retractor and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the rear seat belt retractor, driver's side, if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the rear seat belt retractor, passenger side, is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the seat belt retractor and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger side rear seat belt retractor if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the computer and check the connections of the connector (tracks 19, 20, 41 and 42). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable J. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the driver's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring harness if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable E. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the passenger side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and rear seat belt retractors, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any retractors that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ABGACU4_V08_DF239/ABGACU4_V10_DF239/ABGACU4_V0C_DF239

88C-70

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF239 CONTINUED

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer and check the connections of the connector (tracks 19, 20, 41 and 42). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable J. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the driver's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring harness if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to correctly measure the insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable E. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the passenger side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and rear seat belt retractors, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any retractors that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-71

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT LAP BELT/SEAT BASE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF240 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. Priorities when dealing with a number of faults: If DF240 is present with at least one of DF077, DF065, DF210 or DF232, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. NOTES Special notes: depending on the type of vehicle body, this is either a lap belt pretensioner circuit fault or seat base airbag (anti-submarining airbag) fault. Never carry out measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CC CO

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver's seat lap belt/seat base airbag.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked B. If the value indicated is correct, check the connections of the 64-track connector (tracks 3 and 4). Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. Is the value obtained correct?

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat lap belt/seat base airbag ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat base airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ABGACU4_V08_DF240/ABGACU4_V10_DF240/ABGACU4_V0C_DF240

88C-72

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF240 CONTINUED 1

NO

Again check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 9 and 10) and of the 64-track (tracks 3 and 4) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 9 and 10). Make sure the driver's seat lap belt/seat base airbag ignition module is properly connected. Disconnect the driver's seat lap belt/seat base airbag ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector, then again measure the resistance in cable B. – If the value indicated is correct, replace the driver's seat lap belt/seat base airbag module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat lap belt/seat base airbag ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat base airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-73

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF240 CONTINUED 2

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B. Is the value obtained correct? NO

Seat wiring fault. Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3.

YES

Wiring fault between the computer and driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat lap belt/seat base airbag ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat base airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-74

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER SEAT LAP BELT/SEAT BASE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF241 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. Priorities when dealing with a number of faults: If DF241 is present with at least one of DF068, DF210 or DF232, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. NOTES Special notes: depending on the type of vehicle body, this is either a lap belt pretensioner circuit fault or seat base airbag (anti-submarining airbag) fault. Never carry out measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CC CO

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger seat lap belt/seat base airbag.

Lock the computer with the diagnostic tool command, disconnect the computer and attach the 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked D. If the value obtained is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 39 and 40) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. Is the value obtained correct?

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat lap belt/seat base airbag ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat base airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ABGACU4_V08_DF241/ABGACU4_V10_DF241/ABGACU4_V0C_DF241

88C-75

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF241 CONTINUED 1

NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 9 and 10). Make sure the passenger seat base/lap airbag ignition module is properly connected. Disconnect the passenger seat lap belt/seat base airbag ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector, then again measure the resistance in cable B. – If the value indicated is correct, replace the passenger seat lap belt/seat base airbag module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Again check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 9 and 10) and of the 64-track (tracks 39 and 40) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat lap belt/seat base airbag ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat base airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-76

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF241 CONTINUED 2

CC.1 CC.0

NOTES

None

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B. Is the value obtained correct? NO

Seat wiring fault. Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3.

YES

Wiring fault between the computer and passenger seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat lap belt/seat base airbag ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat base airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-77

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

LEFT-HAND DRIVE/RIGHT-HAND DRIVE CONFIGURATION DF242 PRESENT

NOTES

None

This fault occurs because left-hand/right-hand drive has not been configured. Configure the computer with command CF291. Read the left/right-hand drive configuration LC088 with Configuration reading.

AFTER REPAIR

ABGACU4_V08_DF242/ABGACU4_V10_DF242/ABGACU4_V0C_DF242

88C-78

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Diagnostic - Summary table of statuses and parameters

88C

ACU4 AIRBAG STATUS SUMMARY TABLE: Tool statuses ET010 ET072 ET073 ET074 ET076 ET103 ET105 ET108 ET143 ET144 ET169

Diagnostic tool description Impact detected Passenger airbag status indicator light commanded Computer locked by tool Fault warning light commanded Computer to be replaced Type of passenger airbag locking Locked diagnostics power supply outside the limits Passenger airbag locking mode Passenger airbag(s) locked Fault present or stored Driver's seat belt contact

ACU4 AIRBAG PARAMETER SUMMARY TABLE: Tool parameters PR001 PR002 PR104 PR105 PR106 PR107 PR108 PR109 PR110 PR111 PR112 PR113 PR114 PR115 PR116 PR117 PR118 PR119 PR120 PR140 PR147 PR149 PR150

Diagnostic tool description Computer supply voltage Vehicle type Driver's seat sensor impedance Line 1 impedance (Driver's seat lap belt/seat base airbag circuit). Line 2 impedance (Passenger seat lap belt/seat base airbag circuit). Line 3 impedance (Passenger frontal airbag circuit 1). Line 4 impedance (Passenger frontal airbag circuit 2). Line 5 impedance (Driver's frontal airbag circuit 1). Line 6 impedance (Driver's frontal airbag circuit 2). Line 7 impedance (Driver's side curtain airbag circuit). Line 8 impedance (Passenger side curtain airbag circuit). Line 9 impedance (Driver's chest front side airbag circuit). Line 10 impedance (Passenger chest front side airbag circuit). Line 11 impedance (Driver's rear chest side airbag circuit). Line 12 impedance (Passenger's rear chest side airbag circuit). Line 13 impedance (Front buckle pretensioners circuit). Line 14 impedance (Rear seat belt retractors). Line 15 impedance (Driver's rear frontal airbag circuit). Line 16 impedance (Passenger's rear frontal airbag circuit). Number of memory zone clearings Airbag locking circuit impedance Passenger's rear retractor circuit impedance Driver's rear retractor circuit impedance

The trigger line or sensor impedance is 99.9 Ω when the component is disconnected or not controlled by the computer.

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

88C-79

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

NOTES

Order

Function

1

Diagnostic tool dialogue

2

Computer conformity

3

4

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Conformity check

88C

Only perform this conformity check after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

Fault finding

ACU 4 airbag

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of ALP 1 No dialogue with the airbag computer.

LC034 Type of vehicle

MEGANE II

If there is a fault, refer to the interpretation of fault DF001 Computer.

Computer configuration

Use of READING THE CONFIGURATION commands

Ensure that the computer configuration defined in the "Current" column corresponds to the vehicle equipment.

None

Operation of the warning light Computer initialisation check

Ignition on

Warning light comes on for 3 seconds when the ignition is switched on

None

ABGACU4_V08_CCONF/ABGACU4_V10_CCONF/ABGACU4_V0C_CCONF

88C-80

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0

ACU4 AIRBAG Vdiag: 08, 10, 0C

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

88C

ALP 1

No dialogue with the airbag computer

NOTES

Special note: To perform fault finding on the vehicle computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed), i.e. proceed as follows: – Vehicle card in card reader, press the Start button for more than 5 seconds outside of starting conditions.

Check that the diagnostic tool is not causing the fault by trying to establish dialogue with a computer on another vehicle. If the tool is not the problem and dialogue cannot be established with any other computer in the same vehicle, check the battery voltage and do the work required to obtain the proper reading (10.5 V < battery voltage < 16 V).

Check the presence and condition of the airbag computer supply fuse. Check that the computer connector is properly connected and check the condition of its connections. Check that the supply to the computer is correct: – Disconnect the airbag computer and attach the 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). – Check and ensure the presence of + after ignition feed between the terminals marked earth and + after ignition feed.

Check that the supply to the diagnostic socket is correct: – + before ignition feed on track 16. – + after ignition feed on track 1 – Earth on tracks 4 and 5. With the 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685), check the continuity and insulation of the airbag computer/diagnostic socket connection between: Bornier track CAN H

Track 6 of the diagnostic socket

Bornier track CAN L

Track 14 of the diagnostic socket

If dialogue has still not been established after these various checks, contact the Techline.

ABGACU4_V08_ALP1/ABGACU4_V10_ALP1/ABGACU4_V0C_ALP1

88C-81

ACU4 Vdiag 08, 10 and 0C TTX84 2.0